Service Manual L550 - L580 2plus2

en
Service Manual
(20
Wheel loader
(10 points)
L550 - L580 2plus2

(10
en
Service Manual
(20
Wheel loader
(10 points)
L550 - L580 2plus2

(10
Address
Address:
LIEBHERR-WERK BISCHOFSHOFEN GMBH

Dr. Hans Liebherr Strae 4
A 5500 BISCHOFSHOFEN
Product ID
Manufacturer:
Product group:
Type:
Production number:
Serial number:
LIEBHERR-WERK BISCHOFSHOFEN GMBH

Wheel loader
L550
L556
L566
L576
L580
456
454
460
457
459
16978
15653
14171
14171
14171
Document ID
Order number:
Author:
Document version:
Manual number:
Owner:
1035 3357
LBH / Technical Documentation Department
01
Preface
Intended readership
Contents
This service manual is addressed to anyone whose task it is to ensure that the
machines are ready for everyday use. This especially includes mechanics and
workshop staff of Liebherr dealers and branches.
The first chapter contains information on safety regulations and on the
special tools needed for maintenance and repairs.
Chapter 2 gives you an overview of all the most important technical data of
the machine as a whole and its individual assemblies.
Next comes the maintenance chapter, with the maintenance and inspection
schedule, the testing and adjustment checklists, lubrication charts, description
of maintenance tasks, testing and adjustment tasks and specifications of fuel
and lubricants.
The technical description of the machine is in the following chapters,
structured according to fifteen function groups. The layout, function and
technical data of the groups, components and parts are explained.
Chapter 19 contains information on troubleshooting, the service code table
and a description of the SCULI service software.
Chapter 20 will be gradually updated with the latest options.
Instructions on use
This manual describes several types and versions of machines. The

information generally applies to the types and serial numbers stated at the
bottom of the page. The exception to this is information which only applies to
specific types and serial numbers, which are stated at the beginning of the
section concerned (for example technical data of parts).
Where possible, the ID numbers of parts and components are stated in
the heading.
This manual is available in German, English, French, Spanish and Italian.
Working instructions
Always follow the safety regulations whenever you work on the machine.
You will find a reference to this in the General Information section.
In order to perform these tasks you need a complete set of basic tools
andcertain special tools, all in perfect working order. All tasks require
absolute cleanliness.
Replace seals such as O-rings and surface seals during repairs.
General information
Product description
Maintenance
Diesel engine and pump distributor gear
Cooling system
Travel hydraulics
Working hydraulics
Steering system
Brake system
Electrical system
10
Transfer gear
11
Axles and cardan shaft
12
Machine frame and ballast weight
13
Central lubrication system
14
Coverings and access
15
Cab, heating and air-conditioning
16
Lift arms and quick-change device
17
Equipment and accessories
18
Service codes and diagnosis
19
Options
20
1 General Informations
1.0
Chapter contents
1
General Informations........................................................... 1.0-1

1.1
Safety regulations ...........................................................................1.1-1

1.1.1
Introduction...........................................................................1.1-1
1.1.2
Overview of the safety regulations .......................................1.1-2
1.2
Special tools for maintenance and repair work...............................1.2-1

Special tools in general ........................................................1.2-1
1.2.2
Special tools for Liebherr diesel engines..............................1.2-2
1.2.3
Special tools for hydraulic cylinders .....................................1.2-3
1.2.4
Special tools for electronics..................................................1.2-3
1.2.5
Special tools for axles...........................................................1.2-3
1.2.6
Special tools for the transmission.........................................1.2-5
1.2.7
Central lubrication system ....................................................1.2-5
1.2.8
Special tools for the air conditioning system ........................1.2-5
1.2.9
Special tools for cab windows ..............................................1.2-5
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
1.2.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
1.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
General Informations
1.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Safety regulations
1.1 Safety regulations

Working on the machine poses safety risks to the operator, driver or
maintenance engineers. You can prevent risks and accidents by regularly
reading and observing the various safety instructions.
This is especially important for personnel who only occasionally work on the
machine, for example, carrying out rigging or maintenance work. The safety
regulations listed below, if conscientiously followed, will ensure your own
safety and that of others, and will prevent the machine from being damaged.
Whenever tasks which could cause danger to personnel or damage to the
machine are described, the necessary safety precautions are explained in
this manual.
These are indicated by the headings Danger, Warning or Caution.
1.1.1
Introduction
1. The symbols below have the following meanings:
Danger
Risk of personal injury.
Denotes an impending dangerous situation which can lead to serious injury
or death if not avoided.
! Note the warning.
Warning
Denotes a potentially dangerous situation which can lead to serious injury or
death if not avoided.
! Note the warning.
Caution
Denotes a potentially dangerous situation which can lead to slight injury if
not avoided.
! Note the warning.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
Caution
Risk of damage to the machine.
Denotes actions or circumstances which may result in damage to the machine.
! Note the warning.
Note
Useful information
Denotes information on correctly handling the machine and the lubricants
and fuels used.
! Observe the instructions.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
1.1-1 o f 2
Service Manual
Safety regulations
2. Observance of these instructions does not exempt you from following

any additional rules and guidelines that may apply
The following should also be observed:
The safety rules in force at the operating site
Legally enforceable road traffic regulations
Guidelines issued by trade associations
1.1.2
Overview of the safety regulations

A detailed description of these can be read in the relevant section of the
safety regulations chapter in the operating manual.
The following sections are included in the operating manual:
1
Introduction
General safety regulations
Proper use
Decals on the machine
Instructions on preventing crushing injuries and burns
Instructions on preventing fires and explosions
Safety instructions for start-up
Safety precautions during start-up
Instructions for safe working
10
Safety instructions for driving on slopes
11
Parking safely
12
Transporting the machine safely
13
Towing the machine safely
14
Measures for ensuring safe maintenance

Safety instructions for working on machines with hydro accumulators
16
Safety instructions for welding work on the machine
17
Instructions for working safely on the working attachment
18
Safety instructions for transporting the machine by crane
19
Safe maintenance of hydraulic hoses and hose lines
20
Attachments and accessories
21
Protection against vibrations
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
15
1.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Special tools for maintenance and repair work
1.2 Special tools for maintenance and

repair work
1.2.1
ID no.
Use
Anti-freeze and battery tester
7408922
All wheel loaders
24 volt vacuum pump

Filling and testing device
with case
Manometer 0 - 40 bar
Manometer connection
High pressure hose 1500 mm
High pressure hose 4000 mm
Screw connection M 10 x 1
Draining hose
Drain piece
7408148
All wheel loaders
Remarks
For checking the acid concentration
(battery charging state) and anti-freeze
For preventing oil loss
8145359
All wheel loaders
For checking the hydro accumulator
7361288
5002932
5002866
7002436
7002475
7009134
5005180
7005660
7402657
All wheel loaders

All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders
Safety cap 10 mm
7009315
All wheel loaders
Safety cap 13 mm
Safety cap 17 mm
Safety cap 19 mm
7615515
7615589
7009317
All wheel loaders

All wheel loaders
All wheel loaders
Safety cap 17 mm
7622068
All wheel loaders
USB dongle
10333608
L550 - L580
Diagnostic data cable
10035410
L550 - L580
Adapter cable RS232<>USB
693190714 All wheel loaders
SDCF-03 memory card adapter
10223098
L550 - L580
Compact flash card
10223095
L550 - L580
For checking the hydraulic pressure

Connection for the manometer
High pressure hose for manometer
High pressure hose for manometer
For draining oil via a drain valve
For the drain hose
For securing the valves on the variable
adjustment motor
For securing the valves on the pumps
For securing the valves on the
control block
With SERVICE authorisation
For adjusting the travel hydraulics, and
testing the electrical system and options
For communicating with the wheel
loader electronics if there is an error with
the RS232 interface on the notebook.
For writing to the compact flash card
Blank compact flash card.
Data medium for application software.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
Description
Special tools in general
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
1.2-1 o f 6
Service Manual
Description
Special tools for Liebherr diesel engines

ID no.
Use
Mandrel
9078118
L550 - L556 engine
Mandrel
9078119
L550 - L556 engine
Rotary angle device
0524062
L550 - L580 engine
Holder
0528464
L550 - L580 engine
Dial gauge holder
10023885
L550 - L580 engine
Compression tester
Compression tester insert
Adapter
Claw
8008782
10012817
10297211
10117612
L550 - L580 engine

L550 - L580 engine
L550 - L580 engine
L550 - L580 engine
Engine turner
0524045
L550 - L580 engine
Holder
0528464
L550 - L580 engine
Piston strap
8000592
L550 - L580 engine
Rotary angle device
0524062
L550 - L580 engine
Piston ring tongs
7009319
L550 - L580 engine
Extractor tool
0526855
L550 - L580 engine
Extractor tool
0528462
L550 - L580 engine
Mounting pin
0528470
L550 - L580 engine
Hook and lever
7019858
L550 - L580 engine
Inserter
10116249
L550 - L580 engine
Mounting pin
0528470
L550 - L580 engine
Inserter
10116250
L550 - L580 engine
Special spanner
10020852
L550 - L580 engine
Adapter
0524029
L550 - L580 engine
Adapter
10220689
L550 - L580 engine
Hammer puller
0524072
L550 - L580 engine
Pusher tube
10289319
L550 - L580 engine
Pusher tube
10289320
L550 - L580 engine
Mounting pin
0528472
L550 - L580 engine
1.2-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Remarks
For installing the mass equalisation
shafts (D 934)
For installing the mass equalisation
shafts (D 934)
For installing and removing the
cylinder head
For checking projection of the
cylinder bushings
For checking projection of the
cylinder bushings
For checking the compression
For installing and removing the pistons
and rods
and rods
and rods
and rods
For installing and removing the piston
rings
cylinder bushing
cylinder bushing
For installing and removing
crankshaft attachments
For installing and removing the front
crankshaft seal
For installing and removing the front
crankshaft seal
For installing and removing the flywheel
For installing and removing the rear
crankshaft seal
injection line
pressure pipe port and injection nozzles
For installing and removing the injection
pump and roller tappet
For installing and removing the injection
pump and roller tappet
exhaust pipe
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
1.2.2
Service Manual
Safety regulations
1.2.3
Description
Assembly sleeve 80 mm
ID no.
9227165
9227161
9998624
9998622

Expansion sleeve 80 mm
9107931
9227166
9227162
9110408
9110410

Bearing head assembly
spanner 70/8 mm
Bearing head assembly
spanner 75/12 mm
9110412
Use
L550, L556 steering cylinder
L566, L576, L580
steering cylinder
L550, L556 lift cylinder
L550, L556 tilt cylinder
L566, L576, L580 lift cylinder
L566, L576, L580 tilt cylinder
L566, L576, L580
steering cylinder
L550, L556 lift cylinder
L550, L556 tilt cylinder
L566, L576, L580 lift cylinder
L566, L576, L580 tilt cylinder
9210219
For fitting the piston rod bearing
9239572
L566, L576, L580

steering cylinder
For fitting the piston rod bearing
1.2.4
Description
8502956
Test probe, red

Test probe, black
Magnet tester
Stripping and crimping pliers
0.5 6.0 mm2
Crimping pliers
Wedge extractor tool
Extraction tool size 12 for
pin and bushing
pin and bushing
pin and bushing
Use
For fitting the seals

Remarks
For measuring voltage, current,
resistance and frequency
For testing DEUTSCH connectors
For testing DEUTSCH connectors
For checking solenoid valves
All wheel loaders

8145743
All wheel loaders
8460263
All wheel loaders
For MATE-N-LOK connectors
8503647
7026267
All wheel loaders

All wheel loaders
For DEUTSCH connectors

8145674
All wheel loaders
8145673
All wheel loaders
8503630
All wheel loaders
1.2.5
Special tools for axles
Description
ID no.
Hand pump
8145835
L550 - L580 axles
Collet
7009536
L550 - L576 axles
Spring hook
8145767
L550 - L576 axles
Slip bushing 260 mm
7017559
Slip bushing 315 mm
7017556
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Remarks
Special tools for electronics
ID no.
Digital multimeter
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
Special tools for hydraulic cylinders
Use
Remarks
For finding leaks on
disc brakes
For installing and removing the snap
ring in the planetary drive
For attaching and detaching the
return springs
L556 front axle

L556 rear axle
L566, L576 front axle
L566, L576 rear axle
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
For fitting the brake piston

For fitting the brake piston
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
1.2-3 o f 6
Service Manual
Use
Remarks
7017558
L556 rear axle
For fitting ring gear carriers
7017557
L556 front axle

7017555
7017566
7011518
7017563
Handle for mounting tool

Handle for various mounting tools
For fitting cartridge seal ring
7011522
7013922
L550 - L576 axles

L550 - L576 axles
L556 rear axle
L556, L566, L576 front axle;
L556 - L576 axles
L556 rear axle
L556 front axle
L556 front axle
L556, L566, L576 rear axle
L566, L576, L580 front axle;
L580 rear axle
L556 - L580 axles
L556 - L580 axles
Mounting tool
7017560
Centring bracket
Groove nut spanner 111 mm
7013775
7009537
7011251

Measuring screw
M 16 x 1.5
Measuring screw
M 16 x 1.5
Clamp fork
Mounting tool
Slotted nut spanner
81 mm
Mounting tool
(used with grip 7011518)
7013774
10017840
L550 - L576 axles
7624271
L550 axles, MT-L 3085
Mounting tool
7624272
L550 axles, MT-L 3085
Centring bracket
10008138
Socket wrench
10008139
Socket wrench
10218794
Clamp fork
10008140
L550 MT-L 3085 axles
10286181
L580 Hercules axles
10286183
L580 Hercules axles
10286186
L580 Hercules axles
Grip for seal driver and shell
10286788
L580 Hercules axles
Driver for inner lip seal
10286189
L580 Hercules axles
Driver for wear bushing

with guide
10286190
L580 Hercules axles
Grooved nut socket
10286192
L580 Hercules axles
Seal holder installation tool

Driver for oil bearing
casings, bevel gear
10286193
L580 Hercules axles
10286194
L580 Hercules axles
Special tool kit for

Hercules axles
Driver for lubrication and
oil seal
3 bushing driver with guide
and grip
1.2-4 o f 6
ID no.
7019556
8145771
L550 - L576 axles

MT-L 3085-3105
L550 MT-L 3085 axles
L556 rear axle
L550 MT-L 3085 front axle
L556 - L576 axles
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
For fitting cartridge seal ring

For groove nut spanner
For fitting the grooved nuts
For measuring wear on the
brake discs
For measuring wear on the
brake discs
For fitting the drive flange
For fitting the shaft seal ring
For fitting the grooved nuts on the
axle shaft
For fitting the dust protection
axle insert
For fitting the shaft seal ring
axle insert
For detaching the output
For removing and fitting the
drive pinion
Contains the following items:
10286183 - 10286198
For fitting the lubrication and oil seal,
to be used with grip 10286788
For installing bushing,
including grip 10286788
For fitting the outer lip seal, to be
used with appropriate driver
For fitting the inner lip seal, to be
used with grip 10286788
For installing the wear bushing
For removing and fitting the
grooved nuts
For fitting the seal holder
For installing the bearing casings,
bevel gear
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
Description
Slip bushing
M 90 x 1.5 mm
Slip bushing
M 110 x 1.5 mm
Slip bushing
M 130 x 1.5 mm
Handle
Handle
Mounting tool
Service Manual
Safety regulations
Description
Driver for grease seal
and disc
ID no.
10286195
L580 Hercules axles
Rolling apparatus
10286196
L580 Hercules axles
Lifting tackle
Installation tool for
Lifetime seal
10286197
L580 Hercules axles
Remarks
For fitting the grease seal and disc, to
be used with grip 10286788
For testing the rolling torque of the
wheel hubs
For removing the wheel hub
10286198
L580 Hercules axles
For fitting the Lifetime seal
1.2.6
Description
Special tools for the transmission

ID no.
Use
Fixing spanner
10016179
L550 - L580
Special socket
10016180
L550 - L580
Mounting tool
10016181
L550 - L580
1.2.7
Description
Remarks
For loosening and tightening the
grooved nut on the coupling 1
For loosening and tightening the
grooved nut on the coupling 1
For removing and attaching the snap
ring on the couplings

ID no.
Use
BEKA Max filling press
10009239
All wheel loaders
Groeneveld filling press
10333342
All wheel loaders
Filling connection
Grneveld central lubrication
data cable
7029283
All wheel loaders
7624289
All wheel loaders
7624290
All wheel loaders
Grneveld central lubrication

plug adapter
1.2.8
Description
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
Use
Remarks
For quickly filling the BEKA Max
reservoir
For quickly filling the Groeneveld
reservoir
For filling the reservoir
For inspecting the
central lubrication system
For inspecting the
Special tools for the air conditioning system

ID no.
Use
Remarks
Vacuum pump
7027552
All wheel loaders
For evacuating the air

conditioning system
4-valve test fitting
7027558
All wheel loaders
For testing, evacuating and filling the air

conditioning system
Filling hose, blue 1500 mm
7027553
All wheel loaders
For the test fitting
Filling hose, yellow 1500 mm
7027554
All wheel loaders
Filling hose, red 1500 mm
7027555
All wheel loaders
Car coupling 253a
7027556
All wheel loaders
Car coupling 254a
7027557
All wheel loaders
1.2.9
Description
Complete tool box with
suction pads
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Special tools for cab windows

ID no.
10021147
Use
Remarks
All wheel loaders
For installing and removing windows
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
1.2-5 o f 6
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/25.01.2007
1.2-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
2 Production description
2.0
Chapter contents
2
Production description......................................................... 2.0-1

2.1
Technical data ................................................................................2.1-1

Complete machine................................................................2.1-1
2.1.2
Diesel engine and pump distributor gear..............................2.1-8
2.1.3
Cooling system ...................................................................2.1-12
2.1.4
Travel hydraulics ................................................................2.1-13
2.1.5
Working hydraulics .............................................................2.1-16
2.1.6
Steering system..................................................................2.1-20
2.1.7
Brake system......................................................................2.1-22
2.1.8
Electrical system.................................................................2.1-24
2.1.9
Transmission ......................................................................2.1-25
2.1.10
Axles and cardan shaft .......................................................2.1-26
2.1.11
Machine frame and ballast weight......................................2.1-30
2.1.12
Automatic central lubrication system..................................2.1-30
2.1.13
Cab, heating and air-conditioning.......................................2.1-32
2.1.14
Lift arms and quick-change device.....................................2.1-33
2.1.15
Equipment and accessories ...............................................2.1-36
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
2.1.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Production description
2.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Technical data
2.1 Technical data

2.1.1
Complete machine
Wheel loader with Z lift arms
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978
The values stated refer to the standard version of the machine:

With Z lift arms (2600 mm), without hydraulic quick-change device.
With 23.5 R25 Michelin XHA tyres.
Tipping loads and weights include all lubricants, full fuel tank, ROPS/
FOPS cab and driver.
Description
Value Unit
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Bucket capacity as per ISO 7546

Bucket width
Specific material weight
A Dump height at maximum lifting height
and 45 tilt-out angle
B Dumping height
C Maximum bucket base height
D Maximum bucket pivot height
E Maximum bucket top edge height
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
3.2
2700
1.8
2882
m
mm
t/m
mm
3500
3645
3915
5395
mm
mm
mm
mm
F Reach at maximum lifting height and

45 tilt-out angle
1095 mm
G Digging depth
H Height above cab
I Height above exhaust
J Ground clearance
K Wheel base
L Overall length
Turning radius over bucket outer edge
85
3365
2985
530
3280
8220
6420
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
2.1-1 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Value Unit
Lifting force (SAE)

Breakout force (SAE)
Tipping load when straight
Tipping load articulated at 37
Angle of articulation (to each side)
Operating weight
Tractive force
Travel speed in travel range 1,
forward and reverse
forward and reverse
Travel speed in travel range A1-2
(automatic), forward and reverse
Sound pressure level in cab in L pA
according to ISO 6396
185
125
13205
11865
11650
40
16525
122.6
0 - 10
kN
kN
kg
kg
kg
kg
kN
km/h
0 - 20 km/h
0 - 20 km/h
0 - 40 km/h
0 - 40 km/h
69 dB(A)

Valid for:
L556 - 454 / from 15653
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

2.1-2 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Value Unit

Bucket width
2700 mm
1.8 t/m

2850 mm
B Dumping height
3500 mm
3645 mm
3915 mm
5460 mm

45 tilt-out angle
1160 mm
G Digging depth
85 mm
H Height above cab
3365 mm
2985 mm
J Ground clearance
530 mm
K Wheel base
3280 mm
L Overall length
8240 mm
6440 mm
Lifting force (SAE)
185 kN
130 kN
14890 kg
13350 kg
13140 kg
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
3.6 m
40
Operating weight
17270 kg
Tractive force
136.42 kN

forward and reverse
0 - 10 km/h
Travel speed in travel range 2.

forward and reverse
0 - 20 km/h

0 - 20 km/h

0 - 40 km/h
0 - 40 km/h
69 dB(A)

Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-3 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Value Unit
Bucket capacity as per DIN 7546

Bucket width
3000 mm
1.8 t/m

3240 mm
B Dumping height
3900 mm
4050 mm
4360 mm
5870 mm

45 tilt-out angle
1180 mm
G Digging depth
100 mm
H Height above cab
3550 mm
3100 mm
565 mm
K Wheel base
3580 mm
L Overall length
8912 mm
7096 mm
Lifting force (SAE)
264 kN
200 kN
17690 kg
15850 kg
15550 kg
40
Operating weight
22500 kg
Tractive force
173.31 kN
Travel speed in travel range 1, forward

and reverse
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
0 - 10 km/h
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
J Ground clearance
2.1-4 o f 3 8
4.0 m
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Value Unit

and reverse
0 - 20 km/h

0 - 20 km/h

0 - 40 km/h

0 - 40 km/h

69 dB(A)

Valid for:
L576 - 457 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007

Tipping loads and weights include, all lubricants, full fuel tank, ROPS/
Description
Value Unit

Bucket width
3000 mm
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
4.5 m
1.8 t/m

3187 mm
B Dumping height
3900 mm
4050 mm
4360 mm
5960 mm
1233 mm
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-5 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
45 tilt-out angle
Value Unit
G Digging depth
100 mm
H Height above cab
3550 mm
3100 mm
J Ground clearance
565 mm
K Wheel base
3580 mm
L Overall length
8992 mm
7110 mm
Lifting force (SAE)
264 kN
190 kN
19570 kg
17530 kg
17200 kg
40
Operating weight
24260 kg
Tractive force
173.3 kN

and reverse
0 - 10 km/h

and reverse
0 - 20 km/h

0 - 20 km/h

0 - 40 km/h

0 - 40 km/h

69 dB(A)

L580 - 459 / from 14171

2.1-6 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Value Unit

Bucket width
3300 mm
1.8 t/m

3320 mm
B Dumping height
4100 mm
4270 mm
4580 mm
6340 mm

45 tilt-out angle
1150 mm
G Digging depth
100 mm
H Height above cab
3550 mm
3100 mm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
J Ground clearance
565 mm
K Wheel base
3700 mm
L Overall length
9300 mm
7420 mm
Lifting force (SAE)
250 kN
175 kN
20390 kg
18409 kg
18000 kg
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
5.0 m
40
Operating weight
24580 kg
Tractive force
173.3 kN

and reverse
0 - 10 km/h
0 - 20 km/h
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-7 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
and reverse
Value Unit

0 - 20 km/h

0 - 40 km/h

0 - 40 km/h

2.1.2
69 dB(A)

Diesel engine
L550 - 456 / from 16978; ID 9080542
Description
Value Unit
Engine model
D934 S A6
Number of cylinders
Firing order
1-3-4-2
Capacity
6360 cm
Cylinder bore
122 mm
Stroke
136 mm
Rated power as per ISO 9249
130 / 190 kW / PS
2000 min-1
Rated speed
Maximum torque at 1500 min-1
828 Nm
Lower idle speed
90010 min-1
Upper idle speed
206510 min-1
Start of delivery before TDC
See type plate
Combustion pressure
20 - 28 bar
Injection nozzle opening pressure
315 - 340 bar
Inlet valve play (cold)
0.3 mm
Outlet valve play (cold)
0.4 mm
Direction of rotation, looking at flywheel
Anticlockwise
Number of teeth on flywheel gear
147
Control thermostat
79 C
Longitudinal / traverse inclinability
45 / 45
Injectors
UP20PLD
Control
LHECU PLD
Starter operating voltage
24 V
Starter power consumption
6.6 kW
Alternator voltage output
28 V
Alternator current output
80 A
Turbocharger
KKK K27
Auxiliary power take-off transmission
1 : 1.1515
Weight
800 kg
Emission thresholds comply with
2.1-8 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
EU RL 97/68 EC Stage IIIA
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Technical data
Valid for:
L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 10116679
Description
Value Unit
Engine model
D934 L A6
Number of cylinders
Firing order
1-3-4-2
Capacity
7010 cm
Cylinder bore
122 mm
Stroke
150 mm
140 / 177 kW / PS
2000 min-1
Rated speed
900 Nm
Lower idle speed
90010 min-1
Upper idle speed
206510 min-1
See type plate
Combustion pressure
22 - 34 bar
315 - 340 bar
0.3 mm
0.4 mm
Direction of rotation, looking at

flywheel
Anticlockwise
147
Control thermostat
83 C
45 / 45
Injectors
UP20PLD
Control
LH-ECU-UP/CR
24 V
6.6 kW
28 V
80 A
Turbocharger
KKK K27
1 : 1.1515
Weight
980 kg

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171; ID 9079516
Description
Value Unit
Engine model
D936 L A6
Number of cylinders
Firing order
1-5-3-6-2-4
Capacity
10520 cm
Cylinder bore
122 mm
Stroke
150 mm

Rated speed
2000 min-1
1230 Nm
90010 min-1
Lower idle speed

L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
190 / 259 kW / PS
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-9 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Value Unit
206510 min-1
Upper idle speed

See type plate
Combustion pressure
22 - 34 bar
315 - 340 bar
0.3 mm
0.4 mm
Direction of rotation, looking

at flywheel
Anticlockwise
147
Control thermostat
83 C
45 / 45
Injectors
UP20PLD
Control
LH-ECU-UP/CR
24 V
6.6 kW
28 V
80 A
Turbocharger
KKK K27
1 : 1.1515
Weight
1180 kg
L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 10116961
Description
Value Unit
Engine model
D936 L A6
Number of cylinders
Firing order
1-5-3-6-2-4
Capacity
10520 cm
Cylinder bore
122 mm
Stroke
150 mm

Rated speed
2000 min-1
1320 Nm
Lower idle speed
90010 min-1
Upper idle speed
206510 min-1

Combustion pressure
See type plate

22 34 bar
315 - 340 bar
0.3 mm
0.4 mm
Direction of rotation, looking at flywheel

Control thermostat
Injectors
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Anticlockwise
147
83 C
2.1-10 o f 3 8
200 / 272 kW / PS
45 / 45
UP20PLD
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Value Unit
Control
LH-ECU-UP/CR
24 V
6.6 kW
28 V
80 A
Turbocharger
KKK K29
1 : 1.1515
Weight
1180 kg
Fuel system
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Tank capacity, FULL
300 l
Tank capacity, RESERVE

Valid for:
50 l
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Tank capacity, FULL
400 l
Tank capacity, RESERVE
70 l
Fuel separator
Description
Value Unit
Filter insert grade
10 m
Fuel fine filter

Description
Value Unit
Filtration grade
2 m
Refuelling pump (optional)

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Description
Value Unit
Flow rate
50 l/min
Current consumption
15 A
Power
360 W
Protection class
IP 44
Max. duty cycle
15 minutes
Fuse
20 A
Max. suction height
4 m
Air filter vacuum switch

Description
Value Unit
Air filter contamination vacuum switch

activation point
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
50 mbar
2.1-11 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
Coupling
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Type
466/233 NGT
Coupling
Valid for:
Description
Value Unit
Type
345/254 NGT
Pump distributor gear

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Type
PVG 300 B 341
Input direction
Clockwise
Output direction
Valid for:
Anticlockwise
Transmission ratio for travel

hydraulics pump
0.7868
Transmission ratio for working and

steering hydraulics pump
0.7868
Description
Value Unit
Type
PVG 350 B 384
Input direction
Clockwise
Output direction
2.1.3
Anticlockwise
Transmission ratio for travel

hydraulics pump
0.808
Transmission ratio for working and

steering hydraulics pump
0.865
Cooling system
Gear pump
Description
Value Unit
Capacity
14 cm
Rotary speed at rated engine speed
3030 min-1
Gear motor
Description
Value Unit
Gear motor displacement

Gear motor direction of rotation (looking
towards shaft)
Coil resistance
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Clockwise
175 10 bar
Pressure relief valve
2.1-12 o f 3 8
19 cm
4.7 Ohm
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Value Unit
124 41 Nm
Screw tightening torque

Spanner size
41 mm
Temperature sensor
Description
Value Unit
Measuring range
min. -30 C
max. 130 C
Resistance at 0 C
1000 Ohm
Resistance at 20 C
1112 Ohm
Resistance at 30 C
1171 Ohm
Resistance at 55 C
1322 Ohm
Resistance at 73 C
1437 Ohm
Resistance at 78 C
1469 Ohm
Resistance at 84 C
1509 Ohm
Resistance at 94 C
1577 Ohm
Resistance at 102 C
1632 Ohm
Screw thread
M 14 x 1.5
Protection class
IP 65
Max. tightening torque
30 Nm
Plug connection
2.1.4
Bosch Jet plug,

2-pin (Gold contacts)
Travel hydraulics
Variable displacement pump
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Control type
EZ
Maximum capacity
90 cm
Flow rate at rated speed
222 l/min
Maximum swivel angle (both sides)
20
2542 min-1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Speed (at rated speed)

Power
L550
111 kW
Power
L556
122 kW
Replenishing pump capacity

Replenishing pump flow rate (at rated speed)
46 l/min
Inlet restrictor
1.8 mm
Travel direction solenoid voltage
24 V
Travel direction solenoid current consumption
1.1 A
Travel direction solenoid resistance
22 Ohm
Control pressure proportional valve resistance
14 Ohm
Replenishing pressure at upper idle speed

High pressure at 1400 min-1
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
19.6 cm
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
311 bar
35010 bar
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-13 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Value Unit
-1
High pressure at 1200 min
29010 bar
5010 bar
Pressure relief and replenishing valves
47010 bar
4305 bar
Pressure cut-off
Weight
Valid for:
60 kg
Description
Value Unit
Control type
EZ
Maximum capacity
125 cm
300 l/min
Maximum swivel angle (both sides)
20
2475 min-1
Speed (at rated speed)

Power
L566
160 kW
Power
L576, L580
171 kW
Replenishing pump capacity
28.3 cm
Replenishing pump flow rate (at rated speed)
62 l/min
Inlet restrictor
2.2 mm
Travel direction solenoid voltage
24 V
Travel direction solenoid current consumption
1.1 A
Travel direction solenoid resistance
22 Ohm
Control pressure proportional valve resistance
14 Ohm
Replenishing pressure at upper idle speed
341 bar
-1
High pressure at 1400 min
33010 bar
23010 bar
5010 bar
Pressure relief and replenishing valves
47010 bar
4305 bar
Pressure cut-off
Weight
75 kg
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Control type
EP
Maximum displacement
80 cm
Maximum swivel angel
25
Minimum swivel angle
0
5900 min-1
Maximum speed
489 Nm
Torque (p 400 bar)
2.1-14 o f 3 8
Maximum discharge valve capacity
20 l/min
Discharge valve orifice diameter
3.0 mm
Weight
34 kg
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Variable displacement motor 1
Service Manual
Technical data
Valid for:
Description
Value Unit
Control type
EP
107 cm
25
0
5292 min-1
Maximum speed
653 Nm
Torque (p 400 bar)

20 l/min
3.0 mm
Weight
47 kg

Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
Control type
EP
80 cm
25
0
5900 min-1
Maximum speed
489 Nm
Torque (p 400 bar)

Weight
Valid for:
34 kg
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Control type
EP
107 cm
25
0
5292 min-1
Maximum speed
653 Nm
Torque (p 400 bar)

Weight
Valid for:
47 kg
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Description
Value Unit
Control type
EP
140 cm
25
0
4950 min-1
Maximum speed
855 Nm
Torque (p 400 bar)
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
10 l/min
2.0 mm
Weight
60 kg
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-15 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
Motor scavenging pump

Description
Value Unit
Capacity
11 cm
3030 min-1
Speed at rated speed
2.1.5
Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics pump
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Control type
LRDS
Maximum capacity
95 cm
234 l/min
2542 min-1

Power
70 KW
222 bar
Flow regulator (delta p)

Power controller start of regulation
Weight
Valid for:
18010 bar
53 kg
Description
Value Unit
Control type
LRDS
Capacity
130 cm
290 l/min
2312 min-1

Power
87 kW
222 bar

Power controller start of regulation
Weight
18010 bar
66 kg
Control block
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Spool valve diameter
25 mm
Piston stroke, both sides
11 mm
Lift arm up/down control piston flow
240 / 160 l/min
Tilt out/in control piston flow
160 / 210 l/min
Primary pressure relief valve
3605 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt in
3805 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt out
3805 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / lift
3805 bar
LS pressure cut-off
2905 bar
3305 bar
L550
L556
Pressure relief valve pre-tension
2.1-16 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
81 bar
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Valid for:
Value Unit
Float position/ride control solenoid

valve resistance
30 Ohm
Weight
40 kg
Description
Value Unit
Spool valve diameter
25 mm
Piston stroke, both sides
11 mm
Lift arm up/down control piston flow
300 / 170 l/min
Tilt out/in control piston flow
180 / 200 l/min
3805 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt-in
4005 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / tilt out
4005 bar
Secondary pressure relief valve / lift
4205 bar
LS pressure cut-off
3505 bar
Pressure relief valve pre-tension
81 bar
Float position/ride control solenoid

valve resistance
30 Ohm
Weight
40 kg
Pilot control device

Description
Value Unit
Retaining solenoid voltage
12 V
Retaining solenoid current consumption
0.35 A
Retaining solenoid resistance
70 Ohm
Weight
5.7 kg
Pilot control solenoid valve

Description
Value Unit
Current consumption
0.9 A
Resistance
30 Ohm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Pilot control hydro accumulator

Valid for:
ID 7622 448
Description
Value Unit
Hydro accumulator volume
320 cm
Preload pressure (nitrogen filling)
15 bar
Float position pressure switch

Valid for:
ID 6905 893
Description
Value Unit
Switch type
Normally open
231 bar
Switch point, rising

Thread
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
M 12 x 1.5 mm
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-17 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
Stabilisation module
Valid for:
ID 1003 0852
Description
Value Unit
Control piston diameter
16 mm
Cut-off pressure (LFD off)
12020 bar
Safety valve
33010 bar
Restrictor check valve diameter
2.0 / 0.4 mm
Solenoid valve current consumption
0.6 A
Solenoid valve resistance
40 Ohm
Weight
13 kg
Ride control hydro accumulator

Description
Value Unit
Number of hydro accumulators

L550, L556
2 Qty.

L566, L566, L576
3 Qty.
2000 cm
252 bar
Oil filling
350 cm
Ride control pressure switch

Valid for:
ID 6905 893
Description
Value Unit
Switch type
N/C
10 1 bar

Thread
M 12 x 1.5 mm
Lift cylinder
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 9231 458
Description
Value Unit
Piston diameter
130 mm
Rod diameter
80 mm
Stroke length
745 mm
Minimum installation length
2.1-18 o f 3 8
1245 mm
Weight
136 kg
Lifting at rated load
5.6 seconds
Lowering empty
2.7 seconds
Piston rod bearing tightening torque

(hex screws)
285 Nm
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for
Service Manual
Technical data
Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L574 - 457 / from 14171;

L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 9959 881
Description
Value Unit
Piston diameter
150 mm
Rod diameter
80 mm
Stroke length
790 mm
1320 mm
Weight
165 kg
Lifting at rated load
5.6 seconds
Lowering empty
3.5 seconds

(hex screws)
285 Nm
Tilt cylinder
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 9954 056
Description
Value Unit
Piston diameter
Valid for:
150 mm
Rod diameter
80 mm
Stroke length
455 mm
860 mm
Weight
127 kg
Tilting out at rated load
2.3 seconds
Piston rod bearing tightening torque (hex

screws)
565 Nm
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; ID 9248 203
Description
Value Unit
Piston diameter
170 mm
Rod diameter
90 mm
Stroke length
555 mm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
1050 mm
Weight
188 kg
2.0 seconds

(hex screws)
970 Nm
L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 9903 394
Description
Value Unit
Piston diameter
170 mm
Rod diameter
90 mm
Stroke length
555 mm
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
1185 mm
Weight
198 kg
2.0 seconds

(hex screws)
970 Nm
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-19 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
Return suction filter

Description
Value Unit
Filtration grade
10 m
Pre-tension valve
0.3 bar
Replenishing valve
0.04 bar
Replenishing strainer
160 m
Bypass valve
3.0 bar
Return strainer
80 m
Bleeder filter
Description
Value Unit
Filtration grade
10 m
Inlet opening pressure
2.1.6
0.03 bar
Outlet opening pressure
0.5 bar
Thread
3/4 inch
Steering system
Steering pump
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 5716 846
Description
Value Unit
Control type
DFR
Maximum capacity
45 cm
111 l/min
Swivel angle
min. 0
max. 15.6
2542 min-1

Power
39 kW
222 bar
2105 bar
Pressure cut-off
Weight
Valid for:
21 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171;

L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 5716828
Description
Value Unit
Control type
DFR
Maximum capacity
71 cm
160 l/min
Swivel angle
min. 0
max. 15.6
2312 min-1

Power
56 kW
222 bar
2105 bar
Pressure cut-off
Weight
2.1-20 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
33 kg
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Technical data
Servostat
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 1011 3336
Description
Value Unit
Displacement
Valid for:
462 cm
Secondary pressure relief
28510 bar
Flow booster
1 : 1.6
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171;

L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 10113338
Description
Value Unit
Displacement
588 cm
Secondary pressure relief
28510 bar
Flow booster
1 : 1.6
Steering cylinder
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 9231 461
Description
Valid for:
Value Unit
Piston diameter
80 mm
Rod diameter
40 mm
Stroke length
405 mm
730 mm
1000 Nm
Weight
26.2 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171;

L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 9246849
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Description
Value Unit
Piston diameter
90 mm
Rod diameter
40 mm
Stroke length
455 mm
780 mm
1000 Nm
Weight
29.5 kg
Steering damper hydro accumulator

Valid for:
ID 7623 934
Description
Value Unit
320 cm

Oil filling
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
30 bar
180 cm
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-21 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
Emergency steering pump

Valid for:
ID 1000 7930
Description
Value Unit
Capacity
11 cm
555 bar

Protection class
IP 66
Maximum current consumption
150 A
Weight
10 kg
Emergency steering pressure switch

Valid for:
ID 1029 4440
Description
Value Unit
Switch type
Normally open
162 bar
Switching point
Thread
M 12 x 1.5 mm
Emergency steering check pressure switch

Valid for:
ID 1029 4440
Description
Value Unit
Switch type
Normally open
162 bar
Switching point
Thread
2.1.7
M 12 x 1.5 mm
Brake system
Brake system gear pump
Description
Value Unit
Capacity
4 cm
12.1 l/min
3030 min-1
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653;

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; ID 1029 2360
Description
Value Unit
Accumulator charge valve

activation pressure
1805 bar

deactivation pressure
2105 bar
Parking brake solenoid valve

current consumption
0.6 A
Parking brake solenoid valve resistance
40 Ohm
Maximum service brake pressure
2.1-22 o f 3 8
955 bar
Pedal start angle
42
Pedal stop angle
15
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Compact brake valve
Service Manual
Technical data
Valid for:
L580 - 459 / from 14171; ID 1029 5965
Description
Value Unit

activation pressure
1805 bar

deactivation pressure
2105 bar

current consumption
0.6 A
Parking brake solenoid valve resistance
40 Ohm
705 bar
Maximum service brake pressure

Pedal start angle
42
Pedal stop angle
15
Service brake hydro accumulator

Valid for:
ID 1003 8487
Description
Value Unit
4 Qty.
1400 cm
95 bar
Brake light button

Valid for:
ID 6905 535
Description
Value Unit
Switch type
Normally open
50.5 bar

Thread
M 12 x 1.5 mm
Accumulator charge pressure switch

Valid for:
ID 1003 6072
Description
Value Unit
Switch type
N/C
120 5 bar
Switching point, falling

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Thread
M 12 x 1.5 mm
Disc brake
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Gap
1.00.5 mm
Brake lining thickness, NEW
4.5 mm
Minimum brake lining thickness
1.0 mm
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-23 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
Parking brake hydro accumulator

Valid for:
ID 1028 8602
Description
Value Unit
320 cm
80 bar
Overspeed protection solenoid valve

Description
2.1.8
Value Unit
Current consumption
0.9 A
Resistance
30 Ohm
Electrical system
Description
Value Unit
System voltage
24 V
Battery voltage
12 V
Battery
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653; ID 6002 886
Description
Value Unit
Battery voltage
12 V
Battery capacity
143 Ah
Acid density of charged battery

Cold test current (at -18 C EN 60095-1)
Valid for:
1.26-1.28 kg/l
950 A
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171;
ID 6132 03208
Description
Value Unit
Battery voltage
12 V
Battery capacity
170 Ah
Acid density of charged battery

Cold test current (at -18 C EN 60095-1)
1.26-1.28 kg/l
1000 A
Input / Output - module

Description
Value Unit
Protection class (with connector

plugged in)
Power supply (logical unit)
7.0 to 48.0 VDC
Operating temperature
-40 to +85 C
Operation at ambient air pressure

Weight
2.1-24 o f 3 8
IP6K9K
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
500 to 1100 mbar

1.77 kg
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Technical data
Main electronics (master)

Description
Value Unit
Protection class (with connector

plugged in)
Computing power
266 MHz
Power supply (logical unit)
9.0 to 60.0 VDC
-40 to +85 C
Operation at ambient air pressure

Weight
2.1.9
IP 65
500 to 1100 mbar

3.5 kg
Transmission
Transmission
Description
Value Unit
Number of gears
Transfer ratio in 1st gear
6.103
Transfer ratio in 2nd gear
3.033
Transfer ratio in 3rd gear
1.342
Weight (without oil)
285 kg
Drive shaft flange tightening torque

Tightening torque
Control valve block fastening screws
340 - 400 Nm
30 - 35 Nm
Gear shifting solenoid valves

Description
Value Unit
Voltage
24 V
30050 mA
Current consumption
936 Ohm
Resistance
Speed sensors
Description
Value Unit
1050100 Ohm
Resistance
0.30.2 mm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Distance
Number of teeth on drive shaft VM 1
60
Number of teeth on drive shaft VM 2
60
Number of teeth on power take-off speed

sensor
128
Gear pump
Description
Value Unit
Capacity
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
16 cm
40.8 l/min
2550 min-1
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-25 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
2.1.10
Axles and cardan shaft

Front axle
L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
Type
MT-L 3085 -
Self-locking differential
45 %
Width
2000 mm
Differential nut tightening torque

Wheel hub grooved nut tightening torque
Wheel lug tightening torque
Wheel lug spanner size
3.89
Wheel hub transmission
6.0
23.33
816 kg
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Type
MT-L 3095
45 %
Width
2000 mm

700 Nm
3000+500 Nm
750 Nm
30 mm
Differential transmission
3.89
6.0
Overall transmission
23.33
Weight
924 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 473 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Type
MT-L3105
45 %
Width
2230 mm

2.1-26 o f 3 8
750 Nm
Weight
Valid for:
2000+500 Nm
30 mm
Valid for:
700 Nm
700 Nm
3000+500 Nm
750 Nm
30 mm
4.1
6.0
24.66
Weight
1174 kg
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Technical data
Valid for:
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
SA 197 337 43 R 175
Type
45 %
Width
2230 mm
1200 Nm

2000+200 Nm
750 Nm
32 mm
4.1
6.0
24.60
Weight
1180 kg
Rear axle
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
Type
MT-L 3085 -
45 %
Width
2000 mm

30 mm
3.89
6.0
23.33
Weight
816 kg
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Type
MT-L 3085
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
45 %
Width
2000 mm
1200 Nm

2000+500 Nm
750 Nm
30 mm
3.89
6.0
23.33
Weight
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
2000+500 Nm
750 Nm
Valid for:
700 Nm
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
816 kg
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-27 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Type
MT-L 3095 -
45 %
Width
2230 mm
1200 Nm

30 mm
4.1
6.0
24.66
Swing angle
13
Weight
975 kg
L576 - 473 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Type
MT-L 3105 -
45 %
Width
2230 mm
1200 Nm

750 Nm
30 mm
4.1
6.0
24.66
Swing angle
13
Weight
1174 kg
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
SA 197 478 37 R 118
Type
45 %
Width
2230 mm
1200 Nm

1300+200 Nm
750 Nm
32 mm
4.1
6.0
24.60
Swing angle
13
Weight
2.1-28 o f 3 8
3000+500 Nm
Valid for:
750 Nm
Valid for:
3000+500 Nm
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
1090 kg
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Technical data
Front drive shaft

Valid for:
L550 - 4456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
Min. length
1310 mm
Max. length
1500 mm
Flange tightening torque
125 Nm
Weight
Valid for:
38 kg
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Min. length
1430 mm
Max. length
1440 mm
285 Nm
Weight
Valid for:
72 kg
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Min. length
1500 mm
Max. length
1610 mm
285 Nm
Weight
Valid for:
73 kg
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Min. length
1545 mm
Max. length
1555 mm
285 Nm
Weight
75 kg
Rear drive shaft

Valid for:
L550 - 4456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Description
Value Unit
Min. length
600 mm
Max. length
710 mm
125 Nm
Weight
Valid for:
16 kg
Description
Value Unit
Min. length
765 mm
Max. length
875 mm
125 Nm
Weight
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
24 kg
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-29 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
2.1.11

Ballast weight
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
Weight per ballast weight
614 kg
Material
GG 10
M24 10.9 screw tightening torque

Valid for:
960 Nm
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
901 kg
Material
GG 10

Valid for:
960 Nm
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
950 kg
Material
GG 10

Valid for:
960 Nm
L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
1540 kg
Material
GG 10
2.1.12
960 Nm
Automatic central lubrication system

Central lubrication pump EP1
Description
Value Unit
120 mm
Greases up to
NLGI class 2
Transfer medium
Maximum flow pressure
280 bar
min. - 35 C
max. + 80 C
Power supply
24 V
Protection class
IP 65
Container size
2.1-30 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4 kg
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Flow per stroke
Service Manual
Technical data
Progressive distributor
MX-F
Description
Value Unit
Maximum operating pressure at input

Temperature range
300 bar
min. -35 C
max. +100 C
Greases up to
NLGI class 2
Transfer medium
MX-F 25
Description
Value Unit
Flow per outlet
25 mm
Flow per element
50 mm
Piston diameter
3 mm
MX-F 45
Description
Value Unit
Flow per outlet
45 mm
Flow per element
90 mm
Piston diameter
4 mm
MX-F 75
Description
Value Unit
Flow per outlet
75 mm
Flow per element
150 mm
Piston diameter
5 mm
MX-F 105
Description
Value Unit
Flow per outlet
105 mm
Flow per element
210 mm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Piston diameter
6 mm
Central lubrication pump controller EP-1

Description
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Value Unit
Default lubrication (cycles)
24 Cycles
Default cycle time 75%
40 min
30 min
20 min
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-31 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
2.1.13

Heating and ventilation
Description
Value Unit
Rated voltage
24 V
Number of blower levels
Maximum fan current consumption
15.7 A
Maximum air flow
600 m/h
Heating power
11 kW
Air conditioning system

Description
Value Unit
Refrigerant
R134a
Refrigerant oil (PAG oil)
ZXL 100 PG
Coolant quantity
1250+50 g
Cooling power
9.710% kW
Air conditioning compressor

Description
Value Unit
Type
SD7H15
Capacity
154.9 cm
ZXL 100 PG
(SP 10)
Refrigerant oil (PAG oil)

Filling quantity
200 cm
Maximum current consumption
2.63 A
Weight without oil
6.9 kg
Condenser
Description
Value Unit
Maximum air flow
4000 m/h
Heating power
9.71 kW
35 bar
Dryer collector unit

Description
Value Unit
Contents
0.70 l
Filtration grade
7 m
Leak test
30 bar
Dryer water consumption
16 g
Burst pressure
2.1-32 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
130 bar
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Test pressure
Service Manual
Technical data
Pressure switch
Description
Value Unit
Low pressure OFF
1.50.5 bar
Low pressure ON
3.5 bar
High pressure OFF
252 bar
High pressure ON
181.5 bar
Evaporator
Description
Value Unit
Cooling power
2.1.14
9.7 kW
10%
Temperature sensor activation

temperature
5.5
Temperature sensor deactivation

temperature
4.510% C

Lift arm
Main dimensions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Length 1 bucket arm
2600 mm
Length 2 linkage
1267 mm
Length 3 connecting link assembly

Weight of complete lift arms
(without cylinder)
1380 kg
Bucket arm weight
928 kg
Linkage weight
318 kg
Weight of connecting link assembly
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
718 mm
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
56 kg
2.1-33 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Length 1 bucket arm
2920 mm
Length 2 linkage
1267 mm

(without cylinder)
2090 kg
Bucket arm weight
1345 kg
Linkage weight
508 kg

Valid for:
80 kg
L576 - 457 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Length 1 bucket arm
2920 mm
Length 2 linkage
1401 mm
855 mm

(without cylinder)
2200 kg
Bucket arm weight
1435 kg
Linkage weight
508 kg

Valid for:
718 mm
80 kg
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Length 1 bucket arm
3050 mm
Length 2 linkage
1401 mm
855 mm

(without cylinder)
2250 kg
Bucket arm weight
1500 kg
Linkage weight
508 kg
80 kg
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
2.1-34 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Technical data
Quick-change device
Main dimensions
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Valid for:
Value Unit
A system connection size
1000 mm
B width
1200 mm
H height
820 mm
T depth
450 mm
Weight
430 kg
Description
Value Unit
1100 mm
B width
1370 mm
H height
1100 mm
T depth
620 mm
Weight
830 kg
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
A system connection size
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-35 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
2.1.15

Standard bucket
L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
B bucket width
2700 mm
H height
1475 mm
L length with teeth
1630 mm
1.8 t/m
Bucket capacity
3.2 m
Weight
1305 kg
Teeth UNI-Z-2000 III

Valid for:
8 Pc.
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
B bucket width
2700 mm
H height
1520 mm
L length with teeth
1630 mm
1.8 t/m
Bucket capacity
3.6 m
Weight
1365 kg
Teeth UNI-Z-2000 III

Valid for:
8 Pc.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
B bucket width
3000 mm
H height
1610 mm
L length with teeth
1805 mm
1.8 t/m
Bucket capacity
4.0 m
Weight
2080 kg
Teeth UNI-Z-2000 IV
2.1-36 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9 Pc.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Valid for:
Service Manual
Technical data
Valid for:
L576 - 457 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
B bucket width
3000 mm
H height
1575 mm
L length with teeth
1905 mm
1.8 t/m
Bucket capacity
4.5 m
Weight
2150 kg
Teeth UNI-Z-2000 IV
Valid for:
9 Pc.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
B bucket width
3300 mm
H height
1675 mm
L length with teeth
1900 mm
1.8 t/m
Bucket capacity
5.0 m
Weight
2340 kg
Teeth UNI-Z-2000 IV
9 Pc.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Forklift
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Prong length
1500 mm
L Length (fork carrier + prongs)
1860 mm
K Fork carrier width
2000 mm
H Height (fork carrier + prongs)
1040 mm
Weight (fork carrier + prongs)

Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
740 kg
Description
Value Unit
Prong length
1800 mm
L Length (fork carrier + prongs)
2220 mm
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
2.1-37 o f 3 8
Service Manual
Technical data
Description
Value Unit
2050 mm
H Height (fork carrier + prongs)
1270 mm
Weight (fork carrier + prongs)
1160 kg
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
K Fork carrier width
2.1-38 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
3 Maintenance
3.0
Chapter contents
3
Maintenance........................................................................ 3.0-1
3.1
Maintenance and inspection schedule ...........................................3.1-1
3.2
Testing and adjustment plan...........................................................3.2-1
3.3
Testing and adjustment checklists..................................................3.3-1
3.4
Lubrication chart and filling quantities ............................................3.4-1

3.4.1
Table of filling quantities .......................................................3.4-1
3.4.2
Lubrication charts .................................................................3.4-5
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.5
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Maintenance tasks..........................................................................3.5-1
3.5.1
Preparatory tasks for maintenance ......................................3.5-1
3.5.2
Removing loose parts, dirt, ice and snow from the

machine ................................................................................3.5-5
3.5.3
Checking the machine for external damage.........................3.5-6
3.5.4
Making sure the bolted connections are tight.......................3.5-6
3.5.5
Sealing leaks ........................................................................3.5-6
3.5.6
Checking the engine oil level................................................3.5-6
3.5.7
Changing the engine oil........................................................3.5-7
3.5.8
Changing the diesel engine oil filter .....................................3.5-8
3.5.9
Checking / replacing the V-ribbed belt .................................3.5-9
3.5.10
Checking / adjusting the engine valve play ..........................3.5-9
3.5.11
Checking the diesel engine heating flange ........................3.5-11
3.5.12
Greasing the ring gear on the engine starter flywheel .......3.5-12
3.5.13
Changing the engine oil separator filter insert....................3.5-12
3.5.14
Checking the bearings and condition of the engine

control units ........................................................................3.5-13
3.5.15
Checking the state of sensors and cable connections .......3.5-13
3.5.16
Changing the fuel pre-filter .................................................3.5-13
3.5.17
Changing the fuel fine filter.................................................3.5-15
3.5.18
Draining off condensate from the fuel pre-filter (the

corresponding service code appears) ................................3.5-16
3.5.19
Bleeding the fuel system ....................................................3.5-16
3.5.20
Draining off condensate and sediment from the fuel

tank .....................................................................................3.5-18
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.0-1 o f 4
3.0-2 o f 4
Service Manual
3.5.21
Cleaning the air filter service cap and dust extraction

valve................................................................................... 3.5-19
3.5.22
Testing the air filter vacuum switch ................................... 3.5-19
3.5.23
Changing the air filter primary element when indicated

by the vacuum switch ........................................................ 3.5-20
3.5.24
Changing the air filter secondary element ......................... 3.5-21
3.5.25
Checking the air intake hoses for leaks and tight fitting .... 3.5-22
3.5.26
Checking the exhaust lines for leaks and tight fitting ........ 3.5-22
3.5.27
Check the oil level in the pump distributor gear................. 3.5-23
3.5.28
Changing the splitter box oil .............................................. 3.5-24
3.5.29
Checking the soot particle filter pressure monitor for

function, leaks and blockages............................................ 3.5-24
3.5.30
Checking and draining the soot particle filter

condensate separator ........................................................ 3.5-25
3.5.31
Changing the soot particle filter condensate separator ..... 3.5-26
3.5.32
Cleaning the soot particle filter .......................................... 3.5-27
3.5.33
Checking the coolant antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor

concentration ..................................................................... 3.5-28
3.5.34
Cleaning the cooling system.............................................. 3.5-32
3.5.35
Changing the coolant......................................................... 3.5-33
3.5.36
Checking the oil level in the hydraulic tank........................ 3.5-35
3.5.37
Draining off condensate and sediment from the

hydraulic tank..................................................................... 3.5-36
3.5.38
Changing the oil in the hydraulic tank and checking the

return strainer..................................................................... 3.5-36
3.5.39
Checking and cleaning the magnetic rod on the

hydraulic tank..................................................................... 3.5-37
3.5.40
Changing the hydraulic tank return suction filter ............... 3.5-38
3.5.41
Changing the hydraulic tank bleeder filter ......................... 3.5-38
3.5.42
Lubricating the pilot control device solenoids, universal

joints and tappets............................................................... 3.5-39
3.5.43
Testing the steering ........................................................... 3.5-39
3.5.44
Lubricating the bearing points on the steering cylinders ... 3.5-39
3.5.45
Testing the service brake and parking brake..................... 3.5-40
3.5.46
Checking the gap and wear on the parking brake linings.. 3.5-41
3.5.47
Checking the indicator lamps and lighting ......................... 3.5-42
3.5.48
Checking the batteries, fluid level and terminals ............... 3.5-43
3.5.49
Checking the transmission oil level ................................... 3.5-44
3.5.50
Changing the transmission oil............................................ 3.5-44
3.5.51
Changing the transmission oil filter.................................... 3.5-44
3.5.52
Checking the tightness of the wheels (once after 50,

100 and 250 h)................................................................... 3.5-45
3.5.53
Checking the axle oil level ................................................. 3.5-45
3.5.54
Checking the axle oil level ................................................. 3.5-46
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance
3.5.55
Changing the axle oil ..........................................................3.5-46
3.5.56
Changing the axle oil ..........................................................3.5-47
3.5.57
Lubricating the bevel gear seal ..........................................3.5-48
3.5.58
Checking and lubricating the front drive shaft ....................3.5-48
3.5.59
Checking and lubricating the rear drive shaft.....................3.5-48
3.5.60
Testing and setting the tyre pressure for the machine's

use and attachments ..........................................................3.5-49
3.5.61
Lubricating the articulated bearing and the rear

oscillating bearing...............................................................3.5-49
3.5.62
Checking the lubrication system grease reservoir level .....3.5-50
3.5.63
Checking the pipes, hoses and lubrication points of the

lubrication system...............................................................3.5-51
3.5.64
Checking whether metered quantities are adequate at

the bearing points (grease collars) of the central
lubrication system...............................................................3.5-51
3.5.65
Lubricating the door hinges ................................................3.5-51
3.5.66
Cleaning the fresh air and recirculated air filter..................3.5-51
3.5.67
Changing the fresh air and recirculated air filter ................3.5-53
3.5.68
Checking the indicator beads in the dryer-collector unit ....3.5-54
3.5.69
Lubricating the lift arms and attachment ............................3.5-54
3.5.70
Checking the bucket bearing seals and the bearing

bushings on the lift arms.....................................................3.5-55
3.5.71
Check the lift arms and bucket stops .................................3.5-57
3.5.72
Testing the quick-change device (optional)........................3.5-58
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.6
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Testing and adjustment tasks .........................................................3.6-1

3.6.1
Preparing for testing and adjustment ...................................3.6-1
3.6.2
Safety precautions for testing and adjustment .....................3.6-1
3.6.3
Bringing the machine up to operating temperature ..............3.6-2
3.6.4
Checking the diesel engine speed .......................................3.6-2
3.6.5
Check the fan motor and fan control pressure relief

valve .....................................................................................3.6-3
3.6.6
Calibrating the pedals...........................................................3.6-4
3.6.7
Checking the replenishing pressure of the variable

displacement pump ..............................................................3.6-5
3.6.8
Checking the pressure relief and replenishing valve of

the variable displacement pump...........................................3.6-5
3.6.9
Checking the pressure cut-off of the variable

displacement pump ..............................................................3.6-6
3.6.10
Calibrating the block curve ...................................................3.6-7
3.6.11
Calibrating the variable displacement motors ......................3.6-8
3.6.12
Checking the engine output..................................................3.6-9
3.6.13
Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the working

hydraulics pump .................................................................3.6-10
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.0-3 o f 4
Maintenance
Service Manual
3.6.14
Checking the flow controller (start of delivery) of the

working hydraulics pump ................................................... 3.6-10
3.6.15
Checking the secondary pressure relief valves on the

control block....................................................................... 3.6-11
3.6.16
Checking the primary pressure relief valves on the

control block....................................................................... 3.6-12
3.6.17
Checking the LS pressure cut-off on the control block...... 3.6-12
3.6.18
Depressurising ride control and the hydro accumulators .. 3.6-13
3.6.19
Checking the cut-off pressure in the stabilisation

module ............................................................................... 3.6-13
3.6.20
Checking the nitrogen in the ride control hydro

accumulator ....................................................................... 3.6-13
3.6.21
Check the pressure cut-off of the steering pump............... 3.6-14
3.6.22
Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the steering

pump .................................................................................. 3.6-14
3.6.23
Checking the brake pressure of the compact brake

valve................................................................................... 3.6-15
3.6.24
Checking the brake pressure at the axles ......................... 3.6-15
3.6.25
Checking the capacity of the brake accumulator............... 3.6-16
3.6.26
Checking the accumulator charge pressure ...................... 3.6-17
3.6.27
Checking the brake light pressure switch and brake

lights................................................................................... 3.6-17
3.6.28
Checking the transmission shift pressure.......................... 3.6-17
3.6.29
Checking the nitrogen in the transmission hydro

accumulator ....................................................................... 3.6-18
3.7
Lubricants and fuels ....................................................................... 3.7-1

Diesel fuels .......................................................................... 3.7-2
3.7.2
Lubricating oils for diesel engines ....................................... 3.7-3
3.7.3
Coolant for the diesel engine ............................................... 3.7-5
3.7.4
Hydraulic oils........................................................................ 3.7-8
3.7.5
Lubricating oils for the transmission .................................... 3.7-9
3.7.6
Grease for general lubrication points................................... 3.7-9

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.7.1
3.0-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance and inspection schedule
3.1 Maintenance and inspection schedule

The following abbreviations are used in this section:
h = service hours
Various symbols (solid or empty circles, boxes and stars) are used to
indicate the maintenance tasks, which fall into two main types.
The symbols have the following meanings:
Table with solid circle, box or star
Responsibility for carrying out the maintenance work lies with the machine
operator or his maintenance personnel.
This affects the maintenance intervals every 10 and 50 service hours (h)
and non-scheduled intervals.
The symbols have the following meanings:
Table with empty circle, box or star, or service hours (h)
The maintenance and inspection work must be performed or supervised
by authorised engineers from LIEBHERR or its authorised dealers.
This affects the maintenance intervals on delivery, every 500, 1000, 2000
service hours (h), and at unscheduled times.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
You will find a list of the spare parts needed for maintenance and inspection
work in the service package of the spare parts list.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.1-1 o f 4
Maintenance
Service Manual
Customer:
Machine type: ...
Serial no.: . Service hours: .. Date: ..
Special intervals
Every 2000
Every 1000
Every 500
Every 50
Every 10
On handover
Maintenance / inspection after

service hours
z
z
z
z
TASKS TO BE PERFORMED
By maintenance staff
Once-only activity
zRepeat interval
As necessary
7Annually before the winter
By authorised specialist staff

Once-only activity
Repeat interval
As necessary
Have the driver lubricate the machine in accordance with the lubrication chart
and instruct him on proper maintenance
Instruct the driver in the operation of all functions
Remove loose parts, dirt, ice and snow from the machine
Check the machine for external damage
Make sure the bolted connections are tight
Seal any leaks
Check the hydraulic pressure according to the testing and adjustment plan
z
z
z
3.1-2 o f 4
Check the engine oil level

Change the engine oil (at least once a year): CAUTION See the section on
lubricants and fuels for the engine oil quality and complicating factors.
Change the engine oil filter (at least once a year)
Check the V-ribbed belt and replace it if necessary
Check / adjust the engine valve play
Check the diesel engine heating flange
Lightly grease the ring gear on the engine starter flywheel
Change the engine oil separator filter insert
Check the bearings and and condition of the engine control units
Check the state of sensors and cable connections
Replace the fuel pre-filter (or in the event of a lack of output)
Replace the fuel fine filter (or in the event of a lack of output)
Drain off condensate from the fuel pre-filter (or if the corresponding service
code appears)
Bleed air from fuel system (CAUTION: do not loosen injection lines)
Drain off condensate and sediment from the fuel tank
Clean the air filter service cap and dust extraction valve
Test the air filter vacuum switch
Change the main air filter element when indicated by the vacuum switch (or
every year at the latest)
Clean or replace the air filter secondary element (after replacing the main
element 3 times or every year at the latest)
Check the air intake hoses for leaks and tight fitting
Check the exhaust lines for leaks and tight fitting
Check the oil level in the pump distributor gear
Change the splitter box oil
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Service Manual
Maintenance
Customer:
Machine type: Serial no.: .... Service hours: .
Special intervals
Every 2000
Every 1000
Every 500
Every 50
Every 10
On handover
Maintenance / inspection after

service hours
Date: ..
Once-only activity
Repeat interval
As necessary
7 Annually before the winter

Once-only activity
Repeat interval
As necessary
Diesel particle filter (optional)
Check the diesel particle filter pressure monitor for function, leaks and blockages
Check and drain the diesel particle filter condensate separator
Change the diesel particle filter condensate separator
Clean the diesel particle filter (at least once a year):
Cooling system
3000
Check the coolant antifreeze concentration

Clean the cooling system
Replace the coolant (at least every 2 years)
Working hydraulics
250
Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank

Drain off condensate and sediment from the hydraulic tank
Change the oil in the hydraulic tank and check the return strainer
Check the oil in the hydraulic tank (affects all environmentally compatible
hydraulic fluids)
Check and clean the magnetic rod on the hydraulic tank
Change the hydraulic tank return suction filter insert
Change the hydraulic tank bleeder filter
Lubricate the pilot control device solenoids, universal joints and tappets
Steering system
z
z
Test the steering

Lubricate the bearing points on the steering cylinders
Brake system
Check the service brake and parking brake

Check the gap and wear on the parking brake linings
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/26/02/2007
Electrical system
Check the indicator lamps and lighting

Check the batteries, fluid level and terminals
Transmission
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Check the transmission oil level

Change the transmission oil
Change the transmission oil filter
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.1-3 o f 4
Maintenance
Service Manual
Customer:
Machine type: ...
Serial no.: .... Service hours: .. Date: ..
Special intervals
Every 2000
Every 1000
Every 500
Every 50
Every 10
On handover
Maintenance / inspection
after service hours
Once-only activity
zRepeat interval
As necessary
7Annually before the winter

Once-only activity
Repeat interval
As necessary
Axles and tyres
Checking the tightness of the wheels (once after 50, 100 and 250 h)
Checking the axle oil levels
Changing the axle oil
Lubricate the bevel gear seal on the front and rear axles (if necessary, for
example, if used in water every day) (only applies to L580 - 459)
Check and lubricate the cardan shaft(s)
Check the tyre pressure
Lubricate the articulated bearing and the rear oscillating bearing

Grease the rear section cover lower hinges
Lubrication system (optional)
z
z
Check the lubrication system grease reservoir level

Check the pipes, hoses and lubrication points of the lubrication system
Check whether metered quantities are adequate at the bearing points (grease
collars) of the central lubrication system
Grease the cab door hinges

Clean the fresh air and recirculated air filter
Change the fresh air and recirculated air filter
Check the indicator and filling level beads in the dryer-collector unit of the
air conditioner
3.1-4 o f 4
Lubricate the lift arms and attachment

Check the bucket bearing seals and the bearing bushings on the lift arms
Check the lift arms and bucket stops
Lubricate and test the quick-change device
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Service Manual
Maintenance
Testing and adjustment plan
3.2 Testing and adjustment plan

The tasks in the testing and adjustment plan may only be carried out by
authorised specialist staff of LIEBHERR or its contractual agents.
You can find brief instructions on performing these tasks in the section on
testing and adjustment checklists.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Detailed instructions can be found in the section on testing and adjustment tasks.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.2-1 o f 2
Maintenance
Service Manual
Testing and adjustment plan
Machine type: ...
Serial no.: . Service hours: .
Special intervals
Every 2000
Every 1000
Every 500
Every 50
Every 10
On handover
Maintenance / inspection
after service hours
Cooling system
Check the fan motor and fan control pressure relief valve
Travel hydraulics
Synchronise pedals
Check the replenishing pressure of the variable displacement pump
Check the pressure relief and replenishing valve of the variable displacement
pump
Check the pressure cut-off of the variable displacement pump
Calibrate the block curve
Calibrate the variable displacement motors
Check the engine output
Working hydraulics
Check the flow controller (delta p) of the working hydraulics pump
Check the flow controller (start of delivery) of the working hydraulics pump
Check the secondary pressure relief valves on the control block
Check the primary pressure relief valves on the control block
Check the LS pressure cut-off on the control block
Check the cut-off pressure in the stabilisation module
Check the nitrogen in the ride control hydro accumulator
Steering system
Check the pressure cut-off of the steering pump
Check the flow controller (delta p) of the steering pump
Brake system
Check the opening and closing pressure of the compact brake valve
Check the brake pressure of the compact brake valve
Check the capacity of the brake accumulator
Check the accumulator charge pressure
Check the brake light pressure switch and brake lights
Transmission
Check the transmission shift pressure
Check the nitrogen in the transmission hydro accumulator
3.2-2 o f 2

Once-only activity
Repeat interval
As necessary
Diesel engine
Check the diesel engine speed
Date: ..
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Customer:
Service Manual
Maintenance
Testing and adjustment checklists
3.3 Testing and adjustment checklists
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
The testing and adjustment checklists contain all testing and adjustment
tasks. You can find detailed descriptions of each activity in the section on
testing and adjustment tasks.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.3-1 o f 2
L550, L556 Ser. Nr.
Customer:
Operating hours:
Type of application:
Checked by:
Job site:
Check / Adjustment
2000 Bh.
1000 Bh.
Checked on date:
Unit
Adjust.
values
58
Value
before
adjust.
Value
after
adjust.
Adjust.
point
Test
point
(Temperature sensor hydraulic oil)
Cooling system
Cooling System (fan control)
Fan at high Diesel engine RPM /
Sensor unplugged
bar
110
10

Prop. solenoid valve current less
bar
220
10
P
1
Diesel engine
S
C
U
L
I
Adjustment - pedals
Gas pedal angle sensor
Inching pedal angle sensor
Diesel engine RPM
Low idle RPM
High idle RPM
min
-1
900
min
-1
2065
10
10
Travel hydraulic
Replenishing pressure
At high idle RPM
10
MA
10
MB
MA (MB)
bar
31
Forward
bar
470
Reverse
bar
470
bar
430
High pressure relief valves
Pressure cut off

High pressure
Engine speed drop, max. difference
to high idle RPM
min
-1
Display
30
-1
Block curve at 930 min

Diesel engine RPM
min
High pressure
bar
930
50
930
930
10
-1
Diesel engine RPM
min
High pressure
-1
-1
bar
1200
290
1200
1200
10
-1
Diesel engine RPM
min
High pressure
-1
bar
1400
350
1400
1400
10
S
C
U
L
I
MA (MB)
S
C
U
L
I
MA (MB)
S
C
U
L
I
MA (MB)
S
C
U
L
I
Adjustment var. displ. motor

Automatically adjustment of the
variable displacement motors
Engine performance at 13 km/h
High pressure
L550
bar
300
10
MA
High pressure
L556
bar
330
10
MA
Diesel engine RPM
min
-1
1980
30
= Blocked Machine
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L576 - 454 / from 15653
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.3
2000 Bh.
1000 Bh.
Check / Adjustment
Unit
Adjust.
values
Value
before
adjust.
Value
after
adjust.
Adjust.
point
Test
point
Working hydraulic
Control valve block
5
10
10
10
M / M1
M / LS
Secondary pressure relief valve, lift
bar
Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt in
bar
380
Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt out
bar
380
380
bar
360
290
Control valve block

LS-Pressure cut off
L550
bar
LS-Pressure cut off
L556
bar
330
bar
180
bar
22
bar
120
bar
25
Working hydraulic pump

Power regulator
Flow regulator-Pressure difference
Stabilization module
Shut off pressure (LFD turned off)
20
MX
Hydro accumulator LFD

Pretension pressure (nitrogen filling)
P / LS
M3
M3
M4 / M5
Steering system
Pressure cut off
bar
210
bar
22

Flow regulator Pressure difference
Brake system
Compact brake valve
Cut in pressure
bar
Cut out pressure
bar
Brake pressure in axles
bar
95
bar
> 50
bar
120
180
210
Accumulator
After 9 braking actions
M4 / M5
Pressure switch - brake system

Switching point
M3
Transfer gear
Transfer gear
Switching pressure
bar
20
bar
12
Transmission - hydro accumulator

Remarks:
Signature:
Check and adjust only if required
3.3
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566, L576, L580 Ser. Nr.
Customer:
Operating hours:
Type of application:
Checked by:
Job site:
Check / Adjustment
2000 Bh.
1000 Bh.
Checked on date:
Unit
Adjust.
values
58
Value
before
adjust.
Value
after
adjust.
Adjust.
point
Test
point
(Temperature sensor hydraulic oil)
Cooling system
Cooling System (fan control)
Sensor unplugged
bar
165

Prop. solenoid valve current less
bar
220
10
Diesel engine
Adjustment - pedals
S
C
U
L
I

Inching pedal angle sensor
Diesel engine RPM
Low idle RPM
High idle RPM
min
-1
min
-1
900
2065
10
10
Travel hydraulic
At high idle RPM
bar
34
bar
470
10
MA
10
MB
MA (MB)
High pressure relief valves

Forward
Reverse
bar
470
bar
430
Pressure cut off

High pressure
Engine speed drop, max. difference
to high idle RPM
min
-1
min
-1
Display
30
-1

Diesel engine RPM
High pressure
bar
50
930
930
10
-1
Diesel engine RPM
min
High pressure
930
-1
bar
1200
230
1200
1200
10
-1
Diesel engine RPM
min
High pressure
-1
bar
1400
330
1400
1400
10
S
C
U
L
I
MA (MB)
S
C
U
L
I
MA (MB)
S
C
U
L
I
MA (MB)
S
C
U
L
I
Adjustment var. displ. motor

Automatically adjustment of the
variable displacement motors
Engine performance at 13 km/h
High pressure
L566
High pressure
L576, L580
Diesel engine RPM
bar
bar
min
-1
340
350
10
MA
10
MA
1980
30
= Blocked Machine
L566 - 460 / ab 14171

L576 - 456 / ab 14171
L580 - 459 / ab 14171
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.3
2000 Bh.
1000 Bh.
Check / Adjustment
Unit
Adjust.
values
Value
before
adjust.
Value
after
adjust.
Adjust.
point
Test
point
Working hydraulic
Control valve block
Secondary pressure relief valve, lift
bar
420
Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt in
bar
400
Secondary pressure rel. valve, tilt out
bar
400
10
M / M1
M / LS
bar
380
bar
350
bar
180
bar
22
bar
120
bar
25
Control valve block

LS-Pressure cut off
Power regulator
Flow regulator-Pressure difference
Stabilization module
Shut off pressure (LFD turned off)
20
MX
Hydro accumulator LFD

Pretension pressure (nitrogen filling)
P / LS
180
M3
M3
M4 / M5
M4 / M5
Steering system
Pressure cut off
bar
210
bar
22

Flow regulator Pressure difference
Brake system
Compact brake valve
Cut in pressure
bar
Cut out pressure
bar
210
L566, L576
bar
95
L580
bar
70
bar
> 50
M4 / M5
bar
120
M3
5
5
Accumulator
After 9 braking actions
Pressure switch - brake system
Switching point
Transfer gear
Transfer gear
Switching pressure
bar
20
bar
12
Transmission - hydro accumulator

Remarks:
Signature:
Check and adjust only if required
3.3
copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / ab 14171

L576 - 457 / ab 14171
L580 - 459 / ab 14171
Maintenance
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Testing and adjustment checklists
3.3-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
Lubrication chart and filling quantities
3.4 Lubrication chart and filling quantities

3.4.1
Table of filling quantities

Specifications in the medium column:
The standard lubricants and fuels required for central European climate
conditions are stated here.
Before you change or top up the oil in the hydraulic system (hydraulic
tank), always check if it is filled with petroleum or bio oil.
For more detailed information about the required lubricants and service
fuels, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
Specifications in the dosage column:
The values stated for the filling quantities in the table are only guidelines.
The dipstick and level markings are always mandatory.
Each time the oil is replaced or topped up, check the level in the unit in
question.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Medium
Hydraulic system
Total capacity
Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20
240 l
Diesel engine (with filter

change)
Engine oil
SAE 10W - 40
31 l
Gear oil
SAE 90
2.5 l
Cooling system
Diesel engine
Coolant
45 l
Hydraulic tank
Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20
135 l
Transmission
ATF oil
11.5 l
Front axle
Gear oil
SAE 90 LS
30 l
Rear axle
Gear oil
SAE 90 LS
30 l
Fuel tank
Diesel
Refrigerant
R 134a
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Dosage Unit
300 l
1250+50 g
3.4-1 o f 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Medium
Dosage
Unit
Hydraulic system
Total capacity
Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20
240 l

change)
Engine oil
SAE 10W - 40
31 l
Gear oil
SAE 90
2.5 l
Cooling system
Diesel engine
Coolant
45.0 l
Hydraulic tank
Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20
135 l
Transmission
ATF oil
11.5 l
Front axle
Gear oil
SAE 90 LS
38 l
Rear axle
Gear oil
SAE 90 LS
30 l
Fuel tank
Diesel
Refrigerant
R 134a
300 l
1250+50 g
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:
3.4-2 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
Valid for:
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171
Description
Medium
Dosage
Unit

change)
Engine oil
SAE 10W - 40
Gear oil
SAE 90 LS
Diesel engine cooling

system total capacity
Coolant
52.0 l
Hydraulic system
Total capacity
Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20
260 l
Hydraulic tank
Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20
135 l
Transmission
ATF oil
11.5 l
Front axle
Gear oil
SAE 90 LS
47.0 l
Rear axle
Gear oil
SAE 90 LS
L566: 45.0 l
L576: 47.0 l
Fuel tank
Diesel
Refrigerant
R 134a
43.0 l
2.5 l
400 l
1250+50 g
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Medium

change)
Engine oil
SAE 10W - 40
Gear oil
SAE 90 LS
Diesel engine cooling

system
Total capacity
Coolant
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Dosage
Unit
43.0 l
2.5 l
52.0 l
3.4-3 o f 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Description
Medium
Dosage
Unit
Hydraulic system
Total capacity
Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20
260 l
Hydraulic tank
Engine oil
SAE 20W - 20
135 l
Transmission
ATF oil
11.5 l
Front axle
Gear oil
SAE 90 LS
48.0 l
Rear axle
Gear oil
SAE 90 LS
50.0 l
Fuel tank
Diesel
400 l
Refrigerant
R 134a
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
1250+50 g
3.4-4 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
3.4.2
Lubrication charts
The lubrication chart provides an overview of the location of the maintenance points on the machine and of the maintenance intervals.
You will find detailed information in the maintenance and inspection
schedule, as well as in the individual descriptions in the section on maintenance tasks.
For more detailed information about the required lubricants and service
fuels, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
For information about the required filling quantities, see the tables of filling
quantities.
Key:
1 = transmission
2 = front axle
3 = rear axle
1) = central lubricating rail, front section
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
2) = central lubricating rail, rear section
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.4-5 o f 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Symbol
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 1565

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171;
Description
Symbol
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:
Description
General lubrication points
Lubrication
Check the oil level
Oil change
First oil change
3.4-6 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:
Symbol
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Symbol
Description
General lubrication points
Lubrication
Check the oil level
Oil change
First oil change
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.4-7 o f 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.4-8 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
3.5 Maintenance tasks

On completion of servicing, the machine should be returned to the operating position.
Make sure you are wearing safe working clothing.

Certain jobs not only require a hard hat and safety boots, but also goggles
and safety gloves.
3.5.1
Preparatory tasks for maintenance

Before performing the various maintenance tasks, move the machine to
maintenance position unless otherwise explicitly specified in the description.
The various maintenance tasks include:
Lubricating the lift arms
Checking the oil level or changing the oil in the engine, gears, axles,
hydraulic tank, etc.
Replacing filters as well as adjustment and repair work on the hydraulic system
Safety precautions for maintenance
Always observe the accident prevention regulations during maintenance work.
Make sure that visual contact between the operator in the cab and maintenance personnel is always maintained.
Visual contact
Danger
There is a risk of accidents for maintenance personnel.
The presence of unauthorised persons on the machine can place the
maintenance personnel in extreme danger.
! Never enter a dangerous area of the machine without making your preLBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
sence known.
Wheel wedges
Make sure you can be clearly seen before entering one of the machine's
danger areas.
Secure the machine against rolling away with wheel wedges.
Maintenance positions
The maintenance position depends on the maintenance task to be performed.
The two basic maintenance positions 1 and 2 are described below.
They enable you to access the individual maintenance points.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-1 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Maintenance position 1
To move the machine into maintenance position 1 proceed as follows.
Park the machine on level ground.
Lower the lift arms.
Set the bucket down flat on the ground.
Engage the parking brake.
Turn off the diesel engine.
Take out the ignition key.
To move the machine into maintenance position 2 proceed as follows.
Park the machine on level ground.
Engage the articulation lock.
Lower the lift arms.
Tilt the bucket out and set it down on the ground on its teeth or
cutting edge.
Engage the parking brake.
Take out the ignition key.
Opening the service hatches, doors and hoods

Open the door if you need to access the following units or components:
Hydraulic pumps
Hydraulic tank
Hydraulic tank shut-off valve
Air filter
Battery main switch
Engine compartment hatch

1 Engine compartment hatch
2 Handle with lock
3.5-2 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3 Gas-filled springs
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Opening the engine

compartment hatch
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
Warning
There is a risk of injury if the engine compartment door falls shut.
! Check that the gas-filled springs securely hold the hood fully open.
Open the lock with the ignition key.
Completely open the hatch 1 using the handle 2.
Two gas-filled springs 3 hold the opened hatch in this position.
Opening the engine
compartment hatch
When the hood is open, you can access the following units:
Diesel engine
Cooling system
Hydraulic tank
Engine compartment hatch and hood cable

Open the engine compartment hatch.
Warning
Engine parts which are in motion can cause injury.
Rotating or moving engine parts, such as the fan blades or V-belts, can
cause injury.
! Only open the engine compartment hood when the engine is shut down.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Pull the cable 1 for unlocking the engine compartment hood until the lock
is open.
Engine compartment hood

1 Engine compartment hood
3 Engine compartment hatch
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
4 Cable lock
5 Hydraulic tank cover
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-3 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
The lock 4 unlocks the engine compartment hood 1.

The hood is automatically opened and held in position by two gas-filled
springs 2.
Turn the securing pipe 2 in the direction of the arrow (position shown).
The gas-filled spring 1 is now blocked.
The engine compartment hood cannot be opened.
Warning
There is a risk of injuries if the hood falls shut.
! Check that the gas-filled springs securely hold the hood fully open.
Check the function.
Open the hydraulic tank over 5 as required.
Unlock the cover and open it.
Opening the engine
compartment hatch
When the hood is open, you can access the cooling system.
Make sure that the cab door is closed.
When opening or closing the hood, climb onto the machine via the cab
access, making sure that you have secure footing.
1 Left cooling system hood

2 Right cooling system hood
4 Handle
Completely open the hood 1 and/or 2 by pulling up the handle.
The hood is held in this position by the gas-filled spring 3.
Warning
There is a risk of injuries if the hood falls shut.
! Check that gas-filled spring holds it completely open.

Check the function.
3.5-4 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Cooling system hood
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
Turning off the battery main switch

The battery main switch is located at the rear left of the engine
compartment.
For certain maintenance jobs, the battery main switch must first be
turned off.
Find out from the descriptions of the relevant maintenance tasks whether the
battery main switch must be turned on or off. See the section on maintenance tasks.
Switch on the battery main switch after completing these maintenance tasks.
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the electrical system.
! Do not turn off the battery main switch while the engine is running.
Battery main switch

1 Battery main switch
2 Main switch key
Danger
There is a risk of accidents for maintenance personnel.
If unauthorised people are on the machine it can put the maintenance
personnel in extreme danger.
! For safety reasons, it is essential that the battery main switch is turned off.
! Pull out the key for safety reasons.
Turn off the battery main switch 1 by turning the key 2 to the 0 position.
3.5.2
Removing loose parts, dirt, ice and snow from the machine
Make sure that the machine is in maintenance position 1.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Note
To ensure safe machine transport and easy maintenance: Clean the
machine after everyday work and before starting maintenance tasks.
! Remove any loose parts, coarse dirt, mud, ice, snow etc.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Be careful when cleaning the machine with a high-pressure cleaner. See

the section on cleaning the machine.
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-5 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.3
Checking the machine for external damage

Procedure
Before starting up the machine, check for external damage which might
impair safe operation.
Repair any damage with safety implications immediately.
3.5.4
Making sure the bolted connections are tight

Make sure that:
The machine is in maintenance position 2.
The service doors and hoods are open.
Procedure
Check that all bolts and screws are tight.
Tighten any loose screws or bolts with the required tightening torque.
3.5.5
Sealing leaks
Make sure that:
The service doors and hoods are open.
Procedure
3.5.6
Check the entire hydraulic system for leaks.

Replace any damaged hydraulic seals.
Tighten any loose hydraulic couplings.
See also the section on safe maintenance of hydraulic hoses and
hose lines.
Checking the engine oil level

Make sure that:
The engine compartment hood is open.
The engine is level and has not been running for 2 - 3 minutes.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Diesel engine
Pull out the dipstick 1, wipe it clean, and re-insert it.
Pull out the dipstick once again and read off the oil level.
The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX markings.
3.5-6 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
If the oil level is too low:

Remove the sealing cap from the filler neck 2 and top up with oil.
For the oil quality, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
Clean the sealing cap, place it on the filler neck 2 and tighten it.
3.5.7
Changing the engine oil

Make sure that:
The engine is level.
The engine is warm.
A suitable receptacle, an oil drain hose and the specified engine oil are
at hand.
See the table of filling quantities for the required capacity of the receptacle.
Procedure
1 Oil drain hose

3 Oil drain valve
2 Cap
Unscrew the cap of the oil drain valve on the oil pan.
Screw the oil drain hose to the oil drain valve.
Drain off the oil into the receptacle.
Unscrew the oil drain hose.
Screw the cap onto the oil drain valve.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
When changing the engine oil and the oil filter:

Change the filter as described in the section on changing the engine oil filter.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Diesel engine
Pour the new oil into the filler neck 2 to between the MIN and MAX
markings on the dipstick 1.
Clean the filler cap, place it on the filler neck 2 and tighten it.
Start the engine and check the oil pressure.
Turn off the engine and after 1 or 2 minutes and check the oil level on
the dipstick.
Top up with oil if necessary.
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-7 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.8
Changing the diesel engine oil filter

Make sure that:
The engine oil has been drained off.
A strap wrench and a suitable container are in place.
Only use genuine LIEBHERR spare parts (2 oil filter cartridges).
Procedure
Place a suitable container under the diesel engine.
Release the filter cartridges 1 with a strap wrench and unscrew them.
Clean the seals on the filter bracket.
Lightly coat the rubber gaskets on the new oil filter cartridges with
engine oil.
Screw on the new oil filter cartridge until the sealing ring touches the
filter bracket.
When the sealing ring touches the filter bracket:
Tighten the oil filter cartridge by a half to three-quarter turn. (Do not use a
tool for tightening).
Start the diesel engine:
Check the oil pressure in the engine oil pressure display (see
display unit).
Shut down the diesel engine:
Check the seals on the oil filters and the oil level.
After 2 to 3 minutes, check the oil level on the dipstick.
3.5-8 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Note
Protect the V-ribbed-belt against emerging oil when changing the oil
filter cartridge.
! After changing the oil filter, remove all traces of oil on the diesel engine,
also behind the vibration damper so that this is not diagnosed as a leak
in the leakage in the radial shaft seal at a later stage.
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
3.5.9
Checking / replacing the V-ribbed belt

The V-ribbed belt is on the front of the engine, protected by a cover.
The engine has a tensioning device for the V-ribbed belt. This tensions itself
and requires no maintenance. Check the V-ribbed belt for wear.
Checking the V-ribbed belt
Take off the V-ribbed belt guard.
Check the V-ribbed belt for damage.
Damage to the V-ribbed belt can include:
Torn belt
Tears in several ribs
Lumps of rubber on the base of the belt
Accumulations of dirt and grit
Ribs coming loose from the belt base
Cracks on the back
V-ribbed belt guard
Replacing the V-ribbed belt

Make sure you have a DIN 3122 D 12.5 mm (1/2") ratchet wrench and a
new V-ribbed belt.
Pull back the tensioning device 5 against the spring force anticlockwise
as far as it will go and take off the belt.
With the tensioning device 5 swung back, put the new belt on the pulleys
of the crankshaft 6, air conditioning compressor 1, alternator 3 and
deflector roller 2, 4. Then return the tensioning device 5 to the tensioning
position.
Belt run
Note
When changing the belt, make sure the deflector roller 2, 4 and the tensioning roller 5 move freely. If the tensioning roller or
! deflector roller is defective, replace it.
3.5.10
Checking / adjusting the engine valve play
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Check the valve play with the engine cold.

Make sure that:
The engine compartment hood and door are open.
You have the special cranking device, a feeler gauge and cylinder head
seals ready.
Valve overlap cranking device

L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-9 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Unscrew the service cap from the flywheel housing.

Remove the valve cover, attach the cranking device (ID no. 0524045) to
the flywheel housing and insert a standard ratchet.
For reasons of space, use extensions on the cranking device to the rear
towards the ratchet.
Turn the crankshaft in the direction of rotation until the valves of the
cylinder to be adjusted overlap (see the table).
Cylinder valves
A Outlet valve
E Inlet valve
Engine D 934
Engine D 936
Cylinder
Cylinder
Adjust
Overlap
Adjust
4
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Overlap
Checking and adjusting the inlet valve play
3.5-10 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
Checking and adjusting the outlet valve play

Push a feeler gauge between the valve and the rocker arm and check the
valve play.
Valve play
Inlet valve (cold)
0.30 mm
Outlet valve (cold)
0.40 mm
If it is not correct:
Loosen the nut on the adjusting bolt for the rocker arm and adjust it.
Tighten the counter nut to 40 Nm.
Check the adjustment again.
After checking and adjusting all the valves, put on the cylinder head
covers with new seals.
Remove the cranking device.
3.5.11
Checking the diesel engine heating flange

Make sure that:
You have an ohmmeter or a multimeter ready.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Turn off the battery main switch.

Disconnect the electric connection cable 2 on the heating flange 1.
Connect the ohmmeter or multimeter to the terminal and check the
resistance (0.25 Ohm +/-10% at 20 C).
Disconnect the electric connection cable on the heating flange.
Turn on the battery main switch
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-11 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.12
Greasing the ring gear on the engine starter flywheel

The service cap is on the right side of the engine, on the flywheel housing.
Make sure that:
The engine is in the maintenance position.
Starter ring gear service cap

Unscrew the service cap 1 from the flywheel housing.
Only grease the starter ring gear 2; there may not be any grease on the
sensor gear ring 3.
Check the ring gear and apply a light coating of standard grease
if necessary.
Screw on the service cap again.
3.5.13
Changing the engine oil separator filter insert
Oil separator
Carefully clean the oil separator and the area around it.
Unscrew the oil separator cap and take it off, using a screwdriver
if necessary.
3.5-12 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
The oil separator is on the flywheel side, on the right side of the engine.
Make sure that:
The engine is in maintenance position 1.
You have a genuine LIEBHERR oil separator filter insert ready.
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
3.5.14
Checking the bearings and condition of the engine control

units
Procedure
Check that the bearings are properly seated and undamaged.
If you find damaged bearings:
do not start the engine, replace all the bearings
3.5.15
Checking the state of sensors and cable connections

Procedure
Check that all the sensors and cable connections are properly seated
and in good condition.
Check that none of the cables and wiring harnesses are damaged, rub or
not properly fastened.
If you find any damaged cables, wiring harnesses or sensors:
Do not start the engine until you have replaced the defective parts.
3.5.16
Changing the fuel pre-filter
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
On the right side of the diesel engine you can find:

The fuel pre-filter with water separator and depending on the engine
type fuel pre-heater (optional)
Water level probe
Integrated fuel hand pump
Bleeding the water of the fuel prefilter must be conducted after the water
level probe activates.
Make sure that:
You have a suitable receptacle ready.
Only use genuine LIEBHERR spare parts.
(1 fuel pre-filter cartridge)
Procedure
Danger
There is a risk of fire and explosions.
! Do not smoke.
! Avoid naked flames.
! Only work with the engine switched off and cooled down.
Place a receptacle under the fuel pre-filter.
Carefully clean the fuel pre-filter and the area around it.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-13 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5-14 o f 5 8
Fuel water separator container

Unscrew the water separator container 4 from the filter cartridge 3.
Dispose of the old filter cartridge.
Wash the water separator container and dry it with compressed air.
Lightly oil the O-ring 9 of the water separator container.
Screw the water separator container to the new filter cartridge until the
O-ring touches the filter cartridge.
Tighten the water separator container half a turn by hand.
Screw in the drain plug 5.
Check the filter head is clean and ensure that the thread adapter is firmly
in the filter head.
If the filter head is dirty:
Clean the filter head.
Lubricate the sealing ring 10 of the new filter cartridge with clean fuel.
Fill the filter cartridge via the holes on the outside and screw it on until the
sealing ring lies on the filter head.
Tighten the filter cartridge 3 half a turn by hand.
Reconnect the electrical connections of the water level probe 8 and the
fuel preheater 7 (optional).
Close the bleeder screw 6.
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Fuel prefilter cartridge

Disconnect the electrical connections of the water level probe 8 and the
fuel preheater 7 (optional).
Drain the fuel:
Unscrew the bleeder screw 6 and drain plug 5.
Release the filter cartridge 3 with a strap wrench or similar tools and
unscrew it.
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
Bleed the fuel system.

See the section on bleeding the fuel system.
3.5.17
Changing the fuel fine filter

Make sure that:
You have a suitable receptacle ready.
Only use genuine LIEBHERR spare parts.
(1 fuel filter cartridge)
Procedure
Danger
! Do not smoke.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Place a receptacle under the fuel fine filter.

Carefully clean the fuel fine filter and the area around it.
Unscrew the fuel fine filter 1.
(Use a suitable filter strap)
Dispose of the old filter cartridge.
Check the filter base is clean and ensure that the thread adapter is firmly
in the filter base.
If the filter base is dirty:
Clean the filter base.
Lubricate the sealing ring 2 of the new filter cartridge with clean fuel.
Fill the filter cartridge and screw it on until the sealing ring lies on the
filter head.
Tighten the filter cartridge 1/2 a revolution by hand with a filter wrench.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-15 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.18
Draining off condensate from the fuel pre-filter (the

corresponding service code appears)
After integrated water level probe in the fuel pre-filter activates (service code
on the display), the water collector tank must be drained.
Danger
! Do not smoke.
Draining the fuel pre-filter

Place a receptacle under the fuel pre-filter.
If necessary attach a drainage hose.
Open the drain plug, drain the water until fuel emerges without bubbles.
When fuel emerges:
Tighten the drain plug.
3.5.19
Bleeding the fuel system

Danger
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
! Do not smoke.
Bleeder screw on the head of the fuel prefilter

Unscrew the bleeder screw 1 on the head of the fuel prefilter by 2 to
3 turns.
3.5-16 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
Operate the hand pump 2.

If fuel flows out of the bleeder screw without bubbles:
Tighten the bleeder screw 1.
Continue to operate the hand pump until you feel strong resistance.
Bleeder screw on the head of the fuel fine filter

Unscrew the bleeder screw 1 on the head of the fuel fine filter by 2 to
3 turns.
Continue to activate the hand pump until you feel strong resistance.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Bleeder screw on the crankcase

Unscrew the bleeder screw 1 on the crankcase (if present) by 2 to
3 revolutions.
Continue to activate the hand pump until you feel strong resistance.
Bleeding the fuel filter with the engine bleeding function
It is necessary when the fuel tank has run completely empty.
When the fuel tank is empty there is air in the fuel system.
You can remove some of the air from the fuel system by bleeding the
fuel filter.
You can bleed the air between the injection pump and the injection nozzle
by activating engine bleeding mode.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-17 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
Danger
! Do not smoke.
Bleed the fuel filter:
See the section on bleeding the fuel filter.
Activate the engine bleeding function.
Activation sequence:
Turn the ignition on
With the engine not running, press the button for 10 seconds.
All 3 LEDs on the button light up when the engine bleeding function is
activated.
Turn the ignition key to position II and keep it in there until the
engine starts.
Do not hold the key in the starting position for more than
20 seconds at a time.
The ECU ends the engine bleeding function automatically as soon as the
engine starts again.
If the engine does not start:
Wait a minute and repeat the procedure.
In the meantime, continue to operate the hand pump until you feel
strong resistance.
3.5.20
Draining off condensate and sediment from the fuel tank

Unscrew the sealing cap 1 on the drain valve 2 on the bottom of the
diesel tank.
Screw the drain hose 3 onto the drain valve 2.
Drain the condensation and sediment into a suitable receptacle until
clean fuel begins to flow.
Unscrew the oil drain hose.
Screw the cap 1 onto the drain valve 2 and tighten it.
3.5-18 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
3.5.21
Cleaning the air filter service cap and dust extraction valve
Note
If the valve is damaged, the dust extraction function is impaired and the
filters become clogged more quickly.
! With the engine running at lower idle speed, you should clearly feel air
pulsating at the dust extraction valve.
Make sure that:

The engine compartment hatch is open.
The battery main switch is switched off and the main switch key
is removed.
Cleaning the dust extraction valve
Press the rubber seal on the dust extraction valve 5 several times to
remove the dust from the service cap 3.
When working in dusty conditions, check and empty the dust extraction
valve 5 more often.
If the dust extraction valve is damaged or stays open:
Replace the dust extraction valve.
Cleaning the service cap
Open the fixing clips 4 on the service cap 3 and take the cap off.
Clean the service cap 3.
Put the service cap 3 back on the filter housing 6.
The dust extraction valve 5 must face down.
Make sure the cap is placed properly on the filter housing 6.
Close the fixing clips 4.
3.5.22
Testing the air filter vacuum switch
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Make sure that:

You have a big enough plate available.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-19 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
3.5.23
Testing the vacuum switch

Take the rain cap 1 off the intake pipe 2 of the filter housing.
Start the engine.
Slowly and carefully push the plate over the opening of the intake pipe.
At the same time, check whether the indicator lamp in the cab lights up
or the warning buzzer sounds.
If you hear or see no warning signal when the intake pipe is just sealed,
check the vacuum switch and the wiring, and replace it if necessary.
Changing the air filter primary element when indicated by the

vacuum switch
The primary element 2 should be replaced when the air filter contamination
symbol field on the display unit lights up.
If the air filter contamination symbol field remains lit after the primary
element 2 has been serviced then the secondary element 1 must also
be replaced.
Make sure that:
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Air filter
1 Secondary element
2 Primary element
3 Service cap
4 Fixing clips
5 Dust extraction valve
6 Air filter housing
Remove the primary element 2. To do this pull or turn the element gently
upwards, downwards or to the side in order to release the seal.
3.5-20 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
Ensure that all dirt is removed from the filter housing before inserting a
new filter element.
The secondary element 1 should be replaced every third time the primary
element 2 is replaced.
Lightly oil the seal surfaces before installing the filter elements (for the
primary element 2 this is on the inside, for the secondary element 1 on
the outside). Re-insert filter elements 1 and 2 and make sure that they
are correctly fitted.
Clean the service cap 3 and put it on the filter housing with the dust
extraction valve 5 facing down.
Only when the lid completely covers the filter housing can you close the
fixing clips without excessive force.
3.5.24
Changing the air filter secondary element

If the air filter contamination symbol field remains lit after the primary
element 2 has been serviced then the secondary element 1 must also
be replaced.
Change the secondary element:
After replacing the primary element three times
Otherwise, at least once a year
Make sure that:
The engine compartment door is open.
The battery main switch is switched off and the main switch key
is removed.
Procedure
Air filter
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
1 Secondary element
4 Fixing clips
2 Primary element
3 Service cap
Remove the secondary element 1.
To loosen the seal: Pull or twist the element slightly up, down
or sideways.
Ensure that all dirt is removed from the filter housing before inserting a
new or cleaned filter element.
Lightly oil the seal surfaces before installing the filter elements (for the
secondary element 1 this is the outside).
Re-insert the filter elements 1 make sure that it is correctly fitted.
Clean the service cap 3 and put it on the filter housing with the dust
extraction valve 5 facing down.
Only when the lid completely covers the filter housing can you close the
fixing clips without excessive force.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-21 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.25
Checking the air intake hoses for leaks and tight fitting
Turbo hose 1 between the air filter and the turbocharger

You can check the air intake hose 1 for cracks from the inside after
removing the air filter. It is not possible to check the air intake hose all round
from outside.
Make sure that:
The battery main switch is turned off.
Procedure
Caution
A damaged or leaky air hose will damage the engine.
! Check the air hose for cracks or pitting.
Take the service cap off the air filter housing, then take the primary and
secondary elements out of the air filter housing.
Check the air hose all the way round for cracks and pitting. Use a torch
to light up the hose.
Check the clip fastenings on the air intake hose.
3.5.26
Checking the exhaust lines for leaks and tight fitting

Make sure that:
3.5-22 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
If you find cracks or pitting on the hose:

Replace the hose.
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
Check that the fixing screws 1 and clip 3 on the exhaust pipe between
the turbocharger and the silencer are tightly fastened and do not leak.
Check that the flexible pipe 2 of the exhaust pipe is laid straight.
Check that the spacer 3 is tight.
Check that the fastening clip 6 of the tail pipe 7 is tight.
3.5.27
Check the oil level in the pump distributor gear

The dipstick 3 and the oil filling tube 2 are located in the engine compartment directly beside the hydraulic tank.
Access is from above the engine on the right-hand side.
Make sure that:
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure

Pull out the dipstick 3, wipe it clean, and re-insert it.
Pull out the dipstick 3 once again and read off the oil level.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-23 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX markings.
Remove the sealing cap from the oil filling tube 2 and top up with oil.
For the oil quality, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
Clean the sealing cap for the oil filling tube 2, put it on the oil filling tube
2 on the splitter box, and then tighten it up.
3.5.28
Changing the splitter box oil

Make sure that:
The cover plate under the engine is open.
You have a suitable oil receptacle (capacity approx. 3 l) and the drain
hose with valve connection ready.
For the oil quality and quantity, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
Pull out the dipstick 3 slightly (to read off the oil level more easily).
Unscrew the sealing cap on the oil drain valve 5 and screw the drain
hose onto the oil drain valve 5.
Drain the oil into the receptacle.
Unscrew the drain hose from the oil drain valve 5 and screw on the
sealing cap.
Unscrew the sealing cap from the oil filling tube 2 and top up with
fresh oil.
Clean the sealing cap 2, screw it on and tighten it.
Check the oil level on the dipstick 3.
The oil level must be up to the MAX mark.
3.5.29
Checking the soot particle filter pressure monitor for function,

leaks and blockages
This equipment is optional.
Make sure that:
3.5-24 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
1 Soot particle filter

2 Temperature sensor
3 Counterpressure line connection
Procedure
Unscrew the counterpressure line from the DPX particle filter at position 3
and blow air into it with a compressed air gun.
There must be sufficient distance to the entrance of the counterpressure
line, so that the counterpressure of 150 mbar or 200 mbar is only
slightly exceeded.
Caution
First adjust the air pressure down to no more than 0.5 bar, as otherwise the
electronic counterpressure monitor will be irreparably damaged.
Check the electronic counterpressure monitor while blowing in air.
3.5.30
Checking and draining the soot particle filter condensate

separator
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Make sure that:
Procedure
The condensate separator is mounted on the rear left in the engine
compartment.
Main components
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-25 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
1
2
3
4
Filter/drain unit
5 Exhaust gas counterpressure
Counterpressure line
display line
Condensate container
6 Data logger line
Drain plug
At regular intervals (daily or as required):
Check the filling level of the filter/drain unit.
If the condensate container is over half full with condensation water:
Drain off the accumulated condensation water.
To do this, open the drain plug 4 of the condensate container 3.
Drain the water from the condensate container.
Tighten the drain plug 4 again.
Check the filter insert (visible in the sight glass) of the filter/drain unit 1 for dirt.
If the filter insert is too dirty:
The filter insert must be replaced.
Note
The condensate separator should be completely replaced after 1000 operating hours.
! This must be done when cleaning the filter (every 1000 operating hours
as prescribed).
3.5.31
Changing the soot particle filter condensate separator
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

The condensate separator must be changed when cleaning the filter (every
1000 operating hours as prescribed).
Make sure that:
The condensate separator 1 is mounted on the rear left in the engine
compartment on the fuse panel.
1 Condensate separator
2 PDL data logger
3.5-26 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3 Fuse panel
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
Release the hose connections of the counterpressure line of the
condensate separator 1.
Unscrew the condensate separator 1 from the fuse panel 3.
Screw the new condensate separator 1 into the fuse panel 3 and fasten
the two hose connections back onto the condensate separator.
3.5.32
Cleaning the soot particle filter

The cleaning process removes oil residue from the filter module. This oil
residue comes from the combustion of engine oil and is visible as white ash
(metal oxide).
Before cleaning, completely regenerate the particle filter (operate the wheel
loader for at least 10 minutes at the maximum possible engine load to burn
off any soot sediment on the filter surface).
Make sure that:
You have a suitable extraction system or industrial vacuum cleaner.
Compressed air cleaning
Procedure
Caution
Running at full load makes the filter housing very hot!
! When removing and cleaning it, always wear gloves, a dust mask
and goggles.
Remove the filter module by releasing the V clips.
Clean the inlet side of the filter with compressed air and a vacuum
cleaning system.
Caution
Protect the filter module from external contamination.
- Never clean the filter module with steam or cleaning agents.
- Use non-oiled compressed air for cleaning.
Clean the outlet side of the filter with compressed air and a vacuum
cleaning system. Aim the air jet at each channel of the outlet side, until
you cannot see any more particles.
Install the filter module again.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Note
If the machine has been idling too long to regenerate the particle filter, the
filter must be burned out.
! Put it in a furnace for at least 5 hours at 680 C or use a hot air blower.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-27 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.33
Checking the coolant antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor

concentration
Coolant equalizing reservoir

1 Filler neck
2 Cap
3 Coolant equalizing reservoir

4 Coolant level sensor
All year round, the coolant must contain at least 50% by volume of concentrated antifreeze, but not more than 60% by volume.
This protects against freezing down to around -37 C.
Make sure that:
You have the optical density tester kit or antifreeze tester ready.
Checking the antifreeze concentration
See the coolant temperature on the display unit.

The coolant temperature should be in the bottom third of the display.
Carefully open the sealing cap on the filler neck 1.
Take a sample of the coolant and check the antifreeze concentration
using the test tool.
If the antifreeze concentration is too low:
Refill with pure antifreeze until the required value is attained.
See the section on correcting the antifreeze concentration.
3.5-28 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Caution
There is a danger of scalding due to coolant escaping under pressure.
! Only open the cap on the filler neck once the engine has cooled down.
! Check the coolant temperature.
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
Correcting the antifreeze concentration
1 Cooler drain valve

2 Diesel engine drain plug
If the antifreeze concentration is too low:
Drain off the coolant and top up with pure antifreeze according to the
following diagram.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Caution
There is a risk of damage to the diesel engine.
Too much antifreeze and corrosion protection agent impairs the cooling effect.
This eventually causes damage to the diesel engine.
! Never use more than 60% antifreeze and corrosion protection agent.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-29 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
1 Amount of pure antifreeze to be

added in litres
2 Identified line - top-up quantity
3 Help line(s) example -15 C

4 Measured coolant freezing point
in C
5 Total capacity of cooling

system in litres (example
25 litres)
Example procedure
Assumption:
25 litres total filling quantity of the cooling system
-15 C coolant temperature, measured in the cooling system
In the diagram, go to the line showing the overall cooling system filling
quantity 5 at 25 litres, and move vertically upwards.
Carry on along the help line 3, starting from the temperature -15 C, and
move diagonally to the bottom left.
Finally, starting from the point where the lines cross, go horizontally along
the (identified) line 2 to the far left.
3.5-30 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Selection for antifreeze concentration
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
This gives you the topping up quantity of pure antifreeze and corrosion
protection agent 1 (7.6 litres in this example) to be added in order to achieve
protection down to -37 C.
To restore the correct mixing ratio, you must drain off at least the previously calculated quantity (the top-up quantity) from the cooling system.
Top up with the correct quantity of pure antifreeze and corrosion protection agent.
The coolant previously drained off can be used if necessary to restore the
required coolant level.
Using anti-corrosion agent without antifreeze
In exceptional cases and when outside temperatures never fall below
freezing, such as tropical zones, where it is demonstrable that no approved
antifreeze and corrosion protection agent is available, corrosion inhibitors
may be used.
The coolant must be changed once a year.
The mixing ratio must consist of 7.5% corrosion inhibitor and 92.5% water.
The Gefo 2710 refractometer is recommended for testing.
Checking the coolant and anti-corrosion concentration
Caution
Only open the cap on the filler neck once the engine has cooled down.
The coolant temperature display should be in the bottom third of
the display.
Carefully open the sealing cap on the filler neck.
Check the antifreeze concentration with a 2710 refractometer from the
GEFO company.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Checking the mixing ratio with a refractometer
Gefro refractometer no. 2710

1 Refractometer
2 Eyepiece
Brix value: The measure for soluble dry substance in a liquid.
Clean the cover and the prism carefully.
Place 1 or 2 drops of test fluid on the prism.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-31 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
The fluid is distributed by closing the prism.

Look through the eyepiece 2 against a light background and focus
the scale.
The focus is set by turning the eyepiece 2.
Read off the value on the blue line in the eyepiece.
Conversion diagram from Brix to corrosion

inhibitor concentration (%vol)
Convert the Brix value using the conversion diagram to find the actual
corrosion inhibitor concentration.
3.5.34
Cleaning the cooling system
Cooling system hood

Clean the cooler whenever necessary in order to ensure proper cooling. In

dusty environments, check the cooler every day and clean it if necessary.
Dirty cooler units result in overheating. The consequence is an audible and
visual warning with simultaneous power reduction of the travel drive.
Dust and other contaminants can be removed from the cooling fins with
water jets, steam or compressed air. Compressed air is preferable.
Make sure that:
The left and right cooling system hoods are open.
3.5-32 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
1 Left cooling system hood

2 Right cooling system hood
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
Cooling system
Swing out the condenser 1.
Swing out the fuel cooler 2.
Caution
Risk of damage to the cooling system
Careless handling can damage the cooler fins.
! Do not use hard objects or excessive water pressure for cleaning.
3.5.35
Clean the cooler units with compressed air, steam or water.

Close the condenser 1 again.
Close the fuel cooler 2 again.
Close any cab doors which are open.
Close the cooling system hood(s) (left/right) again.
Changing the coolant

Use clean, fresh water with a Ph value between 6.5 and 8.5 and a low
sulphate / chlorine content for preparing the coolant.
The coolant must be prepared outside the cooling system.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Always dispose of any coolant which you have drained off but no longer
need according to the applicable regulations.
Make sure that:
A receptacle with a minimum capacity of 25 litres is available for the used
coolant, along with a drain hose.
The mixing ratio of the new coolant must be correct.
See also the section on checking the coolant antifreeze concentration.
The shut-off valves on the heating hoses are open.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-33 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
Cooling system
1 Filler neck
3 Coolant level sensor
4 Diesel engine drain plug

5 Cooler drain valve

The coolant temperature should be in the bottom third of the display.
Open the sealing cap on the filler neck 1.
Unscrew the sealing cap on the cooler drain valve 5 and unscrew the
drain hose. Drain the coolant into the receptacle.
Take off the drain hose, screw the sealing cap onto the cooler drain valve
5 and tighten it.
Also drain the coolant from the diesel engine:
Open the drain plug 4 and let the coolant flow into the receptacle.
Screw the drain plug 4 back in and tighten it.
3.5-34 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Caution
Only open the cap on the filler neck once the engine has cooled down.
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
Cooling system equalizing reservoir
3.5.36
1 Cap
3 Filler neck
Top up the coolant in the equalizing reservoir 2 until you can see the
coolant in the filler neck 3.
Screw the cap 1 onto the filler neck 3.
Start the engine.
Allow the engine to run at lower idling speed.
Set the heater to warm.
Top up the coolant in the equalizing reservoir 2 until you can see the
coolant in the filler neck 3.
If the coolant level is correct:
Screw the cap 1 onto the filler neck 3.
Checking the oil level in the hydraulic tank

Note
When using bio oil, take an oil sample every 500 hours.
! See the hydraulic oil section under lubricants and fuels.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Make sure that:

The machine is cold.
Checking the hydraulic oil level
Hydraulic tank
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-35 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
The red maximum oil level marking shows the correct oil level.
Check the oil level in the sight glass 1.
Top up with hydraulic oil.
Topping up with hydraulic oil
Connect the plug 3 to the bleeder filter (to protect against vandalism).
The anti-twist lock of the bleeder filter is released.
Release the tank pre-pressure:
Unscrew the bleeder filter 2 on the hydraulic tank by two turns.
Note
The hydraulic oil may only be poured in through the return strainer.
! For oil specifications, see the section on lubricants and fuels.
3.5.37
Open the cover 1 of the return strainer.

Top up with hydraulic oil up to the oil level marking 4.
Put the cover 1 on the housing and tighten it up.
Screw on the bleeder filter 2 tightly and remove the connector 3 (keep it
somewhere safe).
Draining off condensate and sediment from the hydraulic tank

Make sure that:
The machine has not been used for at least 3 hours.
You have a receptacle ready for water and oil.
3.5.38
Changing the oil in the hydraulic tank and checking the return
strainer
Make sure that:
The machine is at operating temperature.
The engine compartment hood and door are open.
You have a receptacle of around 200 l capacity for the used oil.
3.5-36 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Unscrew the plug 2 from the drain valve.
Connect the drain hose 3 and let the water and sediment flow into
the receptacle.
Take off the drain hose and screw the plug into the drain valve.
Screw in the bleeder filter 1.
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
Unscrew the plug 2 from the drain valve.
Connect the drain hose 3 and let the oil flow into the receptacle.
Take off the drain hose and screw the plug into the drain valve.
Open the cover 4 of the return strainer.
Take the snap ring 5 off the return strainer.
Take out the return strainer 6 and check it for dirt (clean it if necessary).
Note
Serious contamination or large metal fragments in the return strainer may
indicate damage to the hydraulic system.
! In this event, locate the problem and rectify it.

The hydraulic oil may only be poured in through the return strainer.
Top up with hydraulic oil up to the oil level marking 3.
Put the cover 2 on the housing and tighten it up.
Start the diesel engine and let it run briefly at low idling speed.
Turn off the diesel engine and then check the oil level in the sight glass,
topping up if necessary.
3.5.39
Checking and cleaning the magnetic rod on the hydraulic tank

Make sure that:
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Unscrew the plug 2.
The oil level sinks.
Release the bolts on the lid and slowly lift the lid with the magnetic rod 1.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-37 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Note
Serious contamination or large metal fragments on the magnetic rod may
indicate damage to the hydraulic system.

Carefully clean the magnetic rod 1.
After cleaning:
Place the O-ring and cover with the magnetic rod on the housing.
Tighten the screws on the cover.
Screw in the plug 2.
Screw on the bleeder filter 4 tightly and remove the connector 3 (keep it
somewhere safe).
3.5.40
Changing the hydraulic tank return suction filter

Make sure that:
Procedure
Release the tank pre-pressure: Unscrew the bleeder filter 1 on the
hydraulic tank by two turns.
Unscrew the plug 2 (the oil level sinks).
Release the bolts on the lid 3 and slowly lift the lid with the magnetic rod.
Take out the filter element 4.
Put in a new filter element.
Carefully clean the magnetic rod.
Place the O-ring and cover with the magnetic rod on the housing and
tighten the screws on the cover.
Screw in the plug 2.
Note
Serious contamination or large metal fragments in the filter element or on
the magnetic rod may indicate damage to the hydraulic system.

Changing the hydraulic tank bleeder filter
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.5.41
Make sure that:

Procedure
3.5-38 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
You cannot clean the bleeder filter. The bleeder filter 1 and its plastic
housing must be changed at the intervals in the maintenance schedule.
Unscrew the old bleeder filter.
Screw in the new bleeder filter and remove the connector 2 (keep it
somewhere safe).
3.5.42
Lubricating the pilot control device solenoids, universal joints

and tappets
Procedure
Take the rubber sleeve 5 of the control lever off the retaining plate 4.
Move the control lever in the appropriate direction for better access.
Clean the retaining solenoids 1 with a brush.
Lubricate the universal joints 2 and the discs 3 with a brush.
Start the machine and check the retaining function of the solenoids.
Fit the rubber sleeve of the control lever on the retaining plate.
3.5.43
Testing the steering

Make sure that:
The working attachment is in the transport position.
The articulation lock is open.
There is enough space to test the steering.
Procedure
Warning
Beware of accidents
! Do not allow anyone into the danger area while these tests are
being conducted.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
! Perform the test on level ground with no obstacles.
Start the engine.

Without moving the machine, turn the steering in both directions and
check that it is functioning properly.
3.5.44
Lubricating the bearing points on the steering cylinders

Make sure that:
The articulation lock is engaged if possible.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-39 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Procedure
1 Lubrication point at base of right3 Lubrication point on the piston rod

hand steering cylinder
end of left-hand steering cylinder
2 Lubrication point at base of left4 Lubrication point on the piston rod
hand steering cylinder
end of right-hand steering cylinder
Lubricate the bearing points on the steering cylinders.
3.5.45
Testing the service brake and parking brake

Make sure that there is enough room to check the service brake and
parking brake.
Warning
Beware of running over bystanders or obstacles.
! Do not allow anyone into the danger area while these tests are
being conducted.
! Perform the test on level ground with no obstacles.
1 Inch/brake pedal
3 Braking range
2 Inching range
Start the machine, and drive it forwards at around 8 km/h.
Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down. The machine must come to
an abrupt stop.
Checking the parking brake
Start the machine, and drive it forwards at around 5 km/h.
Press the parking brake button while travelling.
The machine must come to an abrupt halt.
3.5-40 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Checking the service brake
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
3.5.46
Checking the gap and wear on the parking brake linings

Friction can change the gap X1 and X2 and the thickness of the brake lining.
Procedure
Warning
There is a risk of injuries due to machine rolling away.
! Make sure that the machine is secured against rolling away when carrying out work on the parking brake.
Disc brake (shown in open position)

1
2
3
4
5
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Lock nut
6 Counter nut
Plug
7 Hex bolt
Adjusting screw
8 X1 Gap
Brake disc
9 X2 Gap
Brake lining
Start the diesel engine and press the button to release the parking brake.
Test the brake lining thickness:
If the brake linings are thinner than 1.0 mm, they must be replaced.
Check the gap X1 and X2:
If the gap X1 + X2 is more than 1.5 mm:
Adjust the gap.
Loosen the counter nut 6 and adjust the gap X1 to 0.3 mm using an allen
key 7.
Tighten the counter nut 6.
Unscrew the sealing cap 2 and loosen the lock nut 1.
Use the adjusting screw 3 to set the gap X2 to 0.3 mm.
Tighten the lock nut 1.
Engage the parking brake several times and test it again.
Screw on the sealing cap 2 and tighten it.
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-41 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.47
Checking the indicator lamps and lighting

Make sure that:
The machine's electrical system is switched on.
Checking the indicator lamps and lighting
When you switch on the ignition, the lamps on the display unit are tested.
All symbol fields light up for three seconds.
Switch on the ignition.

Check that the symbol fields on the display unit light up.
Check that all lights are working.
Adjusting the working floodlights
Note: The front working floodlights cannot be adjusted.
The rear working floodlights are optional.
Adjust the rear working floodlights as required:
Either for close range lighting
or for long range lighting.
1 Floodlight
4 Bracket
2 Fixing screw
5 Adjusting screw
3 Fixing screws
Horizontal Y axis adjustment:
Loosen the screw 2.
Move the left and right floodlights as required.
Tighten the screw again.
Vertical X axis adjustment:
Loosen the screw 5.
Move the left and right floodlights as required.
Tighten the screw again.
3.5-42 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Rear working floodlights
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
3.5.48
Checking the batteries, fluid level and terminals
The batteries are housed in the right ballast weight and can be accessed by
opening the covers.
The batteries must always be in perfect condition in order for the machine to
work reliably.
Make sure that:
The battery main switch is switched off and the main switch key is
taken out.
The covers on the ballast are bolted on.
Warning
Batteries give off explosive gases. Battery acid is highly corrosive.
! Do not smoke. Avoid naked flames when handling, servicing or recharging batteries.
Caution
Beware of sparks and explosions!
! Use a special terminal brush.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Wipe the battery with a clean cloth.

Clean the terminals and the connectors.
To guarantee a good connection, check that the connectors are tight on
the terminals, and tighten them if necessary.
Smear the terminals and connectors with acid-proof grease such
as vaseline.
At very high temperatures, the acid level in the individual cells can drop due
to different rates of evaporation.
Open the plugs on each cell and check the acid level.
Check the charge using an acid density tester.
If the charge is too low (acid density below 1.26 kg/l):
Recharge the batteries.
If there is a risk of frost, it is important that the batteries are not discharged.
Otherwise the electrolyte can freeze and irreparably damage the battery.
If the acid level is too low:
Top up with distilled water to around 10 mm above the plates.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-43 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.49
Checking the transmission oil level

Make sure that:
The articulation lock is engaged.
Procedure
Check the oil level with the engine running and at a gear oil temperature of
2010 C.
Start the engine and let it run at low idling speed.
Check the oil level in the sight glasses 3 and 4.
The oil level must be within the bottom sight glass 4.
Switch off the engine and top up with the required amount of gear oil. For
the oil quality, see the section gear lubricants in the lubricants and
fuels section.
Repeat the check.
If the oil level is too high:
Have LIEBHERR CUSTOMER SERVICE identify the problem and
rectify it.
3.5.50
Changing the transmission oil

Make sure that:
You have a sufficient quantity of the gear oil prescribed in the section on
lubricants and fuels.
The oil in the gearbox is warm.
You have a suitable oil receptacle ready for disposal.
Procedure
3.5.51
Changing the transmission oil filter

Make sure that:
You have a genuine LIEBHERR oil cartridge ready.
Procedure
Start the engine. Turn and steer the machine to the left as far as it
will go.
Release the filter cartridge with a strap wrench and unscrew it.
Clean the seals on the filter bracket.
Lightly coat the rubber seal ring on the new oil filter cartridge with
gear oil.
Screw the new filter cartridge onto the filter bracket and tighten it
by hand.
3.5-44 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Open the cap on the filler neck.

Open the plug 1 on the gearbox and drain the oil into a suitable receptacle.
Then screw the plug 1 in again.
Top up gear oil the filler neck of the plug 2.
Replace the gear oil filter as described in the separate instructions.
Check the oil level in the transmission and top it up if necessary (see the
section on checking the oil level in the transmission).
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
Check the oil level in the transmission and top it up if necessary (see the
section on checking the oil level in the transmission).
Check the oil filter for leaks.
3.5.52
Checking the tightness of the wheels (once after 50, 100

and 250 h)
Make sure that:
A torque wrench with a measuring range of over 650 Nm is available.
Procedure
Note
Check the tightness of the wheels according to the specified intervals.
! This one-off maintenance task scheduled for 50, 100 and 250 service
hours must be performed every time the wheels are changed.
Check that the nuts on all four wheels have been tightened with the
required torque of 750 Nm.
3.5.53
Valid for:
Checking the axle oil level

L576 - 457 / from 14171
The differential and the wheel hubs have a common oil system.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Open the plug 4 and check the oil level in the axle.
Top up with the axle oil prescribed in the section on lubricants and fuels.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-45 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
3.5.54
Valid for:
Checking the axle oil level

L580 - 459 / from 14171
The differential and the wheel hubs have a common oil system.
Procedure
Open the plug 1 and check the oil level in the axle.
Top up with the axle oil prescribed in the section on lubricants and fuels.
3.5.55
Valid for:

L576 - 457 / from 14171
Draining oil
Caution
Running the engine makes the gear oil very hot!
! Always wear suitable gloves and goggles.
Open the plugs 2 and 4.
Open the plugs 1 and 3 on the wheel hubs and drain the oil into
a receptacle.
Close the plugs 1 and 3 again.
3.5-46 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Make sure that:

You have a sufficient quantity of the axle oil prescribed in the section on
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
Topping up oil
The wheel hubs and the differential have a common oil system. This means
the oil can flow back and forth between the differential and the wheel hubs.
Top up oil at the filling inlet 2 up to the plug 4.
Check the oil level at the plug 4 and top up if necessary.
3.5.56
Valid for:

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Make sure that:

You have a sufficient quantity of the axle oil prescribed in the section on
Draining oil
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Caution
Running the engine makes the gear oil very hot!
! Always wear suitable gloves and goggles.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-47 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Open the plug 1.

Open the plugs 2 and 3 on the wheel hubs and drain the oil into
a receptacle.
Topping up oil
The wheel hubs and the differential have a common oil system. This means
the oil can flow back and forth between the differential and the wheel hubs.
Top up oil at the filling inlet 1.
Check the oil level at the filling inlet 1 and top up if necessary.
Close the plug 1 again.
3.5.57
Valid for:
Lubricating the bevel gear seal

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Make sure that:

Procedure
Lubricate at the grease fitting 1 on the front and rear axles.
If necessary, such as when operating the machine in water, lubricate
every day.
3.5.58
Checking and lubricating the front drive shaft

Procedure
Lubricate the drive shaft at both universal joints.
Check the play of the drive shaft in the bearings.
Check the rubber sleeve for leaks and damage.
3.5.59
Checking and lubricating the rear drive shaft

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Procedure
Lubricate the drive shaft at both universal joints.
Check the play of the drive shaft in the bearings.
3.5-48 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
3.5.60
Testing and setting the tyre pressure for the machine's use
and attachments
Make sure the air pressure in the tyres on both axles is correct for the tyre
type, the way the machine is used and the working attachments fitted.
The reference values can be found in the operating manual, in the technical
data section.
Procedure
The air pressure in the tyres has a significant influence on the overall
operating performance of the machine.
Warning
Exploding tyres can cause serious injury.
If the tyre inflation equipment is incorrectly or carelessly used or if the tyre
pressure is too high, the tyres may burst or the rims may come off, causing
severe, or possibly even fatal injuries.
! Use a sufficiently long hose with a self-locking adapter for pumping
the tyres.
! Always keep outside the danger zone when tyres are being pumped up.
Check the air pressure in all the tyres and correct it if necessary.
3.5.61
Lubricating the articulated bearing and the rear oscillating

bearing
Make sure that:
The articulation lock is engaged.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Lubricating the articulation bearing
Articulation bearing lubrication points

1 Top articulation bearing
2 Bottom articulation bearing
Lubricate the articulation bearing lubrication points.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-49 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Lubricating the rear oscillating bearing
Lubricating points on the rear oscillating bearing, right central lubrication rail
1 Rear axle oscillating bearing
2 Front axle oscillating bearing
Lubricate the lubricating points on the rear axle oscillating bearing.
3.5.62
Checking the lubrication system grease reservoir level

Procedure
It the grease in the reservoir container is too low, all 3 LEDs on the central
lubrication system button light up.
Caution
There is a risk of damaging the system.
! Pay attention to cleanliness when filling.
If necessary, fill the reservoir via the filling coupling 1 (fast filling) or the
grease fitting 2.
Grease specifications: See the lubricants and fuels listed in chapter 5.
3.5-50 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Regularly check the grease quantity in the reservoir.

Stay within the minimum and maximum lubricant levels.
The reservoir has a sight glass where the rubber stripper on the agitator can
be seen.
Look through the sight glass to check the level in the grease reservoir.
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
3.5.63
Checking the pipes, hoses and lubrication points of the

lubrication system
Procedure
Visually examine the hose lines for defects.
In case of any defects, locate and rectify the problem.
3.5.64
Checking whether metered quantities are adequate at the

bearing points (grease collars) of the central lubrication
system
Procedure
Visually examine whether metered quantities are adequate at the
bearing points.
If the bearing points are not sufficiently lubricated, locate the problem and
rectify it.
Regularly check the grease quantity in the reservoir.
See the section on checking the lubrication system grease reservoir level,
3.5.65
Lubricating the door hinges

Procedure
Lubricate the door hinges with a grease gun.
3.5.66
Cleaning the fresh air and recirculated air filter

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Cleaning the fresh air filter
Fresh air filter

1 Door
3 Ventilation lint filter
2 Fresh air filter
Open the door 1.
Pull out the fresh air filter 2 by the protruding lug on the bottom.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-51 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Fresh air filter

Clean (blow out) or replace the fresh air filter 2.
Remove the lint filter 3.
Clean (blow out or wash) the lint filter or change it if necessary.
Fresh air filter

Insert the cleaned or new filters, making sure they are correctly fitted (the
arrows moulded on the filter frame point towards the air taken in).
Close the door again.
Recirculation filter
3.5-52 o f 5 8
1 Door
3 Recirculation filter
2 Pin
Remove the pin 2.
Open the door 1.
Take out the recirculated air filter 3 and clean it (blow it out) or replace it.
Put in a clean or new filter.
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Cleaning the recirculated air filter
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
3.5.67
Changing the fresh air and recirculated air filter

Changing the fresh air filter
Fresh air filter

1 Door
3 Ventilation lint filter
2 Fresh air filter
Open the door 1.
Pull out the fresh air filter 2 by the protruding lug on the bottom.
Fresh air filter

Insert the new filter 1, making sure it is correctly fitted (the arrows
moulded on the filter frame point towards the air taken in).
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Changing the recirculated air filter
1 Door
2 Pin
Remove the pin 2.
Open the door 1.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
3 Recirculation filter
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-53 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Take out the recirculated air filter 3.

Put in a new filter.
3.5.68
Checking the indicator beads in the dryer-collector unit

The dryer-collector unit is located on the right under the cooling system hood.
Sight glass in the dryer-collector unit

Check the orange bead 2 (moisture indicator).
If the orange bead 2 has turned transparent:
There is moisture in the refrigerant circuit. You must replace the dryercollector and the compressor oil and refill the system.
The white bead 1 shows the filling level of R134a refrigerant in the circuit
and acts as an indicator during initial filling. The white bead 1 must be at
the top of the sight glass.
The filling level can vary due to temperature fluctuations. It also sinks in time
due to natural leakage. This does not impair operation.
If the cooling performance deteriorates, one of the causes can be a low
refrigerant level.
In normal circumstances, one filling lasts for three to five years.
3.5.69
Lubricating the lift arms and attachment

This also applies to optional equipment, for example:
High dump bucket, timber grabber etc.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Lubricating standard lift arms and attachment
Bearing and lubrication points on the lift arms

Move the lift arms and the bucket to the position shown.
3.5-54 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks

Grease all the bearing and lubrication points on the lift arms.
If fitted, lubricate the quick-change device.
If fitted, grease the lubrication points on the attachment.
The lower bucket bearings should be lubricated daily if necessary.
Lubricating the tilt cylinder support for timber transfer

Tilt cylinder support

1 Grease fitting
3 Lubricating line
2 Distributor block
Grease the lubrication points via the grease fitting 1.
The lubricant is pumped via the distributor block 2 and the lubricating lines 3
to the lubricating points.
If fitted, grease the lubrication points on the timber grabber. For detailed
information on maintenance for the attachment, see the manufacturer's instructions.
3.5.70
Checking the bucket bearing seals and the bearing bushings

on the lift arms
Checking the bucket bearing seal
The bucket bearing seal 3 prevents dirt from entering the bearing, thus
increasing the lifetime of the bearing bushings.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Depending on the type of application, wear occurs on the sealing lips 5 and
on the dirt guard 6. If the bucket bearing seal 3 is in any way damaged or
worn, it must be replaced.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-55 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Checking the bucket bearing seal

1 Bucket bearing plate
2 Bucket arm
3 Bucket bearing seal

4 Bearing bushing
5 Sealing lips
6 Dirt guard
Clean the bucket bearing seals 3 using a steam jet.
Visually check whether the sealing lips 5 touch the sides of the lift arms
and the bucket.
If there is a gap between the sealing lips 5 and the bucket arm 2 or the
bucket bearing plate 1, or if the bucket bearing seal is damaged:
Replace the bucket bearing seal as described in section 17.2.5.
Checking the bearing bushings for wear
Replace the bearing bushings in good time to prevent damage to the

material of the bucket arm.
3.5-56 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Dirt or insufficient lubrication can cause wear on the bearing bushings. The
increased play between the pin and bearing bushing causes noises.
Service Manual
Maintenance
Maintenance tasks
Gently and rapidly tilt the bucket in and out, and check the bearing points
for noise and play.
If there is significant play at the bearing points or loud noise:
Replace the bearing bushings as described in section 17.2.4.
3.5.71
Check the lift arms and bucket stops

There are two ways to attach the equipment to the lift arms: directly or using
the quick-change device.
It is important that the limits stops and the sequence of stops are as
specified. Failure to comply can reduce the lifetime of the equipment and the
lift arms.
Checking the bucket stops without a quick-change device
This is how to check the bucket stops properly:
Secure the machine against rolling away (using the parking brake or
wheel wedges).
Retract the tilt cylinders until the bucket stops 1 touch the bucket arm.
Check the dimension 2 according to the following table.
Dimensions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Description
Dimensions L550 - L580
Dimension 1
0
Dimension 2 Unit
mm
32
If there are deviations from the table above, contact LIEBHERR customer
service about corrective action.
Checking the bucket stops with a quick-change device
This is how to check the bucket stops properly:
Secure the machine against rolling away (using the parking brake or
wheel wedges).
Move the lift arms and the quick-change device to the position shown.
Retract the tilt cylinders until the linkage stop touches the cross tube stop.
Check the dimension 1 according to the following table.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.5-57 o f 5 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Maintenance tasks
Dimensions
Description
Dimensions L550 - L580
Dimension 1
5
Dimension 2
Unit
mm
If there are deviations from the table above, contact LIEBHERR customer
service about corrective action.
3.5.72
Testing the quick-change device (optional)

Make sure that:
The lift arms have been lowered.
The working attachment is tilted in.
Procedure
The operation of the quick-change device can vary according to the version
or the type of machine.
To check that it is working properly:
Unlock the quick-change device and lock it again.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
This prevents the locking pins from jamming and preventing the quickchange device from being released.
To make sure, check:
That the quick-change device is properly locked again.
3.5-58 o f 5 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
Testing and adjustment tasks
3.6 Testing and adjustment tasks

3.6.1
Preparing for testing and adjustment

During the warranty period, only trained and authorised specialist staff may
carry out adjustments on the machine.
Make sure that:
The machine is at operating temperature (except when testing the air
conditioning).
The adjustment data for the machine is available or known.
Seals and safety caps are at hand.
The following special tools are available.
Special tools
Number Description
USB dongle for SCULI
1
3.6.2
ID no.
1033 3608
Data lead for SCULI
1003 5410
Manometer, 0 - 40 bar, class 1.0
7361 288
Manometer, 0 - 600 bar, class 1.0
5002 866
4000 mm test leads
7009 134
1500 mm test leads
7002 475
Safety precautions for testing and adjustment

Always observe the accident prevention regulations during maintenance work.
See the safety regulations section for measures to ensure safe maintenance.
Make sure that visual contact between the operator in the cab and
maintenance personnel is always maintained.
Only carry out adjustments on valves etc. with the machine not running.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Visual contact
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-1 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
3.6.3
Bringing the machine up to operating temperature

During testing and adjustment, the machine must be at an operating temperature of 585 C. The temperature is measured by the hydraulic oil sensor
and can be seen in SCULI.
Procedure
Insert a piece of card or similar material between the fuel cooler 1 and the
hydraulic oil cooler 2.
Connect your laptop, start the engine and run the SCULI program.
In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Adjustment
Block Curve folder.
The cooling system - temperature hydraulic oil variable shows the
hydraulic oil temperature during the adjustment.
58.1
Bring the machine up to operating temperature as follows:

Run the engine at around 2000 rpm.
Activate the tilt-in function as far as it will go and hold the control lever in
this position.
At the same time, move the lift arms up and down with the lever halfway out.
Operate the travel hydraulics in fixed gear 1.
Bring the machine up to operating temperature until the hydraulic oil
temperature is 585 C.
When working on the hydraulic system, the hydraulic oil temperature
must be within the prescribed range.
After finishing the adjustment, take the piece of card out of the oil cooler.
Checking the diesel engine speed

You can read the engine speed from the RPM segment indicator in the
display unit or use a standard engine speed tester.
The engine speed cannot be mechanically adjusted; it is determined directly
by the engine control unit.
Cab display unit
Procedure
Start up the engine.
Check that the top and bottom engine speeds are correct.
Calibrate the gas pedal using the SCULI program and service the engine.
Check the top and bottom idle speeds again.
3.6-2 o f 1 8
Description
Value Unit
Lower idle speed
90010 min-1
Upper idle speed
206510 min-1
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.6.4
Service Manual
Maintenance
3.6.5
Check the fan motor and fan control pressure relief valve
Make the following checks on the fan motor:
These tests must be performed at upper engine speed.
Test the fan according to the temperature (temperature sensor 1 or
2 disconnected).
Test the pressure relief valve 7 on the fan motor 5 (with the plug on the
proportional valve disconnected).
Fan drive components

1 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
2 Coolant temperature sensor
3 Fan pressure test connection
4 Fan gear pump

5 Fan gear motor
6 Fan proportional valve cap
7 Fan proportional valve

8 Fan proportional solenoid
9 Proportional solenoid connector
You can check the fan using the system pressure, measured at the test
connection 3 of the gear pump 4.
Make sure that:
The hydraulic oil temperature is less than 88 C.
The coolant temperature is below 97 C.
If the hydraulic temperature is over 88 C or the coolant temperature is
above 97 C, the fan speeds up. This makes it impossible to test the
fan control.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Checking the fan according to the temperature

The fan speed (system pressure) is tested here in the stated temperature range.
Connect a manometer (250 bar) to the test connection 3 on the gear
pump 4.
Disconnect the hydraulic oil temperature sensor 1 or coolant temperature
sensor 2.
Start the engine and bring it to top idle speed.
Check whether the pressure is correct at top engine idle speed.
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Fan pressure
11010 bar
1650 min-1
Fan speed
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-3 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Valid for:
Description
Value Unit
Fan pressure
17510 bar
1400 min-1
Fan speed
Check the fan motor pressure relief valve.
Checking the fan motor pressure relief valve
Connect a manometer (250 bar) to the test connection 3 on the gear

pump 4.
Pull out the plug 9 on the proportional solenoid 8.
Check whether the pressure is correct at top engine idle speed.
Adjust the pressure relief valve 7 on the fan motor 5 (using the adjusting
screw and a 5 mm open-end spanner - the lock nut is a round nut).
Turn clockwise to increase the pressure and anticlockwise to reduce it.
Remove the cap 6.
Adjust the screw on the proportional valve.
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Fan pressure
22010 bar
approx. 2050 min-1
Fan speed
Valid for:
Description
Value Unit
Fan pressure
22010 bar
approx. 1600 min-1
Fan speed
Plug in the disconnected plug again.
3.6.6
Calibrating the pedals

The pedals can only be calibrated using the SCULI software.
During calibration, the MIN and MAX positions of the gas pedal and inch
pedal are stored in the master electronics.
Connect your laptop, turn on the start switch and run the SCULI program.
Pedals folder.
Set Throttle - start adjustment to 1.
Push the gas pedal all the way down.
The MIN and MAX positions of the gas pedal are stored. After 15 seconds
the value automatically returns to 0 and calibration is finished.
Check that Throttle - guide value is 0% when the pedal is not pressed
and 100% when the pedal is pressed all the way down.
3.6-4 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/19/03/2007
Procedure
Service Manual
Maintenance
Set Inch pedal - start adjustment to 1.

Push the inch pedal all the way down.
The MIN and MAX positions of the gas pedal are stored. After 15 seconds
the value automatically returns to 0 and calibration is finished.
Check that Inch pedal - guide value is 0% when the pedal is not
pressed and 100% when the pedal is pressed all the way down.
3.6.7
Checking the replenishing pressure of the variable

displacement pump
Measure the replenishing pressure at the test connection G.
Procedure
Valid for:
Connect a manometer (40 bar) to the test connection G.

Start the machine and let the engine run at top idling speed.
Check that the replenishing pressure is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the replenishing pressure relief valve 1 until
the replenishing pressure is correct.
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
311 bar
Valid for:
Description
Value Unit
341 bar
3.6.8
Checking the pressure relief and replenishing valve of the

variable displacement pump
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
The pressure relief and replenishing valves protect the variable displacement
pump from pressure peaks. These can occur when braking the machine.
When a pressure peak occurs, oil flows from the high pressure side via
the pressure relief and replenishing valve to the low pressure side in a
closed circuit.
Procedure
To attain the set value for the pressure relief and replenishing valves, the
pressure cut-off must be set to a higher value.
Screw in the adjusting screw 1 on the pressure cut-off by one turn.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connections MA and MB.
Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 the
inching function is disabled.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-5 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Check the pressure relief and replenishing valve 2 for forward travel on the
manometer MA.
Check the pressure relief and replenishing valve 3 for reverse travel on the
manometer MB.
Select fixed gear 2 and forward or reverse travel, and hold the machine in
the blocked condition using the service brake.
Caution
Heat is quickly generated when you test the pressure relief and replenishing valves.
Excessive heat can irreparably damage the pump.
! Only test the pressure relief and replenishing valves for a short time.
In the blocked condition, increase the engine speed to the maximum.
Check that the high pressure at the two pressure relief and replenishing
valves is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the pressure relief and replenishing valve
until the high pressure is correct.
Loosen the adjusting screw 1 on the pressure cut-off by one turn and
check the pressure cut-off.
Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0
the inching function is enabled.
3.6.9
Description
Value Unit
High pressure
47010 bar
Checking the pressure cut-off of the variable displacement

pump
The pressure cut-off limits the maximum pressure of the variable
displacement pump.
When this pressure is reached, the pump flow is automatically reduced in
order to maintain the maximum permitted pressure.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection MA.

Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 the
inching function is disabled.
Select fixed gear 2 and forward travel, and hold the machine in the
blocked condition using the service brake.
In the blocked condition, increase the engine speed to the maximum.
Check that the high pressure on the manometer MA is correct.
Check that the engine suppression is below the threshold.
Turn the adjusting screw 1 on the pressure cut-off 1 until the manometer
MA reaches the correct value.
Use SCULI to set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0
the inching function is enabled.
Description
Value Unit
High pressure
4305 bar
Maximum engine suppression at top idle

speed
3.6-6 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
30 min-1
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Service Manual
Maintenance
3.6.10
Calibrating the block curve

The block curve can only be calibrated using the SCULI software.
During calibration, the current to the proportional valve on the variable
displacement pump is adjusted so that the pump reaches a set pressure at a
set engine speed.
Procedure
Block Curve folder.
Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable to 1 the inching function is
disabled.
Select fixed gear 2 and forward travel, and hold the machine in the
blocked condition using the service brake.
Increase the engine speed to the levels shown in the table (930 min-1,
1200 min-1, 1400 min-1) and test the high pressure.
Adjust the parameter Travel pump - current at 930, 1200, 1400 rpm
until the set value is reached.
Set the Inch pedal - function OFF variable back to 0 the inching
function is enabled.
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
-1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:
High pressure at 930 min engine speed
5010 bar
High pressure at 1200 min-1 engine speed
29010 bar
35010 bar
Description
Value Unit
-1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
High pressure at 930 min engine speed
5010 bar
23010 bar
33010 bar
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-7 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
3.6.11
Calibrating the variable displacement motors

The variable displacement motors are calibrated automatically by the
master electronics.
Automatically calibrating the variable displacement motors
Travel motor folder.
Set the parameter Travel motor - start motor adjustment to 1.
The engine speed is automatically increased to 1000 min-1. After this the
motors are successively calibrated across the entire speed range.
After calibration, set the parameter Travel motor - start motor adjustment
back to 0.
Note: Once the automatic calibration of the motors is complete, a service

code appears in the display.
This can happen if the variable displacement motor current is too high or
low. In this case, the variable displacement motors must be manually
checked and adjusted to 60030 mA.
Setting VG max manually
Adjusting variable displacement motor 1:

In the blocked condition, slowly increase the engine speed until the
manometer MA shows exactly 300 bar.
Lower the current at Travel motor - motor 1 maximal current until the
manometer at M1 shows 155 bar less than manometer MA.
When the manometers MA and M1 show the correct levels, increase the
current at Travel motor - motor 1 maximal current by 10 mA.
Adjusting variable displacement motor 2:
In the blocked condition, slowly increase the engine speed until the
manometer MA shows exactly 300 bar.
Lower the current at Travel motor - motor 2 maximal current until the
manometer at M1 shows 155 bar less than manometer MA.
When the manometers MA and M2 show the correct levels, increase the
current at Travel motor - motor 2 maximal current by 10 mA.
3.6-8 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connections M1 and M2.
Travel motor folder.
disabled.
Select fixed gear 1 and forward travel, and hold the machine in the blocked
condition using the service brake.
Service Manual
Maintenance
Note: The current for both motors must be in the range of 60030 mA. If there
is any deviation, correct it using the adjusting screws 1 or 2.
Repeat the automatically calibration of the variable displacement motors.
3.6.12
Checking the engine output

Before you check the power of the engine, you must carry out the following
tasks:
Tasks in maintenance schedule (air filter, fuel filter etc.)
Check the operating pressures according to the adjustment checklist
The machine must be at operating temperature.
At maximum engine power consumption, the variable displacement motor
power limiting control is activated. It regulates the pivot angle of the motors
so that the engine runs at rated speed. This results in a set high pressure in
the closed circuit.
If the high pressure is is above the set value, the engine power is good.
If the high pressure is is below the set value, the engine power is poor.
If the engine speed reaches the set value, power limiting control is
working correctly.
Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

In the variables editor in the group structure, select the Check
Dieselengine folder.
disabled.
Start the machine, select fixed gear 2 and forward travel direction.
Hold the machine with the service brake and run it at full throttle.
Slowly release the service brake until the machine moves at 13 km/h.
Check that the set values are reached.
If they are not correct:
Troubleshoot the engine: air filters, fuel filters etc.
Troubleshoot the travel hydraulics: check the operating pressure etc.
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
High pressure
30010 bar
198030 min-1
Diesel engine speed
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-9 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Valid for:
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
High pressure
33010 bar
198030 min-1
Diesel engine speed

Valid for:
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
High pressure
34010 bar
198030 min-1
Diesel engine speed

Valid for:
L576 - 457 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
High pressure
34010 bar
198030 min-1
Diesel engine speed
3.6.13
Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the working

hydraulics pump
Make sure you have a differential pressure gauge and two pressure sensors
for the range up to 600 bar.
Procedure
Measure the difference in pressure between the test connections P and LS.
You can measure the differential pressure, for example by slowly raising the
lift arms.
Connect 600 bar pressure sensors to test connections P and LS.
Slowly raise the lift arms and check whether the differential pressure
is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the flow controller 1 until the differential
pressure is correct.
Description
Value Unit
222 bar
Differential pressure
Checking the flow controller (start of delivery) of the working

hydraulics pump
The flow controller determines the maximum output of the variable displacement pump. At the start of delivers, the indicator on the manometer M1
moves away from 0 bar. The set value on the manometer P should
be reached.
Procedure
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the variable displacement pump at
test connections M1 and P.
Start the engine, tilt the bucket all the way out and move the lift arms to
the bottom position.
At idle speed, raise the lift arms all the way and check that the start of
delivery shown on the manometer M1 is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the power controller 1 until the pressure
is correct.
3.6-10 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
3.6.14
Service Manual
Maintenance
3.6.15
Description
Value Unit
Start of regulation
18010 bar
Checking the secondary pressure relief valves on the control

block
Procedure
To check the secondary pressure relief valve, you must increase the setting
of the LS pressure cut-off 5 and the primary pressure relief valve 3.
Screw in the adjusting screw on the LS pressure cut-off 5 on the control
block by two turns.
Tighten the adjusting screw on the primary pressure relief valve 3 by
two turns.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection P on the
control block.
Caution
The pump can be irreparably damaged if you lower the lift arms. This
function has no secondary pressure relief valve.
! Do not lower the lift arms.
Start the machine and let the engine run at lower idling speed.
Raise the lift arms, tilt out the bucket and tilt in the bucket, each to the limit.
Check that the pressure at each secondary pressure relief valve is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the secondary pressure relief valve until it
is correct.
Adjust the primary pressure relief valve 3 and the LS pressure cut off 5
back to the set value. See the sections on testing the primary pressure
relief valve and LS pressure cut-off.
Valid for:
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Tilt-in function (2)
3805 bar
Tilt-out function (4)
3805 bar
Lifting function (1)
3805 bar
Description
Value Unit
Tilt-in function (2)
4005 bar
Tilt-out function (4)
4005 bar
Lifting function (1)
4205 bar
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-11 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
3.6.16
Checking the primary pressure relief valves on the control

block
Procedure
To check the primary pressure relief valve 3, you must increase the setting
of the LS pressure cut-off 5.
Screw in the adjusting screw on the LS pressure cut-off 5 on the control
block by two turns.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection P.
Raise the lift arms to the limit.
Check that the pressure is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the primary pressure relief valve 3 until the
Return the LS pressure cut-off 5 to its normal value. See the section on
testing the LS pressure cut-off.
Valid for:
Valid for:
3.6.17
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
Primary valve (3)
3605 bar
Description
Value Unit
Primary valve (3)
3805 bar
Checking the LS pressure cut-off on the control block

Procedure
Valid for:
Valid for:
3.6-12 o f 1 8
L550 - 456 / from 16978
Description
Value Unit
LS pressure cut-off (5)
2905 bar
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Description
Value Unit
3305 bar
Description
Value Unit
3505 bar
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Valid for:

Raise the lift arms to the limit.
Check that the pressure is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the LS pressure cut-off 5 until the pressure
is correct.
Service Manual
Maintenance
3.6.18
Depressurising ride control and the hydro accumulators

You must depressurise the system before checking and filling the hydro
accumulators or making repairs to the ride control system.
This is how to depressurise the ride control system:
Procedure
Caution: Perform the following actions in the correct sequence.
Put the machine and the lift arms in maintenance position 2.
The working attachment and lift arms must lie on the ground under their
own weight.
Connect a manometer (40 bar) to the test connection M4 on the
front axle.
Connect the same test line to the test connection MX.
The pressure can then be relieved through this line to the tank. This takes
around 10 minutes.
After 10 minutes, take the test line off test connection M4 and drain the
remaining fluid into a suitable receptacle.
Leave the test line connected during the testing and repair work.
After servicing, remove the test line from test connection MX.
3.6.19
Checking the cut-off pressure in the stabilisation module

The cut-off function limits the pressure in the hydro accumulators when ride
control is deactivated. This is how to check and correct the cut-off pressure:
The cut-off pressure is fixed by the spring force. This means the cut-off
pressure cannot be adjusted.
Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection MX on the stabilisation module.
Start the diesel engine (with ride control deactivated).
With the engine idling, raise the lift arms to their full height and accumulate pressure.
Check that the high pressure on the manometer is correct (reading the
highest value).
Find the cause and rectify the fault.
3.6.20
Description
Value Unit
High pressure
12020 bar
Checking the nitrogen in the ride control hydro accumulator

Make sure that you have a charging and testing device with a
nitrogen bottle.
The hydro accumulators can only be tested or filled when they
are depressurised.
Note: The nitrogen chamber of the hydro accumulator has around 350 cm
of oil in it to protect the membrane.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-13 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
Procedure
Depressurise the ride control system as described in the section on
depressurising ride control and the hydro accumulators.
Take off the cap and slightly loosen the plug 2 of the hydro accumulator
using a 6 mm allen key.
Connect the charging and testing device 4 to the hydro accumulator you
want to test.
Open the valve 6 and check whether the nitrogen filling is correct.
Slowly open the valve 8 on the nitrogen bottle 9 until the pressure
is correct.
You can reduce the pressure in the hydro accumulator using the relieve
valve 5. The nitrogen escapes to the open air.
Description
Value
Hydro accumulator temperature
Unit
Nitrogen for filling the hydro accumulator

Minimum hydro accumulator nitrogen filling
3.6.21
10
25
23
26
24
20
27
25
2
2
30
28
bar
26
bar
Check the pressure cut-off of the steering pump

Procedure
3.6.22

Turn the steering fully to the left or right.
Check that the pressure at the test connection P is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw on the pressure controller 2 until the pressure
is correct.
Description
Value Unit
High pressure
2105 bar
Checking the flow controller (delta p) of the steering pump

Make sure you have a differential pressure gauge and two pressure sensors
for the range up to 600 bar.
Procedure
Measure the difference in pressure between the test connections P and LS.
You can only measure the differential pressure when the flow controller is
activated. This is best done when slowly steering.
Fit a test connection between the hose line and the connection LS.
Connect 600 bar pressure sensors to test connections P and LS.
Slowly steer the machine to the left or right and check whether the
differential pressure on the measuring device is correct.
3.6-14 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Service Manual
Maintenance
Turn the adjusting screw on the flow controller 1 until the differential
Description
Value Unit
22 2 bar
Differential pressure
3.6.23
Checking the brake pressure of the compact brake valve

The compact brake valve fills the brake accumulator until the shut-off
pressure is reached.
When you repeatedly press the inch-brake pedal, the pressure in the brake
accumulators falls until the opening pressure is reached. The brake
accumulator charging function then begins.
Procedure
You can check the cut-off pressure of the brake accumulator charging
function using the test connection M3 on the compact brake valve.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) with a short test line to the test
connection MA.
Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down several times.
Look at the manometer M3 to check that the correct opening pressure
is reached.
When the opening pressure is reached, the pressure on the manometer
begins to rise. The pressure then increases to the closing pressure.
Check the test connection M3 to see if the closing pressure is correct.
Turn the adjusting screw 1 on the compact brake valve until the closing
3.6.24
Description
Value Unit
Opening pressure
1805 bar
Closing pressure
2105 bar
Checking the brake pressure at the axles

You can check the brake pressure on the wet disk brakes in the wheel hubs
at the test connection M4 on the front axle 1 and M5 on the cut-in block 2.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Connect manometers (600 bar) to the test connections M4 and M5.

Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down.
Check that the pressure on both manometers is correct.
Adjust the pedal stop screw 3 so that the brake pressure is correct when
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-15 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
the pedal is all the way down. Remove the seal 4, loosen the counter nut
and adjust the bottom screw.
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653;

L566 - 460 / from 14171; L576 - 457 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Brake pressure with the pedal fully

pressed
Valid for:
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Description
Value Unit
Brake pressure with the pedal fully

pressed
3.6.25
95 5 bar
70 5 bar
Checking the capacity of the brake accumulator

Test the capacity of the brake accumulators 1 and 2 for the front and rear
axles respectively by pressing the inch/brake pedal nine times. Before the
test, the pressure in the brake accumulators must be 180 bar.
After pressing the inch/brake pedal nine times, the pressure should not be
below the correct level.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) to the test connection M3 on the

compact brake valve.
Connect manometers (600 bar) to the test connections M4 and M5 on the
cut-in block 2.
Push the inch/brake pedal all the way down several times to lower the
brake accumulator pressure to 180 bar.
Slowly press the inch/brake all the way down nine times, keeping it down
the final time.
Check that the correct pressure is reached on the manometers M4
and M5.
If the brake pressure on either manometer falls below the correct level:
Replace the brake accumulator if necessary.
Description
Value Unit
Lower brake pressure tolerance
3.6-16 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
50 bar
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Service Manual
Maintenance
3.6.26
Checking the accumulator charge pressure

The pressure switch generates a warning if the brake accumulator pressure
is too low. When the pressure in the brake accumulators is reached, the
symbol field 2 goes out and the brake system is ready for operation.
Procedure
You can check the switching point of the pressure switch 1 using the test
connection M3 on the compact brake valve and the symbol field 2 on the
display unit.
Connect a manometer (600 bar) with a short test line to the test connection MA.
Turn on the starter switch.
Gently push the inch/brake pedal to slowly lower the pressure in the
brake accumulators.
Check that the symbol field 2 lights up when the correct pressure is
shown on the manometer M3.
Replace the brake accumulator pressure switch 1.
3.6.27
Description
Value Unit
Pressure switch activation point
1205 bar
Checking the brake light pressure switch and brake lights

This check tests the brake lights.
Procedure
Turn on the starter switch.
Slowly and gently press the inch/brake pedal and watch the brake lights
light up.
If the brake lights do not light up:
Check the brake lights; replace the brake light pressure switch 1
if necessary.
3.6.28
Checking the transmission shift pressure

Procedure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007

Check that the pressure at the test connection P is correct.
The shift pressure relief valve is inside the control valve block. You can
only adjust the shift pressure by adding or removing shims. For a
sectional view view of the control valve block, see section on electrohydraulic pressure modulation.
Description
Value Unit
20 3 bar
Shift pressure
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.6-17 o f 1 8
Maintenance
Service Manual
3.6.29
Checking the nitrogen in the transmission hydro accumulator

Make sure that you have a charging and testing device with a nitrogen bottle.
Procedure
Take off the cap and slightly loosen the plug 2 of the hydro accumulator
using a 6 mm allen key.
Connect the charging and testing device 4 to the hydro accumulator.
Open the valve 6 and check whether the nitrogen filling is correct.
Slowly open the valve 8 on the nitrogen bottle 9 until the nitrogen pressure is correct.
You can reduce the pressure in the hydro accumulator using the relieve
valve 5. The nitrogen escapes to the open air.
Description
Value Unit
122 bar
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Nitrogen filling
3.6-18 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Maintenance
Lubricants and fuels
3.7 Lubricants and fuels

Conscientious observance of the regulations for handling lubricants and
fuels will increase the reliability and service life of the machine.
It is especially important that the specified lubricant qualities are observed.
You can find the various specifications about the prescribed intervals in the
maintenance and inspection schedule and the lubrication chart.
You can find details on lubrication, checking the oil level and changing
operating fluids in the maintenance section under maintenance tasks.
Follow the rules on handling lubricants and fuels, especially the environmental regulations.
Filling quantities and specifications:
The filling quantities listed in the tables are only guidelines. The dipstick
and level markings are always mandatory.
Each time the lubricant or fuel is replaced or topped up, check the level in
the unit in question.
For more detailed information about the required lubricants, fuels and
filling quantities, see the filling quantities in the lubrication chart and the
section on lubricants and fuels.
Environmental protection
Always implement and observe environmental protection measures.
Observe national regulations.
Ensure that liquids can be properly disposed of before draining them.
Disposing of used materials

This applies to the following types of used materials and hazardous waste:
Oils, lubricants, brake fluids, etc.
Coolant
Fuels
Filters, oil cartridges etc.
Rubber, tyres, insulating materials etc.
Batteries
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Procedure
Note
Environmental and health hazard
! Observe the local regulations for protecting the environment when disposing of used materials!
Always collect and store used materials separately in suitable containers.
Dispose of used materials properly at the official collection points.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.7-1 o f 1 0
Maintenance
Service Manual
Converting the hydraulic system from petroleum to

environmentally compatible hydraulic fluids
For the operation of LIEBHERR earth moving machines with environmentally
compatible hydraulic fluids we recommend PANOLIN HLP SYNTH 46.
Machines filled at factory with environmentally compatible hydraulic
fluids have an appropriate sign (CAUTION) attached to the driver's cab
and hydraulic tank.
Procedure for conversion:
Caution
Beware of damaging the machine's hydraulic system.
Mixing environmentally harmless hydraulic fluids with mineral oils produces a
vigorous reaction that can damage the hydraulic system.
! Do not mix environmentally harmless hydraulic fluids with mineral oil.

If you intend to convert the machine to environmentally-compatible
hydraulic fluid, you must first consult LIEBHERR CUSTOMER
SERVICE.
Ask LIEBHERR for the instruction sheet and conversion guidelines and
be sure to follow them.
3.7.1
Specification
Diesel fuels
The diesel fuels must comply with the minimum requirements of the fuel
specifications prescribed as follows.
Authorised fuel specifications:
DIN EN 590
ASTM D 975 (89a) 1D and 2D
Further fuel specifications only upon consultation with the Diesel Engine
Development Department, LIEBHERR Machines Bulle S.A.
Sulphur content in
the diesel fuel
For worldwide markets except the USA:

In DIN EN 590 the maximum sulphur content is 50 mg/kg = max. 0.005 %
by weight.
For the USA:
In ASTM D 975 (89a) 1D and 2D, the maximum sulphur content is 10 ppm.
The diesel fuel lubricating proficiency must be a max. 460 m in accordance

with the HFRR (60) test.
For diesel fuels featuring a sulphur content above / more than
0.5 weight%, the oil-change intervals are to be halved.
Diesel fuels featuring a sulphur content above / more than 1 weight%
are not permissible.
3.7-2 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Low-sulphur diesel fuels featuring a sulphur content of below / less than

0.05 weight% are only applicable if lubricity can be ensured with the
admixture of additives.
Service Manual
Maintenance
Note
In some cases, approval may be given, depending on the quality of the
diesel engine lubricating oil.
! Fuel standard ASTM D 975 does not stipulate that fuels must pass a fuellubricity test. A written confirmation of the fuel supplier must be requested. The additives should be added by the supplier in his capacity as
agent responsible for fuel quality. The addition of secondary-lubricity-additives by the customer is not recommended.
A cetane number of at least 45 is required for fuels in accordance with
ASTM D975. A cetane number above 50 is preferable, especially with
temperatures below 0C.
Diesel fuel at low temperatures
(winter operation)
Diesel fuel precipitates paraffin crystals as the temperature drops. This

increases flow-resistance in the fuel filter to such an extent that a sufficient
supply of fuel to the diesel engine can no longer be guaranteed.
In temperate climates, cold flow is guaranteed up to:
0 C from 15/04. to 30/09
-10 C from 01/10. to 14/11 / 1.3. - 14.04.
-20 C from 16/11 to 29/02
according to DIN EN 590.
If the cold-flow properties of the diesel fuel are insufficient or with lower
ambient temperatures than -20C, we recommend using a fuel filter heater.
Other approved diesel fuels:
Diesel fuel complying with DIN EN 590 with up to 5% vol. FAME.
3.7.2
Lube oil specifications
Lubricating oils for diesel engines

Only high-alloy lube-oils are used nowadays for modern diesel engines.
They are comprised of base oils which feature combined admixtures (additives).
The lubricating oil regulation for LIEBHERR diesel engines is based on the
following specifications and regulations.
Description
Specification
ACEA classification (Association des E4, E5, E6, E7

Constructeurs Europens de
Caution: particle filter operation is
l'Automobile)
only possible with E6
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
API classification (American

Petroleum Institute)
CH-4, CI-4, CJ-4 observe special oilchange interval

Caution: observe the reduced oilchange interval
Lube-oil viscosity
Selection of lube-oil viscosity in accordance with the SAE-classification

(Society of Automotive Engineers).
The ambient temperature is definitive for the correct selection of
the SAE-class.
Selection of the SAE-classification gives no indication of the quality of
a lube-oil.
Too high a viscosity can lead to starting difficulties, and too low a viscosity
could jeopardise the lubricating efficiency.
The temperature ranges specified in the diagram are guidelines and can be
briefly exceeded or fallen short of.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.7-3 o f 1 0
Maintenance
Service Manual
Temperature-dependent selection of the SAE-class

The following engine oil is recommended (for outside temperatures of -20C
to +45C):
Liebherr Motoroil 10W-40
Specification ACEA E4
Liebherr Motoroil low ash
Specification ACEA E6
Lube-oil change intervals
Changing intervals:
Oil change and filter replacement: see the maintenance and inspection schedule
Oil-change respective of climatic zone, sulphur content in the fuel and oil
quality in accordance with the following table.
If the prescribed operating hours (h) have not expired within one year, the
diesel engine oil and filter must be replaced at least once a year.
Difficulty factors
Various difficulty factors or more difficult operating conditions reduce maintenance intervals.
Difficulty factors or difficult conditions include for example.:
frequent cold-starts
sulphur content in the fuel over 0.5%
Outside operating temperatures below -10 C
Should difficulty factors or tougher operating conditions arise, oil-change and
filter replacement must be carried out in accordance with the specifications
in the following table.
Difficulty factor
Oil quality
CH-4
CJ-4
E4
E5
E6
E7
Outside
temperature
Sulphur content
in the fuel
Normal climate,
up to -10 C
up to 0.5%
250 h
500 h
over 0.5%
125 h
250 h
up to 0.5%
125 h
250 h
over 0.5%
not
permissible
125 h
Below -10 C
Interval
Oil-change intervals in operating hours (h)
3.7-4 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
CI-4
Service Manual
Maintenance
3.7.3
General recommendations
Coolant for the diesel engine

The cooling system will only function reliably if it is working under pressure. It
is therefore imperative that it is kept clean and watertight, that the radiator
cap valve and working valves are functioning correctly and the necessary
coolant level is maintained.
The corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze authorised by LIEBHERR guarantees
sufficient protection against cold, corrosion and cavitation, do not corrode
seals and hoses and do not foam up.
Coolants which contain inadequate or ill-prepared corrosion inhibitor/
antifreeze could cause a malfunctioning of aggregates or parts in the cooling
circuit as a result of cavitational or corrosive damage. Furthermore, heatinsulating sedimentation can result at heat-exchanging parts, leading to
overheating, and then to malfunctioning, of the engine.
Note
Emulsifiable corrosion inhibition oils may are impermissible.
! In special cases, it is permissible to use corrosion inhibitors.
Water (fresh water)
Suitable water is colourless, clear, free of mechanical contamination,

drinkable tap water featuring the following restricted analysis values.
Sea water, brackish water, salt water and industrial waste water is
not suitable.
Fresh water quality
Description
Value and unit
Total of alkaline earths (water hardness)
0.6 to 3.6 mmol/l (3 to 20d)
pH value at 20 C
6.5 to 8.0
Chloride-ion content
max. 80 mg/l
Sulphate-ion content
max. 100 mg/l
Fresh water quality when using DCA 4

Description
Value and unit
Total of alkaline earths (water hardness)
0.6 to 2.7 mmol/l (3 to 15d)
pH value at 20 C
6.5 to 8.0
Chloride-ion content
max. 80 mg/l
Sulphate-ion content
max. 80 mg/l
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Water analyses can be applied for from the communal authorities responsible.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
All year roundto
Water %
Corrosion inhibitor /
antifreeze %
Outside
temperature
-37
-34
50
50
Outside
temperature
-50
-58
40
60
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.7-5 o f 1 0
Maintenance
Service Manual
Temperature-dependent selection of mix ratio for corrosion

inhibitor/antifreeze
A = ratio of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze in the coolant as a percentage
Product designation
Manufacturer
Liebherr Antifreeze
Concentrate
Country
Liebherr
Addinol Antifreeze Super
Addinol Lube Oil GmbH,

Leuna
Agip Antifreeze Plus
Aral AG, BochumEni S.p.A.,

Rome
Agip Langzeit-Frostschutz
Eni S.p.A., Wrzburg
Antigel DB 486
Sotragal SA, St-Priest
Aral Antifreeze Extra
Aral AG, Hamburg
Avia Antifreeze APN G48
Avia Minerall AG, Munich
BP Isocool
BP p.l.c. London
GB
Caltex Extended Life

Coolant
Chevron Texaco
Castrol Antifreeze NF
Castrol, London
GB
Chevron Extended Life

Coolant
Chevron Texaco
DEUTZ Khlerschutzmittel 0101 1490
DEUTZ Service International

GmbH, Cologne
ESA Frostschutz G48
ESA Burgdorf
Fuchs Fricofin
Khlerfrostschutz
Fuchs Petrolub AG,

Mannheim
Glacelf Auto Supra

(antifreeze)
Total, Paris
GlycoShell Longlife
Shell International Petroleum

Company, London
GB
GlycoShell N
Shell International Petroleum

Company, London
GB
Glysantin G48
BASF AG,
Ludwigshafen/Germany
Havoline Extendend Life

Antifreeze / Coolant
Chevron Texaco
Havoline XLC
Arteco
Motorex Antifreeze
Protect G48
Bucher AG, Langenthal
Motul Inugel Optimal Ultra
Motul SA, Aubervilliers Cedex
OMV Khlerfrostschutz /
Coolant Plus
OMV Refining & Marketing

GmbH, Vienna
CH
CH
Do not mix products with one another!

* = global / worldwide
3.7-6 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Corrosion inhibitor / antifreeze

permitted for diesel engine
cooling syst
Service Manual
Maintenance
Corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze
premixes (50% water: 50%
corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze)
permitted for diesel engine
cooling systems
Product designation
Manufacturer
Country
Liebherr Antifreeze Mix
Liebherr
Caltex Extended Life Coolant

Pre-Mixed 50/50 (ready-touse version)
Chevron Texaco
Chevron
DEX-COOL
Extended Life Pre-Diluted
50/50 Antifreeze Coolant
Chevron Texaco
Coolelf Auto Supra -37 C
Total, Paris
Havoline XLC, 50/50
Arteco
Havoline
DEX-COOL
Extended Life Pre-Diluted
50/50 Antifreeze
Coolant
Chevron Texaco

Corrosion inhibitors
without antifreeze
In exceptional cases and if outside temperatures constantly remain

above freezing, for example in the tropics, where it can be proven that no
approved corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze is available, the following may
be used as coolant:
Product DC4 (Diesel Coolant Additives 4)
Product Caltex / Chevron / Havoline / Total
When carrying out maintenance tasks, the concentration must be tested and
rectified as necessary.
The coolant must be changed once a year.
Note
The entire amount of coolant must be drained.
! When changing from corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze to pure corrosion
inhibitor, or vice versa.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Approved water-soluble
corrosion inhibitors
(concentrates) for diesel engine
cooling systems
Product designation
Manufacturer
Countr
y
DCA 4 Diesel Coolant Additives
Fleetguard / Cummins
Filtration
Caltex XL Corrosion Inhibitor

Concentrate
Chevron Texaco
Chevron Heavy Duty Extended

Life Corrosion Inhibitor Nitrite
Free (ELC)
Chevron Texaco
Havoline Extended Life Corrosion

Inhibitor (XLI)
Chevron Texaco
Total WT Supra
Total, Paris

L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.7-7 o f 1 0
Maintenance
Service Manual
3.7.4
Specification
Hydraulic oils
Only engine oils (mineral oils) meeting the following specifications and
regulations are permitted.
Description
Specification
API classification (American

Petroleum Institute)
CF-4, CG-4, CH-4
ACEA classification (Association des

Constructeurs Europens de
E2 , E3 , E4
l'Automobile)
Specifications and regulations for hydraulic oil
Viscosity
The viscosity is selected according to the SAE (Society of Automotive

Engineers) classification.
The decisive factor for the selection of the correct SAE class is the ambient temperature.
The selection of the SAE classification has no bearing on the quality of a
hydraulic oil.
The temperature ranges presented in the diagram are merely guidelines.
Temperature-dependent selection of the SAE-class

For temperatures up to 10 C below the specified limit:
Adjust the diesel engine to roughly half speed after starting.
Activate the hydraulic cylinders and engines and briefly move the cyliners
to their stops.
Warming up takes roughly 10 minutes.
At even lower temperatures:
Before starting the engine, prewarm the oil tank.
Environmentally compatible
hydraulic fluids
When operating LIEBHERR earth moving machines with environmentally

compatible hydraulic fluids, we recommend PANOLIN HLP SYNTH 46 with
the viscosity specified by LIEBHERR.
Converting the hydraulic system to environmentally harmless
hydraulic fluid:
See the section on conversion from mineral oils to environmentally
harmless hydraulic fluids.
Note
Environmentally-compatible hydraulic fluids must be checked every 500
operating hours at regular intervals.
! LIEBHERR recommends that oil analysis is carried out by WEAR-CHECK.
3.7-8 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Warming up
Service Manual
Maintenance
Oil change:
At the interval stated in the maintenance and inspection schedule.
At the interval specified by WEAR-CHECK.
Note
Do not mix environmentally-compatible hydraulic fluid from different manufacturers or with mineral oils.
! See also the customer service information.
Monitoring hydraulic oil - changing according to oil samples - analysis
and laboratory report:
Oil change intervals according to sample analysis and laboratory report

1 Service hours
2 First oil sample
3.7.5
Pump distributor gear and axles
3 Second oil sample

4 Further oil samples every 500 operating hours
Lubricating oils for the transmission

Gear oils must comply with the API GL-5 and MIL-L 2105 B, C or D specifications and the viscosity class SAE 90 LS *.
* = Gear oil with limited slip additives for disc brakes and self-locking
differentials.
LS = limited slip additive:
Not required for pump distributor gears
Required for axles
For the viscosity class SAE 90 LS, an oil of the viscosity class SAE 80 W 90
LS can also be used.
Transmission
An ATF oil compliant with the DEXTRON II D specification should be used

as lubrication oil for the transmission.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Factory filling:
ATF 86 AVIA-FLUID DEXRON II D
3.7.6
Description
ID no.
Quantity
ATF 86 AVIA-Fluid DEXRON II D
861012601
210 l
ATF 86 AVIA-Fluid DEXRON II D
10009964
20 l
Grease for general lubrication points

This grease must meet the KP2k specification consistency 2 of the NL
GI class according to DIN 51818 and DIN 51825 or EP 2 according to
NF-T-60 132.
The grease must be made of a lithium complex with a four ball tester (VKA)
value of at least 2300 N according to DIN 51350 or ASTM D 2596.
Application:
Grease for all lubrication points (according to the lubrication schedule)
Lubricant grease for bolt fitting
Lubricant grease for automatic central lubrication systems
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
3.7-9 o f 1 0
Maintenance
Service Manual
Approved greases
LIEBHERR 9610 special grease is a milling-resistant, ageing-resistant lithium

grease, providing protection against corrosion with excellent lubricity over a
wide temperature range.
Its molecular composition yields high degrees of shearing and milling stability and good flow properties in long pipes.
Description
Lubricant grease for automatic

central lubrication systems
ID no.
Quantity
LH 9610 special grease 861302908
400 g (cartridge)
10 kg (drum)
25 kg (drum)
Greases with high-pressure additives (EP greases) are recommended.

Only use greases with the same type of saponification.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22/02/2007
Note
Greases with solid lubricant particles such as graphite are not suitable.
! Do not use this type of grease.
3.7-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
4 Diesel engine, Splitter box

4.0
Chapter contents
4
Diesel engine, Splitter box................................................... 4.1-1

4.1
Diesel engine ..................................................................................4.1-1

4.1.1
Electrical engine components ..............................................4.1-6
4.1.2
Crankshaft flywheel speed sensors B711/B712................4.1-7
4.1.3
Camshaft speed sensor B713 ...........................................4.1-8
4.1.4
Coolant temperature sensor B708 Fuel temperature

sensor B709 ......................................................................4.1-9
4.1.5
Charge air temperature sensor B707 ..............................4.1-10
4.1.6
Charge air pressure sensor B703 ...................................4.1-11
4.1.7
Oil pressure sensor B701................................................4.1-12
4.2
Fuel system.....................................................................................4.2-1
4.2.1
Fuel level sensor ..................................................................4.2-2
4.2.2
Fuel pre-filter ........................................................................4.2-3
4.2.3
Fuel fine filter ........................................................................4.2-4
4.2.4
Refuelling pump (optional) ...................................................4.2-5
4.3
Air filter system ...............................................................................4.3-1

4.3.1
Air filter .................................................................................4.3-1
4.3.2
Vacuum switch .....................................................................4.3-2

Coupling..........................................................................................4.4-1
4.5
Splitter box ......................................................................................4.5-1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
4.4
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.1-1 o f 2
Service manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Diesel engine, Splitter box
4.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual

Diesel engine
4.1
Diesel engine
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The diesel engine is a water-cooled, four-stroke in-line engine with pumpline-nozzle (PLD) direct injection, turbocharging and charge air cooling.
The engine is fitted lengthways in the rear section and elastically supported
on rubber elements. The flywheel end faces to the rear.
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Diesel engine components / right view
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Flywheel housing
Flywheel
Opening for cranking device
Auxiliary drives
Fuel pre-filter
Crankcase bleeder
Bleeder filter with oil separator
Hand pump
Cylinder head
Fuel fine filter
Charge air pipe
Lube oil filler neck
Air intake pipe
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
14 Flame glow plug

15 Engine electronics
(LH-ECU)
16 Air conditioning compressor
17 Alternator
18 Fuel line connections
19 Auxiliary drive
20 Engine block
21 Dipstick
22 Oil separator return line
23 Oil pan
24 Fuel pump
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.1-1 o f 1 2
Service manual
Diesel engine
Diesel engine components / left view

Water pump
Belt drive cover
Thermostat housing
Oil filter
Charge air pipe
Housing bleeder
Turbocharger compressor
8
9
10
11
12
13
Turbocharger turbine
Starter
Oil cooler
Cooling water supply to cooler
Cooling water return from cooler
Crankshaft / vibration damper
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4.1-2 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual

Diesel engine
Valid for:
Diesel engine components / right view

Flywheel
Flywheel housing
Opening for cranking device
Auxiliary drives
Crankcase bleeder
Bleeder filter with oil separator
Cylinder head
Lube oil filler neck
Combustion air intake manifold
Flame glow plug
Pump element with magnetic coil
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Alternator
Engine electronics (LH-ECU)
Auxiliary drive
Hand pump
Fuel pre-filter
Fuel line connections
Fuel fine filter
Engine bearing
Oil pan
Engine block
Fuel pump
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.1-3 o f 1 2
Service manual
Diesel engine
Diesel engine components / left view

Water pump
Tension pulley apparatus
Oil filter
Air intake pipe
Housing bleeder
Charge air pipe
Turbocharger compressor
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Turbocharger turbine
Crankcase
Exhaust pipe
Cooling water supply to cooler
Cooling water return from cooler
Thermostat housing
Crankshaft / vibration damper
Design features of the diesel engine:

Water-cooled four-stroke diesel engine with pump-line-nozzle (PLD)
direct injection
Turbocharger and charge air cooling
Maintenance-free gear drive for camshaft, fuel pump, lubricant pump on
flywheel end and coolant pump on motor end, as well as power take-off for
gear pumps
Individual cylinder heads with cast integral vortex intake duct
Replaceable wet bushings
Small number of parts due to lubricant and coolant lines integrated in crankcase
Oil spray-cooled three-ring piston made of light alloy (D934S)
Oil spray-cooled three-ring piston made of monotherm steel (D934L/D936L)
Engine oil cooler
Double lube oil filter
Large, tilt-proof oil pan
5-bearing (4-cylinder) or 7-bearing (6-cylinder) steel crankshaft with forged
counterweights and diagonal cracked piston rods. Lead bronze triple
composite bearings.
4.1-4 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Service manual

Diesel engine
Function description
Basic function
The diesel engine converts the chemical energy in the fuel into kinetic
energy, which it provides to the flywheel via the torsion absorber and the
pump distributor gear to the travel hydraulics, working hydraulics and
steering hydraulics pumps.
A small portion of the power is taken off at the accessory drive side of the
diesel engine to drive the gear pumps.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
These are the single gear pump for the transmission shift pressure, and the
triple gear pump for the hydrostatically driven fan, the accumulator pressure
brake system and the leak oil scavenging in the variable displacement motor.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.1-5 o f 1 2
Service manual
Diesel engine
4.1.1
Electrical engine components

Design
Valid for:
L576 - 453 / from 14171; L580 - 459 / from 14171;
Electrical engine components

7 Alternator G700
8 Engine electronics (LH-ECU)
A700
9 Pump element magnetic coil
Y711 Y716
10 Water sensor on fuel pre-filter
B710
11 Oil pressure sensor B701
12 Crankshaft 2 flywheel speed

sensor B712
13 Camshaft speed sensor
B713
14 Crankshaft 1 flywheel speed
sensor B711
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 Heating flange R701

2 Starter M700
3 Coolant temperature indicator +
thermostat B708
4 Charge air pressure sensor B703
5 Charge air temperature sensor B707
6 Air conditioning compressor magnetic
coupling M710
4.1-6 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual

Diesel engine
4.1.2
Crankshaft flywheel speed sensors B711/B712

For safety reasons, two identical speed sensors are used on the crankshaft.
The two speed sensors, B711 and B712, are attached to the engine flywheel
housing and their job is to record the speed and position of the crankshaft.
The first sensor (B711) is the working sensor; if it fails, the system
automatically switches to the second backup sensor (B712).
The signal voltage, whose frequency is proportional to the speed, is used
for:
Controlling the fan drive
Starting the emergency steering pump check
Controlling the diesel engine
Indicating the engine speed
Power limiting control
Overspeed protection
0-inching control
Design
The speed sensors are Hall-effect sensors. Hall-effect sensors are electromagnetic components with a permanent magnet and a Hall element (Hall IC).
The distance between the sensor and the flywheel ring gear is fixed.
Distance a = 0.5 - 2 mm
Speed sensor location
Basic function
If a Hall-effect sensor has voltage supplied and is put vertically into a
magnetic field, it provides an output voltage. This signal voltage modulates
proportionally to the speed of the ring gear on the flywheel and is provided to
the engine electronics as a frequency signal.
Attention
Never measure resistance on a Hall-effect sensor.
! Malfunctions are indicated by service codes in display.

Plug assignment
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 Weight
2 Frequency signal (output voltage)
3 12 V power supply
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.1-7 o f 1 2
Service manual
Diesel engine
4.1.3
Camshaft speed sensor B713

The speed sensor B713 is attached to the crankshaft housing of the engine;
its job is to detect the phase of the engine while starting.
If the camshaft sensor fails while the engine is running, the engine
continues turning.
When the engine is turned off and started again, its running is restricted.
The signal voltage, whose frequency is proportional to the speed, is used
for:
Controlling the diesel engine
Design
The speed sensor is a Hall-effect sensors. Hall-effect sensors are electromagnetic components with a permanent magnet and a Hall element (Hall IC).
The distance between the sensor and the flywheel ring gear is fixed.
Distance a = 0.5 - 2 mm
Speed sensor location
Basic function
If a Hall-effect sensor has voltage supplied and is put vertically into a
magnetic field, it provides an output voltage. This signal voltage modulates
proportionally to the speed of the ring gear on the flywheel and is provided to
the engine electronics as a frequency signal.
Attention
Never measure resistance on a Hall-effect sensor.

Plug assignment
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 Weight
2 Frequency signal (output voltage)
3 12 V power supply
4.1-8 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual

Diesel engine
4.1.4
Coolant temperature sensor B708

Fuel temperature sensor B709
The coolant temperature sensor B708 is attached to the thermostat housing of
the engine, while the fuel temperature sensor B709 is fitted in the fuel supply
line. Both have the task of signalling the temperature to the engine control unit
(ECU) in the form of an electrical resistance. The ECU uses this signal for:
Coolant temperature:
Indicating the coolant temperature in the cab
Preglow control
Engine power limiting control
Coolant temperature [C]
Power reduction [%]
-100
-15
100
101
120
150
10
50
50
Controlling the engine to increase the idling speed

Coolant temperature [C]
-100
-90
-40
-10
20
200
200
100
Idling speed increase [rpm]

Fuel temperature:
Fuel temperature [C]
-100
-5
75
80
85
100
Power reduction
[%]
10
10
30
Design
The temperature sensor is a resistance thermometer which operates with an
NTC characteristic (semiconductor).
Basic function
The resistance in the sensor decreases as the temperature rises. The curve is not
a straight line. If the sensor is defective, a temperature of -100 C is assumed.
Coolant resistance characteristic B708
Temperature (C)
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Coolant and fuel

temperature sensor
105
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
0
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
36
39
42
45
48
51
54
57
60
Resistance (kOhm )
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.1-9 o f 1 2
Service manual
Diesel engine
4.1.5
Charge air temperature sensor B707

The charge air temperature sensor B707 is attached to the air intake pipe of
the engine and has the task of signalling the charge air temperature to the
engine control unit (ECU) in the form of an electrical resistance. The ECU
uses this signal for:
Preglow control
Charge air
temperature [C]
Power reduction [%]
-100
-15
75
80
85
100
10
10
30
Design
The temperature sensor is a resistance thermometer which operates with an
NTC characteristic (semiconductor).
Basic function
Charge air temperature sensor
The resistance in the sensor decreases as the temperature rises. The curve is not
a straight line. If the sensor is defective, a temperature of 100 C is assumed.
Temperature (C)
Charge air resistance characteristic B707

105
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Resistance (kOhm )
4.1-10 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual

Diesel engine
4.1.6
Charge air pressure sensor B703

The charge air pressure sensor B703 is attached to the air intake pipe of the
engine and has the task of signalling the charge air pressure to the engine control
unit (ECU) in the form of an electrical voltage. The ECU uses this signal for:
Power reduction (%)
Atmospheric
pressure
(mbar)
Height above sea
level*
(m)
Speed (rpm)
1000
1300
1600
1900
2100
550
4850*
23.1
24.1
24.4
24.4
23.3
620
3950*
19.5
19.6
19.1
19.1
18.0
690
3100*
14.2
14.8
13.9
13.6
12.6
770
2250*
10.0
10.1
8.9
8.4
7.2
840
1550*
0.0
0.0
0.0
Design
The charge air pressure sensor is an absolute pressure sensor with a
membrane and an evaluation circuit. At atmospheric pressure, an absolute
pressure sensor is subject to approximately 1 bar (at sea level 1030 mbar).
1 Electrical connections
2 Evaluation circuit
3 Membrane with sensor element
4 Pressure port
5 Fixing thread
Basic function
Cross section of speed sensor
The electrical resistance varies on the layers applied to the membrane as

they change shape. This deformation due to the accumulating system
pressure alters the electrical resistance and causes a change in the voltage
of the resistance bridge, which has a 5 V supply.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
This voltage is in the range of 0 to 70 mV (depending on the pressure) and is

amplified in the evaluation circuit to between 0.5 and 4.5 V.
Attention
Never measure resistance on a pressure sensor.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.1-11 o f 1 2
Service manual
Diesel engine
4.1.7
Oil pressure sensor B701

The oil pressure sensor B701 is attached to the crankcase of the engine and
has the task of signalling the oil pressure to the engine control unit (ECU) in
the form of an electrical voltage. The ECU uses this signal for:
Indication in the cab
Controlling the engine as a function of the safety curve:
300
1000
1400
1800
2100
Design
The oil pressure sensor is a relative pressure sensor with a membrane and
an evaluation circuit. At atmospheric pressure, a relative pressure sensor is
subject to 0 bar.
1 Electrical connections
2 Evaluation circuit
3 Membrane with sensor element
4 Pressure port
5 Fixing thread
Cross section of speed sensor
Basic function
The electrical resistance varies on the layers applied to the membrane as
they change shape. This deformation due to the accumulating system
pressure alters the electrical resistance and causes a change in the voltage
of the resistance bridge, which has a 5 V supply.
This voltage is in the range of 0 to 70 mV (depending on the pressure) and is
amplified in the evaluation circuit to between 0.5 and 4.5 V.
Attention
Never measure resistance on a pressure sensor.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
4.1-12 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual

Fuel system
4.2
Fuel system
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
The fuel tank is located behind the right cab access.
Fuel system
1
2
3
4
Tank cap
Filler strainer
Fuel level sensor
Distributor port
5 Intake line
6 Return line
7 Diesel engine
8 Fuel cooler
9 Drain valve
10 Fuel tank
The fuel is drawn up by the fuel pump via the intake line and fuel pre-filter (water
and dirt separator) and is delivered to the injection elements via a fine filter.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.2-1 o f 6
Service manual
Fuel system
4.2.1
Fuel level sensor

Design
The fuel level sensor is fitted vertically in the tank.
It is connected via a lead and plugs to the display unit.
The sensor tube contains two electrodes to transmit the fuel level in the tank.
The fuel level sensor tube 2 contains electrodes 3 which measure the fuel
level using a capacitive resistor.
The electronics in the head of the fuel level sensor 1 transmit a corresponding
voltage signal of 1 V 4 V to input module 1 A16a pin 23.
Input module 1 converts the signal to a digital signal and forwards it via the
master electronics to the fuel level display in the display unit A13.
The fuel level sensor is earthed via input module 1 pin 65.
Fuel level display

The lower the fuel level the higher the voltage and thus the level shown on
the fuel level display.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
The reserve fuel level is shown by the fuel level symbol field flashing.
4.2-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual

Fuel system
4.2.2
Fuel pre-filter
The fuel pre-filter protects the engine's fuel system (pump, pump elements,
injection valves, valves and pistons) from dirt and water penetration.
Design
The fuel pre-filter acts as both a water separator and a filter. It is fitted in the
fuel intake line between the engine control unit and the fuel pump.
The intake line is connected via the engine control unit (cooler) to the fuel
tank. The outlet line is connected to the fuel pump.
The water probe in the water collector monitors the condensate in the fuel
pre-filter; if the water level is too high, it generates a service code via the
engine control unit to the display unit.
Fuel pre-filter
1 Hand pump
2 Filter head
3 Filter cartridge
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
4 Water collector
5 Drain cock
6 Water sensor
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.2-3 o f 6
Service manual
Fuel system
4.2.3
Fuel fine filter

Technical data
See section 2.1
The filter can be serviced without any tools. The filter can be removed and
replaced by hand during a service.
Design
The fuel filter is a fine filter with a water drain valve and is fitted between the
fuel pump and the injection pump.
It has a disposable filter cartridge which must be replaced each time it
is serviced.
Fuel fine filter

1 Filter head
2 Filter cartridge
The fuel fine filter protects the fuel system from contamination.
The pressure of the fuel pump forces the fuel through the filter membrane.
The filtered fuel then flows through the outlet in the filter head via the fuel
line to the injection pump.
The water in the fuel system is separated by the impregnation of the filter
insert, and then settles in the filter at the bottom.
The filter can be emptied during maintenance by opening the drain valve.
4.2-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
The diesel fuel is pumped under pressure from the fuel pump through the
filter intake into the filter insert.
Service manual

Fuel system
4.2.4
Refuelling pump (optional)

Technical data
See section 2.1
The refuelling pump is mounted on the right of the rear section.

The refuelling pump is only suitable for diesel fuel.
The refuelling system is designed to assist filling the diesel fuel from the
container to the fuel tank.
Design
Main components of the refuelling pump
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 Intake connection
2 Pressure port
3 Supply pump
4 DC motor
5 Electrical connection
Components of the refuelling pump

1
2
3
4
Snap ring
Check valve
Intake housing
Impeller
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
5
6
7
8
Seal
Discharge housing
Feather key
DC motor
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
9 Electrical connection
10 Carbon brush
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.2-5 o f 6
Service manual
Fuel system
Refuelling system
Refuelling pump
The refuelling pump 5 is a rotary vane pump which draws in fuel via the
intake line 6 and the intake line extension 7 with suction strainer 8, from the
container 9 and pumps it through the discharge line 4 to the fuel tank 3 of
the machine.
The refuelling pump 5 can be switched on and off using the removable key 2.
The refuelling pump 5 is filled with fuel via the discharge line before it is first
used. This means it is self-priming. The diesel fuel also lubricates the
mechanical seals in the pump.
A check valve in the intake port prevents the refuelling pump 5 from running
empty. This means the pump remains self-priming.
The DC motor does not have internal thermal protection; it is designed to run
for a maximum of 15 minutes.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
The external 20 amp fuse F05 (fitted in the instrument panel) protects the
pump from short-circuits and overload.
4.2-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual

Air filter system
4.3
Air filter system

Design
Air filter system

1 Rain cap
2 Fixing clips
3 Air filter
4 Vacuum switch
5 Filtered air intake manifold
6 Fixing clips
The engine takes in fresh air via the rain cap 3 and the air filter 5. The
filtered air is provided to the engine via the turbocharger.
4.3.1
Air filter
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Design
Air filter
1 Secondary element
2 Primary element
3 Service cap
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
4 Fixing clips
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.3-1 o f 2
Service manual
Air filter system
Air filter unit
The primary element 2 and the secondary element 1 of the dry air filter
are designed to ensure maximum protection for the engine at very long
service intervals.
The primary element 2 with radial sealing at the filtered air connection in the
filter housing 6 is subject to scheduled and non-scheduled maintenance.
The secondary element 1 acts as a back-up if the primary element 2 is damaged.
The secondary element 1 is not a service filter. It must be replaced if necessary.
The dust extraction valve 5 automatically removes dust from the service cap 3.
The tangential arrangement of the intake port sets the air into fast rotation,
so that large dust particles are thrown by centrifugal force against the
housing and accumulate in the service cap 3 due to the air flow.
At idle speed, the accumulated dust particles in the service cap 3 are carried
outside via the dust extraction valve 5 by the vibrations in the intake air.
The service cap 3 must be fitted so that the dust extraction valve 5 points down.
With the engine running at lower idle speed, you should clearly feel air
pulsating at the dust extraction valve 5.
4.3.2
Vacuum switch
(ID 6906001)
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Vacuum switch arrangement

2 Air filter
The vacuum switch 1 monitors the pressure ratio between the turbocharger
and the air filter 2.
If the filters are dirty (excessive vacuum) it activates the air contamination
symbol field on the display unit.
4.3-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 Vacuum switch
Service manual

Coupling
4.4
Coupling
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The coupling is an elastic torsion and vibration absorber between the
flywheel on the engine and the splitter box.
Position of the coupling

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 Torsion absorber
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
2 Flywheel
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.4-1 o f 4
Service manual
Coupling
1
2
3
4
Torsion absorber assembly

Hub
Pressure springs
Disc
5
6
7
8
Disc
Fixing screw
Flywheel housing
Flywheel
The disc 5 is bolted to the flywheel 8 of the engine. The hub 2 is axially guided
by circular discs riveted to the hub. The hub 2 can move radially on the disc 4.
The springs 3 are arranged in a ring and form an elastic connection which
transfers the torque between the disc 5 and the hub 2. The drive shaft of the
splitter box is connected to the hub 2 by a spline shaft gearing.
4.4-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Main components of the torsion absorber
Service manual

Coupling
Basic function
The coupling is an elastic connection which also absorbs torque peaks
between the engine and the driven splitter box.
The coupling transmits the engine torque to the splitter box.
Power transmission
The following components transmit the engine torque to the splitter box:
Flywheel 8
Fixing screws 6
Discs 4 and 5
Pressure springs 3
Hub 2
Damping
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
The springs 3 absorb load fluctuations and torque peaks on the engine
crankshaft. The vibrations of the crankshaft are greatly reduced as torque is
transmitted to the splitter box.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.4-3 o f 4
Service manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
Coupling
4.4-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual

Splitter box
4.5
Splitter box
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The splitter box is a single-stage spur gear transmission attached to the
flywheel housing of the diesel engine.
Location of the splitter box
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1 Working hydraulics pump

2 Steering hydraulics pump
3 Travel hydraulics pump

4 Pump distributor gear
Splitter box, rear view

1
2
3
4
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Housing
Dipstick
Oil filler tube
Pump connection for working and
steering hydraulics
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Pump connection for travel

hydraulics
6 Oil drain valve
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4.5-1 o f 4
Service manual
Splitter box
Splitter box, front view

Housing
Dipstick
Oil filler tube
Pump connection for working and
steering hydraulics
5 Oil drain valve

6 Pump connection for travel
hydraulics
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1
2
3
4
4.5-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual

Splitter box
Cross section of the splitter box
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Housing
Stud screw
Disc
Hex nut
O-ring
Ball bearing
Spur gear for working and
steering pump
Bearing flange
O-ring
Cylindrical roller bearing
Bearing flange
O-ring
Spur gear for travel pump
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Ball bearing
O-ring
Stud screw
Hex nut
Disc
Ball bearing
Drive shaft
Shaft seal ring
Bearing flange
O-ring
Ball bearing
4.5-3 o f 4
Service manual
Splitter box
Power transmission
The splitter box transfers and distributes the engine torque to the hydraulic
pumps for:
Travel hydraulics
Working hydraulics
Steering hydraulics
Input
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/29.01.2007
The splitter box is directly driven by the flywheel of the engine via the
elastic coupling.
4.5-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Cooling system
5.0
5
Cooling system.................................................................... 5.0-1

Gear pump ......................................................................................5.1-1
5.2
Gear motor......................................................................................5.2-1
5.3
Temperature sensor .......................................................................5.3-1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
5.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.0-1 o f 8
Cooling system
Service manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
Cooling system
5.0-2 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Cooling system
Cooling system
Design
The cooling system is fitted on the rear section between the diesel engine
and the driver's cab.
Cooler unit components

Air conditioning condenser
Diesel fuel cooler
Hydraulic oil cooler
Gear oil cooler
Water cooler
6 Intercooler
7 Cooler support, cooler unit frame
8 Fan motor with proportional
pressure relief valve
9 Fan blade
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
1
2
3
4
5
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.0-3 o f 8
Cooling system
Service manual
Cooling system
Cooling system components

4
5
6
7
8
Fan motor pressure line

Fan pump intake line
Fan pump
Hydraulic tank
Fan blade
9 Suction and return filter

10 Fan motor leak oil line / variable
displacement motor bearing
lubrication
11 Variable displacement motor 2
12 Cooler unit
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
1 Gear motor with proportional

pressure relief valve
2 Fan motor in-line filter
3 Fan motor shaft seal leak oil
line relief
5.0-4 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Cooling system
Cooling system
Basic function
The fan takes in air from the outside of the cooler units, and blows it over the
cooling fins of the cooler units, through the engine and out again.
The cooler system cools:
The engine coolant
The hydraulic oil
The engine charge air
The air conditioning condenser
The gear oil
The diesel fuel
Hydraulic fan speed control
Hydraulic plan of fan drive

1
2
3
4
Cooler unit
Fan
Gear motor
Proportional pressure relief
valve assembly
5
6
7
8
9
Triple pump
Return strainer
Ventilation and bleeder filter
Suction and return filter
Hydraulic tank
10
11
12
13
14
Bearing lubrication orifice

Bearing lubrication orifice
Collector pipe with safety valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
The speed of the hydrostatically driven fan depends on the engine

speed (pump flow) and the fluid temperatures or the status of the air
conditioning system.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.0-5 o f 8
Cooling system
Service manual
Cooling system
Electric fan speed control
Block diagram of cooling system

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Engine electronics (LH-ECU)

Input module 1
Output module 1
Cooler unit
Gear motor in-line filter
Fan
8 Proportional pressure relief

valve Y13
9 Gear motor
10 Coolant temperature sensor
(B708)
11 Gear pump
12 Diesel engine
13 Charge air temperature
sensor (B707)
14 Hydraulic oil temperature
sensor (B8)
15 Hydraulic tank
The main electronics (master) A15 process the following parameters:

The values of the hydraulic oil temperature sensor B8
The values of the coolant temperature sensor B708
The values of the charge air temperature sensor B707
The signals are provided by the engine controller (LH-ECU) and input
module 1 of the main electronics (master) A15 via CAN bus.
The main electronics (master) A15 calculate the current for the proportional
pressure relief valve Y13 and generate a signal via output module 1.
When the air conditioning system is on, the main electronics (master) A15
regulate the fan current to the value set using SCULI.
This current controls the proportional pressure relief valve Y13 on the gear
motor and therefore the fan speed.
A high temperature means a low current at the proportional pressure relief
valve Y13.
5.0-6 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
The fan speed is controlled by:

The charge air temperature sensor B707 in the intake pipe
The coolant temperature sensor B708 in the cooling water circuit
The hydraulic oil temperature sensor B8 in the hydraulic oil circuit
The proportional pressure relief valve Y13 on the gear motor
The status of the air conditioning system
The main electronics (master) A15
Service manual
Cooling system
Cooling system
If the hydraulic oil sensor B8 records overheating, the following functions

are activated:
Above 88 C the current to the proportional pressure relief valve Y13 is
reduced to 0 mA. This turns the fan motor M1 at maximum speed.
Above 90 C the display unit shows service code E A02A, a warning tone
sounds every 10 seconds and the hydraulic oil overheating warning lamp
H23 is activated.
From 90 C to 100 C the current to the control pressure proportional
valve is reduced gradually to 40 % (tractive force reduction).
If the coolant sensor B708 records overheating, the following functions
are activated:
Above 97 C the current to the proportional pressure relief valve Y13 is
reduced to 0 mA. This turns the fan motor M1 at maximum speed. In addition,
the display unit shows service code E A02A, a warning tone sounds every
10 seconds and the coolant overheating symbol field (H13) is activated.
From 100 C to 105 C the current to the control pressure proportional
valve is reduced gradually to 40 % (tractive force reduction).
If the charge air sensor B707 records overheating, the following
functions are activated:
Above 75 C the service code E6001 appears in the display unit, accompanied
by a warning tone. The engine power is reduced in increments.
Diagram of electric current and fan speed
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
1
2
3
4
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Fan speed
Current to proportional valve (mA)
Engine speed
Fan speed (rated speed)
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Fan speed with no current to

proportional pressure relief
valve Y13
6 Fan speed at low temperature
(minimum speed)
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.0-7 o f 8
Cooling system
Service manual
Cooling system
Tables of system pressure, electric current and fan speed

Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 14171; L556 - 454 / from 14171;
Fan control
At upper engine speed
Hydraulic oil up to 55 C, coolant up to 88 C
Hydraulic oil 55 - 73 C, coolant 88 - 93 C
Temperature sensor unplugged
At upper engine speed, hydraulic oil above 88 C, coolant
above 97 C, proportional solenoid de-energised.
Also suitable for setting the pressure relief valve
System pressure
Current
Fan speed
30 bar
900 mA
500 rpm
30 - 110 bar
900 - 580 mA
500 - 1650 rpm
110 10 bar
580 mA
1650 rpm
220 10 bar
De-energised
2050 rpm
When the air conditioning system is on and the air conditioning compressor
coupling is on, the current is reduced from 900 mA to 750 mA.
Valid for:
Fan control
Hydraulic oil up to 55 C, coolant up to 88 C
Temperature sensor unplugged
At upper engine speed, hydraulic oil above 88 C, coolant
above 97 C, proportional solenoid de-energised.
Also suitable for setting the pressure relief valve
System pressure
Current
Fan speed
40 bar
850 mA
250 rpm
40 - 175 bar
850 - 360 mA
250 - 1400 rpm
175 10 bar
360 mA
1400 rpm
220 10 bar
De-energised
1600 rpm
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/19.03.2007
When the air conditioning system is on and the air conditioning compressor
coupling is on, the current is reduced from 850 mA to 650 mA.
5.0-8 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Cooling system
Gear pump
5.1 Gear pump

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Gear pump arrangement

1 Fan circuit test connection
2 Cooling system gear pump
3 Brake system gear pump

4 Motor scavenging pump
The gear pumps are fitted on the auxiliary drive of the engine and is driven
by the engine at a specific transmission ratio via a spur gear.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
The pumps are connected to each other on the shaft via actuator rings. The
pumps are sealed against each other. The intake side of the cooler gear
pump 2 is connected to the hydraulic tank, and the discharge side is
connected to the gear motor on the fan housing.
Gear pump components

1
2
3
4
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Shaft seal ring

Flange
Seals
Bearing bushings
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Gears
6 Housing
7 Housing cover
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.1-1 o f 2
Cooling system
Service manual
Gear pump
Basic function
The gear pump consists of two intermeshing gears enclosed in a housing.
One of the two gears is driven via the outgoing shaft (driving gear), and the
other driven by the gear teeth (driven gear).
The fluid taken in is injected into the gaps between the teeth and pumped
outside along the housing from the intake port to the pressure port.
Pressure cut-off
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
The cooling system gear pump pressure cut-off is performed by the pressure
relief valve on the gear motor.
5.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Cooling system
Gear motor
5.2 Gear motor

Technical data
See section 2.1
The gear motor is fitted to the fan housing. The gear motor drives the fan
blades via a shaft.
The proportional pressure relief valve attached to the gear motor controls the
fan speed.
Design
Gear motor with proportional pressure relief valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
1 Gear motor
2 Fan drive shaft

valve
Gear motor with proportional pressure relief valve

1
2
3
4
5
6
Bearing cover
Seal kit
Bearing bushing
Gears
Bearing bushing
Motor housing
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
7 Seal kit
8 Proportional pressure relief valve
connecting housing
10 O-ring
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
11
12
13
14
15
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
O-ring
Shaft
Roller bearing
Shaft seal ring
Bearing cover
5.2-1 o f 4
Cooling system
Service manual
Gear motor
Proportional pressure relief valve

1
2
3
4
5
Pressure relief adjusting screw

Counter nut
Cap
Electromagnet
Electromagnet connection
6
7
8
9
Secondary spring
Housing
Secondary piston
Secondary restrictor
10
11
12
13
Housing
Primary spring
Main piston
Primary restrictor
Basic function
The gear motor 1 is powered by the current from the gear pump.
Diagram of fan motor

1 Gear motor
valve assembly
4 Main piston
5.2-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
P Pump intake
T1 Return line to variable
displacement motors
(bearing flushing)
T2 Relief seal (return to tank)
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
The gear motor 1 has a proportional pressure relief valve 3, which controls
the speed of the gear motor and therefore the fan speed.
Service manual
Cooling system
Gear motor
Pressure regulation by the proportional pressure relief

valve
How the proportional pressure relief valve works

When the solenoid 1 is not energised, the proportional pressure relief valve
acts like a pilot-controlled pressure relief valve.
The pressure acting at P passes through the primary restrictor 8 to the
spring chamber of the main piston 7 and acts via the secondary restrictor 5
on the secondary piston 4. The pressure equalisation on the main piston 7
causes the primary spring 6 to close it.
If the pressure on the secondary piston 4 becomes so high that the set force
of the secondary spring 2 is exceeded, the secondary piston 4 opens,
allowing oil to flow into the tank chamber. This gives rise to a difference in
pressure in front of and behind the main piston 7, causing it to open.
If the solenoid 1 is energised, a magnetic force is generated depending on
the current.
The magnetic force acts on the iron core 3, pulling it back according to the
current strength.
This magnetic force reduces the set spring force of the secondary spring 2
accordingly. This causes the proportional valve to open at a lower
system pressure.
Fan speed regulation

The proportional pressure relief valve acts as a bypass on the gear motor.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
At low temperature the bypass is almost fully open. Most of the pump flow
goes through the bypass valve to the tank. The fan turns at low speed
(minimum speed = dragging speed).
As the temperature rises, the bypass valve closes proportionally. The gear
motor turns the fan faster.
Failsafe function
The failsafe function is as follows: if the power supply to the proportionally
controlled pressure relief valve fails, the bypass closes. The full flow of the
gear pump drives the gear motor. The fan turns at maximum speed.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.2-3 o f 4
Cooling system
Service manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
Gear motor
5.2-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service manual
Cooling system
Temperature sensor
5.3 Temperature sensor

(ID 10043264)
Technical data
See section 2.1
The temperature sensor is used for measuring the temperature of the

hydraulic oil.
Design
The sensor element of the temperature sensor consists of an encapsulated
thin-layer nickel resistor.
Temperature sensor
Temperature measurement
Temperature/resistance curve
The sensor is a temperature sensor with an NTC characteristic.
This means, the resistance in the sensor rises along with the temperature.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
The resistance curve of the temperature sensor is almost linear.

For the coolant and charge air temperature sensors, see the section on
the ENGINE.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5.3-1 o f 2
Cooling system
Service manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/22.02.2007
Temperature sensor
5.3-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
6 Travel Hydraulics
6.0
Chapter contents
6
Travel Hydraulics ................................................................ 6.0-1

6.0.1
Travel hydraulics L550, L556 ............................................6.0-1
6.0.2
Travel hydraulics L566, L576, L580 ..................................6.0-9
6.1
Variable displacement pump ..........................................................6.1-1
6.2
Variable displacement motors ........................................................6.2-1

Variable adjustment motor ...................................................6.2-3
6.2.2
Motor scavenging pump .......................................................6.2-8
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
6.2.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Travel Hydraulics
6.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
6.0.1
Valid for:
Travel hydraulics L550, L556

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Main components of the travel hydraulics

1
2
3
4
Hydraulic tank
Collector pipe
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
5 Oil cooler
8 Scavenging pump
9 Fan pump
10 Fan motor
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-1 o f 1 6
Travel Hydraulics
PowerPoint
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the travel hydraulics
6.0-2 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
Service Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Hydraulic tank
Bleeder filter
Return strainer
Bypass valve
Pre-tension valve
Replenishing valve with strainer
leak oil
Solenoid valve block return oil
Compact brake pump leak oil
Control block return oil
Shut-off valve
intake port
Steering pump intake port
intake port
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
Gear pump fan
assembly
Axial piston pump
Travel direction valve
Travel Hydraulics
23 Servo cylinder
24 Restrictor 1.8 mm
25 Pressure relief and replenishing
valve A
valve B
27 Replenishing pressure relief valve
28 Pressure cut-off
29 Control pressure proportional valve
30 Replenishing pump
31 To working hydraulics pilot control
32 Bypass valve
assembly
34 Axial piston drive unit
35 Check valves
36 Proportional valve and piston rod
37 Servo piston
assembly
42 Check valves
44 Servo piston
45 Discharge valve
46 Pressure relief valve

with orifice
47 Orifice 4.2 mm
50 Fan motor assembly
51 Main piston
52 Pressure relief and
proportional valve
53 Gear motor
54 Fan blade
55 Oil cooler
56 Bypass valve
57 Collector pipe
58 Return oil from servostat
Test connections:
PST Control pressure / variable
displacement pump
G Replenishing pressure
MA High pressure / forward
travel direction
MB High pressure / reverse
travel direction
M1 Servo pressure / variable
displacement motor 1
P High pressure / fan
The hydrostatic travel drive operates in a closed circuit. The variable

displacement pump 20 pumps oil directly to the variable displacement
motors 33 and 40. The oil returning from the variable displacement motors is
pumped back to the intake side of the variable displacement pump.
1st gear: At low speed or high tractive force, both motors pivot out to a wide
angle. This provides a low output speed and a high torque to the motors. If
the travel speed is increased, both motors pivot inwards.
2nd gear: Motor 33 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0. Motor
40 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed.
3rd gear: Motor 40 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0. Motor
33 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed. Maximum travel
speed is achieved at an angle of approximately 15.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The variable displacement pump operates in a closed circuit. It pumps the oil
directly to the variable displacement motors. The oil flowing back from the
motors is fed back to the intake side of the pump.
The main electronics (master) control the pump. Depending on the operating
state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve 5 is activated by
the main electronics. The proportional valve regulates the control pressure and
therefore the pump flow.
At high load, the pump is adjusted to a lower displacement by the reaction
forces from the high pressure.
The travel direction valve 3 determines the direction in which the
displacement pump operates and thus the travel direction of the machine.
The pressure cut-off 2 limits the maximum operating pressure within the
closed circuit.
The pressure relief valves 4 for forward and reverse travel direction protect
the travel drive from excessive pressure peaks.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-3 o f 1 6
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
See the detailed description in the section on the variable displacement pump.
Variable displacement pump regulation
The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement pump.
The following parameters affect the control of the pump:
Gas pedal position
Inching function
Tractive force control
Excess hydraulic oil or coolant temperature
Engine overspeed or excessive road speed
Gas pedal position
When gas pedal is depressed, the current to the control pressure proportional valve is increased and the variable displacement pump pivots out.
The control pressure proportional valve is only energised when the engine
speeds exceeds 930 rpm. The current is then increased to the set value
according to the engine speed.
Inching function
When the inch/brake pedal is depressed, the main electronics (master)

reduce the current to the control pressure proportional valve and hydrostatic
braking takes place.
At excess engine speeds of 2450 rpm and above, the inching function is
gradually reduced, and at 2600 rpm it is completely deactivated. This
prevents engine overspeed when travelling downhill.
If the inching angle sensor fails, the inching function is gradually deactivated
within 20 seconds.
Tractive force adjustment
If tractive force control is activated, the main electronics (master) reduce the
maximum current to the control pressure proportional valve. This restricts the
tractive force to the set level.
The following parameters are required for tractive force control:
The tractive force control button must be switched on
The machine must be moving forward
The machine must be in 1st gear (even with kickdown)
You can use the two buttons to adjust the tractive force as required in a
range of 100% to 70%.
Overheating
If the hydraulic oil (90 - 95 C) or the coolant (90 - 100 C) overheats, the
main electronics (master) reduce the current to the control pressure proportional valve. The current is reduced gradually to 40% of the maximum level.
The control pressure proportional valve is energised normally again when
the temperature falls back below the threshold.
Engine overspeed or excessive

road speed
Above a certain speed in each gear, the main electronics (master) starts
gradually reducing the current to the control pressure proportional valve to
200 mA.
At even higher road speeds or engine or motor overspeed, the overspeed
protection function is activated. The rear axle is braked using replenishing
pressure from the variable displacement pump.
6.0-4 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Tractive force control is gradually disabled as the speed increases from 0.3
to 4 km/h.
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
Variable displacement motors
The variable displacement motors drive the transmission. A higher or
lower torque is transferred to the transmission, depending on the pivot angle
and pressure.
The flow from the displacement pump reaches the variable displacement
motor via pressure connection A or B. In the process, the regulating pistons
which move along the cylinder of the rotary group are subjected to pressure.
The resulting force turns the drive shaft and generates a certain torque.
The main electronics (master) control the motors. Depending on the
operating state of the machine, the proportional valves 3 on the variable
displacement motors are activated by the main electronics. This adjusts the
pivot angle and displacement to the current operating condition.
The discharge valve 4 in the variable displacement motor 2 is employed in
the closed circuit to avoid heat build-up. In the process, oil is discharged
from the low pressure side of the closed circuit and fed to the hydraulic tank.
The replenishing pump replaces this oil with cooled oil.
Variable displacement motor regulation
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement motors.

The following parameters affect the control of the motors:
Road speed
Gas pedal position
Variable displacement motor power limiting control (excessive
engine suppression)
Inching function
Tempomat
Road speed
The proportional valves on the motors are energised according to the speed.
The lower the current at the proportional valve of the motors, the smaller the
pivot angle and the displacement of the motor.
Gas pedal position
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
The gas pedal governs how the motors pivot to a smaller angle. This
accelerates the machine.
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-5 o f 1 6
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Variable displacement motor

power limiting control
Power limiting control comes into affect when the engine is excessively
suppressed due to load. This can occur while driving and additionally
operating the working hydraulics or steering.
The main electronics (master) increase the current at the proportional valve
of the motors until the engine speed is back in the normal range. The motors
then pivot out again.
Inching function

increase the current to the motor proportional valve and hydrostatic braking
takes place.
Vmax function
With the Vmax function, the motors move towards a set displacement which
corresponds to the preselected speed at full throttle. This means that the
road speed decreases as the engine speed is reduced.
The function is only activated when travelling forward in first or second
fixed gear.
The current speed when the Vmax button is pressed is stored. The machine
then reaches this speed at full throttle.

road speed
If the engine overrevs when travelling downhill, the motors pivot to a smaller
angle. If the engine speed exceeds a critical level, overspeed protection is
activated. The rear axle is braked.
Overspeed protection is also activated if the variable displacement
motors overrev.
During bearing flushing, fresh, cooled oil is directed to the tapered roller
bearings and into the housing of the variable displacement motors. The hot
oil is pumped out.
The return oil from the fan motor 1 is pumped to the port U of the motors.
The orifice 10 ensures that the oil is distributed evenly to both motors.
6.0-6 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Variable displacement motor bearing flushing
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
The scavenging pump 2 draws oil from the connection T on both variable
displacement motors. The hot oil flows to the collector pipe 7 and the oil
cooler 6, and through the return suction filter 4 back to the hydraulic tank 5.
Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the replenishing pump of the travel
hydraulics. The replenishing pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via
the connection 1.
A pre-tension valve in the return suction filter 3 preloads the suction side of
the replenishing pump with a pressure of 0.5 bar. The replenishing pump is
better able to draw up the oil for cold starts. This means that the pressure in
the hydrostatic control circuit increases more quickly and a better drive
performance is achieved.
The oil returning from the travel hydraulics is directed over the oil cooler.
The oil is then pumped back through the connection 2 and the return suction
filter 3 to the hydraulic tank.
The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the
hydraulic tank by providing appropriate ventilation.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
See the detailed description in the section on the hydraulic tank.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-7 o f 1 6
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Travel Hydraulics
6.0-8 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
6.0.2
Valid for:
Travel hydraulics L566, L576, L580

Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Main components of the travel hydraulics

1
2
3
4
Hydraulic tank
Collector pipe
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Oil cooler
8 Scavenging pump
9 Fan pump
10 Fan motor
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-9 o f 1 6
Travel Hydraulics
PowerPoint
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the travel hydraulics
6.0-10 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Hydraulic tank
Bleeder filter
Return strainer
Bypass valve
Pre-tension valve
leak oil
Solenoid valve block return oil
Control block return oil
Shut-off valve
intake port
intake port
Gear pump fan
Variable displacement
pump assembly
Axial piston pump
Servo cylinder
Travel Hydraulics
24 Restrictor 1.8 mm
valve A
valve B
27 Replenishing pressure relief
valve
28 Pressure cut-off
29 Control pressure proportional valve
32 Bypass valve
assembly
35 Check valves
37 Servo piston
38 Discharge valve
39 Pressure relief valve with orifice
assembly
42 Check valves
44 Servo piston
45 Discharge valve
with orifice
47 Orifice 4.2 mm
50 Fan motor assembly
51 Main piston
proportional valve
53 Gear motor
54 Fan blade
55 Oil cooler
56 Bypass valve
57 Collector pipe
58 Return oil from servostat
Test connections:
PST Control pressure / variable
displacement pump
G Replenishing pressure
MA High pressure / forward
travel direction
MB High pressure / reverse
travel direction
P High pressure / fan
The hydrostatic travel drive operates in a closed circuit. The variable displacement pump 20 pumps oil directly to the variable displacement motors
33 and 40. The oil returning from the variable displacement motors is
pumped back to the intake side of the variable displacement pump.
1st gear: At low speed or high tractive force, both motors pivot out to a wide
angle. This provides a low output speed and a high torque to the motors. If
the travel speed is increased, both motors pivot inwards.
2nd gear: Motor 33 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0. Motor
40 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed.
3rd gear: Motor 40 is uncoupled (not turning) and at an angle of 0. Motor
33 moves to a certain angle depending on the travel speed. Maximum travel
speed is achieved at an angle of approximately 15.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The variable displacement pump operates in a closed circuit. It pumps the oil
directly to the variable displacement motors. The oil flowing back from the
motors is fed back to the intake side of the pump.
state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve 5 is activated
by the main electronics. The proportional valve regulates the control
pressure and therefore the pump flow.
The travel direction valve 3 determines the direction in which the displacement pump operates and thus the travel direction of the machine.
The pressure cut-off 2 limits the maximum operating pressure within the
closed circuit.
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-11 o f 1 6
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
The pressure relief valves 4 for forward and reverse travel direction protect
the travel drive from excessive pressure peaks.
Variable displacement pump regulation
The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement pump.
Gas pedal position
Inching function
Gas pedal position
When gas pedal is depressed, the current to the control pressure proportional valve is increased and the variable displacement pump pivots out.
The control pressure proportional valve is only energised when the engine
speeds exceeds 930 rpm. The current is then increased to the set value
according to the engine speed.
Inching function

reduce the current to the control pressure proportional valve and hydrostatic
braking takes place.
At excess engine speeds of 2450 rpm and above, the inching function is
gradually reduced, and at 2600 rpm it is completely deactivated. This
prevents engine overspeed when travelling downhill.
If the inching angle sensor fails, the inching function is gradually deactivated
within 20 seconds.
If tractive force control is activated, the main electronics (master) reduce the
maximum current to the control pressure proportional valve. This restricts the
tractive force to the set level.
The following parameters are required for tractive force control:
The tractive force control button must be switched on
The machine must be moving forward
The machine must be in 1st gear (even with kickdown)
You can use the two buttons to adjust the tractive force as required in a
range of 100% to 70%.
Overheating
If the hydraulic oil (90 - 95 C) or the coolant (90 - 100 C) overheats, the main
electronics (master) reduce the current to the control pressure proportional
valve. The current is reduced gradually to 40% of the maximum level.
The control pressure proportional valve is energised normally again when
the temperature falls back below the threshold.

road speed
Above a certain speed in each gear, the main electronics (master) starts
gradually reducing the current to the control pressure proportional valve to
200 mA.
At even higher road speeds or engine or motor overspeed, the overspeed
protection function is activated. The rear axle is braked using replenishing
pressure from the variable displacement pump.
6.0-12 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Tractive force control is gradually disabled as the speed increases from 0.3
to 4 km/h.
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
The variable displacement motors drive the transmission. A higher or lower
torque is transferred to the transmission, depending on the pivot angle
and pressure.
The resulting force turns the drive shaft and generates a certain torque.
The discharge valve 4 in the variable displacement motors 1 and 2 is
employed in the closed circuit to avoid heat build-up. In the process, oil is
discharged from the low pressure side of the closed circuit and fed to the
hydraulic tank. The replenishing pump replaces this oil with cooled oil.
Variable displacement motor regulation
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The main electronics (master) control the variable displacement motors.

The following parameters affect the control of the motors:
Road speed
Gas pedal position
Variable displacement motor power limiting control (excessive engine
suppression)
Inching function
Tempomat
Road speed
The proportional valves on the motors are energised according to the speed.
The lower the current at the proportional valve of the motors, the smaller the
pivot angle and the displacement of the motor.
Gas pedal position
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
The gas pedal governs how the motors pivot to a smaller angle. This
accelerates the machine.
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-13 o f 1 6
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual

power limiting control
Power limiting control comes into affect when the engine is excessively
suppressed due to load. This can occur while driving and additionally
operating the working hydraulics or steering.
The main electronics (master) increase the current at the proportional valve
of the motors until the engine speed is back in the normal range. The motors
then pivot out again.
Inching function

increase the current to the motor proportional valve and hydrostatic braking
takes place.
Vmax function
With the Vmax function, the motors move towards a set displacement which
corresponds to the preselected speed at full throttle. This means that the
road speed decreases as the engine speed is reduced.
The function is only activated when travelling forward in first or second
fixed gear.
then reaches this speed at full throttle.

road speed
If the engine overrevs when travelling downhill, the motors pivot to a smaller
angle. If the engine speed exceeds a critical level, overspeed protection is
activated. The rear axle is braked.
Overspeed protection is also activated if the variable displacement
motors overrev.
oil is pumped out.
6.0-14 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the replenishing pump of the travel
hydraulics. The replenishing pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via
the connection 1.
A pre-tension valve in the return suction filter 3 preloads the suction side of
the replenishing pump with a pressure of 0.5 bar. The replenishing pump is
better able to draw up the oil for cold starts. This means that the pressure in
the hydrostatic control circuit increases more quickly and a better drive
performance is achieved.
The oil returning from the travel hydraulics is directed over the oil cooler. The
oil is then pumped back through the connection 2 and the return suction filter
3 to the hydraulic tank.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.0-15 o f 1 6
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Travel Hydraulics
6.0-16 o f 1 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
6.1 Variable displacement pump

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the variable displacement pump

1 Drive shaft
2 Pump housing
3 Servo cylinder
4 Travel direction valve

5 Connection housing
The variable displacement pump is flange-mounted to the splitter box and is

driven by the diesel engine via this unit.
The variable displacement pump is an axial piston pump with a swash plate
design. The variable displacement pump contains proportional valves for the
control pressure and pressure cut-off, as well as a replenishing pressure
valve, pressure relief and replenishing valve, and a replenishing pump.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The following diagrams illustrate the design of the variable displacement pump:
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.1-1 o f 1 0
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Components of the variable displacement pump, side view

Drive shaft
Shaft seal ring
Snap ring
Pump housing
Servo piston
Control pressure proportional valve
Pressure cut-off
Connection housing
Disc
Replenishing pump housing
Coupling hub
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Bearing bushing
Internal gear
External gear
Bearing bushing
Bearing bushing
Bushing
Control lens
Snap ring
Pressure spring
Bushing
Cylinder
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Piston
Return ball
Return plate
Glide shoe
Disc springs
Swash plate
Guide pin
Pin
Swash plate bearing
Roller bearing
Snap ring
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
6.1-2 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
Components of the variable displacement pump, servo cylinder and servo valve view
Servo piston
Pump housing
Spring cup
Pressure spring
Pressure spring
Turcon-Glyd seal
Guide ring
Solenoid
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Pressure cut-off
Connection housing
Pressure relief and replenishing valve
Replenishing pressure relief valve
Twist screw
Solenoid
17 Receptacle ring
18 Adjusting screw for the
pump zero position
19 Counter nut
20 Spring cup
21 Snap ring
22 Cover
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.1-3 o f 1 0
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Components of the variable displacement pump, front view

4 Restrictor
5 Plug
6 Replenishing pressure
relief valve

replenishing valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1 Pressure cut-off
replenishing valve
6.1-4 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the variable displacement pump

1
2
3
4
5

Servo cylinder
Restrictor
Pressure relief and
replenishing valve A
replenishing valve B
7 Replenishing pressure relief valve

8 Pressure cut-off
9 Control pressure proportional
valve
11 Suction line from replenishing
pump
13 To the oil cooler
The variable displacement pump is designed for hydrostatic drives in a closed

circuit. The pump delivers directly to the variable displacement motors. The oil
flowing back from the motors is fed back to the opposite side of the pump.
state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve 9 is activated
by the main electronics (master). The proportional valve regulates the
control pressure and therefore the pump flow.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The travel direction valve determines the direction in which the displacement
pump operates and the travel direction of the machine.
The pressure relief and replenishing valves A and B protect the travel drive
from excessive pressure peaks. At the same time, the valves act as
replenishing valves for the closed circuit.
The pressure cut-off limits the maximum operating pressure within the
closed circuit.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.1-5 o f 1 0
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Control of the pump

state of the machine, the control pressure proportional valve is activated by
the main electronics. The proportional valve regulates the control pressure
and therefore the pump flow.
Gas pedal position
Inching function

Depending on the operating state of the machine, the control pressure
proportional valve is activated by the main electronics (master). The valve
reduces the pressure in the PST channel in proportion to the magnet
current. It operates largely independently of the PSP control pressure.
In the de-energised state, the PST control pressure duct is connected to the
tank T. The more the current increases, the higher the control pressure. The
maximum level is limited by the replenishing pressure.
Depending on the current to the proportional valve 3, the control piston 2 is
moved closer to or further from the regulating springs 1. This adjusts the
pressure in the PST duct.
Servo piston and swash plate
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The servo piston 3 turns the swash plate 2 mounted on roller bearings and
thus changes the pump flow rate of the pump.
Servo piston and swash plate
6.1-6 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
1 Swash plate bearing

2 Swash plate
3 Servo piston
4 Cylinder with piston
As the swivel angle increases, the pump flow is increased. The drive torque
is increased.
When the swivel angle is reduced, the flow rate of the pump is also reduced.
The drive torque is reduced.
When in the zero position, the pump flow is also zero. The strong spring
centring in the servo cylinder keeps the swash plate in the zero position if no
control signals are present. The zero position can be mechanically adjusted.
Sectional view of the servo cylinder

1
2
3
4
Pump housing
Pressure spring
Servo cylinder
Forward travel direction servo
oil supply
5 Reverse travel direction servo

oil supply
6 Pressure spring
7 Zero position adjusting screw
On traversing the zero position, the flow direction of the hydraulic oil is
smoothly reversed.

The travel direction valve determines the direction in which the pump
swivels out.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The travel direction valve directs the control pressure into one of the two
servo chambers in the servo cylinder. The opposite chamber remains
connected to the drain.
Sectional view of the travel direction valve

1
2
3
4
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Forward travel direction solenoid

Servo oil supply
Reverse travel direction solenoid
Forward travel direction servo
oil supply
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Reverse travel direction servo

oil supply
6 Servo piston
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.1-7 o f 1 0
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Replenishing pump
The replenishing pump is an internal gear pump. The replenishing pump
draws up oil from the hydraulic tank. The delivery volume of the pump is
proportional to the drive speed.
Front view of the replenishing pump

1 Internal gear pump
2 Suction side of the

replenishing pump
The replenishing pump supplies the closed circuit with fresh, cooled oil. The
replenishing pump also provides oil for the control circuit (control pressure).
The maximum replenishing pressure is limited by the replenishing pressure
relief valve.
Replenishing pressure relief valve
Cross section of the replenishing pressure relief valve

1 Tank outlet
2 Oil from the replenishing pump
3 Adjusting screw
4 Oil to the pressure relief and

replenishing valve
5 Valve piston
Excess oil that is not fed into the closed circuit flows via the replenishing
pressure relief valve to the pump housing. At the same time, this oil cools
the rotary group of the variable displacement pump.
6.1-8 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
This directly actuated pressure relief valve protects the replenishing pump
against excess pressure.
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
Pressure cut-off
The pressure cut-off valve limits the operating pressure in the closed circuit.
When the maximum operating pressure is reached, the flow of the variable
displacement pump is reduced so that the maximum operating pressure is
just maintained.
Hydraulic diagram of active/inactive pressure cut-off

1 Variable displacement pump
2 Travel direction valve
3 Control pressure proportional
valve
4 Pressure cut-off
5 Nozzle
6 Replenishing pump
Pressure cut-off active: when the maximum operating pressure is reached in

the closed circuit, the pressure cut-off is activated. Control oil flows into the
tank duct.
Sufficient oil from the replenishing pump 6 can no longer flow through the
nozzle 5. Up to the nozzle 5 the replenishing pressure acts; after it, only the
reduced control pressure.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Pressure cut-off inactive: the control pressure acts in the duct up to the
control pressure proportional valve 3 and the pressure cut-off 4.
Sectional view of the pressure cut-off

1
2
3
4
Pressure spring
Valve piston
Servo oil supply
Control edge
5 Tank outlet
6 Tappet
7 Low pressure / closed circuit
8 Check valve
9 Bore hole
10 High pressure / closed circuit
The operating pressure controls the valve. When the maximum operating
pressure has been reached, the tappet 6 and the valve piston 2 are pushed
against the pressure spring 1. The control pressure channel 3 is linked to the
tank outlet 5, and servo oil drains off. The control pressure drops and the variable displacement pump swivels to a smaller flow rate. The variable displacement
pump then delivers just enough oil to attain the maximum pressure.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.1-9 o f 1 0
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Pressure relief and replenishing valve

The pilot-controlled pressure relief and replenishing valves prevent excess
pressure from forming in the closed circuit.
The high pressure from the system acts via the nozzle 6 on the pilot control
piston 2. It the set value is exceeded, the pilot control piston opens. The rear
piston chamber 3 is opened via the relief duct 8 to the low pressure side.
The main piston 4 then opens and the high pressure oil can flow to the low
pressure side 5.
Pressure relief and replenishing valve at high pressure

1
2
3
4
Pressure spring
Pilot control piston
Rear piston chamber
Main piston
5
6
7
8
Low pressure side

Nozzle
High pressure
Relief duct
At the same time, the valves act as replenishing valves for the closed circuit.
Pressure relief and replenishing valve during replenishment

1 Main piston
2 Pressure spring
3 Main piston control edge
6.1-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4 Replenishing oil intake

5 Closed circuit replenishment
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Oil leaks in the closed circuit reduce the pressure on the low pressure side.
This opens the main piston and oil from the replenishing pump can flow into
the closed circuit.
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
6.2 Variable displacement motors

Basic function
Variable displacement motor arrangement

1
2

3
4
Proportional valve
Discharge valve
The variable displacement motors drive the transmission. A higher or

lower torque is transferred to the transmission, depending on the pivot angle
and pressure.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Regulation of the variable displacement motors during acceleration

1st gear: At low speed, both motors pivot to a 25 angle. The greatest torque
is transferred to the transmission.
If the travel speed is increased, the motors simultaneously pivot inwards.
The shift range is reached at around 6 km/h. Motor 1 moves back towards 0
and motor 2 towards 23. Motor 1 reduces its torque and motor 2 increases
its torque.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.2-1 o f 8
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Once motor 1 reaches an angle of 0, the coupling 1 opens in a loadfree condition.

2nd gear: In 2nd gear, only variable displacement motor 2 is active. Motor 1
is uncoupled and at an angle of 0.
As the speed is increased, motor 2 gradually reduces its angle. The next
shift range is reached at around 17 km/h.
Motor 1 is coupled again and moves to a wide angle. At the same time,
motor 2 moves to 0. Motor 2 is then uncoupled.
3rd gear: In 3rd gear, only variable displacement motor 1 is active. Initially,
motor 1 is at an angle of 25. In this range, the variable displacement pump
takes control. At speeds higher than 23 km/h, motor 1 moves towards a
smaller angle.
6.2-2 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007
oil is pumped out.
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
6.2.1
Variable adjustment motor

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the variable displacement motor

1 Drive shaft
2 Housing
3 Discharge valve
4 Control unit
5 Regulating unit
6 Proportional valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The variable displacement motor is flange-mounted on the transfer gear.

The inclined axial tapered piston rotary group and the variable displacement
are all integrated in the variable displacement motor.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.2-3 o f 8
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Drive shaft
Snap ring
Shaft seal ring
U-connection
Motor housing
Piston
Cylinder
Control lens
Q min adjusting screw
Bolt connection
Pressure spring
Discharge valve
6.2-4 o f 8
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Orifice
Valve piston
Socket-head screw
Servo piston seal
Servo piston
Threaded pin
Control pin
Regulating spring 1
Connecting plate
Spring cup
Spring cup
Regulating spring 2
Control bushing
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Control piston
Proportional magnet
Regulation adjusting screw
Installation pin
O-ring
Q max adjusting screw
Adjusting washer
Pressure spring
Centre pin
Drive shaft bearing
Check valve
Valve insert
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007
Components of the variable displacement motor
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.2-5 o f 8
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the variable displacement motor

1
2
3
4
5
6
Variable adjustment motor

Check valves
Proportional valve
Control piston
Servo piston
Discharge valve
7
8
9
10
11
M1
Orifice
Bearing lubrication oil
Return oil from discharge valve
Housing scavenging connection
Servo pressure test connection
The resulting force turns the drive shaft and generates a certain torque. The
torque at the drive shaft depends on the swivel angle and on the operating
pressure in the closed circuit. The speed of the drive shaft depends on the
pump flow and on the swivel angle of the variable displacement motor.
As the swivel angle decreases, the speed increases and the potential
torque is reduced.
As the swivel angle increases, the torque increases and the potential
speed is reduced.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007
The regulation and control unit installed in the connecting housing adjusts
the swivel angle of the motor. The main electronics (master) control the
position of the motor.
6.2-6 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Travel Hydraulics
Electro-proportional control (EP)

Depending on the energisation of the proportional magnet 7, the variable
displacement motor is moved to the required angle.
When the proportional magnet not energized, the motor is held at the 0
angle by the high pressure acting on the small servo piston face 2.
When the proportional magnet is energised, above a certain current the
control piston 6 is pushed up against the regulating springs 5 and 4. Highpressure oil flows via the control piston 6 to the large piston face 1 and the
variable displacement motor moves out to a wider angle.
During regulation, the control piston 3 is pushed down, increasing the
tension in the regulating spring 4. This stops the regulation process if the
current at the proportional magnet is not further increased.
If the current is increased, the force of the two regulating springs is
overcome and the motor continues moving to a wider angle.
The maximum pivot angle is reached at a current of around 600 mA. The
force of the proportional magnet is go great that it overcomes the spring
force even at a wide pivot angle.
The adjusting screw 8 is used for adjusting the regulating springs 5 (basic
setting). Adjust the regulating springs 5 so that the motor is moved to a 25
angle at 600 mA on the proportional magnet.
The main electronics (master) control the speed with which the variable
displacement motor is moved. This means no swivel restrictors are required.
Cooling by the discharge valve

The discharge valve is used in the closed circuit to avoid excessive heat
build-up. In the process, oil is discharged from the low pressure side of the
closed circuit and fed to the hydraulic tank. The replenishing pump replaces
this oil with cooled oil.
When the machine is at rest, the pressure is the same on both faces of the
valve piston 4. The two return springs 5 push the valve piston 4 to the centre
position. No oil is discharged in this position.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
When the machine moves, the pressure in the duct 6 or 7 increases and
moves the valve piston 4 towards one of the return springs 5. The low
pressure side is opened and a defined quantity of oil flows via the orifice 1
and the pressure relief valve 2 to the hydraulic tank.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
6.2-7 o f 8
Travel Hydraulics
Service Manual
6.2.2

Design
Scavenging pump arrangement


The gear pumps are fitted on the auxiliary drive of the engine and is driven
1
2
3
4
Flight
O-ring
Flange
Seals
5
6
7
8
Bearing bushings
Gears
Housing
Housing cover
Scavenging from the variable displacement motor housing
The pump actively draws up hot oil from the housing of the variable displacement motors and pumps it through the oil cooler to the hydraulic tank.
6.2-8 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw26/01/2007
Motor scavenging pump components
7 Working hydraulics
7.0
Chapter contents
7
Working hydraulics.............................................................. 7.0-1

7.0.1
Working hydraulics - L550, L556..........................................7.0-1
7.0.2
Working hydraulics - L566, L576, L580................................7.0-7
7.1
Working hydraulics pump ...............................................................7.1-1
7.2
Control block ...................................................................................7.2-1
7.3
Pilot control unit ..............................................................................7.3-1

7.3.1
Pilot control unit ....................................................................7.3-5
7.3.2
Pilot control solenoid valve ...................................................7.3-9
7.3.3
Pilot control hydro accumulator ..........................................7.3-10
7.3.4
Float position pressure switch ............................................7.3-11
7.4
Ride control.....................................................................................7.4-1
7.4.1
Ride control L550, L556 ....................................................7.4-1
7.4.2
Ride control L566, L576, L580 ..........................................7.4-7
7.4.3
Stabilisation module ...........................................................7.4-13
7.4.4
Hydro accumulator unit.......................................................7.4-15
7.4.5
Ride control pressure switch ..............................................7.4-17
7.5
Lift and tilt cylinders ........................................................................7.5-1

7.5.1
Lift cylinder ...........................................................................7.5-1
7.5.2
Tilt cylinder ...........................................................................7.5-3
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
7.6
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Hydraulic tank .................................................................................7.6-1

7.6.1
Filter unit...............................................................................7.6-3
7.6.2
Bleeder filter .........................................................................7.6-8
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Working hydraulics
7.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
7.0.1
Valid for:
Working hydraulics - L550, L556

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Design
Main components of the working hydraulics

1
2
3
4
Lift cylinder
Tilt cylinder
Pilot control unit
Hydraulic tank
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653

6 Travel hydraulics variable displacement pump with replenishing pump
7 Pilot control solenoid valve
8
9
10
11
12

Compact brake valve
Hydro accumulator unit
Control block
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.0-1 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
PowerPoint
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the working hydraulics
7.0-2 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
Service Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
Hydraulic tank
Bleeder filter
Return strainer
Bypass valve
Pre-tension valve
Travel pump return line
Fan motor leak oil
Return line from oil cooler
Shut-off valve
Emergency steering pump intake port
Replenishing pump
Axial piston pump
Return cylinder
Restrictor
Servo cylinder
Power regulator
Restrictor
Flow controller
Steering pump return line
Pilot control unit
Tilt-out valve
Working hydraulics
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
Bucket return-to-dig solenoid

Tilt-in valve
Lifting valve
Lift kick-out solenoid
Lowering valve
Float position solenoid
Float position pressure switch,
26 bar
Ride control pressure switch,
10 bar
Ride control spool valve
Restrictor check valve
Ride control solenoid valve
Safety valve
Check valve
Control block assembly
Pre-tension valve
LS pressure cut-off
Flow control valve
Tilt cylinder pressure balance
Tilt cylinder spool valve
Lift cylinder pressure balance
Lift cylinder spool valve
Load valve
60 Lifting pressure relief valve

61 Restrictor check valve
62 Float position / ride control solenoid valve
63 Check valve
64 Tilt-in pressure relief valve
65 Tilt-out pressure relief valve
66 Orifice 1 mm
67 Lift cylinder
68 Tilt cylinder
69 Oil from compact brake valve
(housing preheating)
70 Cut-in block
71 Overspeed protection solenoid valve
73 Check valve
74 Pilot control hydro accumulator
Test connections:
P Working hydraulics pump
high pressure
M1 Working hydraulics pump servo pressure
LS LS signal pressure
MX Ride control accumulator pressure
The working hydraulics are equipped with the following standard functions:
Working movements for the lift and tilt cylinders
Ride control
Float position
Automatic bucket return-to-dig function
Lift kick-out
The working hydraulics system operates in an open circuit. The working
hydraulics pump 20 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and pumps it to
the control block 50. The returning oil is pumped through the return suction
filter 5 back to the hydraulic tank 1.
The control block is activated via the hydraulic pilot control unit. The control
block contains the spool valves for the lift and tilt cylinders. The LS system in
the control valve block distributes the flow of the working hydraulics pump to
the consumer units independently of load.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The ride control system attenuates the bouncing and pitching vibrations of
the machine while it is travelling, thus greatly increasing comfort and safety.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.0-3 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the working hydraulics. The
working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the shut-off
connection 1. The returning oil is pumped back through the connection 2 and
the return suction filter 3 to the hydraulic tank.
The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the hydraulic
tank by providing appropriate ventilation.

The working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank and pumps
it to the control block.
The flow regulator 2 (load sensing) ensures that the working hydraulics pump
only delivers as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the working hydraulics
currently need.
The power regulator 1 ensures that the maximum current consumption of the
variable displacement pump is never exceeded.
See the detailed description in the section on the working hydraulics pump.
Control block
The control block contains the spool valves for the lift cylinder 3 and the tilt
cylinder 4.
The LS pressure relief valve 7 limits the maximum pressure of the working
hydraulics pump. The primary pressure relief valve 5 additionally limits the
maximum pressure of the working hydraulics pump.
The secondary pressure relief valves 2 protect the hydraulic system against
pressure peaks from the consumer units. The float position/ride control
solenoid valve 6 is activated for the float position and ride control.
See the detailed description in the section on the control block.
The working hydraulics are actuated by a separate control circuit. The spool
valves in the control block 1 are hydraulically actuated by the pilot control unit 2.
The variable displacement pump 5 (replenishing pump) of the travel hydraulics takes the required servo oil and pumps it through the pilot control
solenoid valve 4 to the pilot control unit 2.
See the detailed description in the section on the pilot control unit.
7.0-4 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Pilot control unit
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Ride control
The lift cylinders are connected at the base end via the control valve block 3
and the stabilisation module 2 to the hydro accumulators 1. The rod end of
the lift cylinders is connected to the hydraulic tank via the float position/ride
control solenoid valve 4 in the control valve block.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
See the detailed description in the section on ride control.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.0-5 o f 1 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Working hydraulics
7.0-6 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
7.0.2
Valid for:
Working hydraulics - L566, L576, L580

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Design
Main components of the working hydraulics

1
2
3
4
Lift cylinder
Tilt cylinder
Pilot control unit
Hydraulic tank
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

6 Travel hydraulics variable displacement pump with replenishing pump
8
9
10
11
12

Compact brake valve
Control block
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.0-7 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
PowerPoint
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the working hydraulics
7.0-8 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
Hydraulic tank
Bleeder filter
Return strainer
Bypass valve
Pre-tension valve
Fan motor leak oil
Shut-off valve
Emergency steering pump intake port
Replenishing pump
Axial piston pump
Return cylinder
Restrictor
Servo cylinder
Power regulator
Restrictor
Flow controller
Steering pump return line
Pilot control unit
Tilt-out valve
Working hydraulics
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59

Tilt-in valve
Lifting valve
Lowering valve
Float position pressure switch,
26 bar
Ride control pressure switch,
10 bar
Safety valve
Check valve
Pre-tension valve
LS pressure cut-off
Flow control valve
Load valve

63 Check valve
64 Tilt-in pressure relief valve
65 Tilt-out pressure relief valve
66 Orifice 1 mm
67 Lift cylinder
68 Tilt cylinder
69 Oil from compact brake valve
70 Cut-in block
73 Check valve
Test connections:
P Working hydraulics pump
high pressure
M1 Working hydraulics pump servo pressure
LS LS signal pressure
MX Ride control accumulator pressure
The working hydraulics are equipped with the following standard functions:
Working movements for the lift and tilt cylinders
Ride control
Float position
Automatic bucket return-to-dig function
Lift kick-out
The working hydraulics system operates in an open circuit. The working
hydraulics pump 20 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and pumps it to the
control block 50. The returning oil is pumped through the return suction filter 5
back to the hydraulic tank 1.
The control block is activated via the hydraulic pilot control unit. The control
block contains the spool valves for the lift and tilt cylinders. The LS system in
the control valve block distributes the flow of the working hydraulics pump to
the consumer units independently of load.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.0-9 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the working hydraulics. The
working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the shut-off
connection 1. The returning oil is pumped back through the connection 2 and
the return suction filter 3 to the hydraulic tank.
The bleeder filter 4 compensates for pressure differences inside the hydraulic
tank by providing appropriate ventilation.

The working hydraulics pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank and pumps
it to the control block.
The flow regulator 2 (load sensing) ensures that the working hydraulics
pump only delivers as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the working
hydraulics currently need.
The power regulator 1 ensures that the maximum current consumption of the
variable displacement pump is never exceeded.
See the detailed description in the section on the working hydraulics pump.
Control block
cylinder 4.
The LS pressure relief valve 7 limits the maximum pressure of the working
hydraulics pump. The primary pressure relief valve 5 additionally limits the
maximum pressure of the working hydraulics pump.
The secondary pressure relief valves 2 protect the hydraulic system against
pressure peaks from the consumer units. The float position/ride control
solenoid valve 6 is activated for the float position and ride control.
valves in the control block 1 are hydraulically actuated by the pilot control unit 2.
The variable displacement pump 5 (replenishing pump) of the travel hydraulics takes the required servo oil and pumps it through the pilot control
solenoid valve 4 to the pilot control unit 2.
7.0-10 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Pilot control unit
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Ride control
The lift cylinders are connected at the base end via the control valve block 3
and the stabilisation module 2 to the hydro accumulators 1. The rod end of
the lift cylinders is connected to the hydraulic tank via the float position/ride
control solenoid valve 4 in the control valve block.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
See the detailed description in the section on ride control.
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.0-11 o f 1 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Working hydraulics
7.0-12 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
7.1 Working hydraulics pump

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the working hydraulics pump

1 Drive shaft
2 Pump housing
4 Power regulator
5 Flow controller
The working hydraulics pump is flange-mounted to the splitter box and is

The working hydraulics pump is an axial piston pump with a swash plate design.
The rotary group cylinder contains seven pistons in a circular arrangement
which can move back and forward.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Two power regulator and a flow controller are attached to the pump housing.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.1-1 o f 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Drive shaft
Shaft seal ring
Snap ring
Cover
Pump housing
Swash plate
Glide shoe
Piston
Adjusting pin
Q min adjusting screw
Pressure spring
O-ring
Valve housing
7.1-2 o f 8
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Control lever
Restrictor
Piston with roller
Control bushing
Sleeve
Servo piston
Control plate
Restrictor
Connection housing
Pressure spring
Return piston
Return pin
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
O-ring
Cylinder
Q max adjusting screw
Bushing
Return plate
Disc springs
Return ball
Swash plate bearing
Guide pin
Snap ring
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Components of the working hydraulics pump
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Components of the regulator unit

Valve piston
Plug
Valve insert
Adjusting screw
Counter nut
Spring cup
O-ring
Regulating springs
Spring cup
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
LS connection
Valve piston
Regulator housing
Adjusting screw
Counter nut
Spring cup
Regulating spring
Spring cup
Control lever
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Pin
Valve piston
Spring cup
Pressure spring
Spring cup
O-ring
Brace
Valve insert
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.1-3 o f 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the working hydraulics pump

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Rotary group
Return cylinder
Restrictor
Servo cylinder
Restrictor
Power regulator
Flow controller
8
9
10
11
M1
LS
P
Connection to hydraulic tank

Oil to control valve block
LS signal from control valve block
Intake connection
Servo pressure test connection
LS signal pressure
high pressure
The working hydraulics pump operates in an open circuit. It draws up oil

directly from the hydraulic tank and pumps it to the control block. The flow of
the of the working hydraulics pump is determined by the angle and speed of
the pump.
The governors fitted to the working hydraulics pump determine the angle of
the pump and therefore the pump flow.
Pump control
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The swash plate 1 of the working hydraulics pump is moved out by the control
piston 2. The operating pressure constantly acts in the piston chamber 3. This
causes the pump to swivel out.
Working hydraulics pump with control unit
7.1-4 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
The swash plate is returned to its initial position by the return piston 5.
Pressure oil is pumped into the piston chamber 4. The return piston is
controlled by the governors fitted on the working hydraulics pump.
The working hydraulics pump flow is controlled by the following governors:
Flow controller
Power regulator
The operating state of the working hydraulics system governs which
governor is currently activated.
If the working hydraulics demand only a small amount of oil or none at all, the
flow regulator restricts the working hydraulics pump to the required amount.
If the set power limit is reached at a certain flow and increasing pressure, the
flow regulator reduces the working hydraulics pump flow.
Flow regulation
The load sensing system ensures that the working hydraulics pump only
delivers as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the working hydraulics
currently need.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
When the working hydraulics are not in use, the oil flow is blocked by the
spool valves in the control block and the working hydraulics pump is reduced
to minimum flow (leak flow). Connection 2 is depressurised. The high
pressure pushes the piston 3 against the pressure springs 1 which
determine the standby pressure in the system. The control piston 3 opens
the high pressure duct 4 to the duct 5 and the return cylinder reduces the
pump to leak flow.
Flow controller when the working hydraulics do not need oil

1 Pressure springs
2 LS connection X
3 Control piston
4 High pressure duct

5 Duct to return cylinder
6 Flow controller
If the working hydraulics need oil, the pressure at the connection 2 increases.
The pressure and force of the springs 1 move the control piston 3 against the
high pressure. The duct 5 opens to the tank connection 7. The open duct
relieves the return cylinder and the pump delivers the required oil quantity.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.1-5 o f 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Flow controller when the working hydraulics need oil

1
2
3
4
Pressure springs
LS connection X
Control piston
High pressure duct
5 Duct to return cylinder

6 Flow controller
7 To the pump housing
Pump pressure limitation

The maximum operating pressure in the system is limited by the LS
pressure cut-off valve 1 in the control block. The LS pressure, which affects
the flow regulator 2, is set to a particular value.
LS pressure cut-off in the control block
The power regulator controls the displacement of the working hydraulics

pump according to the operating pressure, so that a specific drive power is
never exceeded.
The power regulator works on the principle of hyperbolic control. It regulates
the pump exactly along the preset power curve 1 (flow x high pressure).
7.1-6 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Pump output regulation
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Pump output diagram

The operating pressure acts via the ring face 8 of piston on the control lever 11.
This produces a variable levering force depending on the position of the control
cylinder (flow) and acts on the externally adjustable spring 6. If the force on the
lever 11 generated by the operating pressure exceeds the set spring force, the
valve piston 5 is moved. Pressure oil flows through the duct 3 to the return
cylinder and the working hydraulics pump displacement is reduced.
Power regulator in the control phase

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1
2
3
4
5
6
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Power regulator
Pressure spring
Duct to return cylinder
High pressure duct
Valve piston
Regulating spring
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
7
8
9
10
11
Tank connection
Piston ring face
Servo piston
Piston with roller
Control lever
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.1-7 o f 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
7.1-8 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
7.2 Control block

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the control block

1
2
3
4
5
6
Closing element
Lifting pressure relief valve
Tilt-in pressure relief valve
Pressure balances
Main block housing
7
8
9
10
Tilt-out pressure relief valve

Float position / ride control solenoid valve
11 LS pressure cut-off
The control block is mounted in the front section. It consists of the main block
housing 5 and the closing element 1. Additional segments for a 3rd and 4th
control circuit can be installed if needed between the main block housing and
the closing element.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The control block contains all the pressure cut-off valves and the valves for
the float position and ride control.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.2-1 o f 6
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Components of the control block

Main block housing
Pre-tension valve
Tilt-out replenishing valve
Lowering replenishing valve
6
7
8
9
10
Closing plate
Counter nut
Cap nut
Spool valve stroke adjusting screw
11
12
13
14
Cover
Pressure spring
Spring cup
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1
2
3
4
5
Components of the control block
7.2-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Cross section A-A of control block with spool valves for lift cylinder
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Cross section B-B of control block with spool valves for tilt cylinder
1
2
3
4
5
Main block housing

Pressure spring
Cover
Spool valve stroke adjusting screw
6 Cap nut
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
7 Counter nut
9 Control piston
10 Valve insert
11 Main piston
12 Pressure balance
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
13
14
15
16
17
18

Spring cup
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.2-3 o f 6
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the control valve block

LS pressure cut-off
Flow control valve
Tilt cylinder load valve
Lift cylinder load valve
Float position / ride control solenoid valve
13 Replenishing valve
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Pre-tension valve
Orifice 1.0 mm
Lift cylinder connection
Housing preheating connection
Tank connection from stabilization module
Hydraulic tank connection
LS connection
Working hydraulics pump connection
Tilt cylinder connection
cylinder 6.
The spool valves are supplied with oil by the pilot control unit. The restrictor
check valves 7 in the control valve block allow sensitive control of the
individual functions.
The LS control and the pressure balances 5 and 9 divide the oil among the
individual consumer units.
The float position or ride control function is activated by the solenoid valve 12.
Secondary pressure relief valves for each function protect the working
attachment, cylinders, hose lines and the control block from overload. At the
same time, the secondary pressure relief valves act as replenishing valves.
The LS pressure cut-off 2 protects the working hydraulics pump from
excess pressure.
7.2-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Working hydraulics in active state

The spool valves in the control block are hydraulically actuated by the pilot
control unit.
Control block in active state

When the tilt-in function is actuated, oil flows from the pilot control unit to the
connection a1. This pushes the spool valve 2 to the left.
The spool valve 2 opens the pump duct P to the pressure balance 3 via the
control notches 1. If the pump pressure exceeds the pressure at the tilt
cylinder, the pressure balance in the load valve opens and oil flows through
the connection A1 to the tilt cylinder.
The oil returning from the tilt cylinder flows through the connection B1 and
the spool valve to the tank channel T.
Working hydraulics in float position
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
In the float position, the working attachment lies on the ground under its own
weight. The lift arms can move up and down freely to compensate for
uneven ground.
Control block in float position

L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.2-5 o f 6
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
At the maximum deflection of the LH control lever for lowering the lift arms,
there is maximum control pressure at the connection b2. This pushes the
spool valve 1 all the way to the right against the regulating spring 3 and the
limit screw 2.
When the spool valve 1 is in this position, the base end B2 of the lift cylinder
is connected to the tank channel T.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The float position solenoid valve 4 is also energised. The rod ends of the lift
cylinder A2 is also connected to the tank duct T. The lift arms can now move
up and down freely.
7.2-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
7.3 Pilot control unit

Design
Main components of the pilot control unit

3 Pilot control unit
4 Variable displacement pump with
replenishing pump
6
7
8
9

Solenoid valve block
Control block
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1 Float position pressure switch,

26 bar
2 Ride control pressure switch,
10 bar
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.3-1 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the pilot control unit

1
2
3
4
Hydraulic tank
Replenishing pump
6 Check valve

26 bar
10 bar
10 Pilot control unit
11 Tilt-in valve
12 Bucket return-to-dig solenoid
13 Tilt-out valve
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Lifting valve
Lowering valve
Restrictor valve
The pilot control solenoid valve 5 is installed for the safety of the machine.
The working hydraulics lockout button must be activated to prevent
accidental movements of the working attachment during maintenance, road
travel and when the driver leaves the machine. The operation of the working
hydraulics is disabled.
The pilot control hydro accumulator 7 with check valve 6 on the solenoid
valve block 3 allows the lift arms to be lowered or the bucket to be tilted out,
even when the engine is not running.
The bucket return-to-dig, lift kick-out and float position functions are controlled
via retaining solenoids in the pilot control unit and proximity switches.
7.3-2 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
valves are hydraulically actuated by the pilot control unit 10. The required
control oil is taken from the replenishing pump 2 of the travel hydraulics. The
replenishing pressure relief valve limits the pilot control pressure to the
specified level.
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Pilot control unit

The pilot control unit controls the spool valves in the control block. The
control pressure increases smoothly according to the deflection of the lever.
The pilot control unit contains retaining solenoids for the bucket return-to-dig,
lift kick-out and float position functions. These solenoids hold the control
lever in the maximum position until the solenoid current is switched off.
Variable displacement pump with replenishing pump

The replenishing pump 1 is part of the variable displacement pump 2 of the
travel hydraulics. The replenishing pump delivers oil for the following components and functions:
Travel hydraulics control circuit
Replenishing oil in the closed circuit
Pilot control of the working hydraulics
Overspeed protection (rear axle braking function)
The maximum pressure of the replenishing pump is limited by the replenishing pressure relief valve.
The design and functions are described in the sections on the travel
hydraulics and the variable displacement pump.

The solenoid valve block 4 contains the pilot control solenoid valve 2 and
the pilot control hydro accumulator 1.
When the machine is started or when the starter switch is in position 1, the
pilot control solenoid valve is activated automatically. Control oil flows to the
pilot control unit and the working hydraulics can be operated.
The hydro accumulator 1 and check valve (starter switch in position 1) allow
the lift arms to be lowered and the working attachment to be tilted out, even
when the engine is not running.
The working hydraulics lockout button deactivates the pilot control solenoid
valve. The P connection in the pilot control unit is relieved towards the
hydraulic tank and the working hydraulics cannot be used.
See the detailed description in the section on the pilot control unit solenoid valve.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Control block
The control block contains the spool valves for the tilt cylinder 1 and the lift
cylinder 2.
The spool valves for the lift and tilt cylinders are supplied with oil by the pilot
control unit.
The restrictors in the control valve block allow sensitive control of the
individual functions.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve relieves the lift cylinder rod end
to the hydraulic tank when it is activated.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.3-3 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
7.3-4 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
7.3.1
Pilot control unit

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the pilot control device

1 Housing
2 Control valve
3 Electromagnetic locking
4 Control plate
5 Control lever
The pilot control device is fitted in the operating panel to the right of the
driver's seat.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
An additional pilot control unit for special functions (3rd control circuit) can
be fitted on the side of the existing pilot control unit.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.3-5 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
7.3-6 o f 1 2
Pressure spring
Spring sleeve
O-ring
Brass bushing
Sealing ring
O-ring
Plastic bushing
O-ring
Tappet guide
Retaining ring
Electromagnet with sockets
Threaded rod with universal joint
Ring
Tappet with universal joint
Disc
Lock nut
Connector piece
Counter nut
Control lever
Control plate
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Shim
Adjusting bushing
Nut
Counter nut
Adjusting screw
Snap ring
Tappet
Guide bushing
Tappet
Retaining plates
Spring cup
Return spring
Regulating spring
Regulating piston
Plug
Bore hole
Housing
Connection 2
Connection 4
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Components of the pilot control device
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the pilot control unit

1
2
3
4
Lowering valve
Lifting valve
Tilt-out valve
Tilt-in valve
5 Float position solenoid

6 Lift kick-out solenoid
7 Bucket return-to-dig solenoid
The pilot control device activates the pistons in the control block hydraulically.
It works on the basis of directly controlled pressure relief valves. When the
control lever is moved, it supplies oil to the appropriate connection.
The pressure regulation of the valves in the pilot control device depends on:
The position of the control lever
The properties of the individual regulating springs
The retaining solenoids allow each function to be electromagnetically locked.
Its magnetic force holds the control lever in its end position.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Idle state
In the idle state, the control lever is held in the zero position by the return spring
2. The connection 6 is connected via the hole 5 to the tank connection T.
Control valve in idle state / Control valve in active state

Regulating phase
When the control lever is moved, the tappet 7 pushes against the return
spring 8 and the regulating spring 9. The regulating spring 9 pushes down
the regulating piston 10 and closes the connection of the port 12 and the
tank connection T. At the same time, the connection 12 is connected via the
hole 11 to the connection P.
The control phase begins as soon as the force of the regulating spring 9 and
the force of the hydraulic pressure at the connection 12 are equal. The
regulating piston 10 is in equilibrium.
The interaction of the regulating piston 10 and the regulating spring 9 means
that the pressure at the connection 12 is proportional to the stroke of the
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.3-7 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
tappet 7 and therefore to the position of the control lever. The pressure
regulation which is proportional to the position of the control lever allows the
spool valves in the control block to be moved proportionally to the pressure.
Electromagnetic locking
The following functions have electromagnetic locking:
Lift kick-out
Bucket return-to-dig
Float position
The pressure spring 1 is attached under the tappet 3 and the spring sleeve
2. Just before the end of the stroke of the tappet and the control lever, the
operator must apply additional force to tension the pressure spring 1.
This shows the operator that the control lever is at its end position / maximum deflection.
At the end position (maximum deflection) of the control lever, the ring 5
comes into contact with the anchor magnet 4. When the solenoid is
activated, its magnetic force holds the control lever in its end position.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Unlocking takes place automatically by switching off the solenoid current

using the proximity switch or by pulling back the control lever.
7.3-8 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
7.3.2

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Solenoid valves in the cut-in block

3 Overspeed protection solenoid

valve
4 Solenoid valve block assembly
The cut-in block is fitted on left of the rear section beside the engine.
Basic function
The cut-in block includes the following components in a single housing:
Pilot control solenoid valve (working hydraulics)
Overspeed protection solenoid valve (rear axle braking function)
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
When the engine is running or when the starter switch is in position 1, the
pilot control solenoid valve 5 is activated automatically. Control oil flows to
the pilot control unit 1 and the working hydraulics can be operated.
Hydraulic plan of the solenoid valve block

1
2
3
4
Pilot control unit

Solenoid valve block assembly
Check valve

6 Overspeed protection solenoid
valve
7 Replenishing pump
The on-road travel button deactivates the pilot control solenoid valve 5. The
P connection in the pilot control unit 1 is relieved towards the hydraulic tank
and the working hydraulics cannot be used.
The pilot control hydro accumulator 3 with check valve 4 allows the working
hydraulics to be used even when the engine is not running (starter switch in
position 1). The lift arms can be lowered and the working attachment tilted out.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.3-9 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
7.3.3

(ID 7622 448)
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the hydro accumulator

1 Plug
2 Membrane
3 Closing head
4 Accumulator
The elastic partition between the fluid and the nitrogen is a membrane 2,
which is stretched in the accumulator 4. The closing head 3 prevents the
membrane from being pressed into the inlet opening when the hydro
accumulator is completely empty.
The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be checked and topped up using the
filling and testing device.
Basic function
It has the following applications:

To act as an attenuator for pressure peaks, for example for the ride
control system or steering attenuation.
As an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for the
brake system.
Storing pressure for the pilot control

The hydro accumulator 1 allows the working hydraulics to be used even
when the engine is not running (starter switch in position 1). The lift arms
can be lowered and the working attachment tilted out.
7.3-10 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The purpose of the hydro accumulator is to store hydraulic energy and

supply it when needed.
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
7.3.4

(ID 6905 869)
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the pressure switch

1 Connection contact
2 Adjusting screw
3 Pressure spring
4 Switch contact
5 Membrane
6 Housing
The float position pressure switch is installed under the pilot control unit in
the control line for lowering the lift arms.
Basic function
The membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off.
The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When a
set value is reached, the electric contact opens and the circuit is interrupted.
This type of membrane pressure switch is known as normally open.
Activating the float position function

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The float position pressure switch activates the float position function.
Layout of pressure switches and solenoid valve

2 Float position pressure switch
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
3 Ride control pressure switch

4 Float position retaining solenoid
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.3-11 o f 1 2
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
When the float position pressure switch 2 reaches a set pilot control
pressure, its electrical contact closes. If the float position/ride control button
is switched on, the float position/ride control solenoid valve 1 (on the control
valve block) and the float position retaining solenoid 4 (in the pilot control
unit) are activated.
When float position retaining solenoid 4 is activated, its magnetic force holds
the control lever in its end position.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The float position/ride control solenoid valve 1 (on the control valve block)
relieves the lift cylinder rod end to the hydraulic tank. The working attachment
lies on the ground under its own weight.
7.3-12 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Ride control
7.4 Ride control

7.4.1
Valid for:
Ride control L550, L556

L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Design
Main components of the ride control system

1 Lift cylinder
2 Control block
4 Stabilisation module
5 Hydro accumulator
The stabilisation module 4, hydro accumulator 5 and control valve block 2

are installed in the front section.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Basic function
The wheel loader is an unsprung earth-moving machine and therefore tends
towards bouncing and pitching vibrations. These vibrations are uncomfortable
for the driver, reduce drive performance and machine safety.
The ride control system is a hydropneumatic spring support between the lift
arms and the chassis. It reduces bouncing and pitching vibrations.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-1 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Ride control
Hydraulic diagram of the ride control system

Safety valve
Check valve
Pilot control unit
14 Lowering valve
15 Lifting valve
26 bar
10 bar
18 Lift cylinder
19 Control block assembly

20 Lift cylinder spool valve
24 Tilt cylinder spool valve
When ride control is activated, the lift cylinders 15 are connected at the base
end to the hydro accumulators 6. The hydro accumulators are filled with
nitrogen and absorb pressure peaks at the base end of the lift cylinders.
The lift cylinders are connected at the rod end to the hydraulic tank. This
allows the lift arms to move up freely.
7.4-2 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Ride control
The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator from overload.
If the pressure is too high, the stabilisation module stops the oil flow to the
hydro accumulators.
The solenoid valve 7 is for activating and deactivating ride control.
The safety valve 2 opens if the pressure to the tank connection is too high.
This protects the hydro accumulator from overload.
See the detailed description in the section on the stabilisation module.

The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator 1 from overload.
hydro accumulators.
The hydro accumulators absorb bouncing and pitching vibrations.
The vibration damping effect is achieved using a nitrogen filling in the
hydro accumulators.
See the detailed description in the section on the hydro accumulator unit.
Control valve block

cylinder 1.
The lift cylinder base end is connected to the control valve block and the
stabilisation module.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve 3 connects the lift cylinder rod
end to the hydraulic tank when it is activated.

The ride control pressure switch 1 prevents ride control from being activated
at the same time as the float position or lift arm lowering function.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
When the float position or lift arm lowering function is not activated, the
contact in the ride control pressure switch 1 is closed. This means that ride
control can be activated.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-3 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Ride control
Ride control deactivated

When ride control is deactivated, the spool valve 2 is in the second position.
Oil can flow through the check valve from the spool valve 2 to hydro
accumulators 6. This means the hydro accumulators already have the load
pressure of the working attachment.
If the pressure is too high, the spool valve 2 blocks the connection to the hydro
accumulators. This pushes the spool valve to the left into the closed position.
The connection between the lift cylinder rod end and the hydraulic tank is
interrupted. The pressure generated at the lift cylinder rod end prevents the
working attachment from vibrating. This makes it easier to pick up material.
Hydraulic diagram with ride control deactivated

4
5
6
7

Safety valve
Check valve
8 Lift cylinder
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
2 Ride control spool valve
7.4-4 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Ride control
Ride control activated

Ride control can only be activated when:
The ride control button is activated
The travel speed is above 9.1 km/h (adjustable)
The contact on the ride control pressure switch is closed
When ride control is activated, the float position/ride control solenoid valve 9
and the ride control solenoid valve 4 are energised.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve 9 opens the lift cylinder rod end
to the hydraulic tank.
The ride control solenoid valve 4 directs the pressure of the hydro accumulator
to the left side of the spool valve 2. This pushes the spool valve 2 right, fully
opening the connection to the hydro accumulators.
The safety valve 5 is installed to relieve the pressure. If there are excess
pressure peaks, the safety valve opens to the hydraulic tank.
If the speed falls below 9.1 km/h the two solenoid valves are switched off
again. The lift arms can no longer vibrate.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The activation speed of 9.1 km/h can be adjusted using the SCULI software.
Hydraulic diagram with ride control activated

L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
4
5
6
7

Safety valve
Check valve
8 Lift cylinder
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-5 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Ride control
7.4-6 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Ride control
7.4.2
Valid for:
Ride control L566, L576, L580

Design
Main components of the ride control system

1 Lift cylinder
2 Control block
5 Hydro accumulator
The stabilisation module 4, hydro accumulator 5 and control valve block 2

are installed in the front section.
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The wheel loader is an unsprung earth-moving machine and therefore tends

towards bouncing and pitching vibrations. These vibrations are uncomfortable
for the driver, reduce drive performance and machine safety.
The ride control system is a hydropneumatic spring support between the lift
arms and the chassis. It reduces bouncing and pitching vibrations.
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-7 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Ride control
Hydraulic diagram of the ride control system

Safety valve
Check valve
Pilot control unit
9 Lowering valve
10 Lifting valve
26 bar
10 bar
13 Lift cylinder
20 Control block assembly

25 Tilt cylinder spool valve
When ride control is activated, the lift cylinders 15 are connected at the base
end to the hydro accumulators 6. The hydro accumulators are filled with
nitrogen and absorb pressure peaks at the base end of the lift cylinders.
The lift cylinders are connected at the rod end to the hydraulic tank. This
allows the lift arms to move up freely.
7.4-8 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Ride control
The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator from overload.
hydro accumulators.
The solenoid valve 7 is for activating and deactivating ride control.
The safety valve 2 opens if the pressure to the tank connection is too high.
This protects the hydro accumulator from overload.
See the detailed description in the section on the stabilisation module.

The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator 1 from overload.
hydro accumulators.
The hydro accumulators absorb bouncing and pitching vibrations.
The vibration damping effect is achieved using a nitrogen filling in the
hydro accumulators.
See the detailed description in the section on the hydro accumulator unit.
Control valve block

cylinder 1.
The lift cylinder base end is connected to the control valve block and the
stabilisation module.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve 3 connects the lift cylinder rod
end to the hydraulic tank when it is activated.

The ride control pressure switch 1 prevents ride control from being activated
at the same time as the float position or lift arm lowering function.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
contact in the ride control pressure switch 1 is closed. This means that ride
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-9 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Ride control
Ride control deactivated

When ride control is deactivated, the spool valve 2 is in the second position.
Oil can flow through the check valve from the spool valve 2 to hydro
accumulators 6. This means the hydro accumulators already have the load
pressure of the working attachment.
If the pressure is too high, the spool valve 2 blocks the connection to the hydro
accumulators. This pushes the spool valve to the left into the closed position.
The connection between the lift cylinder rod end and the hydraulic tank is
interrupted. The pressure generated at the lift cylinder rod end prevents the
working attachment from vibrating. This makes it easier to pick up material.
Hydraulic diagram with ride control deactivated

4
5
6
7

Safety valve
Check valve
8 Lift cylinder
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
7.4-10 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Ride control
Ride control activated

Ride control can only be activated when:
The ride control button is activated
At a travel speed above 9.1 km/h (adjustable)
The contact on the ride control pressure switch is closed
When ride control is activated, the float position/ride control solenoid valve 9
and the ride control solenoid valve 4 are energised.
The float position/ride control solenoid valve 9 opens the lift cylinder rod end
to the hydraulic tank.
The ride control solenoid valve 4 directs the pressure of the hydro accumulator to the left side of the spool valve 2. This pushes the spool valve 2 right,
fully opening the connection to the hydro accumulators.
The safety valve 5 is installed to relieve the pressure. If there are excess
pressure peaks, the safety valve opens to the hydraulic tank.
If the speed falls below 9.1 km/h the two solenoid valves are switched off
again. The lift arms can no longer vibrate.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The activation speed of 9.1 km/h can be adjusted using the SCULI software.
Hydraulic diagram with ride control activated

1
2
3
4
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
5
6
7
8
Safety valve
Check valve
Lift cylinder

Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-11 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Ride control
7.4-12 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Ride control
7.4.3
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the stabilisation module

1
2
3
4
Housing
Safety valve
Ride control piston
Lift cylinder connection
5 Hydro accumulator connection

6 Tank connection
7 Ride control solenoid valve
The stabilisation module is mounted under the steering cylinder in the

front section.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
It consists of the housing 1, which contains the safety valve 2 and the ride
control piston 3. The ride control solenoid valve 7 is for activating and deactivating ride control.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-13 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Ride control
Components of the stabilisation module

1
2
3
4
5
Plug
Socket-head screw
Spacer bushing
Spring cup
Regulating spring
6
7
8
9
Regulating spring
Regulating piston
10
11
12
13
Outer restrictor screw

Inner restrictor screw
Housing
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The stabilisation module protects the hydro accumulator from excessive

pressure peaks.
Hydraulic diagram of the stabilisation module
7.4-14 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Ride control
7.4.4

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the hydro accumulator unit

1 Housing
2 Stabilisation module connection
3 Hydro accumulator
The hydro accumulator unit is mounted in the front section. The hydro
accumulators are mounted on the housing.
The housing is connected to the stabilisation module.
L550, L556
L566, L576, L580
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Function
The hydro accumulator unit is connected via the stabilisation module to the
base end of the lift cylinders. If the maximum pressure is reached, the
stabilisation module stops the oil flow to the hydro accumulators. This
protects the hydro accumulator from overload.
The hydro accumulators absorb bouncing and pitching vibrations. The vibration
damping effect is achieved using a nitrogen filling in the hydro accumulators.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-15 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Ride control
Oil filling on the nitrogen side of the hydro accumulator
Cross section of the hydro accumulator

1 Plug
2 Nitrogen filling
3 Oil filling
4 Membrane
5 Closing head
6 Accumulator
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The hydro accumulators have a small amount of oil in them to protect the
membrane on the nitrogen side. When sudden pressure peaks occur, such
as when driving over rough ground, the oil prevents the membrane from
hitting the inside of the accumulator too hard.
7.4-16 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Ride control
7.4.5

(ID 6905 893)
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

2 Adjusting screw
3 Pressure spring
4 Switch contact
5 Membrane
6 Housing
The ride control pressure switch is installed under the pilot control unit in the
control line for lowering the lift arms.
Basic function
This type of membrane pressure switch is known as "normally closed".
Deactivating the ride control function

The ride control pressure switch prevents ride control from being activated at
the same time as the float position or lift arm lowering function.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
contact in the ride control pressure switch is closed. This means that ride
When the float position or lift arm lowering function is activated, the pressure
on the ride control pressure switch increases and the electrical contact in the
switch opens. This prevents ride control from being activated at the same time.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.4-17 o f 1 8
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Ride control
7.4-18 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Lift and tilt cylinders
7.5 Lift and tilt cylinders

7.5.1
Lift cylinder
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the lift cylinder

1 Rod-end cylinder bearing
2 Piston rod bearing
3 Cylinder tube
4 Piston rod
5 Piston
6 Base-end cylinder bearing
7 Hex screw
The cylinder base is welded to the cylinder tube 3.

The rod-end cylinder bearing 1 is forked.
The base-end cylinder bearing 6 is a lug with a bearing bushing.
The piston rod bearing 2 is pushed on and screwed to the cylinder tube 3.
The piston 5 and the piston rod bearing 2 are fitted with Glyd Seal, Rimseal
and Stepseal sealing rings.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The O rings are equipped with support rings.
Extension and retraction
The hydraulic cylinder is a double-action cylinder with a piston at one end.
The maximum forces in the cylinder depend on the maximum operating
pressure and the active surfaces.
When extending, the piston face is active; when retracting, the smaller ring
face is active.
This means the force when extending is greater than when retracting.
The piston speed is inversely proportional to the force. It is faster when
retracting than extending.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.5-1 o f 4
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Piston rod guide

The piston rod is guided by the guide rings on the piston and in the piston
rod bearing.
Sealing
The scraper ring in the piston rod bearing prevents dirt from penetrating the
piston rod.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The O-rings and the Glyd Seal, Rimseal and Stepseal sealing rings seal the
pressure chambers inside and out.
7.5-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
7.5.2
Tilt cylinder
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the tilt cylinder

3 Cylinder tube
4 Piston rod
5 Piston
7 Hex screw

The rod-end cylinder bearing 1 and the base-end cylinder bearing 6 form a
lug with a bearing bushing.
The piston rod bearing 2 is pushed on and screwed to the cylinder tube 3.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The O rings are equipped with support rings.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.5-3 o f 4
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
face is active.
Piston rod guide

rod bearing.
Sealing
piston rod.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
7.5-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Hydraulic tank
7.6 Hydraulic tank

Design
Main components of the hydraulic tank

1 Shut-off valve
2 Working hydraulics pump intake port
3 Emergency steering pump intake port
4 Steering pump intake port
5 Suction line from replenishing pump
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Steel container
Gear pump intake connection
Oil level sight glass
Return and suction filter
Return strainer
Bleeder filter
Fixing panels for air filter and exhaust system
The hydraulic tank is fitted on the rear section. The fittings for fastening the
exhaust and air filter are on the steel part of the hydraulic tank.
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The hydraulic tank contains the oil required by the hydraulic system. It
supplies oil to the travel hydraulics, working hydraulics, brake system and
steering system.
When the machine moves, a plate inside the hydraulic tank calms the
hydraulic oil. This moderating plate divides the hydraulic tank into a return
chamber and an intake chamber.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.6-1 o f 1 0
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Hydraulic tank
Filter unit
The filter unit consists of the following components:
1 Return suction filter
2 Return strainer
3 Bleeder filter
The return suction filter 1 filters the oil flowing back from the working and
travel hydraulics. The oil flows from the inside outwards through the filter.
At the same time the filter acts as a suction filter for the replenishing pump of
the hydrostatic travel drive. The replenishing pump draws up the filtered oil
via the connection 4.
To prevent excessive changes of pressure inside the hydraulic tank, air must
be exchanged with the atmosphere outside. The bleeder filter 2 provides the
connection to the outside.
To prevent contamination, the air taken in from outside passes through a
fine filter. A valve with a spring provides a slight pressure inside the
hydraulic tank.
The return strainer 3 filters some of the oil returning from the entire hydraulic
system. The filtered oil then flows back to the hydraulic tank.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
See the detailed description in the section on the filter unit and bleeder filter.
7.6-2 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Hydraulic tank
7.6.1
Filter unit
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components and connections of the filter unit

13 Return and suction filter
14 Integrated bypass valve
15 Bleeder filter
16 Return strainer
17 Filter housing
The filter unit is contained in the hydraulic tank.

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The steel vessel is sealed with an O-ring.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.6-3 o f 1 0
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Hydraulic tank
Components of the filter unit

Filter housing
Return suction filter cover
Return strainer cover
Duct to bypass valve
Bleeder filter
6
7
8
9
10
Bypass valve
Pre-tension valve
Suction line from replenishing pump
Replenishing strainer
Return strainer
11
12
13
14
15
Return pipe
Replenishing valve
Filter element
Magnetic rod
Filter casing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
1
2
3
4
5
7.6-4 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Hydraulic tank
Basic function
The return suction filter 1 acts as a return filter for oil flowing back from the
working and travel hydraulics, and as a suction filter for the replenishing
pump of the hydrostatic travel drive.
Some of oil flowing back from the various consumer units is pumped through
the return suction filter 3 back to the hydraulic tank.
The bleeder filter 2 prevents inadmissible pressure changes inside the hydraulic tank. This means air can be exchanged with the atmosphere outside.
Connections on the filter unit:
Fan motor leak oil
Suction line from replenishing pump
Working hydraulics pump leak oil
Solenoid valve block return line
Working hydraulics pump leak oil
Return line from control block
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Basic function of the filter unit

1 Control block oil cooler connection
2 Magnetic rod
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
6 Replenishing strainer
7 Pre-tension valve
8 Return strainer
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.6-5 o f 1 0
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Hydraulic tank
4 Lower chamber
9 Return pipe
The oil flowing back from the working and travel hydraulics is pumped
through the connection 1 to the return suction filter 3. The oil flows from the
inside outwards through the return suction filter 3 and is cleaned.
The magnetic rod 2 attracts larger metal particles from the oil flowing past.
This also increases the lifetime of the filter.
The outside of the filter is connected to intake connection 5 of the replenishing pump.
More oil flows from the working and travel hydraulics to the return and
suction filter than is drawn up by the replenishing pump. The excess oil flows
through the pre-tension valve 7 to the hydraulic tank.
Oil supply to the replenishing pump

The returning oil flows from the inside outwards through the return suction
filter 1.
The replenishing pump of the travel hydraulics draws up some of the oil from
the lower chamber 2 via the intake connection 4.
The pre-tension valve 3 preloads the intake connection 4 of the replenishing
pump with a pressure of 0.5 bar. The excess oil flows through the pretension valve 3 to the hydraulic tank.
Replenishing pump oil supply

2 Lower chamber
3 Pre-tension valve
Replenishing function
5 Replenishing strainer
If there is insufficient oil to supply the replenishing pump, it can draw up oil
from the hydraulic tank. Oil flows through the replenishing strainer 5 and the
replenishing valve 6 to the intake connection 4 of the replenishing pump.
There may be too little oil in the filter element, for instance after it is changed.
7.6-6 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The pressure of the intake connection 4 allows the replenishing to draw up oil
more easily for cold starts. This increases the pressure in the hydrostatic control circuit increases more quickly and a better drive performance is achieved.
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Hydraulic tank
Bypass valve for pressure relief

The bypass valve 4 prevents excess pressure in the return system.
Excess pressure can arise if the filter element 1 is dirty or if the oil is not sufficiently viscous.
If a certain pressure is reached, the bypass valve 4 opens. The oil then flows
through the duct 3, the bypass valve 4 and the return strainer 5 to the
hydraulic tank.
Return suction filter with bypass valve and return strainer

2 Connections to the filter unit:
3 Duct to bypass valve
4 Bypass valve
5 Return strainer
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
The return strainer 5 catches dirt particles. This prevents soiling of the
hydraulic tank.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.6-7 o f 1 0
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
Hydraulic tank
7.6.2
Bleeder filter
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the bleeder filter

1
2
3
4
5
Filter housing
Inlet valve
Pressure spring
Outlet valve
Pressure spring
6
7
8
9
O-ring
Fine filter
O-ring
Inner housing
The bleeder filter consists of an oil-resistant, corrosion-proof plastic housing

in which a filter element folded in a star shape is inserted. The bleeder filter
contains an inlet and outlet valve.
Function
To prevent contamination, the air taken in from outside passes through the
fine filter.
The spring-loaded outlet valve 2 and inlet valve 3 reduce the exchange of
air. This minimises the oil contamination and increases the service life of the
fine filter element.
7.6-8 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
To prevent excessive changes of pressure inside the hydraulic tank, air must
be exchanged with the atmosphere outside.
Service Manual
Working hydraulics
Hydraulic tank
Excess pressure in the hydraulic tank

Excess pressure in the hydraulic tank can be caused by increased oil
temperature or by the hydraulic cylinders retracting.
At a certain excess pressure, the outlet valve 2 opens. This allows air to
escape through the fine filter 1 and the opening 3.
Insufficient pressure in the hydraulic tank

Insufficient pressure in the hydraulic tank can be caused by decreasing oil
temperature or by the hydraulic cylinders extending.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
At a certain low pressure, the inlet valve 4 opens. This allows air to flow in
through the opening 3 and the fine filter 1.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7.6-9 o f 1 0
Working hydraulics
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/05/02/2007
Hydraulic tank
7.6-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
8 Steering System
8.0
Chapter contents
8
Steering System.................................................................. 8.0-1

8.0
Steering system ..............................................................................8.0-1
8.1
Steering pump ................................................................................8.1-1
8.2
Servostat.........................................................................................8.2-1
8.3
Steering cylinder .............................................................................8.3-1

8.3.1
8.4
Steering damper hydro accumulator ....................................8.3-3

Emergency steering........................................................................8.4-1
Emergency steering pump ...................................................8.4-5
8.4.2
Emergency steering pressure switch ...................................8.4-7
8.4.3
Emergency steering check pressure switch .........................8.4-8
8.4.4
Valve block ...........................................................................8.4-9
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
8.4.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Steering System
8.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System
8.0 Steering system
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Design
Main components of the steering system

1
2
3
4
Servostat
Oil cooler
Collector pipe
Hydraulic tank
5
6
7
8

Valve block
Left steering cylinder
9 Steering damper hydro

accumulator
10 Right steering cylinder
The machine has articulated steering. Two steering cylinders move the front
section and the rear section to each other using the articulated joint.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.0-1 o f 4
Steering System
PowerPoint
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the steering system
8.0-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Steering System
Hydraulic tank
Bleeder filter
Return strainer
Bypass valve
Pre-tension valve
Fan motor leak oil
Solenoid valve block leak oil
Shut-off valve
intake port
15 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
16 Right steering cylinder
17 Right steering damper hydro
accumulator
18 Left steering cylinder

19 Left steering damper
hydro accumulator
21 Axial piston pump
22 Servo cylinder
23 Return cylinder
24 Restrictor
25 Restrictor
26 Pressure cut-off
27 Flow controller
return line
30 Servostat
31 Left replenishing valve
32 Left pressure relief valve
33 Right replenishing valve
34 Right pressure relief valve
35 Metering pump
36
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
50
51
52
Valve slider
Valve block
Check valve
Check valve
pressure switch B3
pressure switch B3a
Electric motor
Gear pump
Oil cooler
Collector pipe
Bypass valve
Test connections:
P High pressure / steering pump
M High pressure / steering pump
or emergency steering pump
The steering system operates in an open circuit. The variable displacement

pump 20 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and pumps it through the
valve block 40 to the servostat 30. The servostat supplies oil to the two
steering cylinders when the steering wheel is moved.
The load sensing system ensures that the pump 20 only pumps as much oil
as is actually required.
The emergency steering system allows steering movement if the variable
displacement pump fails. The emergency steering pump 45 delivers oil via
the valve block 40 to the servostat 30.
The hydro accumulators 17 and 18 on the steering cylinders absorb steering
movements. The absorber system in the steering cylinder prevents the front
and rear sections from bumping other at full articulation.
Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the steering system. The variable
displacement pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the connection 1.
The returning oil from the servostat is pumped back through the oil cooler
and the connection 3 via the return suction filter 4 to the hydraulic tank. Leak
oil from the variable displacement pump is directed through the connection 2
via the return strainer 5 to the hydraulic tank. The bleeder filter 6 compensates for pressure differences inside the hydraulic tank by providing
appropriate ventilation.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

The pump draws up oil directly from the hydraulic tank and pumps it through
the valve block to the servostat.
The load sensing system ensures that the variable displacement pump only
provides as much oil as the steering system currently needs.
The pressure cut-off valve 2 limits the maximum pressure of the pump.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.0-3 o f 4
Steering System
Service Manual
Valve block
The valve block directs the oil from the variable displacement pump or the
emergency steering pump to the servostat.
The emergency steering pressure switch 1 monitors the pressure of the
variable displacement pump. If the pressure at the emergency steering
pressure switch 1 is too low, the emergency steering pump is automatically
activated. This can happen if the diesel engine shuts down or if the variable
displacement pump fails.
The check valves 2 and 3 prevent the oil from flowing back to the pumps.
See the detailed description in the section on the valve block.
Servostat
The servostat is connected to the steering column. The steering wheel
actuates the metering pump and valve slider in the servostat, causing the
steering system to move.
If the steering wheel is moved quickly, the flow booster system pumps some
of the oil via the spool directly to the steering cylinders. This facilitates fast
steering on rough terrain.
When the steering wheel is moved slowly, the flow booster is not activated.
All the oil is pumped through the spool and the metering pump to the steering cylinders. This facilitates sensitive steering on roads.
Two pressure relief valves protect the steering cylinder and servostat from
excessive pressure peaks.
See the detailed description in the section on the servostat.
Steering cylinder
The steering cylinders are connected to the front and rear sections.
The servostat supplies oil to the steering cylinders during steering.
The hydro accumulators on the steering cylinders absorb steering movements. The absorber system in the steering cylinder prevents the front and
rear sections from bumping other at full articulation.
See the detailed description in the section on the steering cylinder.
The emergency steering function allows the steering system to be operated

if the engine or the variable displacement pump fails. The emergency
steering pump is activated by the main electronics (master).
See the detailed description in the section on emergency steering.

The gear pump 4 of the emergency steering pump is powered by the electric
motor 2. The electric motor is switched on when necessary via the relay 1.
In emergency steering mode the emergency steering pump draws up oil from
the hydraulic tank and pumps it through the valve block to the servostat.
The pressure relief valve 3 protects the pump from excess pressure.
See the detailed description in the section on the emergency steering pump.
8.0-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Emergency steering function
Service Manual
Steering System
Steering pump
8.1 Steering pump

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the steering pump

1 Drive shaft
2 Pump housing
3 Flow controller
4 Pressure cut-off
The steering pump is an axial piston pump with a swash plate design. The
steering pump is flange-mounted to the working hydraulics pump and is
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The pressure and flow controller attached to pump housing affect the control
unit of the pump.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.1-1 o f 6
Steering System
Service Manual
Steering pump
Components of the steering pump

Drive shaft
Snap ring
Shaft seal ring
Pump housing
Bearing casing
Swash plate
Return plate
Piston
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Cylinder
Control plate
O-ring
P connection
Valve housing
Shim
Tapered roller bearing
Shim
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Intake connection
Snap ring
Support ring
Pressure spring
Support ring
Glide shoe
Return ball
Tapered roller bearing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8.1-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System
Steering pump
Components of the steering pump

Ball journal
Glide shoe
Servo piston
Regulating spring
Piston guide
6
7
8
9
10
Test connection P
Plug
Pressure cut-off
Flow controller
LS connection
11
12
13
14
Guide piston
Return cylinder
Glide shoe
Ball journal
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1
2
3
4
5
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.1-3 o f 6
Steering System
Service Manual
Steering pump
Basic function
Hydraulic plan of the variable displacement pump

1
2
3
4
5
6
Rotary group
Servo cylinder
Return cylinder
Restrictor
Restrictor
Pressure cut-off
7
8
9
10
11
12
Flow controller
High pressure test connection
Oil to servostat
LS signal from servostat
Return line to hydraulic tank
Intake connection
The steering pump operates in an open circuit. During operation, the pump
delivers oil from the hydraulic tank through the valve block to the steering.
The displacement of the steering pump is proportional to the input speed
and the variable cylinder volume.
The pressure cut-off valve 6 and flow controller 7 attached to pump housing
affect the control unit of the pump. The pump control unit pivots the swash
plate out of the zero position. When the swash plate pivots out, the piston
stroke in the rotary group 1 increases and the pump starts delivering oil.
Control unit
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The control unit continuously regulates the steering pump flow. The angle of
the swash plate 3 is changed from 0 towards 15 and vice versa.
Control unit with return cylinder and actuating cylinder
8.1-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System
Steering pump
The system pressure constantly acts on the actuating cylinder 1. The

actuating cylinder 1 pushes the swash plate 3 towards a wider angle and
pump delivers oil.
The return cylinder 2 moves the swash plate 3 against the actuating cylinder
1 to a smaller angle. The effective piston face of the return cylinder 2 is
larger than that of the actuating cylinder 1.
The oil pressure acting on the return cylinder 2 is controlled by the flow
controller or pressure cut-off valve. In the pump control range, the oil
pressure on the return cylinder is just enough to keep the forces of the
actuating and return cylinders in equilibrium. This means the pump can
maintain a specific pivot angle and pump a corresponding amount of oil.
Flow controller (load sensing)

The load sensing system ensures that the variable displacement pump
only provides as much oil from the hydraulic tank as the steering system
currently needs.
If the steering system needs oil, the load pressure at the connection 4 increases.
The pressure and the force of the springs 5 push the piston 2 against the pump
pressure. The duct A opens to the tank connection T. The open duct A relieves
the return cylinder 3 and the pump delivers the required quantity of oil.
Flow controller during steering (pump delivers oil)

Flow controller
Valve piston
Plug
Connection X
Pressure springs
6
7
T
A
P
Adjusting screw
Pressure cut-off
Pump housing return line
To the return cylinder
High pressure
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1
2
3
4
5
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.1-5 o f 6
Steering System
Service Manual
Steering pump
If the steering wheel is not moved, the load pressure at the connection 4
decreases. The pump pressure moves the piston 2 against the springs 5.
The piston 2 opens the pump pressure duct P to the duct A and the return
cylinder regulates the pump to the minimum flow.
Flow controller with no steering movement (pump does not deliver oil)
Pressure cut-off
When the maximum operating pressure in the system has been reached, the
pump moves back to the smallest angle and only delivers leak oil. The
maximum operating pressure remains constant.
When the pump reaches its maximum operating pressure, the piston 3 in the
pressure cut-off valve 1 moves against the spring 4. This opens the duct A
and pressure oil flows to the return cylinder.
Pressure cut-off valve at maximum system pressure

1
2
3
4
8.1-6 o f 6
Pressure cut-off
Effective face
Valve piston
Pressure spring
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5
P
A
T
Adjusting screw
High pressure
To the return cylinder
Pump housing return line
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The return cylinder moves the swash plate and regulates the pump to the
smallest angle.
Service Manual
Steering System
Servostat
8.2 Servostat
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the servostat

1 Left pressure relief valve
2 Inner rotary slide valve with teeth
3 Right pressure relief valve

4 Housing with spool valve
5 Metering pump
The servostat is fastened on rubber fittings at the front under the cab. The
rubber fittings prevent noise from the hydraulics from being transferred to the
steel cab frame.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The steering column meshes with the teeth of the internal rotary slider 2.
The internal rotary slider in the servostat is actuated by the steering wheel
and the steering column.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.2-1 o f 6
Steering System
Service Manual
Servostat
Components of the servostat

Closing plate
Metering pump
Internal gear
O-ring
Intermediate flange
Outer valve sleeve
7
8
9
10
11
12
Internal rotary slider

Flight
Actuator journal
Housing
Needle bearing
Guide ring
13
14
15
16
17
Shaft seal ring

Right pressure relief valve
Leaf springs
Left pressure relief valve
Replenishing valve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1
2
3
4
5
6
8.2-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System
Servostat
Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the servostat

1
2
3
4
5
6
Left replenishing valve

Left pressure relief valve
Right replenishing valve
Right pressure relief valve
Metering pump
Valve slider
7
8
9
10
11
Return line to hydraulic tank

Steering cylinder connection
Steering cylinder connection
Oil from valve block
Load sensing signal
When it is actuated, the servostat directs oil from the variable displacement
pump to the steering cylinders. The oil supply to the steering cylinders is
precisely metered according to the speed of the steering wheel.
When the steering wheel is turned, the position of the internal rotary slider is
turned in relation to the outer valve sleeve. This opens the valve, allowing a
certain amount of oil to flow through the metering pump to the steering cylinder.
Flow booster
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The flow booster allows the small servostat to supply oil from two cylinders.
A specific portion of the flow is directed through the metering pump, and
another portion is pumped through the spool directly to the cylinders.
Diagram of flow booster

1 Boost ratio
2 Turns of steering wheel
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
3 Oil via the metering pump

4 Oil via the spool
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.2-3 o f 6
Steering System
Service Manual
Servostat
If the steering wheel is moved slowly, the entire flow is directed through the
metering pump 3. The oil flowing to the steering system depends on the size of
the metering pump. This allows very sensitive steering for travelling on roads.
At faster steering speeds of more than 10 turns of the steering wheel per
minute, additional holes in the spool open. Some of the oil flows through the
metering pump 3, and more oil flows the spool 4 directly to the cylinders. The
volumetric flow ration is 1:1.6. This allows very fast steering for rough terrain.
Flow regulation (load sensing)

Load sensing ensures that the variable displacement pump only supplies the
amount of oil currently needed by the steering system. The servostat reports the
required amount of oil via the LS connection to the variable displacement pump.
Steering system in inactive state
When the steering is not actuated, the duct P on the variable displacement
pump 3 is blocked. The LS connection for controlling the pump is relieved
via the spool to the tank connection T. The LS depressurised connection adjusts the variable displacement pump minimum flow.
Steering system in active state
When the steering is actuated, the spool 2 is moved. The connection P is

connected to the connection LS and to the steering cylinder. The increase
pressure at the LS connection causes the flow controller 4 to regulate the
variable displacement pump 3 to the required oil quantity.
Pressure cut-off
The pressure relief valves prevent excessive pressure peaks in the steering
system. Pressure peaks can be caused by sudden loads while driving.
Depending on the direction of the load, either the pressure relief valve 1 on the
left steering cylinder or the pressure relief valve 2 for the right cylinder opens.
8.2-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The variable displacement pump 3 is adjusted until there is a specific

pressure difference between the connection P and the connection LS.
Service Manual
Steering System
Servostat
When the set pressure is reached, the valve cone 6 opens against the pressure spring 4. Oil flows from the consumer unit 7 to the tank connection 5.
The opening pressure of the pressure relief valve can be set using the
adjusting screw 3.
Replenishing function
The servostat has two replenishing valves: one for steering to the left and
one for steering to the right.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The replenishing valves prevent vacuums from forming in the steering

cylinder under certain operating conditions. Oil flows through the check valve
2 from the tank duct 1 to the steering cylinder (duct 3). The pin 4 prevents
the check valve 2 from moving too far from the valve insert.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.2-5 o f 6
Steering System
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Servostat
8.2-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System
Steering cylinder
8.3 Steering cylinder

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the steering cylinder

3 Cylinder tube
4 Piston rod
5 Piston
6 Damper bushing

The rod-end cylinder bearing 1 and the base-end cylinder bearing 7 form a
lug with a swivel bearing.
The piston rod bearing 2 is screwed into the cylinder tube 3.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

face is active.
Piston rod guide

rod bearing.
L550 - 456 / from 16978
L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.3-1 o f 4
Steering System
Service Manual
Steering cylinder
Sealing
piston rod.
Stroke end shock absorber
Stroke end shock absorber

1 Piston rod
2 Piston
3 Damper bushing
4 Damper notch
The piston rod is slowed down before it is fully retracted.

Just before the piston 2 hits the cylinder base, it enters the damper bushing
3 in the cylinder base.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The oil can only flow through the damper notch 4. This decreases the flow
diameter for the displaced oil and the speed of the piston is reduced.
8.3-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System
Steering cylinder
8.3.1
Steering damper hydro accumulator

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

1 Plug for test and filling valve
2 Membrane
3 Closing head
4 Accumulator
accumulator is completely empty.
The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be checked and topped up using the
filling and testing device.
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

As an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for the
brake system.
Steering damper
The hydro accumulators on the steering cylinders absorb steering movements when changing direction quickly. Also, the damping effect absorbs
external influences on the machine, for example if the working attachment is
driven against an obstacle.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.3-3 o f 4
Steering System
Service Manual
Steering cylinder
Oil filling on the nitrogen side of the hydro accumulator
Cross section of the hydro accumulator

1 Plug for test and filling valve
2 Nitrogen filling
3 Oil filling
4 Membrane
5 Closing head
6 Accumulator
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The hydro accumulator has a small amount of oil in it to protect the membrane on the nitrogen side. When sudden pressure peaks occur, such as
when driving on rough terrain or suddenly moving the steering wheel, the oil
prevents the membrane from hitting the inside of the accumulator too hard.
8.3-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System
Emergency steering
8.4 Emergency steering

Design
Main components of the emergency steering

1 Emergency steering button
2 Emergency steering check
symbol field
3 Emergency steering symbol field
4 Main electronics (master)
5 Input module 1
6 Emergency steering pressure
switch B3
7 Valve block
pressure switch B3a
9 Emergency steering pump
10 Emergency steering pump relay
11 Output module 2
The emergency steering pump 9, the emergency steering pump relay 10 and
the emergency steering check pressure switch 8 are mounted on the right of
the rear section.
The valve block 7 and the emergency steering pressure switch 6 are
mounted on the left of the rear section.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The main electronics (master) 4 are located in the cab behind the driver's seat.
The input module 1 and the output module 2 are fitted in the right cab access.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.4-1 o f 1 0
Steering System
Service Manual
Emergency steering
Basic function
Functional diagram of the emergency steering

1 Emergency steering button
symbol field
5 Input module 1
switch B3
7 Valve block
pressure switch B3a
10 Emergency steering pump relay
11 Output module 2
The emergency steering system allows continued steering if the variable

displacement pump or the diesel engine fails. The emergency steering pump
9 delivers oil via the valve block 7 to the servostat.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The emergency steering pump is regulated by the main electronics (master)

4. The emergency steering check pressure switch 8, and the emergency
steering pressure switch 5 provide the main electronics with the necessary
signals. The emergency steering button 1 is for restarting the emergency
steering pump.
8.4-2 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System
Emergency steering
Pressure switch test

When you switch on the ignition, the pressure switches are tested. The pressure
switch is powered (24 V) via the fuse F11. When the system is OK, no signal is
returned to the input module 1. This tells the main electronics (master) 2 that the
pressure switch is working properly. The symbol fields 3 and 4 do not light up.
If the pressure switch is defective or if there is moisture in the plug or cable,
a positive signal is sent to the input module 1.
If the emergency steering pressure switch 5 is defective, the emergency
steering symbol field 4 lights up. If the emergency steering pressure check
switch 6 is defective, the emergency steering check symbol field 3 lights up.
Function diagram of the emergency steering

when the pressure switch is defective
(ignition on, engine off, both pressure switches
closed in the depressurised state)
1 Input module 1
symbol field

switch
pressure switch
Emergency steering check

Every time the machine is started up the system performs a brief safety test.
This safety test is not performed until the engine is running. This is to
prevent the high current consumption of the emergency steering pump from
impairing the starting procedure.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
During the safety test, the emergency steering pump is activated. The pump
runs for 2 to 3 seconds. A pressure of 16 bar must be reached within this
time. The contact on the emergency steering check pressure switch 6
closes. During the safety test, the emergency steering check symbol field 3
lights up. The emergency steering system is then operational and the
emergency steering check symbol field goes out.
If the pressure at the emergency steering check pressure switch 6 does not
reach 16 bar, the check symbol field stays lit until the ignition is switched off.
The safety test is interrupted after 3 seconds. The emergency steering field
check symbol field indicates to the driver that the emergency steering
system is defective.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.4-3 o f 1 0
Steering System
Service Manual
Emergency steering
Activated emergency steering system
Functional diagram of the emergency steering

1 Input module 1
2 Output module 2
pressure switch
4 Emergency steering
pressure switch
5 Electric motor
6
7
8
9
10
Valve block
Oil from the steering pump
To servostat
Emergency steering button
If the diesel engine or the steering pump 7 fails, the emergency steering function
is started automatically. If the pressure drops, the emergency steering pressure
switch 4 sends a signal via the input module 1 to the main electronics (master)
10. The main electronics give the start command to the output module 2 and the
emergency steering pump starts pumping oil. At the same time the emergency
steering symbol field lights up, accompanied by an audible signal. The
emergency steering function is provided for 40 seconds. The electric motor 5 of
the emergency steering pump is automatically switched off.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The emergency steering pump can only started manually using the emergency steering button 9. This function is only available for 10 seconds if the
ignition is on.
8.4-4 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Steering System
Emergency steering
8.4.1

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the emergency steering pump

1 Relay
2 Electric motor

4 Gear pump
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The emergency steering pump is mounted on the right of the rear section.
Components of the emergency steering pump

1
2
3
4
Relay
Electric motor
Connector piece
Sealing ring
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
5
6
7
8
Flange
Seals
Bushing
Gears
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
9 Housing
10 Valve housing
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.4-5 o f 1 0
Steering System
Service Manual
Emergency steering
Basic function
The gear pump of the emergency steering pump is powered by the electric
motor. The electric motor is switched on and off via a relay.
The gear pump draws up oil from the hydraulic tank as needed. The oil is
pumped via the valve block to the servostat. A pressure relief valve protects
the pump from excess pressure.
Gear pump with pressure relief valve

The gear pump 1 of the emergency steering pump is protected by a pressure
relief valve. By restricting the maximum pressure, this also prevents the
electric motor from consuming too much current.
The system pressure pushes the valve piston 2 against the spring 3.
If the maximum pressure is reached, the valve piston 2 opens. This allows
hydraulic oil to flow out to the intake side of the gear pump.
The maximum pressure is determined by the pressure spring 3 and the
adjusting disc 4.
Emergency steering pump relay
Emergency steering pump with electric diagram

1 Relay
2 Positive current supply
3 Relay activation
8.4-6 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
4 Output module 2
5 Electric motor
6 Main earth connection
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The electric motor 5 of the emergency steering pump is switched on and off
via the relay 1. The relay 1 is activated by the main electronics (master) and
the output module 2. The relay is designed to switch large currents.
Service Manual
Steering System
Emergency steering
8.4.2

ID 1029 4440
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

2 Adjusting screw
3 Pressure spring
4 Switch contact
5 Membrane
6 Housing
The emergency steering pressure switch 1 is mounted on the valve block 2.
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Membrane pressure switches are for switching electric circuits on and off.
The hydraulic pressure acts via a membrane on an adjustable spring. When
a set value is reached, the electric contact closes and the circuit is closed.
Activating the emergency steering function

The emergency steering pressure switch monitors the steering system
pressure.
If the diesel engine or the steering fails, the pressure at the emergency
steering pressure switch drops. If the pressure drops, the switch contact
opens. This interrupts the positive signal to the input module 1 and the
emergency steering system is activated.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
8.4-7 o f 1 0
Steering System
Service Manual
Emergency steering
8.4.3
Emergency steering check pressure switch

ID 1029 4440
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

2 Adjusting screw
3 Pressure spring
4 Switch contact
5 Membrane
6 Housing
The emergency steering pressure switch 2 is mounted on the emergency

steering pump 1.
Activating the emergency steering function

The job of the emergency steering check pressure switch is to test the emergency steering system.
When the diesel engine is started, the emergency steering pump begins to
pump oil. If the pressure rises to the set level, the switch contact closes. A
positive signal to the input module 1 is activated and the emergency steering
check is successfully completed.
8.4-8 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Basic function
Service Manual
Steering System
Emergency steering
8.4.4
Valve block
Design
Components and connections on the valve block

1 Oil from the emergency
steering pump
2 Oil from the variable
displacement pump
3 Emergency steering
pressure switch
check valve
5
6
7
8
To servostat
Housing
Steering test connection
check valve
The valve block is fitted on left of the rear section.
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The valve block connects the oil from the variable displacement pump or the
emergency steering pump to the servostat.
Hydraulic plan of the valve block

1 Oil from the variable displacement pump
2 Emergency steering pressure switch
3 Oil from the emergency
steering pump
check valve
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS

check valve
6 To servostat
7 Steering pressure test
connection
8.4-9 o f 1 0
Steering System
Service Manual
Emergency steering
The emergency steering pressure switch 2 monitors the pressure of the

variable displacement pump. If the pressure at the switch 2 is too low, the
emergency steering pump is automatically activated. This can happen if the
diesel engine fails or if the variable displacement pump pressure drops.
The check valves 4 and 5 prevent oil from flowing back to the pump.
Valve block during normal
steering function
Valve block during normal steering function

When the steering is activated, the variable displacement pump delivers oil
to the connection 2 and via the check valve 4 to the servostat. The check
valve 8 prevents oil from flowing back to the emergency steering pump.
Valve block during emergency steering function

The emergency steering pump delivers oil to the connection 1 and via the
check valve 8 to the servostat. The check valve 4 prevents oil from flowing
back to the variable displacement pump.
8.4-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Valve block during emergency

steering function
9 Brake system
9.0
Chapter contents
9
Brake system ...................................................................... 9.0-1

9.0.1
9.1
Brake system........................................................................9.0-1
Service brake ..................................................................................9.1-1
9.1.1
Brake system gear pump......................................................9.1-1
9.1.2
Compact brake valve............................................................9.1-3
9.1.3
Service brake hydro accumulator.........................................9.1-7
9.1.4
Brake light pressure switch ..................................................9.1-9
9.1.5
Accumulator charge pressure switch .................................9.1-10
9.2
Parking brake..................................................................................9.2-1
9.2.1
Disc brake.............................................................................9.2-2
9.2.2
Parking brake hydro accumulator.........................................9.2-4
9.3
Overspeed protection .....................................................................9.3-1

Overspeed protection solenoid valve ...................................9.3-3
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
9.3.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Brake system
9.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Brake system
9.0.1
Brake system
Design
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Main components of the brake system

1 Compact brake valve
2 Front axle service brake
hydro accumulator
3 Rear axle service brake
hydro accumulator
4 Parking brake hydro accumulator
6 Hydraulic tank
7 Rear axle
9 Overspeed protection
solenoid valve
12 Transmission with parking brake
13 Front axle
Test connections:
M3 Accumulator charge
pressure
M4 Front axle brake pressure
M5 Rear axle brake pressure
M6 Parking brake pressure
The gear pump 5 is flange-mounted on the engine. Together with the compact
brake valve 1, its job is to charge the hydro accumulators of the brake system.
The hydro accumulators for the service brake are fitted outside on the cab floor.
The hydro accumulator for the parking brake mounted directly on the compact
brake valve.
The service brake is a wet disc brake mounted in the wheel hubs of both axles.
The parking brake is a disc brake attached to the transmission 12.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.0-1 o f 6
Brake system
Service Manual
PowerPoint
Basic function
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Hydraulic tank
Return strainer
Replenishing pump
solenoid valve
Check valve
Compact brake valve assembly
Pressure balance pilot valve
9.0-2 o f 6
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Check valve
Inverted shuttle valve
Check valve
Inching angle sensor
Pressure control piston for
st
1 circuit
Pressure control piston for
2nd circuit
Accumulator charge
pressure switch
Front axle disc brakes
Front axle hydro accumulator
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
24
25
26
27
28
29
Transfer gear
Parking brake
Brake light pressure switch
Rear axle disc brakes
Rear axle hydro accumulator
Control valve block
(housing spreheating)
Test connections:
M3 Accumulator charge pressure
M4 Front axle brake pressure
M6 Parking brake pressure
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Hydraulic diagram of the brake system
Service Manual
Brake system
The service brake is a hydraulic 2-circuit brake system. It acts on the wet
discs in the front and rear axles.
The brake system gear pump 3 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 1 and
pumps it to the compact brake valve 10. The accumulator charge valve 11 in the
compact brake valve fills the hydro accumulators to a specified oil pressure.
When the inch/brake pedal is slightly depressed (up to 2/3 of the way down),
only the hydraulic inching function is activated via the inching angle sensor 17.
When the inch/brake pedal is fully depressed (in the last third), oil flows from the
hydro accumulators 22 and 28 via the pressure control pistons 18 and 19 to the
brake pistons in the front and rear axles. This activates the wet disc brakes. At
the end of the braking procedure, the oil flows into the hydraulic tank.
The parking brake 25 is opened by oil pressure and closed by spring force. When
the parking brake solenoid valve 16 is energised, oil flows from the parking brake
hydro accumulator 23 to the parking brake and opens the callipers.
Hydraulic tank
The hydraulic tank provides filtered oil for the brake system. The gear pump
draws up oil from the hydraulic tank via the connection 1. The returning oil is
pumped back through the return strainer 3 to the hydraulic tank.

The brake system gear pump 2 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank and
pumps it through the connection 4 to the compact brake valve.
The cooling system gear pump 3 and the brake system gear pump 2 have a
shared intake port.
See the detailed description in the section on the brake system gear pump.
Compact brake valve with hydro accumulator

LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The compact brake valve performs the following tasks:

Charging the hydro accumulator
Inching function when the inch/brake pedal is slightly depressed
Braking function when the inch/brake pedal is fully depressed
Activating the parking brake via the parking brake solenoid valve
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.0-3 o f 6
Brake system
Service Manual
The accumulator charge valve fills the hydro accumulators 2, 3 and 4 to a

specified oil pressure. The accumulator charge pressure switch 5 monitors
the pressure in the hydro accumulators.
When the inch/brake pedal is pressed, oil flows from the service brake hydro
accumulators 3 and 4 to the wet disk brake. The contact on the brake light
pressure switch 6 closes and the brake lights light up.
See the detailed description in the section on the compact brake valve.
Service brake
The service brake is a wet disc brake 1 mounted in the front and rear axles.
The oil pressure pushes the brake discs together. The number of brake
discs and the brake pressure determine the braking force.
L550, L556, L566, L576

1 Brake piston
2 Brake discs
9.0-4 o f 6
Brake discs in the axle
3 Wheel hub (Multitrac axle)
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L580
4 Differential (Hercules axle)
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
See the detailed description of the wet disc brake in the section on the axles.
Service Manual
Brake system
Parking brake
The parking brake is attached to the output shaft of the transmission 4 and
thus acts on all four wheels.
The parking brake is opened by oil pressure and closed by spring force.
When you start the engine and press the parking brake button, the solenoid
valve 2 in the compact brake valve 1 is activated. Oil flows from the hydro
accumulator 3 to the parking brake 5, where it acts on the brake cylinder and
opens the callipers.
When you press the parking brake button again or turn off the engine, the
force of the springs in the brake cylinder closes the brake, thus generating
the required braking torque on the brake disc.
When the parking brake is closed, the LED in the parking brake button and
the parking brake symbol field in the display light up.
See the detailed description in the section on the parking brake.
The overspeed protection prevents the engine and the variable displacement
motors from overrevving, which can occur, for example, when driving downhill.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
When a set limit speed is exceeded, the overspeed protection solenoid

valve 3 is activated. Oil flows from the replenishing pump 2 to the rear axle
disc brake 5, causing the machine to slow down.
See the detailed description in the section on overspeed protection.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.0-5 o f 6
Service Manual
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Brake system
9.0-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Brake system
Service brake
9.1 Service brake

9.1.1

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Scavenging pump arrangement


LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
The gear pumps are fitted on the accessory drive of the engine and is driven
Brake system gear pump components

1
2
3
4
5
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Driver
O-ring
Flange
Seals
Bearing bushings
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
6
7
8
9
Gears
Housing
Housing cover
Shaft seal ring
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.1-1 o f 1 0
Brake system
Service Manual
Service brake
Basic function
The gear pump consists of two intermeshing gears enclosed in a housing.
One of the two gears is driven via the outgoing shaft (driving gear), and the
other driven by the gear teeth.
The fluid taken in is injected into the gaps between the teeth and pumped
outside along the housing from the intake port to the pressure port.
Oil supply for the brake system
The brake system gear pump 2 draws up oil from the hydraulic tank 4 via the
internal intake duct of the cooling system gear pump 3. The oil is pumped via
the discharge port to the compact brake valve 1.
Pressure cut-off
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007
The brake system gear pump pressure cut-off is performed by the pressure
relief valve in the compact brake valve.
9.1-2 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Brake system
Service brake
9.1.2
Compact brake valve

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
This compact brake valve is attached to the cab floor. It is activated using
the inch/brake pedal.
Main components of the compact brake valve

Actuation pedal
Inching angle sensor R1
Brake pressure adjusting screw
Compact brake valve housing
6 Accumulator charge valve

7 Parking brake solenoid valve
8 Accumulator charge
pressure switch
9 Base plate
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
1
2
3
4
5
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.1-3 o f 1 0
Brake system
Service Manual
Cross section of the compact brake valve

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Pedal idle position adjusting screw

Base plate
Parking brake check valve
Pressure balance check valve
Accumulator pressure test piston
Valve insert
Compact brake valve housing
Pilot valve actuating piston
9.1-4 o f 1 0
10 Opening/closing pressure
adjusting screw
11 Inverted shuttle valve
12 Return spring for 2nd brake circuit
13 Pressure control piston for
2nd brake circuit
14 Return spring for 1st brake circuit
15 Pressure control piston for 1st
brake circuit
16 Spring cup
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17 Pressure control spring

18 Brake pressure
adjusting screw
19 Seal rings
20 Pressure control springs
21 Spring sleeve
22 Actuating piston
23 Actuation pedal
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007
Service brake
Service Manual
Brake system
Service brake
Basic function
Hydraulic diagram of the compact brake valve

2 Inching angle sensor
1st circuit
2nd circuit
5 Inverted shuttle valve
6 Check valve
7 Pressure balance pilot valve
8 Check valve
9
10
11
12

Flow control nozzle
Gear pump P connection
To the control valve block
pressure switch
14 Front axle hydro accumulator
16 Parking brake connection

17 Front axle connection
18 To the overspeed protection
solenoid valve
19 Brake light pressure switch
20 Rear axle hydro accumulator
21 Hydraulic tank connections
M3 Accumulator charge pressure
test connection
The compact brake valve is supplied with oil by a gear pump. The integrated
accumulator charge valve 9 and the pilot valve 7 fill the hydro accumulator
with pressure oil.
If the accumulator charge cut-off pressure is reached, the accumulator
charge valve 9 switches the pump flow to circulate to the connection N.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
If braking causes the accumulator pressure to fall to the accumulator charge cutin pressure, the accumulator charge valve 9 switches to accumulator charging.
The brake circuits of the front and rear axles are separated by the inverted
shuttle valve 5.
The parking brake solenoid valve 1 provides pressure oil to the disc brake.
Service brake
When the pedal is depressed in the first two thirds of its range, the hydraulic
inching function is activated. This function is triggered by the angle sensor
on the compact brake valve.
If the pedal is depressed further, the pressure control pistons of the 2nd circuit
control the pressure in the brake pistons in proportion to the pedal force.
At the end of the braking procedure, the oil flows back to the hydraulic tank.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.1-5 o f 1 0
Brake system
Service Manual
Service brake
If one brake circuit fails, the second remains operational due to the mechanical
contact between the two pressure control pistons in the compact brake valve.
The actuation force remains the same.
Parking brake
When you press the parking brake button, the parking brake solenoid valve
1 is opened. The accumulator pressure acts on the cylinders of the disc
brake and opens the brake.
Inching angle sensor

The angle sensor attached to the compact brake valve consists of two
redundant sensors. The angle sensor 1 sends an electrical signal to input
module 1 and the angle sensor 2 sends a signal to the input module 2.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007
When the inch/brake pedal is pressed, the current to the control pressure
proportional valve (travel hydraulics pump) is reduced. The variable
displacement pump reduces its flow. This hydrostatically brakes the machine.
9.1-6 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Brake system
Service brake
9.1.3
Service brake hydro accumulator

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

1 Plug
2 Membrane
3 Closing head
4 Accumulator
accumulator is completely empty. The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be
checked and topped up using the filling and testing device.
Basic function
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

To act an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for
the brake system.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.1-7 o f 1 0
Brake system
Service Manual
Service brake
Storing pressure for the service brake
Hydro accumulator arrangement

1
2
3
4
Compact brake valve

Front axle hydro accumulator
Rear axle hydro accumulator
pressure switch
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007
The service brake hydro accumulators allow the brake to be applied a

certain number of times if the service brake pump fails. Oil flows from the
hydro accumulators through the compact brake valve 1 to the disc brake.
9.1-8 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Brake system
Service brake
9.1.4

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

2 Adjusting screw
3 Pressure spring
4 Switch contact
5 Membrane
6 Housing
The brake light pressure switch 1 is mounted on the compact brake valve 3.
Basic function
Brake light switching function

The job of the brake light pressure switch is to switch on the brake lights.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
When the inch/brake pedal is pressed, the pressure on the parking brake
pressure switch rises. When a set level is reached, the contact closes and
the brake lights are switched on.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.1-9 o f 1 0
Brake system
Service Manual
Service brake
9.1.5
Accumulator charge pressure switch

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

2 Adjusting screw
3 Pressure spring
4 Switch contact
5 Membrane
6 Housing
The accumulator charge pressure switch 2 is mounted on the compact brake

valve 3.
Basic function
This type of membrane pressure switch is known as normally closed.
Accumulator charge pressure monitoring function

The job of the accumulator charge pressure switch is to monitor the
accumulator charge pressure.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26.01.2007
If the pressure in one of the brake accumulators falls below the level set for
the pressure switch, the contact closes and the accumulator charge
pressure symbol field lights up. In addition, an audible signal sounds.
9.1-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Brake system
Parking brake
9.2 Parking brake

Basic function of the parking brake
Components of the parking brake

4 Transfer gear
5 Disc brake
The parking brake is a spring accumulator brake. The parking brake is

opened by oil pressure and closed by spring force.
The parking brake is supplied with oil by the compact brake valve 1. The
accumulator charge valve of the compact brake valve 1 fills the parking
brake hydro accumulator 3 to a specified oil pressure.
The parking brake hydro accumulator 3 provides oil pressure via the
solenoid valve 2 to open the parking brake. The solenoid valve 2 is actuated
using the parking brake button.
When the parking brake is opened, oil flows from the hydro accumulator 3
via the solenoid valve 2 to the disc brake 5.
Function of the parking brake switch

The parking brake can only be released when the engine is running.
When you start the engine and press the parking brake button 2, the parking
brake solenoid valve is activated. The brake pressure then acts via the open
parking brake solenoid valve on the brake cylinder, and opens the parking
brake against the force of the brake callipers. The parking brake symbol field
3 on the display goes out.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
When you press the parking brake button 2 again or turn off the engine, the
force of the springs in the brake cylinder closes the brake, thus generating
the required braking torque on the brake disc. The parking brake symbol
field 3 and the LED 1 in the parking brake button light up.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.2-1 o f 6
Brake system
Service Manual
Parking brake
9.2.1
Disc brake
Technical data
See section 2.1
Disc brake components

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Counter nut
Plug
Adjusting screw
Anti-twist locking pin
Brake callipers
Dust seal
Pressure pin
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Brake disc
Guide pin
Lock nut
Counter nut
Brake pad
Adjusting screw
Piston seal
15
16
17
18
19
20
Brake piston
Cup springs
Housing
Brake oil connection
Rubber centring element
Bleeder screw
The parking brake is a spring-loaded sliding saddle brake which acts on the
brake disc 8 attached outside on the output shaft of the transmission.
9.2-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Design
Service Manual
Brake system
Parking brake
Basic function of the disc brake
Disc brake in open position

The two identical brake pads 5 and the brake calliper 1 slide freely on the
guide pins 4, which are fastened in the transmission housing.
When the brake is applied, it clamps the brake pads 5, creating a braking
torque on the brake disk 3.
The clamping force is generated by the cup springs 9. The piston 8 is
pushed together with the pressure pin 2 and the front brake pad 5 towards
the brake disc 3.
When the front brake pad 5 comes into contact with the brake disc 3, the
reactive force pushes the brake callipers 1 along the guide pin 4 until the
rear brake pad 5 is also pressed against the brake disc 3.
The parking brake is released by tensioning the entire cup spring set 9. Oil in
the pressure chamber 7 pushes the piston 8 all the way back against the
force of the cup springs 9.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Rubber fittings on the guide pin 4 push the entire brake calliper to the right
until the adjusting screw 6 touches the transmission housing. This moves the
rear brake pad 5 away from the brake disc 3.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.2-3 o f 6
Brake system
Service Manual
Parking brake
9.2.2

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design

1 Plug
2 Membrane
3 Closing head
4 Accumulator
accumulator is completely empty. The plug 1 allows the accumulator to be
checked and topped up using the filling and testing device.
Basic function

To act an energy reserve to supply energy when needed, for example for
the brake system.
9.2-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007

Service Manual
Brake system
Parking brake
Storing pressure for the parking brake
Components of the parking brake

3 Transmission with disc brake
The parking brake is closed by spring force and opened by the brake oil from
the hydro accumulator 2.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
When the parking brake button is pressed, brake oil flows from the hydro
accumulator and releases the parking brake. The parking brake can only be
safely released when the parking brake symbol field is not lit.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.2-5 o f 6
Brake system
Service Manual
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Parking brake
9.2-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Brake system
9.3 Overspeed protection

Design
Main components of the overspeed protection

solenoid valve
4 Solenoid valve block

5 Rear axle
The solenoid valve block 4 is fitted on left of the rear section beside the engine.
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Hydraulic diagram of the overspeed protection system

2nd circuit
4 Replenishing pump
solenoid valve
7 Rear axle disc brake

Test connection:
The overspeed protection prevents the engine and the variable displacement
motors from overrevving, which can occur, for example, when driving downhill.
When the engine or the variable displacement motors reach a set limit
speed, the overspeed protection solenoid valve 6 is activated. Oil flows from
the replenishing pump 4 to the rear axle disc brake 7, causing the machine
to slow down.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.3-1 o f 4
Brake system
Service Manual
Overspeed service code

If the engine or the variable displacement motors overspeed, the machine
reacts as follows:
The overspeed protection solenoid valve is energised
A service code appears in the display:
E 5030 Overspeed on one of the variable displacement motors
E 5032 Overspeed on variable displacement motor 1
E 5031 Overspeed on variable displacement motor 2
E 600B Overspeed on diesel engine
The warning buzzer sounds for one second.
Additionally, after 3 seconds of overspeed protection being active, the
service code E 5029 appears.
The brake is activated according to the intensity of overspeed. The following

situations may occur:
Situation A: In the event of serious overspeed, for example on a steep
slope, the brake activated constantly for more than 3 seconds. The service
code E 5029 appears with a short warning tone.
Situation B: Once the limit speed is exceeded, the machine is automatically
braked until the speed falls back below the threshold. After a short time, the
limit speed is exceeded again and the brake is activated again. If the brake
is activated for longer than 3 seconds, the service code E 5029 appears
with a short warning tone. This also happens if the brake intervention is
briefly interrupted.
Situation C: The machine is briefly braked. The speed then returns to the
normal range.
The service code E 5029 only appears during reckless driving, for example
at full speed down steep slopes. If the service code E 5029 is found several
times in the memory, it may affect the warranty on the machine, especially if
any damage was caused by overspeed.
The service codes are stored in the main electronics A15.
9.3-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
Caution: Brake interventions with the service code E 5029 do not occur
during normal operation. This service code is only generated when the
machine is not operated properly.
Service Manual
Brake system
9.3.1

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the solenoid valve block

solenoid valve
4 Solenoid valve block assembly
The solenoid valve block is fitted on left of the rear section beside the engine.
Basic function
The solenoid valve block includes the following components in a single housing:
Pilot control solenoid valve (working hydraulics)
Overspeed protection solenoid valve (rear axle braking function)
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007


5 Rear axle disc brake
During normal operation, the overspeed protection solenoid valve 3 is not

energised. Oil can flow freely from the compact brake valve 1 through the
overspeed protection solenoid valve 3 to the rear axle disc brake 5.
If the engine or the variable displacement motors reach a set limit speed, the
overspeed protection solenoid valve 3 is energised. Oil flows from the
connection 2 (from the replenishing pump) to the rear axle disc brake 5,
causing the machine to slow down.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
9.3-3 o f 4
Brake system
Service Manual
LBH/version 01/10.2006/en/dw/26/01/2007
9.3-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
10 Electrical system
10.0
Chapter contents
10
Electrical system ............................................................... 10.0-1

10.0.1
10.1
Electrical system with circuit diagrams...............................10.0-3

Electrical components...................................................................10.1-1
10.1.1
Electrical components in the cab........................................10.1-1
10.1.2
Fuse and relay board A4 ....................................................10.1-2
10.1.3
Main electronics (master) A15............................................10.1-6
10.1.4
Input modules (A16a, A16b, A16c) ..................................10.1-10
10.1.5
Output modules (A17a, A17b, A17c)................................10.1-15
10.1.6
Electrical components in the rear section.........................10.1-20
10.2
Battery installation ........................................................................10.2-1

Batteries .............................................................................10.2-2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
10.2.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.0-1 o f 1
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Electrical system
10.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Electrical system
10.0.1
Electrical system with circuit diagrams

Design
The operating voltage of the machine is 24 volts. The batteries (2 x 12 V) are
connected in series.
The two batteries are installed in the right ballast weight.
Components of the
electrical system
The table below lists all the components of the electrical system. The entry
in the step column helps you locate the component in the circuit diagrams.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Abbreviations:
- WH = Wiring harness
- LFD = Liebherr ride control
- SV = Solenoid valve
- PSV = Proportional solenoid valve
- LED = Light-emitting diode
- SH = Service hours
- * Options
Machine view 1, left
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.0-3 o f 1
Electrical system
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Machine view 2, right
Machine view 3, above
10.0-4 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Electrical system
Circuit diagrams
The circuit diagrams are on pages 1 to 75. The following list contains the
pages and their main functions.
Overview of pages for the electrical system:
1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW L550 - L580
2
3
The circuit diagrams of the electrical system show the function sequences
for the entire machine, including optional equipment. All components and
connections are marked and shown with the appropriate switching code so
that they are clearly identifiable. The keys also list the designations of
the components.
The circuit diagrams are divided into pages. The pages are also divided into
individual sections.
Click the links in the online documentation to skip to the relevant information.
Component designation -
The designations of the components and connectors are always shown with
-XX..:
- -XX = Component designation, e.g.
-P1 = Mechanical service hours indicator (optional)
Location code +
Location codes are shown with +XX. The location codes show where the
components are fitted on the machine.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
The following location codes are shown:

- +B
Ballast weight, general
- +B1 Left ballast weight
- +B2 Rear ballast weight
- +F
Travel drive, general
- +F1 Front axle
- +F2 Rear axle
- +F3 Transmission
- +H
Rear section
- +H1 Rear section hatch
- +H2 Rear section below cab, right
- +H3 Rear section below cab, left
- +H4 Right rear section
- +H5 Left rear section
- +K
Cab, general
- +K1 Cab front instruments
- +K2 Cab rear wall
- +K3 Cab roof
- +K4 Cab instruments in side cover, rear right
- +K5 Cab instruments in side cover, rear left
- +K6 Cab floor
- +M Engine
- +V
Front section
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.0-5 o f 3
Electrical system
Service Manual
+V1
+V2
+V3
Front section
Lift arm
Tilt cylinder
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
10.0-6 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
CANBUS3
HEAT/AIRCON
CONTROL
CC01
91/92 MOTORCONTROLLHECU
106
B
PROJ: 8920980_003
DISPLAYUNIT
SENSORS
(SWITCH,
SENSOR)
CANBUS1
45
MACHINE
INPUTMODULE1
CANBUS2
C
4x
CAN
1x
LAN
CANBUS3
ACTUATORS
(MAGNETICS,
SOLENOIDVALVES)
CANBUS4
4XRS232
OPTIONS(e.g.
WEIGHING EQUIPMENT
CENTRALGREASING,
etc.)
FrdiesesDokumentunddendarindargestelltenGegen
standbehaltenwirunsalleRechtevor.Vervielfltigung,
BekanntgabeanDritteoderVerwertungseinesInhaltes
sindohneunsereausdrcklicheZustimmungverboten.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
112
2xCFCard
Wereserveallrightsinthisdocumentandintheinforma
tioncontainedtherein.Reproduction,useordisclosure
tothirdpartieswithoutexpressauthorityisstrictly
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
97
93
CAN
CAN
AIRCONDITIONINGKEYPAD MAINKEYPAD
22 OUTPUTMODULE1
Ethernet/RS232/CAN
D
ELECTRIC LOAD
(LIGHTING,
WINDSCREENWIPER,
REAR
REARWINDOWHEATER
46 INPUTMODULE2
21
OUTPUTMODULE2
ELECTRICKEYPAD
FUSEANDRELAY BOARD
SENSORS
MACHINE
ACTUATORS
F
Ersteller
Datum
SPL
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
OVERVIEWDIAGRAM
ELECTRICALSYSTEMELECTRONICSGG6TIER3WHEELLOADER
WerkBischofshofenGmbH
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
1
114
TABLEOFCONTENTS
SHEET
CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER
61
STARTER
TABLEOFCONTENTS
SHEET
TRAVELDIRECTIONSHYDRAULICPUMPBUZZERPRESSUREHIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP
54
FUNCTIONWORKINGBASKET
59
DISPLAYUNITCANBUS3
35
FUNCTIOND+PROFILELIGHTPARKINGLIGHT
20
DISPLAYUNITCANBUS3
36
FOOTFLAPVMC3MIDDLEFLAPVMC4
66
WORKINGPROJECTORREARREAR
31
FANMOTORANDSENSORICEUPPROTECTION
64
WORKINGPROJECTORREARCABIN
32
JOYSTICKSTEERING
72
WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTCABINXENONWORKINGPROJECTOR
30
JOYSTICKSTEERING
74
AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEMAMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSORSUNSENSOR
62
BMKINDEX
AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEMAMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSORSUNSENSOR
63
BMKINDEX
HEADFLAPVMC5TEMPERATURESENSORAUTOMATICAIRCONDITIONING
67
BMKINDEX
FUELTEMPERATURESENSORACTIVEOSCILLATING
107
BMKINDEX
CHARGEAIRCOOLEROILPRESSURESWITCH
106
BMKINDEX
10
COUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTION
BMKINDEX
11
KEYHANDOUTCONTAININGTYPECOUNTINGNUMBERSYSTEMANDPLACE
BMKINDEX
12
STEERINGCOLUMNSWITCHSTOPLIGHTLOWBEAMHIGHBEAM
25
BMKINDEX
13
LHCONTROLLEVERSWITCHCOMFORTCONTROL3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT
51
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
BMKINDEX
14
GENERATOR
BMKINDEX
15
VENTILATORCONDENSERINTEGRATED
68
BMKINDEX
16
VENTILATORCONDENSERRETROFITKIT
69
BMKINDEX
17
MOTORCONTROLAUTOMATICRUNOUT
47
BMKINDEX
18
EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMPLFDAIRFILTERCONTAMINATIONRIDECONTROL
23
BRAKEACCUMULATOR
21
EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMPLFDAIRFILTERCONTAMINATIONRIDECONTROL
24
BRAKEACCUMULATOR
22
OUTPUTMODULE2BACKUPALARMANDCANBESWITCHEDOFF
45
CANBUS1
37
OUTPUTMODULE2BACKUPALARMANDCANBESWITCHEDOFF
46
CANBUS2
38
PARKINGBRAKESPEEDSENSORCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD
78
DIAGNOSTICPLUGMOTORCONTROLANDAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
70
PHASESENSOR
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
105
BMKINDEX
DIESELPREHEATINGCOLDWEATHERKIT40
82
REVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTORGROENEVELD
ANGLESENSORINCH/GASPEDAL
52
REARAREAMONITORINGVIAMONITORANDCAMERA
PROJ: 8920980_003
WARNINGBEACONMIRRORANDREARWINDOWHEATER
33
INJECTIONPUMPCYLINDER13
109
FLOATPOSITIONBUCKETRETURNTODIGLIFTKICKOUT
56
110
WINDSCREENWASHERFRONTANDREARHOOTER
28
79
WINDSCREENWASHERFRONTANDREARHOOTER
29
101
STANDBYAM4CYLINDERENGINE
111
EP3.AND4.CONTROLCIRCUIT
60
STANDBYAM6CYLINDERENGINE
102
TRAVELRANGESSWIVELANGLEHYDROMOTORSOVERSPEEDPROTECTION
53
TANKPIPESENSORTRANSMISSION/HYDRAULICOILTEMPERATUREVENTILATORCOOLINGWATERLEVEL
Datum
76
108
Ausgabe
nderung
75
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
TABLEOFCONTENTS
3
ZeichNr.
108
55
Datum
105
BACKUPALARMGEROTORSTEERINGDIESELPREHEATING
Ersteller
Zustand
108
ELECTRICALDIAGRAMDIESELENGINE4AND6CYLINDER
26
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1
ELECTRONICIMMOBILISER
8920980
460901000003
7
21
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
2
114
TABLEOFCONTENTS
SHEET
WATERVALVEVMC1RECIRCULATEDAIRFLAPVMC2
GENERALOUTLAYELECTRICKEYPAD
94
KEYOFSYMBOLSDINEN613461DINEN613462DINEN60617
GENERALOUTLAYMAINKEYPAD
95
CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMLIEBHERR
77
GENERALOUTLAYHEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
96
CIGARETTELIGHTERELECTRICALSOCKET12VRADIOLOUDSPEAKER
34
GENERALOUTLAYHEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEMSYSTEMSIDE
97
INGITIONLOCKBATTERIESGENERATORMAINFUSES
19
GENERALOUTLAYINPUTMODULE1
86
ADDITIONALEQUIPMENT12QUICKCHANGEDEVICE
58
87
ADDITIONALEQUIPMENT123AND4QUICKCHANGEDEVICE
57
88
AUXILIARYHEATERDBW2010
80
89
AUXILIARYHEATERTHERMO90
81
GENERALOUTLAYAIRCONDITIONINGKEYPADFLAPCONTROL
99
PROJ: 8920980_003
GENERALOUTLAYMOTORCONTROL4CYLINDER
113
GENERALOUTLAYMOTORCONTROL6CYLINDER
104
GENERALOUTLAYMOTORCONTROLENGINESIDE
93
GENERALOUTLAYOPTIONKEYPAD
98
GENERALOUTLAYOUTPUTMODULE1
90
91
92
83
VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESL586
84
SUPPLYINPUTMODULE1AND2
41
SUPPLYINPUTMODULE3JOYSTICKSTEERING
71
73
SUPPLYINPUTMODULE4EP3.AND4.CONTROLCIRCUIT
50
SUPPLYMASTERSUPPLYDIAGNOSTICPLUG
40
SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE1
42
SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE1AND2
43
SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE2
44
SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE3
48
SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE3AUTOMATICLIGHTINGSHUTDOWN
49
SUPPLYKEYPADS
39
HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS
27
GENERALOUTLAYSENSORS
103
112
GENERALOUTLAYPROTECTIVEFOIL
100
OVERVIEWDIAGRAMELECTRICALSYSTEMELECTRONICSGG6TIER3WHEELLOADER
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
SHEET
85
VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40
Zustand
TABLEOFCONTENTS
GENERALOUTLAYMASTER
WATERDETECTOR
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
22
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
TANKPIPESENSORTRANSMISSION/HYDRAULICOILTEMPERATUREVENTILATORCOOLINGWATERLEVEL
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
106
F
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
114
TABLEOFCONTENTS
3
65
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
3
114
TYPE/COUNTINGNUMBER,SYSTEM,LOCATIONCODE
TYPE/COUNTINGNUMBER
CIRCUITSTWISTED
M1STARTERMOTOROPERATINGSUPPLYCODE
52
52
=BBALLAST
=FTRAVELDRIVE
=HHINDCARRIAGE
=KCABIN
=MENGINE
=VFRONTSECTION
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
=SYSTEM
=K
+K6
X1.S1
=KSYSTEM(CABIN)
+K6LOCATIONCODE(CABFLOOR)
X1.SPLUGNAMEANDPINCONTACT
X1.B1
X1.BPLUGNAMEANDSOCKETCONTACT
+K6
=K
52PINAMPLUG
CABLEGREENOPTION
/7.E4
+LOCATIONCODE
CROSSREFERENCEUPSHEET7E4
OPENLINEEND
+BBALLAST
+B1BALLASTLEFT
+B2BALLASTRIGHT
LETZTEMODIFICATION
+KCABIN
+K1CABINFITTINGS
+K2CABINREARPANEL
+K2.RHCABINREARPANELRELAYRACK
+K3CABROOF
+K4CABINFITTINGSSIDECOVERRIGHTREAR
+K5CABINFITTINGSSIDECOVERLEFTREAR
+K6CABFLOOR
+FTRAVELDRIVE
+F1FRONTAXLE
+F2REARAXLE
+F3TRANSMISSION
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
+HHINDCARRIAGE
+H1HINDCARRIAGEREARHATCH
+H2HINDCARRIAGEUNTERCABINRIGHT
+H3HINDCARRIAGEUNTERCABINLEFT
+H4HINDCARRIAGERIGHT
+H5HINDCARRIAGELEFT
+MENGINE
+VFRONTSECTION
+V1FRONTSECTION
+V2LIFTARM
+V3TILTCYLINDER
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
KEYHANDOUTCONTAINING
TYPECOUNTINGNUMBERSYSTEMANDPLACE
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
4
114
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
A3
RADIO
/34.D7
=K
A3.X1
PLUGRADIO
/34.D7
A3.X2
PLUGRADIO
A4.46.4*
SYSTEM PLACE
+K3
A13.X2
PLUGDISPLAYUNITLCD
/35.A3
=K
+K1
=K
+K3
A13a.X
DISPLAYUNIT
/35.D3
=K
+K1
/34.D7
=K
+K3
A15
MAINELECTRONICSMASTER
/85.B1
=K
+K2
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/30.D5
=K
+K2
A15.CAN.X
PLUGMASTER8POLIG
/35.B7
=K
+K2
A4.46.8*
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/30.D8
=K
+K2
A15.COM4.X
PLUGMASTERRSUBD
/40.B6
=K
+K2
A4.Kl.15.a*
Kl.15INPUTMODULE4
/50.A1
=K
+K2
A15.X
PLUGMASTER6POLIG
/40.E1
=K
+K2
A4.X40
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/40.A4
=K
+K2
A16a
INPUTMODULE1
/86.B1
=H
+H3
A4.X40.3a*
CONNECTIONRELAYBOARD
/47.A4
=K
+K2
A16a.X1
PLUGINPUTMODULE1
/51.C1
=H
+H3
A4.X41
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/80.E2
=K
+K2
A16a.X1.44*
CANCONNECTION.INPUTMODULE1
/37.E6
=H
+H3
A4.X42
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/40.C4
=K
+K2
A16b
INPUTMODULE2
/87.B1
=K
+K2
A4.X43
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/43.B2
=K
+K2
A16b.X1
PLUGINPUTMODULE2
/27.A8
=K
+K2
A4.X44
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/25.D3
=K
+K2
A16b.X1.10a*
PLUGCOMFORTCONTROL3.+4.CONTROLCIRCUIT
/51.D8
=K
+K2
A4.X44a:4*
/79.F8
=K
+K2
A16b.X1.9a*
/51.D7
=K
+K2
A4.X45
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/35.E2
=K
+K2
A16b.X2.9+10b*
/51.D7
=K
+K2
A4.X46
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/30.D4
=K
+K2
A16c
INPUTMODULE3
/88.B1
=H
+H3
A4.X47
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/33.B7
=K
+K2
A16c.X1
PLUGINPUTMODULE3
/71.E1
=H
+H3
A4.X48
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/49.C8
=K
+K
A16d
INPUTMODULE4
/89.B1
=H
+H3
A4.X48.*
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/69.B7
=K
+K2
A16d.X1
PLUGINPUTMODULE4
/60.B1
=H
+H3
A4.X49
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/25.B7
=K
+K2
A17.aX1a*
PLUGCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD
/78.B2
=H
+H3
A4.X50
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/27.B5
=K
+K2
A17.X2*
PLUGQUICKCHANGEDEVICE
/57.D8
=H
+H
A4.X50.12a*
/33.B3
=K
+K2
A17a
OUTPUTMODULE1
/90.B1
=H
+H3
A4.X51
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/20.B4
=K
+K2
A17a.X1
PLUGOUTPUTMODULE1
/42.E7
=H
+H3
A4.X52
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/80.C3
=K
+K2
A17a.X1.43.57*
PLUGCANCONNECTIONINPUTMODULE1
/37.B6
=H
+H3
A4.X53
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/20.D3
=K
+K2
A17a.X1.48a*
OPTIONBUCKETRETURNTODIGBERPUSHBUTTONSWITCH
/56.E6
=H
+H3
A4.X55
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/19.C8
=K
+K2
A17a.X1.6a*
OPTIONBUCKETRETURNTODIGBERPUSHBUTTONSWITCH
/56.B6
=H
+H3
A4.X56
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/19.B2
=K
+K2
A17b
OUTPUTMODULE2
/91.B1
=H
+H3
A4.X56a*
/69.B2
=K
+K2
A17b..X1.43.57*
PLUGCANCONNECTIONOUTPUTMODULE2
/38.C1
=K
+K
A4.X56a:4*
/79.B4
=K
+K2
A17b.X1
PLUGOUTPUTMODULE2
/43.C1
=H
+H3
A4.X57
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/19.B3
=K
+K2
A17b.X1.44*
CANCONNECTIONOUTPUTMODULE2
/38.F1
=K
+K
A4.X58
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/27.B8
=K
+K2
A17b.X1.58*
/38.F2
=K
+K
A9*
IMMOBILISER
/79.D4
=K
+K2
A17b.X143a*
/38.D7
=H
+H3
A9.X*
PLUGIMMOBILISER
/79.D4
=K
+K2
A17c
OUTPUTMODULE3
/92.B1
=H
+H3
A11
MAINKEYPAD
/95.C3
=K
+K4
A17c.X1
PLUGOUTPUTMODULE3
/48.E2
=H
+H3
A11.X1
PLUGMAINKEYPAD
/35.B4
=K
+K4
A18
ELECTRICKEYPAD
/94.B2
=K
+K4
A13
DISPLAYUNITLCD
/35.B1
=K
+K1
A18.X1
PLUGELECTRICKEYPAD
/27.A2
=K
+K4
A13.X1
PLUGDISPLAYUNITLCD
/35.B1
=K
+K1
A18.X1.1a*
AUTOMATICLIGHTINGSHUTDOWN
/49.D6
=K
+K4
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
SHEET
BMK
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
FUNCTION
BMK
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
5
114
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
A18.X1.1b*
/49.D6
=K
A18.X2
PLUGELECTRIESKEYBOARD
/25.C2
A19
OPTIONKEYPAD
A19.X1
SYSTEM PLACE
+K4
B10
HOOTER
/28.C2
=H
+H
=K
+K4
B10.X1
PLUGHOOTER
/28.C2
=H
+H
/98.B3
=K
+K4
B10.X2
PLUGHOOTER
/28.C2
=H
+H
PLUGOPTIONKEYPAD
/35.E7
=K
+K4
B10a*
PLUGHOOTEROPTION
/28.C2
=H
+H
A19.X2
PLUGCANBUS3
/35.F7
=K
+K4
B10a.X2*
PLUGHOOTEROPTION
/28.C1
=H
+H
A21
AIRCONELECTRONICSCC0129POLIG
/96.A2
=K
+K4
B11l
LOUDSPEAKERLEFT
/34.E7
=K
+K3
A21.X1
PLUGAIRCONELECTRONICSCC01
/62.B3
=K
+K4
B11l.X1
PLUGLOUDSPEAKERLEFT
/34.E7
=K
+K3
A21.XB
DIAGNOSTICPLUGAIRCONDITIONINGELECTRONICS
/70.E6
=K
+K4
B11l.X2
PLUGLOUDSPEAKERLEFT
/34.F7
=K
+K3
A21a
AIRCONELECTRONICSCC0142POLIG
/97.B1
=K
+K4
B11r
LOUDSPEAKERRIGHT
/34.E8
=K
+K3
A21a.X2
PLUGAIRCONELECTRONICSCC01
/64.B1
=K
+K4
B11r.X1
PLUGLOUDSPEAKERRIGHT
/34.E8
=K
+K3
A22
KEYPADHEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
/99.B2
=K
+K4
B11r.X2
PLUGLOUDSPEAKERRIGHT
/34.F8
=K
+K3
A22.X1
PLUGKEYBOARDHEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
/39.E6
=K
+K4
B12
PRESSURESWITCHBRAKELIGHT
/25.E1
=H
+H3
A204
CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMGROENEVELD
/78.C5
=K
+K4
B12.X
PLUGPRESSURESWITCH
/25.E1
=H
+H3
A204.X*
/78.C4
=K
+K4
B13
COOLINGWATERLEVEL
/21.C4
=H
+H
A205*
/78.D3
=H
+H3
B13.X
PLUGCOOLINGWATERLEVEL
/21.C4
=H
+H
A205.X*
/78.D3
=H
+H3
B14
TRANSMISSIONTEMPERATURE
/21.C5
=F
+F3
A700C.6
MOTORCONTROLENGINESIDE6CYLINDER
/104.A1
=M
+M
B14.X
PLUGTRANSMISSIONTEMPERATURE
/21.C5
=F
+F3
A700C.6.X1
PLUGENGINESIDE
/105.E2
=M
+M
B15
INDUCTIVESWITCHBUCKETRETURNTODIG
/56.C2
=V
+V3
A700C4
MOTORCONTROLENGINESIDE4CYLINDER
/113.A1
=M
+M
B15.X
PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH
/56.C2
=V
+V3
A700D
MOTORCONTROLVEHICLESIDE
/93.B1
=M
+M
B16
BACKUPALARM
/45.C5
=H
+H5
A700D.X2
PLUGVEHICLESIDE
/47.E1
=M
+M
B16.X
PLUGBACKUPALARM
/45.D5
=H
+H5
A.X1*
PLUGCIRCULATINGPUMPDBW2010
/80.E6
=B
+B2
B16a.X1*
PLUGREVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTORCANBESWITCHEDOFF
/45.D5
=H
+H5
B1
SPEEDSENSORTRANSMISSION
/78.C6
=F
+F3
B16b.X*
PLUGREVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTORCANBESWITCHEDOFF
/45.C7
=H
+H5
B1.X
PLUGSPEEDSENSOR
/78.C6
=F
+F3
B16c.X1*
PLUGOPTIONBACKUPALARM
/45.C5
=H
+H1
B2
SPEEDSENSORCONTROLMOTOR1
/78.C7
=F
+F3
B17
INDUCTIVESWITCHLIFTKICKOUT
/56.C4
=V
+V
B2.X
PLUGSPEEDSENSORCONTROLMOTOR1
/78.C7
=F
+F3
B17.B
PLUGLIFTKICKOUT
/56.B4
=V
+V
B2a
SPEEDSENSORCONTROLMOTOR2
/78.C8
=F
+F3
B17.X
PLUGLIFTKICKOUT
/56.B4
=V
+V
B2a.X
PLUGSPEEDSENSORCONTROLMOTOR2
/78.C8
=F
+F3
B17.X_1
PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH
/56.C4
=V
+V
B3
PRESSURESWITCHEMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMP
/23.C5
=H
+H5
B19
PRESSURESWITCHBRAKEACCUMULATOR
/21.C3
=K
+K6
B3.X
PLUGPRESSURESWITCH
/23.C5
=H
+H5
B19.X
PLUGPRESSURESWITCH
/21.C3
=K
+K6
B3a
PRESSURESWITCHCHECKEMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMP
/23.C4
=H
+H4
B25
TANKPIPESENSOR
/21.C1
=H
+H2
B3a.X
PLUGPRESSURESWITCH
/23.C4
=H
+H4
B25.X
PLUGTANKPIPESENSOR
/21.C1
=H
+H2
B4
AIRFILTERCONTAMINATION
/23.C6
=H
+H
B26
TEMPERATURESENSORICEUPPROTECTION
/64.D5
=K
+K4
B4.X_1
PLUGPRESSURESWITCH
/23.C6
=H
+H
B26a
TEMPERATURESENSORICEUPPROTECTION
/64.D7
=K
+K4
B8
HYDRAULICOILTEMPERATURESENSOR
/21.C6
=H
+H1
B27
PRESSURESWITCHAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
/62.C4
=H
+H
B8.X
PLUGHYDRAULICOILTEMPERATURESENSOR
/21.C6
=H
+H1
B27.X
PLUGPRESSURESWITCH
/62.C4
=H
+H
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
SHEET
BMK
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
FUNCTION
BMK
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Ort
Blatt
von
Anlage
003
6
114
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
B27.X.2*
PLUGPRESSURESWITCH
/69.D8
=H
B28
PRESSURESWITCHRIDECONTROL
/23.C6
B28.X
PLUGPRESSURESWITCH
B32
SYSTEM PLACE
+H
B711
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1
/108.B2
=M
+M
=K
+K
B711.X
PLUGENGINESPEEDSENSOR1
/108.B2
=M
+M
/23.C6
=K
+K
B712
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2
/108.B4
=M
+M
PRESSURESWITCHFLOATPOSITION
/56.C1
=K
+K4
B712.X
PLUGENGINESPEEDSENSOR2
/108.B5
=M
+M
B32.X
PLUGPRESSURESWITCH
/56.C1
=K
+K4
B713
PHASESENSOR
/108.B7
=M
+M
B39
AIRCONAMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSOR
/62.D5
=K
+K6
B713.X
PLUGPHASESENSOR
/108.B7
=M
+M
B39.X
PLUGAMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSOR
/62.D6
=K
+K6
B.X6*
PLUGAUXILIARYHEATERDBW2010
/80.D5
=B
+B2
B40
INTERIORTEMPERATURESENSOR
/67.E6
=K
+K4
C.X1*
PLUGCIRCULATINGPUMPDBW2010
/80.E6
=B
+B2
B42
SUNSENSORAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
/62.D7
=K
+K1
E1
REARLAMPLEFT
/25.E2
=B
+B1
B42.X
PLUGSUNSENSORAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
/62.D7
=K
+K1
E2
INDOORLIGHTING
/19.E7
=K
+K3
B43
INDUCTIVESWITCHDISTRIBUTORLH
/77.C7
=H
+H5
E2.X1
PLUGINDOORLIGHTING
/19.E7
=K
+K3
B44
INDUCTIVESWITCHLEVELLH
/77.C4
=H
+H5
E2.X2
PLUGINDOORLIGHTING
/19.E7
=K
+K3
B45
PRESSURESENSORHIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP
/54.C7
=H
+H4
E2.X3
PLUGINDOORLIGHTING
/19.E7
=K
+K3
B45.X
PLUGPRESSURESENSORHIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP
/54.C7
=H
+H4
E3
DRIVINGHEADLIGHTLEFT
/25.E4
=V
+V1
B200*
INDUCTIVESWITCHJOYSTICKSTEERING
/72.C4
=K
+K4
E3.X
PLUGDRIVINGHEADLIGHTLEFT
/25.E4
=V
+V1
B200.X*
PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH
/72.C4
=K
+K4
E3.Xa*
PLUGCOUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONLEFT
/26.E3
=V
+V
B201*
PRESSURESWITCHJOYSTICKSTEERING
/72.C2
=H
+H3
E3.Xb*
PLUGCOUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONLEFT
/26.F3
=V
+V
B201.X*
PLUGPRESSURESWITCH
/72.C2
=H
+H3
E4
DRIVINGHEADLIGHTRIGHT
/25.E5
=V
+V1
B202*
SIGNALTRANSMITTERJOYSTICKSTEERING
/71.C6
=K
+K4
E4.X
PLUGDRIVINGHEADLIGHTRIGHT
/25.E5
=V
+V1
B202.X*
PLUGSIGNALTRANSMITTERJOYSTICKSTEERING
/71.C6
=K
+K4
E4.Xa*
PLUGCOUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONRIGHT
/26.E6
=V
+V
B203*
PRESSURESWITCHCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEM
/78.D5
=V
+V1
E4.Xb*
PLUGCOUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONRIGHT
/26.F6
=V
+V
B203.X*
PLUGPRESSURESWITCH
/78.E5
=V
+V1
E5
REARLIGHTRIGHT
/25.E7
=B
+B2
B213*
INDUCTIVESWITCHCUTOFFTILTCYLINDER
/61.C7
=V
+V2
E6
REARLIGHTLEFT24V5W
/25.E2
=B
+B1
B213.X*
PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH
/61.C7
=V
+V2
E7
REARLIGHTRIGHT24V5W
/25.E6
=B
+B2
B701
OILPRESSURE
/106.B5
=M
+M
E8
CONTEURLIGHTLEFT24V4W
/25.E3
=K
+K3
B701.X
PLUGOILPRESSURE
/106.B5
=M
+M
E9
CONTEURLIGHTRIGHT24V4W
/25.E6
=K
+K3
B703
CHARGEAIRPRESSURE
/106.B2
=M
+M
E10
WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT24V70W
/30.E4
=K
+K3
B703.X
PLUGCHARGEAIRPRESSURE
/106.B2
=M
+M
E10.X
PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT
/30.E4
=K
+K3
B707
PLUGCHARGEAIRTEMPERATURE
/107.C7
=M
+M
E10a
WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT24V70W
/30.E5
=K
+K3
B707.X
PLUGCHARGEAIRTEMPERATURE
/107.C7
=M
+M
E10a..X
PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT
/30.E5
=K
+K3
B708
COOLANTTEMPERATURE
/107.C5
=M
+M
E10b*
XENONWORKINGPROJECTOR
/30.E5
=K
+K3
B708.X
PLUGCOOLANTTEMPERATURE
/107.C5
=M
+M
E10b.X*
PLUGXENON
/30.E5
=K
+K3
B709
FUELTEMPERATURE
/107.C3
=M
+M
E11
WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT
/30.E7
=K
+K3
B709.X
PLUGFUELTEMPERATURE
/107.C3
=M
+M
E11.X
PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT
/30.E7
=K
+K3
B710
WATERDETECTOR
/106.C7
=M
+M
E11a
/30.E7
=K
+K3
B710.X
PLUGWATERDETECTOR
/106.C7
=M
+M
E11a.X
PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORFRONTRIGHT
/30.E7
=K
+K3
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
SHEET
BMK
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
FUNCTION
BMK
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
7
114
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
E11b*
/30.E8
=K
E11b.X*
PLUGXENON
/30.E8
E12*
WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARLEFT
E12.b*
SYSTEM PLACE
+K3
F02*
/84.C7
=H
+H
=K
+K3
F03
EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMP
/19.D4
=H
+H5
/32.E3
=K
+K3
F03**
OPTIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40
/83.C6
=H
+H5.
/32.E4
=K
+K3
F03*
/84.C6
=H
+H5
E12.b.X*
PLUGE12b
/32.D4
=K
+K3
F07
Kl.30HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS
/19.D5
=H
+H5
E12.X*
PLUGE12
/32.E3
=K
+K3
F07*
/84.D7
=H
+H5
E12a*
/32.E4
=K
+K3
F07**
/83.D7
=H
+H5.
E12a.X*
PLUGE12a
/32.D4
=K
+K3
F07*.X1*
OPTIONBATTERYKS40
/83.D7
=H
+H5.
E13*
WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREARRIGHT
/32.E6
=K
+K3
F07*.X1
VERSIONBATTERYKSL586
/84.D7
=H
+H5
E13.b*
/32.E7
=K
+K3
F07.X1
PLUGKl.30HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS
/19.D5
=H
+H5
E13.b.X*
PLUGE13b
/32.D7
=K
+K3
F07.X2
PLUGKl.30HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS
/19.E5
=H
+H5
E13.X*
PLUGE13
/32.D6
=K
+K3
F07B
HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSKl.15
/27.C1
=K
+K2
E13a*
/32.E7
=K
+K3
F10
DISPLAYUNIT
/35.D2
=K
+K2
E13a.X*
PLUGE13a
/32.D7
=K
+K3
F11
PRESSURESWITCHB28B32
/56.E1
=K
+K2
E14l
LICENCEPLATELIGHTLEFT24V10W
/25.D8
=H
+H1
F12*
/78.B3
=K
+K2
E14r
LICENCEPLATELIGHTRIGHT24V10W
/25.D8
=H
+H1
F13
CONDENSERFAN
/68.B2
=K
+K2
E16
WORKINGPROJECTORREARLEFT
/31.E4
=H
+H1
F14*
DIESELPREHEATING
/55.A8
=K
+K2
E16.X
PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORREARLEFT
/31.E4
=H
+H1
F15
LHCONTROLLEVER
/51.A5
=K
+K2
E17
WORKINGPROJECTORREARRIGHT
/31.E7
=H
+H1
F18
WINDSCREENWIPERREAR
/28.C8
=K
+K2
E17.X
PLUGWORKINGPROJECTORREARRIGHT
/31.E7
=H
+H1
F19
Kl.15AIRCONDITIONINGELECTRONICS
/62.B2
=K
+K2
E200
RESERVELIGHTING
/45.D8
=K
+K4
F19A
Kl.30AIRCONDITIONINGELECTRONICS
/62.B1
=K
+K2
E200.X
PLUGRESERVELIGHTING
/45.D8
=K
+K4
F20
WINDSCREENWASHER,HOOTER
/28.C3
=K
+K2
F2
HIGHBEAMLEFT
/25.B5
=K
+K2
F21
LOWBEAM/DRIVINGLIGHT
/25.B3
=K
+K2
F3
HIGHBEAMHIGHBEAM
/25.B6
=K
+K2
F22
STOPLIGHTLIGHTING
/45.A8
=K
+K2
F4
DRIVINGLIGHTLEFT
/25.B3
=K
+K2
F23*
REVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTORPARTICLEFILTER
/75.A3
=K
+K2
F5
DRIVINGLIGHTRIGHT
/25.B4
=K
+K2
F24
IGNITIONONMOTORCONTROL
/47.B4
=K
+K2
F6
PROFILELIGHT/PARKINGLIGHTLEFT
/20.C6
=K
+K2
F25
WARNINGBEACON
/33.C2
=K
+K2
F7
PROFILELIGHT/PARKINGLIGHTRIGHT
/20.C6
=K
+K2
F26
DIAGNOSTICPLUGIMMOBILISER
/40.C6
=K
+K2
F8
DRIVER'SSEATRADIOKl.58
/19.B8
=K
+K2
F27
PROFILELIGHT/IDENTIFICATION/CONTEURLIGHT
/20.C8
=K
+K2
F8A
INDOORLIGHTINGAUXILIARYHEATER
/19.B7
=K
+K2
F29
IGNITIONSTARTERSWITCHBYPASS
/19.B3
=K
+K2
F9
LHCONTROLLEVEROPTIONS
/51.A6
=K
+K2
F30
VOLTAGECONVERTER(RADIO)
/34.B2
=K
+K2
F01
MAINFUSES
/19.D2
=H
+H5
F31A
WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTLEFT
/30.B3
=K
+K2
F01**
/83.C3
=H
+H5.
F31B
/30.B5
=K
+K2
F01*
/84.C3
=H
+H5
F32A
/31.B2
=K
+K2
F02
HEATINGFLANGE
/19.D4
=H
+H
F32B
/31.B5
=K
+K2
F02**
/83.C7
=H
+H.
F33A
/32.B2
=K
+K2
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
SHEET
BMK
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
FUNCTION
BMK
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
8
114
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
F33B
/32.B4
=K
F34*
REFUELLINGPUMP
/55.A6
F35
MASTER
F36
SYSTEM PLACE
+K2
F010.X1
PLUGACKNOWLEDGEMENTHEATINGFLANGE
/19.C5
=H
+H5
=K
+K2
F010.X2
PLUGACKNOWLEDGEMENTHEATERFLANGE
/19.D5
=H
+H5
/40.B4
=K
+K2
F208*
DIESELPREHEATING40
/82.C4
=K
+K2
MOTORCONTROL
/47.B3
=K
+K2
F209*
INPUTMODULE4LOGIC
/50.B1
=K
+K2
F38
MOTORCONTROLLOGIC
/47.B5
=K
+K2
F210*
Kl:15INPUTMODULE4
/50.B3
=K
+K2
F39*
PRESELECTIONDIALAUXILIARYHEATER
/81.A5
=K
+K2
F213*
CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER
/61.C2
=K
+K2
F40*
AUXILIARYHEATER
/81.A8
=K
+K2
F216*
AUTOMATICRUNOUT
/47.B8
=K
+K2
F42*
AUXILIARYHEATERNOZZLESTICKPREHEATER
/80.D2
=K
+K2
G1
BATTERY
/19.E2
=B
+B
F43
MODULESLOGIC
/41.B2
=K
+K2
G1*
/84.D3
=B
+B1
F44
INPUTMODULE1
/41.B7
=K
+K2
G1**
/83.D3
=B
+B1.
F45
INPUTMODULE2
/41.B3
=K
+K2
G2
BATTERY
/19.E3
=B
+B1
F46*
INPUTMODULE3
/71.A3
=K
+K2
G2*
/84.D4
=B
+B1
F47
OUTPUTMODULE1BK1
/42.B4
=K
+K2
G2**
/83.D4
=B
+B1.
F48
OUTPUTMODULE1BK1
/42.B7
=K
+K2
G3
ALTERNATOR
/19.E4
=M
+M
F49*
OUTPUTMODULE1
/55.E2
=K
+K2
G3*
/84.E6
=M
+M
F50*
WORKINGBASKET
/59.B1
=K
+K2
G3**
/83.E6
=M
+M.
F51
OUTPUTMODULE2BK4
/43.A6
=K
+K2
G700*
GENERATOROPTION
/105.B4
=M
+M
F52
OUTPUTMODULE2BK3
/43.A7
=K
+K2
G700
GENERATOR
/105.B3
=M
+M
F53
OUTPUTMODULE1DO3
/77.B2
=K
+K2
H15
BLINKERLEFT24V21WORANGE
/25.E4
=V
+V1
F54
MASTERLOGIC
/40.B5
=K
+K2
H16
BLINKERRIGHT24V21W
/25.E5
=V
+V1
F55
OUTPUTMODULE2BK1
/44.A4
=K
+K2
H17
BLINKERBACKLEFT24V21W
/25.E2
=B
+B1
F56
OUTPUTMODULE2BK2
/44.A7
=K
+K2
H18
BLINKERRIGHTREAR24V21W
/25.E7
=B
+B2
F59
OUTPUTMODULE1BK4
/43.A2
=K
+K2
H20
BRAKELIGHTLEFT24V21W
/25.E2
=B
+B1
F60
OUTPUTMODULE1BK3
/43.A3
=K
+K2
H21
STOPLIGHTRIGHT24V21W
/25.E7
=B
+B2
F61
OUTPUTMODULE2DO3
/45.A1
=K
+K2
H22
WARNINGBEACON
/33.E3
=K
+K3
F62
OUTPUTMODULE2DO4
/45.A2
=K
+K2
H22.X
PLUGWARNINGBEACON
/33.E3
=K
+K3
F63*
OUTPUTMODULE3BK1
/48.A4
=K
+K2
H22a
OPTIONBACKUPALARM
/45.C3
=H
+H1
F64*
OUTPUTMODULE3BK2
/48.A6
=K
+K2
H22a.X1*
/45.C3
=H
+H1
F65*
OUTPUTMODULE3BK3
/49.A1
=K
+K2
H22a.X2*
/45.D3
=H
+H1
F66*
OUTPUTMODULE3BK4
/49.A3
=K
+K2
H40
BUZZER
/54.C8
=K
+K2
F71
KEYPADS
/39.B2
=K
+K2
H40.X1
PLUGBUZZER
/54.C8
=K
+K2
F73*
REARAREAMONITORING
/76.A5
=K
+K2
H40.X2
PLUGBUZZER
/54.C8
=K
+K2
F74
MIRROR/REARWINDOWHEATER
/33.B6
=K
+K2
H50
PROFILELIGHT/PARKINGLIGHTLEFTFRONT24V4W
/25.E4
=V
+V1
F75
RADIOKl.58ELECTRICALSOCKET12V
/34.B5
=K
+K2
H51
PROFILELIGHT/PARKINGLIGHT24V4W
/25.E5
=V
+V1
F76
RADIO
/34.B5
=K
+K2
H52
REVERSINGLAMPLEFT
/25.E3
=B
+B1
F010
FEEDBACKHEATINGFLANGE
/19.C5
=H
+H5
H53
REVERSINGLAMPRIGHT24V21W
/25.E6
=B
+B2
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
SHEET
BMK
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
FUNCTION
BMK
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
9
114
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
H54
LOWBEAM24V70WH7
/25.E4
=V
H55
LOWBEAM24V70WH7
/25.E5
H56
HIGHBEAM24V70WH3
H57
SYSTEM PLACE
+V1
K33B
/32.B6
=K
+K2
=V
+V1
K208*
WORKINGBASKET
/59.B6
=K
+K2.
/25.E4
=V
+V1
K213*
CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER
/61.C6
=K
+K2
HIGHBEAM24V70WH3
/25.E5
=V
+V1
K216*
AUTOMATICRUNOUT
/47.D8
=K
+K2
H58*
REVERSEWARNINGLIGHTREDFLASHING
/55.C3
=B
+B1
K227*
DIESELPREHEATING40
/82.C5
=K
+K2
H59*
REVERSEWARNINGLIGHTREDFLASHING
/55.C4
=B
+B1
K228*
DIESELPREHEATING40
/82.C6
=K
+K2
K1
FLASHERUNIT
/27.C8
=K
+K2
K240
HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS
/27.A4
=K
+K2
K2
PROFILELIGHT/IDENTIFICATION/CONTEURLIGHT
/20.C7
=K
+K2
K243*
AUXILIARYHEATERNOZZLESTICKPREHEATER
/80.D3
=K
+K2
K3
LOWBEAM
/25.B5
=K
+K2
K244
CONDENSERFAN
/68.B4
=K
+K2
K3A
HIGHBEAM
/25.B7
=K
+K2
K245
CONDENSERFAN
/69.B7
=K
+K
K5
SIMULATIOND+
/20.C4
=K
+K2
K245
CONDENSERFAN
/68.B7
=K
+K2
K5a
INTERVALWINDSCREENWIPERFRONT
/28.B4
=K
+K1
K246*
/49.D7
=K
+K2
K5a.X
PLUGINTERVALWINDSCREENWIPERFRONT
/28.C5
=K
+K1
K248*
CONDENSERFAN
/69.B4
=K
+K2.
K8
WINDSCREENWIPERREAR
/28.C7
=K
+K2
Kl.15*
Kl.15CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER
/61.B2
=K
+K2
K9
WARNINGBEACON
/33.C3
=K
+K2
Kl.15.X
CONNECTIONKl.15A4
/19.B2
=K
+K2
K01
IGNITIONSTARTERSWITCHBYPASS
/19.C2
=K
+K2
Kl.30.X
CONNECTIONKl.30A4
/19.D2
=K
+K2
K04
HEATINGFLANGE
/19.D6
=H
+H5
Kl.30.Xa*
Kl.30DIESELPREHEATING40
/82.B3
=K
+K2
K04**
/83.B7
=H
+H5.
Kl.30a*
Kl.30AUTOMATICRUNOUT
/47.A8
=K
+K2
K04*
/84.B7
=H
+H5
L2
LEDF2
/25.C6
=K
+K2
K10
/33.B7
=K
+K2
L3
LEDF3
/25.C6
=K
+K2
K11
/23.C2
=H
+H4
L4
LEDF4
/25.C4
=K
+K2
K11*
/84.B6
=H
+H4
L5
LEDF5
/25.C4
=K
+K2
K11**
/83.B6
=H
+H4.
L6
LEDF6
/20.C6
=K
+K2
K11*.X3*
/83.B6
=H
+H4.
L7
LEDF7
/20.C7
=K
+K2
K11*.X4*
/83.B6
=H
+H4.
L8
LEDF8
/19.B8
=K
+K2
K12
RADIOELECTRICALSOCKET12V
/34.B4
=K
+K2
L8A
LEDF8A
/19.B7
=K
+K2
K22
HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTKl.15
/27.C2
=K
+K2
L9
LEDF9
/51.B6
=K
+K2
K22a
HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSMG
/27.C3
=K
+K2
L07B
LEDF07B
/27.D1
=K
+K2
K22b
HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSMG
/27.C4
=K
+K2
L10
LEDF10
/35.E2
=K
+K2
K25*
HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSUSA
/27.C5
=K
+K2
L11
LEDF11
/56.E1
=K
+K2
K26*
/27.C7
=K
+K2
L12*
LEDF12
/78.B3
=K
+K2
K31A
/30.B4
=K
+K2
L13
LEDF13
/68.B3
=K
+K2
K31B
/30.B7
=K
+K2
L14*
LEDF14
/55.B8
=K
+K2
K32A
/31.B4
=K
+K2
L15
LEDF15
/51.B5
=K
+K2
K32B
/31.B7
=K
+K2
L18
LEDF18
/28.C8
=K
+K2
K33A
/32.B3
=K
+K2
L19
LEDF19
/62.B2
=K
+K2
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
SHEET
BMK
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
FUNCTION
BMK
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
10
114
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
L19A
LEDF19A
/62.B1
=K
L20
LEDF20
/28.C3
L21
LEDF21
L22
SYSTEM PLACE
+K2
L55
LEDF55
/44.B5
=K
+K2
=K
+K2
L56
LEDF56
/44.B7
=K
+K2
/25.C3
=K
+K2
L59
LEDF59
/43.B2
=K
+K2
LEDF22
/45.B8
=K
+K2
L60
LEDF60
/43.B3
=K
+K2
L23*
LEDF23
/75.B3
=K
+K2
L61
LEDF61
/45.B2
=K
+K2
L24
LEDF24
/47.B4
=K
+K2
L62
LEDF62
/45.B3
=K
+K2
L25
LEDF25
/33.C2
=K
+K2
L63*
LEDF63
/48.B4
=K
+K2
L26
LEDF26
/40.D6
=K
+K2
L64*
LEDF64
/48.B6
=K
+K2
L27
LEDF27
/20.C8
=K
+K2
L65*
LEDF65
/49.B2
=K
+K2
L29
LEDF29
/19.C3
=K
+K2
L66*
LEDF66
/49.B3
=K
+K2
L30
LEDF30
/34.B2
=K
+K2
L71
LEDF71
/39.B2
=K
+K2
L31A
LEDF31A
/30.C3
=K
+K2
L73*
LEDF73
/76.B5
=K
+K2
L31B
LEDF31B
/30.C6
=K
+K2
L74
LEDF74
/33.C6
=K
+K2
L32A
LEDF32A
/31.B3
=K
+K2
L75
LEDF75
/34.B5
=K
+K2
L32B
LEDF32B
/31.B6
=K
+K2
L76
LEDF76
/34.B6
=K
+K2
L33A
LEDF33A
/32.B2
=K
+K2
L77
LEDD+
/20.C4
=K
+K2
L33B
LEDF33B
/32.B5
=K
+K2
M1
STARTERMOTOR
/19.E3
=M
+M
L34*
LEDF34
/55.B6
=K
+K2
M1*
/84.E5
=M
+M
L35
LEDF35
/40.C4
=K
+K2
M1**
/83.E5
=M
+M.
L36
LEDF36
/47.B3
=K
+K2
M2
WINDSCREENWIPERFRONT
/28.D4
=K
+K1
L38
LEDF38
/47.B5
=K
+K2
M2.X1
PLUGWINDSCREENWIPERFRONT
/28.D4
=K
+K1
L39*
LEDF39
/81.B5
=K
+K2
M2.X2*
PLUGWINDSCREENWIPERFRONTRESERVE
/28.D5
=K
+K1
L40*
LEDF40
/81.B8
=K
+K2
M3
WINDSCREENWIPERREAR
/28.D7
=K
+K2
L42*
LEDF42
/80.D2
=K
+K2
M3.X
PLUGWINDSCREENWIPERREAR
/28.D7
=K
+K2
L43
LEDF43
/41.B2
=K
+K2
M4
WASHINGPUMPFRONT
/28.D6
=K
+K1
L44
LEDF44
/41.B7
=K
+K2
M4.X
PLUGWASHINGPUMPFRONT
/28.E6
=K
+K1
L45
LEDF45
/41.B4
=K
+K2
M5
FANMOTOR
/64.E3
=K
+K4
L46*
LEDF46
/71.B3
=K
+K2
M5.X
PLUGFANMOTOR
/64.D2
=K
+K4
L47
LEDF47
/42.B4
=K
+K2
M6
LIEBHERRCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEM
/77.C3
=H
+H5
L48
LEDF48
/42.B7
=K
+K2
M6.X
PLUGLIEBHERRCENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEM
/77.D3
=H
+H5
L49*
LEDF49
/55.E2
=K
+K2
M7
COMPRESSORSEAT
/19.E8
=K
+K2
L50*
LEDF50
/59.B2
=K
+K2
M7.X
PLUGCOMPRESSORSEAT
/19.E8
=K
+K2
L51
LEDF51
/43.B6
=K
+K2
M8
/23.D2
=H
+H4
L52
LEDF52
/43.B7
=K
+K2
M8*
/84.B5
=H
+H4
L53
LEDF53
/77.B2
=K
+K2
M8**
/83.B5
=H
+H4.
L54
LEDF54
/40.C5
=K
+K2
M9
WASHINGPUMPREAR
/28.D8
=K
+K4
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
SHEET
BMK
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
FUNCTION
BMK
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
11
114
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
M9.X
PLUGWASHINGPUMPREAR
/28.D8
=K
M10*
REFUELLINGPUMP
/55.E6
M11
WATERVALVE
M11.X
SYSTEM PLACE
+K4
OLE17*
CONNECTIONAUXILIARYHEATER
/80.D8
=K
+K2
=H
+H1
OLE18*
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/80.E2
=K
+K2
/65.E3
=K
+K4
OLE19*
LIGHTINGS210
/59.E3
=K
+K2
PLUGWATERVALVE
/65.E2
=K
+K4
OLE20*
LIGHTINGS210
/59.E4
=K
+K2
M13*
CONDENSERFAN
/69.D6
=H
+H3a
OLE21*
CONNECTIONAUXILIARYHEATERTHERMO90
/81.D3
=B
+B2
M13
CONDENSERFAN
/68.D7
=H
+H3
OLE22*
/80.E7
=B
+B2
M13.X
PLUGCONDENSERFAN
/68.D7
=H
+H3
OLE23*
REVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTOR
/75.C1
=H
+H3
M13.X*
PLUGCONDENSERFAN
/69.D6
=H
+H3a
OLE23*
QUICKCHANGEDEVICE
/57.E7
=K
+K4
M14
RECIRCULATEDAIRFLAP
/65.E7
=K
+K4
P1
WORKINGHOURMETER
/20.A3
=K
+K4
M14.X
PLUGRECIRCULATEDAIRFLAP
/65.E6
=K
+K4
P1.X1
PLUGWORKINGHOURMETER
/20.A3
=K
+K4
M15*
CIRCULATINGPUMPDWB2010
/80.D7
=H
+H1
P1.X2
PLUGWORKINGHOURMETER
/20.B3
=K
+K4
M15
FOOTFLAP
/66.E3
=K
+K4
R1
ANGLESENSORINCHPEDAL
/52.C3
=K
+K6
M15.X*
PLUGCIRCULATINGPUMPDWB2010
/80.D7
=H
+H1
R1.X
PLUGANGLESENSOR
/52.C3
=K
+K6
M15.X
PLUGFOOTFLAP
/66.E2
=K
+K4
R2
DROPRESISTORL2
/25.C6
=K
+K2
M16
MIDDLEFLAP
/66.E7
=K
+K4
R3
DROPRESISTORL3
/25.C6
=K
+K2
M16.X
PLUGMIDDLEFLAP
/66.E6
=K
+K4
R4
DROPRESISTORL4
/25.C4
=K
+K2
M17
HEADFLAP
/67.E3
=K
+K4
R5
ANGLESENSORGASPEDAL
/52.C7
=K
+K6
M17.X
PLUGHEADFLAP
/67.E3
=K
+K4
R5
DROPRESISTORL5
/25.C4
=K
+K2
M700
STARTERMOTOR
/105.B6
=M
+M
R5.X
PLUGANGLESENSOR
/52.C6
=K
+K6
MO1
MVMODULATION
/53.C2
=F
+F3
R6
DROPRESISTORL6
/20.C6
=K
+K2
OLE1
SPARELINEKl.W
/19.C4
=K
+K2
R6a*
MIRRORHEATING
/33.E6
=K
+K3
OLE2*
/19.D7
=K
+K2
R6a.X*
PLUGMIRRORHEATING
/33.E6
=K
+K3
OLE3*
WORKINGPROJECTORCABROOFREAR
/31.A8
=K
+K2
R6b*
MIRRORHEATING
/33.E6
=K
+K3
OLE4*
LIGHTINGRFWEOAOPTIONAL
/33.E5
=K
+K2
R6b.X*
PLUGMIRRORHEATING
/33.E6
=K
+K3
OLE5*
/51.F8
=K
+K2
R7
DROPRESISTORL7
/20.C7
=K
+K2
OLE6*
/51.F8
=K
+K2
R8
DROPRESISTORL8
/19.B8
=K
+K2
OLE7*
LOGICOUTPUTMODULE3
/41.D1
=K
+K2
R8A
DROPRESISTORL8A
/19.B7
=K
+K2
OLE8*
LOGICINPUTMODULE3
/42.D1
=K
+K2
R9
DROPRESISTORL9
/51.B6
=K
+K2
OLE9*
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/45.C8
=K
+K2
R9A*
EXCITATIONRESERVE
/20.C2
=K
+K2
OLE10*
AUTOMATICRUNOUT
/47.B7
=K
+K2
R9B
EXCITATIONGG6
/20.C2
=K
+K2
OLE11*
CONNECTIONIMMOBILISER
/79.A4
=K
+K2
R07B
DROPRESISTORL07B
/27.D1
=K
+K2
OLE12*
/79.A8
=K
+K2
R10
DROPRESISTORL10
/35.E2
=K
+K2
OLE13*
/79.F7
=K
+K2
R10*
DIESELPREHEATING
/82.E5
=M
+M
OLE14*
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/80.B3
=K
+K2
R10.X*
PLUGDIESELPREHEATING
/82.E5
=M
+M
OLE15*
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/80.B6
=K
+K2
R11
DROPRESISTORL11
/56.E1
=K
+K2
OLE16*
PLUGRELAYBOARD
/80.C7
=K
+K2
R12
REARWINDOWHEATER
/33.E7
=K
+K2
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
SHEET
BMK
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
FUNCTION
BMK
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
12
114
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
R12.X1
PLUGREARWINDOWHEATER
/33.E7
=K
R12.X2
PLUGREARWINDOWHEATER
/33.E7
R12:*
DROPRESISTORL12
R13
SYSTEM PLACE
+K2
R45
DROPRESISTORL45
/41.B4
=K
+K2
=K
+K2
R46*
DROPRESISTORL46
/71.B3
=K
+K2
/78.B3
=K
+K2
R47
DROPRESISTORL47
/42.B4
=K
+K2
DROPRESISTORL13
/68.B3
=K
+K2
R48
DROPRESISTORL48
/42.B7
=K
+K2
R13*
DIESELPREHEATING
/55.E8
=M
+M
R49*
DROPRESISTORL49
/55.E2
=K
+K2
R13.X*
PLUGDIESELPREHEATING
/55.E8
=M
+M
R50*
DROPRESISTORL50
/59.B2
=K
+K2
R14*
DROPRESISTORL14
/55.B8
=K
+K2
R51
DROPRESISTORL51
/43.B6
=K
+K2
R15
DROPRESISTORL15
/51.B5
=K
+K2
R52
DROPRESISTORL52
/43.B7
=K
+K2
R18
DROPRESISTORL18
/28.C8
=K
+K2
R53
DROPRESISTORF53
/77.B2
=K
+K2
R19
DROPRESISTORL19
/62.B2
=K
+K2
R54
DROPRESISTORL54
/40.C5
=K
+K2
R19A
DROPRESISTORL19A
/62.B1
=K
+K2
R55
DROPRESISTORL55
/44.B5
=K
+K2
R20
DROPRESISTORL20
/28.C3
=K
+K2
R56
DROPRESISTORL56
/44.B7
=K
+K2
R21
DROPRESISTORL21
/25.C3
=K
+K2
R59
DROPRESISTORL59
/43.B2
=K
+K2
R22
DROPRESISTORL22
/45.B8
=K
+K2
R60
DROPRESISTORL60
/43.B3
=K
+K2
R23*
DROPRESISTORL23
/75.B3
=K
+K2
R61
DROPRESISTORL61
/45.B2
=K
+K2
R24
DROPRESISTORL24
/47.B4
=K
+K2
R62
DROPRESISTORL62
/45.B3
=K
+K2
R25
DROPRESISTORL25
/33.C2
=K
+K2
R63*
DROPRESISTORL63
/48.B4
=K
+K2
R26
DROPRESISTORL26
/40.D6
=K
+K2
R64*
DROPRESISTORL64
/48.B6
=K
+K2
R27
DROPRESISTORL27
/20.C8
=K
+K2
R65*
DROPRESISTORL65
/49.B2
=K
+K2
R29
DROPRESISTORL29
/19.C3
=K
+K2
R66*
DROPRESISTORL66
/49.B3
=K
+K2
R30
DROPRESISTORL30
/34.B2
=K
+K2
R71
DROPRESISTORL71
/39.B2
=K
+K2
R31A
DROPRESISTORL31A
/30.C3
=K
+K2
R73*
DROPRESISTORL73
/76.B5
=K
+K2
R31B
DROPRESISTORL31B
/30.C6
=K
+K2
R74
DROPRESISTORL74
/33.C6
=K
+K2
R32A
DROPRESISTORL32A
/31.B3
=K
+K2
R75
DROPRESISTORL75
/34.B5
=K
+K2
R32B
DROPRESISTORL32B
/31.B6
=K
+K2
R76
DROPRESISTORL75
/34.B6
=K
+K2
R33A
DROPRESISTORL33A
/32.B2
=K
+K2
R77
DROPRESISTORL77
/20.C4
=K
+K2
R33B
DROPRESISTORL33B
/32.B5
=K
+K2
R701
HEATERFLANGE
/19.F6
=M
+M
R34*
DROPRESISTORL34
/55.B6
=K
+K2
S1
IGNITIONSWITCH
/19.A3
=K
+K4
R35
DROPRESISTORL35
/40.C4
=K
+K2
S1.X1
PLUGIGNITIONSWITCH
/19.A3
=K
+K4
R36
DROPRESISTORL36
/47.B3
=K
+K2
S1.X1.8a*
/79.A6
=K
+K4
R38
DROPRESISTORL38
/47.B5
=K
+K2
S1.X2
PLUGIGNITIONSWITCH
/19.B4
=K
+K4
R39*
DROPRESISTORL39
/81.B5
=K
+K2
S1.X3
PLUGIGNITIONSWITCH
/19.B4
=K
+K4
R40*
DROPRESISTORL40
/81.B8
=K
+K2
S2
LHCONTROLLEVERVNRANDOPTIONS
/51.E4
=K
+K4
R42*
DROPRESISTORL42
/80.D2
=K
+K2
S2.1
FORWARDNEUTRALBACKWARDS
/51.F4
=K
+K4
R43
DROPRESISTORL43
/41.B2
=K
+K2
S2.2
KICKDOWN
/51.F5
=K
+K4
R44
DROPRESISTORL44
/41.B7
=K
+K2
S2.3
PUSHBUTTONSWITCHOPTION1
/51.F5
=K
+K4
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
SHEET
BMK
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
FUNCTION
BMK
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
13
114
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
S2.4
PUSHBUTTONSWITCHOPTION2
/51.F6
=K
S2.X
PLUGLHCONTROLLEVERVNRANDOPTIONS
/51.E5
S2a*
LHCONTROLLEVERWITHANALOGUESENSOR+GRIPSENSOR
S2a.X2*
SYSTEM PLACE
+K4
SPLICE.X7
REVERSINGLAMP
/25.D7
=H
+H4
=K
+K4
SPLICE.X8
BRAKELIGHT
/25.F1
=H
+H4
/60.D4
=K
+K4
SPLICE.X10*
/78.B2
=H
+H3
PLUGLHCONTROLLEVER
/60.D5
=K
+K4
SPLICE.X30*
WORKINGBASKET
/59.D4
=K
+K6
S3
STEERINGCOLUMNSWITCH
/25.B1
=K
+K1
SPLICE.X70*
LHCONTROLLEVERWITHANALOGUESENSORGRIPSENSOR
/60.C5
=K
+K
S3.X1
PLUGSTEERINGCOLUMNSWITCH
/28.E2
=K
+K1
Splice.X1
LOGICMODULES
/41.D2
=K
+K
S3.X2
PLUGSTEERINGCOLUMNSWITCH
/25.A2
=K
+K1
Splice.X3
OPTIONSLHCONTROLLEVER
/51.D5
=K
+K
S15
BATTERYMAINSWITCH
/19.E1
=H
+H5
Splice.X4*
CONDENSERFAN
/69.D4
=K
+K
S15*
/84.E2
=H
+H5
Splice.X9
WINDSCREENWIPERFRONT
/28.A5
=K
+K
S15**
/83.E2
=H
+H5.
Splice.X11*
/33.D6
=K
+K3
S23*
QUICKCHANGEDEVICE
/57.C7
=K
+K4
Splice.X12*
/33.F6
=K
+K3
S23.X1*
/57.C7
=K
+K4
T1
VOLTAGECONVERTER
/34.B7
=K
+K2
S23.X2*
/57.D7
=K
+K4
T1.X
PLUGVOLTAGECONVERTER
/34.A7
=K
+K2
S23a*
QUICKCHANGEDEVICE
/57.C6
=K
+K4
V1
FREEWHEELINGDIODEK01
/19.C2
=K
+K2
S43*
BACKUPALARMCANBESWITCHEDOFF
/45.A7
=K
+K4
V2*
BLOCKINGDIODE
/28.C1
=H
+H
S43.X1*
PLUGBACKUPALARM
/45.A7
=K
+K4
V2
FREEWHEELINGDIODEk01.30
/19.C3
=K
+K2
S43.X2*
PLUGBACKUPALARM
/45.A7
=K
+K4
V2.X1*
PLUGBLOCKINGDIODE
/28.B1
=H
+H
S202*
PUSHBUTTONSWITCHJOYSTICKSTEERING
/72.C3
=K
+K4
V2.X2*
PLUGBLOCKINGDIODE
/28.C1
=H
+H
S204*
REFUELLINGPUMP
/55.C6
=H
+H2
V3
/34.B4
=K
+K2
S210*
WORKINGBASKET
/59.D3
=K
+K4
V8
FREEWHEELINGDIODEK5
/20.C3
=K
+K2
S210.X1*
PLUGWORKINGBASKET
/59.D3
=K
+K4
V9
FREEWHEELINGDIODEK3
/25.C5
=K
+K2
S210.X2*
PLUGWORKINGBASKET
/59.D3
=K
+K4
V10
FREEWHEELINGDIODEK2
/20.C7
=K
+K2
S212*
RFWEOAOPTIONAL
/33.C4
=K
+K4
V11
/27.C3
=K
+K2
S212.X1*
PLUGRFWEOAOPTIONAL
/33.B4
=K
+K4
V12
FREEWHEELINGDIODEK22a
/27.C4
=K
+K2
S212.X2*
PLUGRFWEOAOPTIONAL
/33.C5
=K
+K4
V13
FREEWHEELINGDIODEK22b
/27.C4
=K
+K2
S212a*
SYMBOLRFWEOAOPTIONAL
/33.B4
=K
+K4
V14*
/27.C6
=K
+K2
S213*
EMERGENCYOFF1WORKINGBASKET
/59.D7
=K
+K4
V15*
/27.C7
=K
+K2
S213*
CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER
/61.C4
=V
+V1
V16
FREEWHEELINGDIODEK31A
/30.B5
=K
+K2
S213.X1*
PLUGCUTOFFTILTCYLINDER
/61.C4
=V
+V1
V17
FREEWHEELINGDIODEK31B
/30.B7
=K
+K2
S213.X2*
/61.C4
=V
+V1
V18
/31.B4
=K
+K2
S214*
EMERGENCYOFF2WORKINGBASKET
/59.D8
=K
+K4
V19
/31.B7
=K
+K2
S216*
EMERGENCYOFFAUTOMATICRUNOUT
/47.C8
=K
+K3
V20
/32.B4
=K
+K2
S222
COMFORTCONTROL3.+4.COMFORTCONTROL
/51.E7
=K
+K4
V21
/32.B6
=K
+K2
S222.X1*
/51.E7
=K
+K4
V32
/68.B4
=K
+K2
S222.X2*
/51.E8
=K
+K4
V32C
BLOCKINGDIODE
/31.B7
=K
+K2
SPLICE.X2
SPLICELOGICMODULES
/42.C2
=K
+K2
V33
/68.B4
=K
+K2
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
SHEET
BMK
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
FUNCTION
BMK
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
14
114
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
V33C
BLOCKINGDIODE
/32.B6
=K
V34
/68.B7
V35
V36
SYSTEM PLACE
+K2
X2.B.50*
PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.50
/69.D6
=K
+K6
=K
+K2
X2.B.51*
PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.51
/69.D7
=K
+K6
/68.B7
=K
+K2
X2.B.52*
PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.52
/69.E7
=K
+K6
/49.D7
=K
+K
X2.J
HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSEU
/27.C6
=K
+K2
V37
/49.D7
=K
+K
X2.S
PLUGCABFLOOR
/62.C5
=K
+K6
V46*
/80.D2
=K
+K2
X2.S**
PLUGCABFLOOROPTION
/69.E8
=K
+K6
V48*
/49.D8
=K
+K2
X2.S.50*
PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.50
/69.D6
=K
+K6
V49
/68.B7
=K
+K2
X2.S.51*
PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.51
/69.D7
=K
+K6
V50
/68.B5
=K
+K2
X2.S.52*
PLUGCABFLOORX2.S.52
/69.E7
=K
+K6
V53
/27.A3
=K
+K2
X3*
PLUGPRESELECTIONDIALTHERMO90
/81.B1
=K
+K4
V57
/33.C8
=K
+K2
X3.J
/27.C8
=K
+K2
V58
FREEWHEELINGDIODEK9
/33.C3
=K
+K2
X4*
PLUGPRESELECTIONDIALDBW2010
/80.B1
=K
+K4
V59
FREEWHEELINGDIODEK8
/28.C6
=K
+K2
X4.J*
JUMPERRESERVE
/20.C1
=K
+K2
V60
/25.C7
=K
+K2
X5*
PLUGNOZZLESTICKPREHEATERDBW2010
/80.E3
=B
+B2
V80
BLOCKINGDIODE
/20.B2
=K
+K2
X5.J*
JUMPERRESERVE
/20.C2
=K
+K2
V81
BLOCKINGDIODE
/20.C3
=K
+K2
X6.J
JUMPERGG6
/20.C2
=K
+K2
V82
BLOCKINGDIODE
/20.D3
=K
+K2
X11.ST1*
PLUGAUXILIARYHEATERTHERMO90
/81.D5
=B
+B2
V83*
BLOCKINGDIODE
/27.D2
=K
+K2
X12.ST2*
/81.C6
=B
+B2
V84*
BLOCKINGDIODE
/27.D2
=K
+K2
X13.ST3*
/81.D7
=B
+B2
V85
BLOCKINGDIODE
/27.D3
=K
+K2
X16.B
PLUGLIGHTINGREARHATCH
/31.D4
=H
+H
V86
BLOCKINGDIODE
/27.D4
=K
+K2
X16.S
PLUGLIGHTINGREARHATCH
/31.D4
=H
+H
V87
BLOCKINGDIODE
/27.D8
=K
+K2
X22a.B
PLUGCABIN
/30.D4
=K
+K4
V88*
BLOCKINGDIODE
/27.D8
=K
+K2
X22a.S
PLUGCABIN
/30.D4
=K
+K4
V89
BLOCKINGDIODE
/27.C8
=K
+K2
X22b.B
PLUGWIRINGHARNESSCABIN
/19.D7
=K
+K4
V100*
BLOCKINGDIODE
/57.B7
=K
+K2
X22b.S
PLUGWIRINGHARNESSCAB
/19.D7
=K
+K4
V100.X1*
PLUGBLOCKINGDIODE
/57.B7
=K
+K2
X26.B
PLUGE12
/32.D3
=K
+K3
V100.X2*
PLUGBLOCKINGDIODE
/57.B7
=K
+K2
X26.S*
PLUGE12
/32.E3
=K
+K3
W1
ANTENNA
/34.D8
=K
+K3
X26a.S*
PLUGE12b
/32.E4
=K
+K3
X1.B
PLUGCABFLOOR
/20.E3
=K
+K6
X27.B
PLUGE12a
/32.D4
=K
+K3
X1.B.64*
/57.B8
=H
+H
X27.S*
PLUGE12a
/32.D4
=K
+K3
X1.B.65*
/57.E8
=H
+H
X28.B
PLUGFANMOTOR
/21.B7
=H
+H
X1.J
HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTSEU
/27.C5
=K
+K2
X28.B
PLUGE13
/32.D6
=K
+K3
X1.S
PLUGCABFLOOR
/20.D3
=K
+K6
X28.S
PLUGFANMOTOR
/21.B7
=H
+H
X1.S.61a*
PLUGCABFLOORX1.S.61
/69.C8
=K
+K
X28.S*
PLUGE13
/32.D6
=K
+K3
X2.B
PLUGCABFLOOR
/62.C5
=K
+K6
X28a.S*
PLUGE13b
/32.E7
=K
+K3
X2.B**
PLUGCABFLOOROPTION
/69.E8
=K
+K6
X29.B
PLUGE13a
/32.D7
=K
+K3
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
SHEET
BMK
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
FUNCTION
BMK
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
15
114
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
X29.S*
PLUGE13a
/32.D7
=K
X31
PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH
/77.C5
X33
PLUGMAGNETICSPILOTCONTROLUNIT
X33.X
SYSTEM PLACE
+K3
X.RS232.B
PLUGDIAGNOSTICLEADAIRCONDITIONINGELECTRONICS
/70.B7
=K
+K
=H
+H5
XA16a.X1.58*
CANCONNECTION.INPUTMODULE1
/37.E7
=H
+H3
/56.C7
=K
+K4
XB39
PLUGAMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSOR
/62.D6
=K
+K6
PLUGMAGNETICSPILOTCONTROLUNIT
/56.C7
=K
+K4
XE14l.a*
PLUGLICENCEPLATELIGHTITALIANVERSION
/25.D7
=H
+H1
X37a*
PLUGRFWEOOPTIONAL
/25.C8
=H
+H3
XE14l.a.*
/25.E7
=H
+H1
X37b*
PLUGRFWEOOPTIONAL
/25.C8
=H
+H3
XE14l.b*
/25.D7
=H
+H1
X43
PLUGINDUCTIVESWITCH
/77.C7
=V
+V1
XE14r.a*
/25.D8
=H
+H1
X44*
PLUGRELAYBOARDDIESELPREHEATING
/82.B5
=K
+K2
XE14r.a.*
/25.E8
=H
+H1
X45.B*
PLUGCONNECTORLINTFILTER
/69.B5
=K
+K2
XE14r.b*
/25.E8
=H
+H1
X45.S*
PLUGCONNECTORLINTFILTER
/69.B5
=K
+K2
XMSP1
MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEFRONTLEFT
/19.D3
=H
+H2
X48.B*
PLUGEMERGENCYOFF2WORKINGBASKET
/59.C8
=H
+H
XMSP1.e*
/59.F4
=H
+H2
X48.S*
PLUGEMERGENCYOFF2WORKINGBASKET
/59.C8
=H
+H
XMSP1a
/31.F4
=K
+H2
X50.B*
/78.C2
=H
+H3
XMSP1b
/43.D2
=H
+H2
X50.S*
/78.C2
=H
+H3
XMSP1c
/25.F6
=H
+H2
X51.B*
PLUGEMERGENCYOFF
/59.A7
=K
+K
XMSP1d*
/48.D3
=H
+H2
X51.S*
PLUGEMERGENCYOFF
/59.A7
=K
+K
XMSP4.1
MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEREARLEFT
/19.E1
=H
+H
X52.B*
PLUGREVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTOR
/75.D4
=K
+K2
XMSP4.1*
/84.D2
=H
+H
X60
DIAGNOSTICPLUG
/40.F6
=K
+K2
XMSP4.1**
/83.D2
=H
+H.
X60a
DIAGNOSTICPLUGENGINECONTROLUNIT
/70.E2
=M
+M
XMSP4.2
MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEBACKLEFT
/19.D3
=H
+H5
X70
12VELECTRICALSOCKET
/34.E4
=K
+K5
XMSP4.3
MASSGROUPINGBLOCKHINDCARRIAGEBACKLEFT
/19.F3
=H
+H5
X70.X1
PLUG12VELECTRICALSOCKET
/34.E4
=K
+K5
XMSP6.1
MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABREARWALL
/19.D2
=K
+K2
X70.X2
PLUG12VELECTRICALSOCKET
/34.E4
=K
+K5
XMSP6.10*
/71.C2
=K
+K2
X71
ELECTRICALSOCKETCIGARETTELIGHTER
/34.E3
=K
+K4
XMSP6.11*
/71.C4
=K
+K2
X71.X
PLUGCIGARETTELIGHTER
/34.E3
=K
+K4
XMSP6.12*
/57.E8
=K
+K2
X73
CIGARETTELIGHTER
/34.F3
=K
+K4
XMSP6.13*
/33.F7
=K
+K2
X75.B*
PLUGINTERIORTEMPERATURESENSOR
/67.C6
=K
+K4
XMSP6.14*
/55.C8
=K
+K2
X75.S
PLUGINTERIORTEMPERATURESENSOR
/67.C6
=K
+K4
XMSP6.15*
/81.C6
=K
+K2
X223.B*
PLUGDIESELPREHEATING40
/80.F3
=K
+K2
XMSP6.16*
/80.F1
=K
+K2
X223.S*
PLUGDIESELPREHEATING40
/82.B6
=K
+K2
XMSP6.18*
/30.F5
=K
+K2
X321a*
COUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONLEFT
/26.E2
=V
+V
XMSP6.19*
/82.F6
=K
+K6
X321b*
COUNTRYSPECIFICTYPE/EXECUTIONRIGHT
/26.E8
=V
+V
XMSP6.2
/19.D2
=K
+K2
X700.B
PLUGMOTORCONTROL
/105.D7
=M
+M
XMSP6.20*
/82.F6
=K
+K6
X700.S
PLUGMOTORCONTROL
/105.D7
=M
+M
XMSP6.21*
/76.C5
=K
+K2
X701.B
PLUGMOTORCONTROL
/105.D8
=M
+M
XMSP6.22*
/75.D4
=K
+K2
X701.S
PLUGMOTORCONTROL
/105.D8
=M
+M
XMSP6a
/28.F8
=K
+K2
X.M7a.S
PLUGDIAGNOSTICLEADAIRCONDITIONINGELECTRONICS
/70.B6
=K
+K2
XMSP6b
/39.B4
=K
+K2
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
SHEET
BMK
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
FUNCTION
BMK
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
16
114
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
XMSP6c
/33.F7
=K
XMSP6d*
/45.B7
XMSP6e*
XMSP7a
SYSTEM PLACE
+K2
Y11a.JPT*
PLUGOPTIONALEQUIPMENT3
/57.C3
=V
+V
=K
+K2
Y11b*
EP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT
/50.C7
=V
+V1
/33.B5
=K
+K2
Y11b.JPT*
PLUGEP3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT
/50.C7
=V
+V1
MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABROOF
/32.F6
=K
+K3
Y12
OPTIONALEQUIPMENT2
/57.C2
=V
+V
XMSP7b
MASSGROUPINGBLOCKCABROOF
/25.F6
=K
+K3
Y12.JPT
/57.C2
=V
+V
XMSP10*
/84.F4
=M
+M
Y12a*
/50.C6
=V
+V1
XMSP12
MASSGROUPINGBLOCKA4
/19.D2
=K
+K2
Y12a*
OPTIONALEQUIPMENT4
/57.C4
=V
+V
XMSP12.1*
MASSGROUPINGBLOCKA4
/47.E8
=K
+K2
Y12a.JPT*
/50.C6
=V
+V1
XMSP12.2*
MASSGROUPINGBLOCKA4
/79.C6
=K
+K2
Y12a.JPT*
/57.C4
=V
+V
XMSP63*
/78.D4
=K
+K2
Y12b*
/50.C8
=V
+V1
XMSP200*
/50.C2
=K
+K2
Y12b.JPT*
/50.C8
=V
+V1
XMSP201*
/61.D4
=K
+K2
Y13
FANMOTORINTERCOOLER
/21.C7
=H
+H
XMSP.20*
/69.F7
=K
+K2
Y13.X
PLUGFANMOTOR
/21.C7
=H
+H
Y2
TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONFORWARD
/54.C1
=H
+H
Y14
WORKINGHYDRAULICSLOCKOUT
/57.C5
=H
+H
Y2.DT
PLUGTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONFORWARD
/54.C1
=H
+H
Y14.JPT
PLUGWORKINGHYDRAULICSLOCKOUT
/57.C5
=H
+H
Y2a
TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONFORWARD
/54.C3
=H
+H
Y15
PWMSWIVELANGLETRAVELPUMP
/54.C5
=H
+H
Y2a.DT
PLUGTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONFORWARD
/54.C3
=H
+H
Y15.JPT
PLUGPWMSWIVELANGLETRAVELPUMP
/54.C5
=H
+H
Y3
TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONBACKWARDS
/54.C2
=H
+H
Y15a
PWMSWIVELANGLETRAVELPUMP
/54.C6
=H
+H
Y3.DT
PLUGTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONBACKWARDS
/54.C2
=H
+H
Y15a.JPT
PLUGPWMSWIVELANGLETRAVELPUMP
/54.C6
=H
+H
Y3a
TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONBACKWARDS
/54.C4
=H
+H
Y16
OVERSPEEDPROTECTION
/53.C5
=H
+H
Y3a.DT
PLUGTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONBACKWARDS
/54.C4
=H
+H
Y16.JPT
PLUGOVERSPEEDPROTECTION
/53.C5
=H
+H
Y6
TRAVELRANGES,MODULATION
/53.C2
=F
+F3
Y17
LIFTKICKOUT
/56.C7
=K
+K4
Y6.1
TRAVELRANGE1
/53.C4
=F
+F3
Y18
FLOATPOSITION
/56.C7
=K
+K4
Y6.2
TRAVELRANGE2
/53.C2
=F
+F3
Y20
RIDECONTROL
/23.C7
=V
+V1
Y6.3
TRAVELRANGE3
/53.C3
=F
+F3
Y20.JPT
PLUGRIDECONTROL
/23.C7
=V
+V1
Y6.X
PLUGTRAVELRANGES,MODULATION
/53.C2
=F
+F3
Y21
RIDECONTROL
/23.C8
=V
+V1
Y9
BUCKETRETURNTODIG
/56.C7
=K
+K4
Y21.JPT
PLUGRIDECONTROL
/23.C8
=V
+V1
Y9a
BUCKETRETURNTODIGBERPUSHBUTTONSWITCH
/56.C6
=V
+V1
Y22
AIRCONDITIONINGCOMPRESSOR
/62.E5
=M
+M
Y9a.JPT*
PLUGBUCKETRETURNTODIGBERPUSHBUTTONSWITCH
/56.C6
=V
+V1
Y22.X
PLUGAIRCONDITIONINGCOMPRESSOR
/62.E5
=M
+M
Y10
PARKINGBRAKE
/78.C1
=H
+K6
Y50
FANREVERSAL
/21.C8
=H
+H3
Y10.JPT
PLUGPARKINGBRAKE
/78.C1
=H
+K6
Y50.AF2
PLUGFANREVERSAL
/21.C8
=H
+H3
Y11
OPTIONALEQUIPMENT1
/57.C1
=V
+V
Y51*
JOYSTICKSTEERINGLEFT
/72.C6
=H
+H3
Y11.JPT
/57.C1
=V
+V
Y51.AF2*
PLUGJOYSTICKSTEERINGLEFT
/72.C6
=H
+H3
Y11a*
/50.C5
=V
+V1
Y52*
JOYSTICKSTEERINGRIGHT
/72.C7
=H
+H3
Y11a*
OPTIONALEQUIPMENT3
/57.C3
=V
+V
Y52.AF2*
PLUGJOYSTICKSTEERINGRIGHT
/72.C7
=H
+H3
Y11a.JPT*
/50.C5
=V
+V1
Y53
QUICKCHANGEDEVICE
/57.C8
=V
+V1
PROJ: 8920980_003
FUNCTION
SHEET
BMK
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
FUNCTION
BMK
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Ort
Blatt
von
Anlage
003
17
114
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
BMK
FUNCTION
SHEET
SYSTEM PLACE
Y53.JPT
/57.D8
=V
+V1
Y57
HYDROMOTORSWIVELANGLE1
/53.C8
=F
+F3
Y57.DT
PLUGHYDROMOTORSWIVELANGLE1
/53.C8
=F
+F3
Y63*
GEROTORSTEERING
/55.C4
=H
+H3
Y63.JPT*
PLUGGEROTORSTEERING
/55.C4
=H
+H3
Y64*
SAFETYJOYSTICKSTEERING
/72.C8
=H
+H3
Y64.JPT*
PLUGSAFETYJOYSTICKSTEERING
/72.C8
=H
+H3
Y65*
WORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERLOCKOUT
/59.E4
=V
+V1
Y65.JPT*
PLUGWORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERLOCKOUT
/59.E4
=V
+V1
Y66*
WORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERLOCKOUT
/59.E5
=V
+V1
Y66.JPT*
PLUGWORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERLOCKOUT
/59.E5
=V
+V1
Y67*
WORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERFINECONTROL
/59.E6
=V
+V1
Y67.JPT*
PLUGWORKINGBASKETTILTCYLINDERFINECONTROL
/59.E6
=V
+V1
Y68*
CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER
/61.E6
=V
+V1
Y68.JPT*
/61.E6
=V
+V1
Y711
INJECTIONPUMP1
/109.B3
=M
+M
Y712
INJECTIONPUMP2
/109.B4
=M
+M
Y713
INJECTIONPUMP3
/109.B6
=M
+M
Y714
INJECTIONPUMP4
/110.B3
=M
+M
Y715
INJECTIONPUMP5
/110.B4
=M
+M
Y716
INJECTIONPUMP6
/110.B6
=M
+M
YEP1
HYDRAULICMOTOR1
/53.C6
=F
+F3
YEP1.DT
PLUGHYDRAULICMOTOR1
/53.C6
=F
+F3
YEP2
HYDROMOTORS2
/53.C7
=F
+F3
YEP2.DT
PLUGHYDRAULICMOTOR2
/53.C7
=F
+F3
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
BMKINDEX
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
18
114
WH 2.5Q
58
15
15
50a
50a
P 0 12
A16a.X1
OLE1
Verb.
1
+H5
F07
10A
RD
BK 70Q
31
RD 70Q
+H5
XMSP4.3
BK 70Q
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
+H2
XMSP1c
E2.X1
B
6
BK 2.5Q
RD 25Q
WH 2Q
+K2
M7
2
28
E2.X2
E2.X3
=K
+H2
XMSP1b
+M
R701
0
M7.X
+K3
XMSP7a
BK 2Q
BK 2Q
=K
BK 2Q
+K2
XMSP6b
IGNITION LOCKBATTERIESGENERATOR
MAINFUSES
4
+K3
E2
0
3
D+
M7.X
RD 1.5Q
+M
G3
WH 2Q
31
/81.B6
50
Datum
B+
Kl.30.F07 RD 1.5Q
+M
M1
/D+
* 30
WH 1Q
+B1
G2
X1.B
X1.S
R.5
=K
/27.A5
Ersteller
+K4
X22b.S
X22b.B
28
RD 25Q
/20.E3
BK 70Q
RD 25Q
+B
G1
+H5
S15
30.1
RD 25Q
RD 70Q
A4.X55
RD 25Q
XMSP4.1
+H
A4.X57
30.2 50
+H5
K04
2
1
GND
OLE2
=H
ELECTRICALSOCKET
RADIO
F8
/34.B3
L8
100A
F02
+H
+H5
F01
100A
*
1
L8A
65
+H5
XMSP4.2
BK 25Q
+H2
XMSP1
200A
F03
+H5
WH 1.5Q
1 1
+K2
XMSP6.1
BK,BK 25Q,25Q
BK 25Q
+K2
XMSP6.2
RD 25Q
BK 25Q
RD 25Q
MP
R8
WH 2Q
+H5
F010
5A
HBR
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
+K6
65
V2
GND
=K
Zustand
RD 6Q
XMSP12
RD 25Q
R8A
T.4
GND
Kl.30.X
1
Verb.
L29
85
15A
BU
GND
87
Kl.30.F08
R29
A700D.DO2
X2 39
A700D.X2
F8
=K+K4X3:1
10A
RD
A
WH 2Q
K01
A700D.X2
/93.E2
A700D
+M
WH 6Q
V1
A700D.DI2
X2 64
F8A
ENGINEECU
SELECTION
HEATERFLANGE
86
25A
WH
WH 1.5Q
=K+K6X1.S:65
F29
/23.B2
30
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
/93.E2
A700D
+M
E
Kl.15
ENGINEECU
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
HEATERFLANGE
WH 1.5Q
Kl.15.X
1
T.1
39
T.3
64
A4
=K
+K2
A4.X57
S.4
A4.X56
RD 2.5Q
Kl.30
S1.X3
A4
=K
+K2
BK 1.5Q
A9IMMOBILISERKl.15
S1.X2
A4.X57
X1 24
A16a.UI15
A
+H3
Kl50a
A16a
/86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input15
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
30
ENGINESIDE/105.B6
PROJ: 8920980_003
30
WH 2.5Q
10
24
WH 2.5Q
+K4
S1
10
A9Kl.15
S1.X1
/79.C6
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
WH 2.5Q
WH 2.5Q
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
19
114
A18.X2
A4.X49
A4
=K
+K2
LEDGREEN
L77
10
OLDM.4
M.9
K.10
PROFILELIGHT/PARKINGLIGHT
R77
E
86
R9B
V81
220
F6
86
F27
10A
RD
87
87a
R27
GND
L27
T.7
T.8
A4.X57
A4.X57
WH 1.5Q
19
WH 1.5Q
Kl.58aR
/25.C8
Kl.58aL
/25.D2
19
WH 1.5Q
6
WH 1.5Q
5
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
4
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
Kl.58aL
/25.D3
WH 1.5Q
Kl.58aL
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
/25.E4
T.6
A4.X57
2
2
/19.F5
D+
GND
T.5
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
GND
A4.X57
A4.X53
/D+ WH 1Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
L7
GND
WH 1Q
O.1
L6
85
87a
WH 1.5Q
87
Kl.58aR
85
/25.D6
WH 1.5Q
V82
R7
WH 1.5Q
X6.J
10A
R6
Kl.58aR
X5.J
10A
K2
V8
/25.D6
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
K5
X4.J
10A
3A
VT
30
V10
Kl.58aR
F7
3A
VT
30
/25.E5
R9A
Kl.30
/51.A4
=K
+K2
A4.X51
F15.2
Kl.15
V80
PROJ: 8920980_003
+K2
XMSP6b
/51.A4
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
JUMPERX6220Ohm/5WattL550L586
P1.X2
Kl.15
F15.1
JUMPERX5RESERVE
A4
=K
+K2
ELECTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
/94.D3
OUTLETA6
A18
PARKINGLIGHT
+K4
A
=K
A18.PWM6
X2 3
WH 1Q
INFO
JUMPERX4RESERVE0OHMEXCITATION
+K4
P1
P1.X1
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
FUNCTIOND+
PROFILELIGHTPARKINGLIGHT
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
20
114
A
A16a.UI4
X1 7
A16a.X1
/93.D2
A700D
+M
A700D.AI11.1
X2 63
A700D.X2
/86.C5
A16a
A16a
transmisson overtemperature+H3
+H3
A16a.UI13
X1 22
A16a.X1
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
resistor input 1
hydraulics oil temperature
D
A16a.RI1
X1 46
A16a.X1
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.D1
PWMOutput 6(Bank2)
A17a
VENTILATOR
+H3
A
A17a.PWM6
X1 19
A17a.X1
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.D2
PWMOutput6(Bank
A17b
FANREVERSAL
+H3
A
A17b.PWM6
X1 19
A17b.X1
+H
X28.B
X28.S
+K6
B19
0
0
sw
ge
UP
+
B
+H
B13
0
+H1
B8
0
B19.X
+F3
B14
0
B13.X
1
1
+H
Y13
0
B8.X
Y13.X
+H3
Y50
0
Y50.AF2
BK 1.5Q
+H
X28.S
X28.B
BU 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
BK 1.5Q
2
B25.X
Y13.X
B8.X
+H2
B25
B14.X
vi
B13.X
gn
Y50.AF2
B19.X
3
1
B25.X
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
RD 1Q
WH 1Q
BU 1Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
BK 1.5Q
+H3
A16a
/86.E5
+H3
A16a
EARTHTANKSENSOR
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
/86.D5
GND PRESSURERESERVOIRBRAKE
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
X1 32
A16a.24V
+H3
A16a
VccPRESSURERESERVOIRBRAKE
/86.E2
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
+M
A700D
+H3
A16a
COOLANT LEVEL
SIGNAL
ENGINEECU
/93.D2
/86.C5
X1 47
A16a.RI1
D
hydraulics oil temperature
resistor input 2
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
A17a.X1
A17b.X1
X1 61
A17a.GND_PWM6
+H3
A17a
EARTHVENTILATOR
/90.D5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
61
A16a.X1
X2 62
A700D.AI11.2
61
A700D.X2
47
A16a.X1
X1 61
A16a.GND
62
A16a.X1
X1 65
A16a.GND
61
A16a.X1
32
E
65
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
RD 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1.5Q
19
PRESSURERESERVOIRBRAKE
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
19
A16a.X1
37
A16a.X1
A16a
+H3
ENGINEECU
VCC
coolant level signal
46
A16a.24V
X1 37
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input 4
22
A16a
+H3
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input 14
A16a
TANKSENSOR
+H3
A
A16a.UI14
X1 23
23
/86.F2
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
24VTANKSENSOR
63
X1 61
A17b.GND_PWM6
+H3
A17b
/91.D5
EARTHFANREVERSAL
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
TANKPIPESENSORTRANSMISSION/HYDRAULICOILTEMPERATURE
VENTILATORCOOLINGWATERLEVEL,BRAKEACCUMULATOR
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
21
114
WH 1Q
A16a.RI1
X1 46
A16a.X1
+H3
A17a.X1
+H3
A17b.PWM6
X1 19
A17b.X1
+H3
X28.B
X28.S
+H3
A16a
/35.D5
X1 32
A16a.24V
=M
+M
+H3
A700D
D
pressure
accumulator
brake
A16a
=M+M/34.D2
MasseTankgeber
Masse
CAN:
INPUTMODUL1
/35.E2
Supply24V
CAN:
INPUTMODUL1
X2 62
A700D.AI11.2
KHLWASSERSTANDS.
SIGNAL
MOTORECU
B13a..X2
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
+H3
A17a.X1
X1 47
A16a.RI1
+H3
A16a Hydraulikltempertur
/35.B5 Widerstandseingang2
CAN:
INPUTMODUL1
+H3
A17b.X1
X1 61
A17a.GND_PWM6
+H3
A17a
/37.D5
MasseLfter
Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL1
61
+H3
A16a.X1
WH 1Q
X1 65
A16a.GND
A700D.X2
62
+H3
A16a.X1
65
+H3
A16a.X1
32
B13a.X
W160 +WL017 BU
B13a
47
X28.S
X28.B
B13SteckverbindungSuperseal
L544L554
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
W160 +WL016 BK
B13a.X
Y50.AF2
+H3
BK 1.5Q
B13a..X2
WH 1Q
B8.X
2
Y13.X
+H3
Y50
2
1
C
B8
Y13
0
B13.X
Y13.X
1
B8.X
61
+F3
B14
B19.X
+K6
+H3
Y50.AF2
ge
2
B25.X
B13
sw
B14.X
+K6
B19
B13.X
1
B19.X
vi
X1 61
A17b.GND_PWM6
+H3
A17b MasseLfterumkehr
/38.D5
Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
VALIDTOSERIALNUMBER:see attachment
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
A17a.PWM6
X1 19
19
A16a.X1
+H3
W160 +WL016 BU
1
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16a.UI13
X1 22
B25
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
1
gn
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
W160 +WL016 RD
B25.X
A700D.X2
+H3
OUTPUTMODUL2
CAN:
/38.D2 PWMAusgang6(Bank2)
A17b
Lfterumkehr
19
A16a.X1
=M
+H3
A16a.UI4
X1 7
+H3
OUTPUTMODUL1
CAN:
/37.D2 PWMAusgang6(Bank2)
A17a
Lfter
A16a.X1
+H3
37
A16a.X1
+H3
A16a.UI14
X1 23
23
A16a.24V
X1 37
A700D.AI11.1
X2 63
INPUTMODUL1
INPUTMODUL1
CAN:
CAN:
/35.D2
analogerUniversaleingang13 /35.B5 Widerstandseingang1
A16a Getriebebertemperatur A16a Hydraulikltempertur
46
+H3
W160 +WL017 RD
+H3
MOTORECU
VCC
KHLWASSERSTANDS.
22
INPUTMODUL1
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
CAN:
=M+M/34.D2
/35.D2
analogerUniversaleingang14 /35.B2 analogue all-purpose input4
A16a
A16a pressure accumulatorbrakeA700D
Tankgeber
+M
WH 1Q
A16a
+H3
WH 1Q
/35.E2
A
INPUTMODUL1
CAN:
Versorgung24V
24VTankgeber
63
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
TANKPIPESENSORTRANSMISSION/HYDRAULICOILTEMPERATURE
VENTILATORCOOLINGWATERLEVEL,BRAKEACCUMULATOR
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
22
114
WH 1Q
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
WH 1.5Q
30
30
WH 1Q
1
X1 60
A17b.GND_PWM5
+H3
A17b
EARTHemergency steering
/91.D5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
+H3
A16a
/86.D5
GNDNLPCheck
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
+H3
A16a
/86.E2
/86.D5
1
2
VccNLP
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
A700D.X2
X1 60
A16a.GND
+H3
A16a
BK 1.5Q
X1 34
A16a.24V
A16a.X1
X1 59
A16a.GND
+M
A700D
GNDNLP
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
/93.E2
X2 46
A700D.TI1.GND
A17b.X1
AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION

VACUUM
ENGINEECU
A17b.X1
X1 62
A17b.GND_PWM7
+H3
A17b
EARTHLFD
/91.D5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
63
A16a.X1
Y21.JPT
62
A17b.X1
Y20.JPT
BK 1.5Q
A16a.X1
VccNLPCheck
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
59
60
B28.X
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
B4.X_1
60
/86.E2
33
WH 1Q
A16a
B3.X
BK 1Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 25Q
+V1
Y21
0
WH 1Q
Y21.JPT
+V1
Y20
0
Kl.15
Y20.JPT
1
/56.E2
UP
+K
B28
+H5
B3
0
UP
+H
B4
0
B28.X
WH 1Q
+H4
B3a
0
B4.X_1
46
Ausgabe
WH 1.5Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1.5Q
85
B3.X
X1 33
A16a.24V
Datum
A17b.X1
34
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
B3a.X
+H3
A16a.X1
Ersteller
A17b.X1
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.D2
PWMAusgang8(bank
A17b LFD/FLOATPOSITION
+H3
A
A17b.PWM8
X1 21
B3a.X
Zustand
+K6
X1.B
X1.S
86
88a
+H4
M8
0
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.D2
PWMOutput7(bank
A17b
LFD
+H3
A
A17b.PWM7
X1 20
21
A16a.X1
20
A16a.X1
ENGINEECU
INPUTMODULE1
VACUUM
CAN:
/93.E2
A700D AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION /86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input6
A16a
LFD
+M
+H3
A700D.TI1
A
X2 60
A16a.UI6
X1 19
A700D.X2
19
18
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input3
A16a
PRESSURENLP
+H3
A
A16a.UI3
X1 6
RD 25Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
88
GNDVIAEARTHSTRIP
A16a.X1
+H4
K11
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Kl.30.F08
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
A16a PRESSURENLPCheck
+H3
A
A16a.UI1
X1 4
/19.C4
A17b.X1
60
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.D2
PWMOutput5(bank
A17b
emergency steering
A
A17b.PWM5
X1 18
X1 63
A17b.GND_PWM8
+H3
A17b
/91.D5
EARTHLFD
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
F
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMPLFDAIRFILTERCONTAMINATION
RIDECONTROL
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
23
114
+H3
MOTORECU
UNTERDRUCK
LUFTFILTERVERSCHM.
A700D.X2
+M
=M
A16a.UI6
X1 19
A17b.X1
+H3
=H
=H
+H3
A17b.X1
=H+H/38.D5
X1 60
A17b.GND_PWM5
MasseNotlenkung
Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2
=H
+H3
A17b.X1
X1 62
A17b.GND_PWM7
X1 63
A17b.GND_PWM8
=H
=H
+H3
+H3
MasseLFD/Schaufelschwimmstellung
MasseLFD/Schaufelschwimmstellung
A17b
A17b
F1110A/RD =K+K/15.E2
=H
+H3
A17b
60
Kl.15.6
WH 1Q
63
M
=H
+H3
A17b.X1
UNTERDRUCK
MOTORECU
62
=M+M/34.E2
2
29
=M
A700D.TI1.GND
+M
A700D LUFTFILTERVERSCHM.GND
BK 1.5Q
=K
+K6
X1.S
29
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
B28.X
46
WH 1Q
WH 1.5Q
30
WH 1Q
+K
B28
BK 1.5Q
B4.X_1
+H
=M
+M
A700D.X2
+V1
Y21.JPT
1
+V1
Y21
0
2
Y21.JPT
+V1
B28.X
BK 1.5Q
WH 25Q
+V1
Y20.JPT
1
+V1
Y20
0
2
Y20.JPT
+V1
A17b.X1
+H3
=H
WH 1.5Q
30
WH 1Q
+H
Splice.X6
=K
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
+K6
=K
A17b.PWM8
X1 21
WH 1Q
+H
B4
B3.X
+H5
+H3
=H
B3a.X
+H4
+H
B4.X_1
X1.S
+K6
=K
=H+H/38.D5
Masse
=H+H/38.D5
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2
Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
A17b.PWM7
X1 20
X2 46
=H
+H4
M8
+H3
=H
WH 1Q
A16a.X1
+H3
=H
+H5
B3
WH 1Q
1
1
+H5
B3.X
INPUTMODUL1
OUTPUTMODUL2
OUTPUTMODUL2
CAN:
CAN:
CAN:
=H+H/35.D2analogue all-purpose =H+H/38.D2
input6
PWMAusgang7(Bank2)=H+H/38.D2 PWMAusgang8(Bank2)
A16a
A17b
A17b
LFD
LFD
LFD/Schaufelschwimmstellung
+H3
=H
A700D.TI1
X2 60
=M
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
A16a.X1
+H3
30.1 31
K11.X3
K11.X1
+H4 +H4
=H =H
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16a.UI3
X1 6
PROJ: 8920980_003
=H =H
+H4 +H4
K11.X4
K11.X2
30.2 50
=H
+H4
K11
GNDberMasseband
+H4
B3a.X
+H4
B3a
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Kl.30.F08
18
A16a.X1
+H3
=K+K/4.C4
A17b.X1
+H3
=H
A16a.UI1
X1 4
+H3
A17b.PWM5
X1 18
+H3
=H
21
OUTPUTMODUL2
INPUTMODUL1
INPUTMODUL1
CAN:
CAN:
CAN:
=M+M/34.E2
=H+H/38.C2 PWMAusgang5(Bank2) =H+H/35.B2analogue all-purpose input1
=H+H/35.B2analogue all-purpose input3 A700D
A17b
A16a pressureNLPCheck
A16a
Notlenkung
DruckNLP
+M
20
19
60
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
EMERGENCYSTEERINGPUMPLFDAIRFILTERCONTAMINATION
RIDECONTROL
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
24
114
HIGHBEAM
30
86
30
F4
A17b.X1
F5
7,5A
BN
7,5A
BN
V9
R5
L21
L4
L5
7,5A
BN
V60
85
87a
A
GND
87
R2
R3
L2
L3
GND
10
XMSP1c
E4.X
XMSP1c
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
1
1
XE14l.a.
H53
E7
H21
H18
+B2
E5
0
XE14l.b
+K3
XMSP7b
+H2
XMSP1c
XE14r.b
X16.B
X16.S
EXTENSION OF THE
LICENCE-PLATE LIGHTING
FOR THEITALIANVERSION
+H2
XMSP1c
+H4
Splice.X8
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
STEERINGCOLUMNSWITCHSTOPLIGHT
LOWBEAMHIGHBEAM
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
XE14r.a.
+H1
E14r
BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
/27.E7
Kl.49
/20.E6
Kl.58aR
WH 1.5Q
1
1
SW 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+K3
E9
H51 H16
BK 1.5Q
4
WH 1.5Q
3
/20.E6
H55
WH 1.5Q
3
WH 1.5Q
H57
XE14r.a
1
+H1
E14l
BK 1.5Q
2
2
XE14r.b
XE14l.b
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
+V1
E4
+H
X16.S
X16.B
XE14l.a
BK 1.5Q
+V1
E3
+K4
X22b.S
X22b.B
SW 1.5Q
H56
F.6
H54
H50
WH 1.5Q
2
+H4
Splice.X7
A4.X45
/27.E5
18
18
/20.E6
17
17
16
2
WH 1.5Q
3
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
4
E3.X
+K3
XMSP7a
16
19
19
/20.E5
/27.E6
WH 1.5Q
5
10
H15
X1.S
X1.B
5
1
H52
A4.X45
*
E
BK 1.5QEXTEN
6
X1.S
X1.B
+K6
SW 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
A4.X45 F.5
GND
F.1
Kl.58aL
E6
GND
BK 1.5Q
H20
A4.X45
WH 1.5Q
3
BK 1.5Q
H17
XMSP1b
nderung
+H3
X37a
85
GND
F.3
SW 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
/20.E5
3
/20.E6
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
Kl.58aL
Kl.49
B12.1
WH 1.5Q
+K4
X22b.S
X22b.B
+K3
E8
B12.X
GND
A4.X44
+B1
E1
0
87
R4
E.3
/27.E5
/45.E8
R21
GND
F3
7,5A
BN
X37b
+H3
X2 4
A18.PWM7
A
low beam
/94.E3
OUTLETA7
CAN:
ELECTRICKEYPAD
+H3
B12
0
F2
K3A
10A
RD
K3
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
F21
=K
+K4
A18
/33.E4
A17b.DO3
X1 37
86
B12.X
X1.37
+H3
87a
A18.X2
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.F2
digital output 3
A17b
REVERSINGLIGHT
hb/lbF/A
LH
0
/33.E4
K.8
Zustand
A4.X49
K.6
Kl.15
PROJ: 8920980_003
WH 1.5Q
+K1
S3
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A4
=K
+K2
A4.X49
K.4
/20.E7
A4.X49
K.2
WH 1.5Q
A4.X49
X1.37
56
Kl.58aR
30
56a
BK 1.5Q
2
2
56b
37
49a
=K
WH 1.5Q
=K
BK 1.5Q
=K
2
=K
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
3/7 S3.X2
A16b.X1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
2/7
/87.C2
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
5/7
A16b.X1
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEuniversal
HIGHBEAM
A
A16b.UI2
X1 5
A16b
+K2
/87.C2
4/7
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEuniversal
DRIVINGLIGHT
A
A16b.UI1
X1 4
A16b
+K2
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
25
114
/7.E7
Kl.49a.2
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/36.B2ANALOGUEUniversaleingang1
DRIVINGLIGHT
/36.B2ANALOGUEUniversaleingang2
HIGHBEAM
A16b
+K2
49a
56b
56a
15
A4.X49
A4.X49
K.4
A4.X49
K.6
K.8
B
A4
=K
+K2
56
A4.X49
K.2
A16b.X1
A16b.UI2
X1 5
A16b.X1
3/7
S3.X2
5/7
+K1
S3.X2
2/7
+K1
S3.X2
A16b
+K2
A16b.UI1
X1 4
2
2
HIGHBEAM
Kl.15
PROJ: 8920980_003
+K1
+K1
S3
0
30
F21
10A
RD
a bc
L OR
ab
E
F4
7,5A
BN
F5
7,5A
BN
87
30
F2
7,5A
BN
87a
86
K3
F3
7,5A
BN
85
87a
GND
86
K3a
87
85
GND
C
GND
GND
H50 H54
H56
=V
+V1
E3
=V 2
+V1
E4
H57
H55
H51
4
WH 1.5Q
D
31
intstall 3pin
socket!
58
+V
X321b
0
31
BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q
1
XMSP1c
54
54
BK 1.5Q BK 1.5Q
E4.X
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q BK 1.5Q
3
WH 1.5Q
H16
E4.Xa
XMSP1c
E3.Xa
E3.X
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
58
+V
X321b
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
/7.E5
/5.E6
4
WH 1.5Q
18
3
Kl.58aR.1
4
Kl.49.3
5
+V
E4.Xa
1
1
18
17
17
16
19
19
3
+V
E3.Xa
H15
1.5Q,1.5Q BK,BK
8JB0019333001
LBHID6200003
F.6
E4.Xb
+V
/5.E5
/7.E6
Kl.49.2
5
Kl.58aL.1
4
2
+K6 +K6
X1.SX1.S
16
+K6 +K6
X1.SX1.S
E3.Xb
+V
A4.X45
F.1
WH 1.5Q
F.3
54
A4.X45
A4.X45F.5
A4.X45
WH 1.5Q
3
3
4
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+V
X321a
0
31
GND
BK 1.5Q
58
install3-pin
socket!
31
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
54
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
58
WH 1.5Q
+V
X321a
Abblentlicht
OUTLETA7
CAN:
ELECTRIESKEYBOARD
/39.E4
+K4
A18
A4.X44
E.3
WH 1.5Q
8JB0019333001
LBHID6200003
GND
HELLAint
X2 4
A18.PWM7
WH 1.5Q
A18.X2
GND
HELLA
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K1 +K1 +K1

S3.X1S3.X1S3.X1
B
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
5 S3.X2
4/7
+K1
Kl.49aR.2
Kl.49aL.2
/7.B5
/7.B5
E3.Xb
E4.Xb
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
COUNTRYSPECIFIC
TYPE/EXECUTION
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
26
114
A18.X1
A4.X50
RD,RD 1.5Q,1.5Q
A4.X50
L.4
A4
=K
+K2
RD 1.5Q
RD 1.5Q
Kl.30.F07
Kl.30
7
ELECTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
/94.C3 FLASHINGSPEEDINPUT
A18 HAZARDWARNINGLIGHT
+K4
A
=K
A18.Flasher
X1 6
/19.F5
/39.B3
L.3
86
30
A18.X1
10
RD 1.5Q
ELECTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
/94.D3
OUTLETA1
A18 HAZARDWARNINGLIGHT
+K4
A
=K
A18.PWM1
X1 10
K240
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEuniversal
INDICATORSIGNAL
A
A16b.UI3
6 X1
A16b.X1
+K2
/87.C2
A16b
+K2
A
V53
85
87
87a
GND
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
L.1
A4.X50
RD 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
U.3
U.4
A4.X58
A4.X58
11
A4.X50
L.11
V89
M.7
C
E
30
86
30
K22
F07B
86
30
K22a
10A
RD
87a
87
85
86
K22b
V11
V12
87a
87
V13
85
87a
87
X1.J
10A
RD
30
86
K25
V14
85
87a
87
X2.J
10A
RD
30
86
49
K26
GND
87a
87
85
GND
49a
A4.X58
U.6
E1/H18RIGHTREAR
WH 1.5Q
/25.D7
Kl.49
10
X1.S
X1.B
WH 1.5Q
M.10
OLDM.3
V88
10
L.6
Kl.49
E5/H17LEFTREAR
A4.X51
WH 1.5Q 10
WH 1.5Q 6
A4.X50
/25.E4
8
8
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
E3/H15LEFTFRONT
56
Kl.49
hb/lbF/A
LH
0
30
X1.S
X1.B
/25.D2
=K
+K1
S3
0
56a
L.5
WH 1.5Q
56b
WH 1.5Q 5
WH 1.5Q 12
49a
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
A4.X50
M.12
OLDM.1
WH 1.5Q
A4.X51
Kl.49
GND
V87
/25.E5
31
GND
V86
E4/H16RIGHTFRONT
X3.J
10A
RD
85
GND
WH 1.5Q
2
WH 1.5Q
3
WH 1.5Q
L
GND
V85
GND
+K1
S3.X1
K1
V84 V83
F07bKL.15
R07B
L07B
V15
WH 1.5Q
A4.X51
OLDM.6
A4
=K
+K2
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
L.8
A4.X50
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
WH 1.5Q
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
27
114
OPTION
HORNOPERATIONVIAPUSHBUTTONSWITCHON
LHCONTROLLEVER
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
12
A4.X49
A4
=K
+K2
31
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
+K2
XMSP6a
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
Kl.15
3
2
=K
BK 1.5Q
15A
BU
A18.X2
86
30
K8
F18
V59
10
85
87
10A
RD
87a
R20
L20
SW 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
B10.X2
+H
R18
GND
L18
GND
GND
A4.X44
53
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
31b
M3.X
M9.X
+K2
M3
M4.X
53a
+K4
M9
0
M9.X
31
sw
sw
31
swbl
wsbl
+K1
M4
0
bl
M3.X
53
7/7
6/7
7
1
7
53a
WH 1.5Q
swbl
wsbl
53c
WH 1.5Q
0 J 1
53
+K1
M2
0
wash
53b
31b
bl
M3.X
1
+
WH 1.5Q
6
*
M4.X
1/7
horn
0 1
M2.X2
M2.X1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
S3.X2
=K
+H2
XMSP1a
E.7
WH 1.5Q
K.1
A4.X49
E.9
A4.X44
47
X1 47
A17b.GND_PWM2
D
+H3
EARTHOPTIONS
A17b
/91.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
B10a.X2
+H
K.12
WH 1.5Q
+H
B10
15
WH 1.5Q 6
1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q
1.5Q
F20
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH 1.5Q
B10.X1
31b
0
K5a.X
6905155
31b
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+K2
XMSP6a
S3.X1
Ersteller
BK 1.5Q
15
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
Zustand
+K1
K5a
E
V2
B10a
1
+H
+H
V2.X2 1/1
A18.X1
Kl.15
1
1
A4
=K
+K2
86
0 1
WH 1.5Q
25
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
SW 1.5Q
5
25
K5a.X
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
OPT3
sw5
S3
+K1
V2.X1
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
ELECTRICKEYPAD
ELECTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
CAN:
/94.D3
OUTLETA3
/94.D3
OUTLETA4
A18 WINDSCREENWIPER
A18 WASHINGPUMPREAR
+K4
+K4
A
A
=K
=K
A18.PWM3
A18.PWM4
X1 12
X2 1
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput2(Array
A17b
OPTIONS
+H3
A
A17b.PWM2
X1 5
+K
Splice.X9
OPT1
sw4
OPT2
sw3
12
+K2
XMSP6a
+K2
XMSP6a
+K2
XMSP6a
3
Ident.Nr.
WINDSCREENWASHERFRONT
ANDREARHOOTER
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
28
114
Splice.X9
A18
+K4
+K6
X1.S
+K4
31b
BK 1.5Q
12
86
30
K8
V44
10
87a
87
85
F18
10A
RD
85
GND
87
87a
GND
GND
A4.X49
A4.X44
A4.X55
+K2
A4.X44
11
GND
K.1
E.9
BK 1.5Q
86
K271
E.7
M4
0
53
+K2
M3
sw
M4.X
sw
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
15
31b
S3.X1
+K2
XMSP6a
M9.X
31
BK 1.5Q
M3.X
+K2
+K4
M9
0
53
0 J 1
31
53a
53b
S3.X2
2
7/7
31b
M9.X
+K2
XMSP6a
+K2
XMSP6a
WH 1.5Q
+K1
M2
6/7
53a
+
wsbl
swbl
bl
wsbl
1
53c
53
+K2
* M3.X
1
+
31b
+K2
M3.X
swbl
+K2
M3.X
*
M4.X
bl
1/7
M2.X2
M2.X1
S3
+K1
WH 1.5Q
+K2
XMSP6a
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
12
E
30
+K2
XMSP6a
+H2
XMSP1a
A4
=K
+K2
F20
15A
BU
A4.X49
V59
A18.X2
K.12
31
A18.PWM4
X2 1
+K1
K5
Kl.15
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4
=K
+K2
Kl.15
15
+K2
+K2
A4.X55 A4.X55
4
5
10
I 86
B10.X2
+H
=H
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
3
2
A18.X1
=H
+H
B10.X1
=H
+H
B10
ELEKTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
OutputA4
windscreen washerrear
A18.PWM3
X1 12
25
25
/39.D4
ELEKTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
/39.D4
OutputA3
SWindscreen wiper A18
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
WINDSCREENWASHERFRONT
ANDREARHOOTER
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
29
114
WH 1.5Q
A4.X58
A4
=K
+K2
E1
PROJ: 8920980_003
F31A
Kl.30
E1
30
KL.15
E2
oder
Kl.30
F31B
30
KL.15
E1 A E2
E1 A E2
87a
87
10A
RD
85
86
K31B
V16
10A
RD
E1 A E2
V17
E1 A E2
87a
R31A
87
85
R31B
GND
L31A
GND
L31B
XMSP7a
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
+K2
XMSP6.18
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
WH 2Q
2
XMSP7a
E11b.X
+K2
XMSP6.18
OPTIONXENON
WORKINGPROJECTOR
Ident.Nr.
WORKINGPROJECTORFRONTCABIN
+K3
E11b
0
BK 2Q
E11a.X
OPTIONXENON
WORKINGPROJECTOR
Ersteller
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
SW 1.5Q
+K3
E11a
SW 1.5Q
+K3
XMSP7a
E11b.X
E11.X
A4.46.8
+K2
3
1
+K3
E11
E11a.X
SW 1.5Q
SW 1.5Q
5
E10b.X
E10a..X
SW 1.5Q
WH 2Q
2
SW 1.5Q
1
1
2
E11.X
+K3
E10b
0
+K3
E10a
SW 1.5Q
+K3
XMSP7a
E10b.X
E10.X
+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S
A4.46.4
+K2
BK 2Q
+K3
E10
E10a..X
G.8
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A4.X46
G.7
SW 1.5Q
+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S
A4.X46
G.4
A4.X46
G.3
A4.X46
X2 5
A18.PWM8
=K
A
+K4
WORKINGPROJECTORFRONT
A18
/94.E3
OUTLETA8
CAN:
ELECTRICKEYPAD
A18.X2
GND
GND
Zustand
86
K31A
E10.X
Kl.15
Kl.30
E2
oder
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Kl.15
Kl.30
U.5
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
30
114
A4.X58
Verb.
=K+K2A4.X58:7
OLE3
U.8
A4
=K
+K2
WORKINGPROJECTORREARAMREAR
E2
E1
30
oder
F32A
Kl.30
Kl.15
WH 1.5Q
E1
Kl.30
Kl.15
Kl.30
KL.15
86
V32C
E2
oder
K32A
Kl.30
F32B
KL.15
V18
10A
RD
E1 A E2
E1 A E2
87a
87
85
10A
RD
E1 A E2
R32A
L32A
87
85
X58
GND
/32.A7
GND
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
10
WH 2Q
14
WH 2Q
WH 2Q
4
BK 2Q
+H2
XMSP1a
ZeichNr.
Ident.Nr.
WORKINGPROJECTORREARREAR
3
+H
X16.B
X16.S
BK 2Q
E17.X
BK 2Q
Ersteller
3
2
+H2
XMSP1a
WH 2Q
1
+H1
E17
E16
+H
X16.B
X16.S
E17.X
E16.X
X1.S
E16.X
13
11
11
1
+H
X16.S
X16.B
X2 6
A18.PWM9
=K
A
+K4
A18 WORKINGPROJECTORREAR
/94.E3
OUTLETA9
CAN:
ELECTRICKEYPAD
G.10
13
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
X1.S
A18.X2
A4.X46
G.9
WH 2Q
+H
X16.S
X16.B
A4.X46
G.6
WH 2Q
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
A4.X46
12
G.5
WH 2Q
A4.X46
WH 2Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
87a
L32B
GND
Zustand
B
V19
R32B
GND
BK 2Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
86
K32B
PROJ: 8920980_003
30
E1 A E2
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
31
114
+K2
A4.X58
U7
A4
=K
+K2
E2
oder
F33A
Kl.30
KL.15
V33C
E2
86
X58
Kl.15
E1
30
/31.C8
E1
Kl.30
Kl.15
WORKINGPROJECTORREARAMCABROOF
Kl.30
WH 1.5Q
oder
K33A
Kl.30
F33B
KL.15
V20
10A
RD
E1 A E2
E1 A E2
87a
87
10A
RD
85
E1 A E2
R33A
87a
87
85
GND
GND
GND
+K3
XMSP7a
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
10
10
1.5Q
1
2
+K3
X28a.S
1.5Q
E13.b.X
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
BK 2Q
+K3
XMSP7a
4
+K3
E13.b
WH 2Q 12
WH 2Q
1
1
1
E13.b.X
1.5Q
X28a.S
+K3
1.5Q
2
+K3
X29.S
X29.B
WORKINGPROJECTORREARCABIN
3
E13a.X
BK 2Q
+K3
XMSP7a
WORKINGPROJECTOR
DOUBLE
+K3
X28.S
X28.B
G.12
+K3
E13a
SW 1.5Q
E13.X
A4.X46
11
WH 2Q
9
9
WH 2Q
1
E13a.X
1.5Q
+K3
X26a.S
+K3
X29.B
X29.S
1
2
E12.b.X
+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S
+K3
E13
BK 2Q
+K3
XMSP7a
G.11
SW 1.5Q
1.5Q
E13.X
=K
A4.X46
+K3
E12.b
1.5Q
SW 1.5Q
=K
X27.S
X27.B
+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S
+K3
X28.B
X28.S
E12a.X
WORKINGPROJECTOR
SIMPLE
WH 2Q
+K3
E12a
2
2
+K3
X26.S
X26.B
1
1
E12.X
E12.b.X
1.5Q
E12a.X
+K3
E12
X26a.S
+K3
=K
+K3
X27.B
X27.S
WORKINGPROJECTOR
DOUBLE
E12.X
G.2
7
7
1
WH 2Q
+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S
SW 1.5Q
=K
+K3
X26.B
X26.S
A4.X46
WH 2Q
G.1
WORKINGPROJECTOR
SIMPLE
+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S
A4.X46
WH 2Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Zustand
V21
L33B
BK 2Q
R33B
GND
L33A
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
86
K33B
PROJ: 8920980_003
30
E1 A E2
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
32
114
ELECTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
/94.D3
OUTLETA2
A18
WARNINGBEACON
+K4
A
=K
A18.PWM2
X1 11
WH 1.5Q
ELECTRICKEYPAD
CAN:
/94.D3
OUTLETA5
A18 REARWINDOWHEATER
+K4
A
=K
A18.PWM5
X2 2
OptionBACKUPALARM
OPTICALOPTIONALREVERSINGACTIVE
RD 1Q
A18.X2
=K
BK 1.5Q
H.4
A4.X47
Kl.30
A4
=K
+K2
=K
+K2
K10
S212.X1
86
F74
S212.X2
30
V57
87a
10A
RD
87a
87
R74
85
WH 1.5Q
Masse
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
WH 2.5Q
+K3
+K3
R6a
R6b
0
2
1
1
BK 2.5Q
=K
BK 2.5Q
+K2
XMSP6.13
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
R12.X2
BK 2.5Q
R6b.X
Splice.X12
+K3
WARNINGBEACONMIRRORAND
REARWINDOWHEATER
4
R12.X1
+K2
R12
Verb.
OLE4
WH 2.5Q
OPTIONMIRRORHEATING
3
R6b.X
R6a.X
WH 2.5Q
WH 2.5Q
=K+K4S212.X2:9
1
R6a.X
WH 1.5Q
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
=K
H.2
=K
WH 1.5Q
+K3
Splice.X11
BK 2.5Q
+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S
36
WH 1.5Q
REVERSINGLIGHT
+K3
H22
X1.37
/25.A8
H22.X
/25.A8
X1.37
+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S
WH 1.5Q
+K6
36
35
35
WH 1.5Q
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
A4.X47
H.1
L.10
WH 1.5Q
15
WH 1.5Q
A4.X50
L.9
+K6
X1.S
WH 1.5Q
A4.X50
R.8
10
A4.X55
A4.X47
WH 2.5Q
GND
GND
Ausgabe
L74
L25
Datum
85
GND
GND
R25
Ersteller
87
V58
86
15A
BU
K9
F25
Zustand
+K2
XMSP6e
Kl.15
10
10
12
PROJ: 8920980_003
30
S212.X2
210
WH 1.5Q
0
S212
+K4
1
E
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
S212a
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A4
=K
+K2
S212.X1
+K2
A4.X50.12a
L.12
A4.X50
A18.X1
11
WH 1.5Q
+K2
XMSP6c
8920980
460901000003
7
1
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
33
114
RD 2.5Q
WH 1.5Q
RD 2.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
S.5
A4.X56
=K
T1.X
S.9
A4.X56
O.5
A4.X53
C.7
A4.X42
=K
4
24V
+K2
A4
=K
+K2
T1
A4.X56
S.7
A4.X56
5
BK 1.5Q
6
WH 1.5Q
3
BK 1.5Q
S.3
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
RD 1.5Q
+K4
X22a.B
X22a.S
+K4
12
+K4
X22b.S
X22b.B
=K
7
A3.X1
=K
+K3
A3
X70.X2
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
+K3
B11l
+K3
B11r
2
B11l.X2
CIGARETTELIGHTERELECTRICALSOCKET12VRADIO
LOUDSPEAKER
3
B11r.X1
B11l.X1
CIGARETTE
LIGHTER
24V
Datum
RD<>BNRD
BK<>BN
ELECTRICALSOCKET12V
Ersteller
+K3
=K
RD 0.75Q
=K
W1
6
6
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
10165605
BK 0.75Q
=K
RD 0.75Q
+
X70.X1
+K5
X70
10165605
1
2
LSli
5
LSre
3
=K
RADIO
A3.X2
+K4
X71
4
+
BK 0.75Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
IGN
=K
XMSP6a
+K2
Zustand
12
O.3
GND
BK 1.5Q
L76
RD 1.5Q
L75
11
R76
BK 1.5Q
A4.X53
=K
11
R75
GND
=K
85
GND
R.6
=K
B
A
L30
A4.X55
RD 1.5Q
87
WH 1.5Q
87a
=K
10A
RD
/19.B8
F8Kl.58
F76
10A
RD
PROJ: 8920980_003
R30
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
V3
F75
K12
86
T1.X
15A
BU
WH 1.5Q
30
F30
WH 1.5Q
+K2
XMSP6a
12V
WH 1.5Q
A4
=K
+K2
Kl.30
A4
=K
+K2
BK 2.5Q
BK 2.5Q
RD 2.5Q
B11r.X2
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
34
114
/99.C2
/99.C2
+K4
A22
/99.C2
/99.C2
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
A21.X1
RD 1Q
A19.X1
A19.X1
A19.X1
A19.X1
L10
X1 8
A19.CAN_Low
A
+K4
CAN_Low
A19
/98.D4
CAN_Low
CAN:
OPTIONSKEYBOARD
BK 1.5Q
WH 0.5Q
RD 1Q
A21.X1
=K
F.11
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
CAN:
CAN:
/96.C2
CAN1_LowOUT
/96.C2
CAN1_HighOUT
CAN1_LowOUT
CAN1_HighOUT
A
A
A21.CAN1
A21.CAN1
X1 16
X1 17
X1 7
A19.CAN_High
A
+K4
CAN_High
A19
/98.D4
CAN_High
CAN:
OPTIONSKEYBOARD
X1 4
A19.CAN_Low
A
+K4
CAN_Low
A19
/98.C4
CAN_Low
CAN:
OPTIONSKEYBOARD
X1 3
A19.CAN_High
A
+K4
CAN_High
A19
/98.C4
CAN_High
CAN:
OPTIONSKEYBOARD
+K4
+K4
+K4
+K4
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
F
Ident.Nr.
DISPLAYUNIT
CANBUS3
3
A19.X2
7
11
Datum
HEAT/AIRCON
CAN:
CAN_High
CAN_High
A
A22.CAN_High
X1 3
=K
+K2
XMSP6c
Ersteller
A21.X1
X1 13
X1 14
A21.CAN1
A21.CAN1
A
A
+K4
+K4
CAN1_LowINPUT
CAN1_HighINPUT
A21
A21
/96.C2
CAN1_Low&#5486
/96.C2
CAN1_High&#5486
CAN:
CAN:
=K
A4.X45
A21.X1
=K
WH,WH 0.5Q,0.5Q
+K2
XMSP6b
=K
R10
GND
=K
=K
BU 1Q
A13a.X
+K1
5A
LBN
A15.CAN.X
X1 7
A22.CAN_High
A
CAN_High
CAN_High
CAN:
HEAT/AIRCON
A22.X1
=K
F10
A15.CAN.X
CANHIGH3
A
A15.CAN3H
.CAN.X 7
14
A22.X1
A22.X1
A22.X1
HEAT/AIRCON
CAN:
CAN_Low
CAN_Low
A
A22.CAN_Low
X1 4
WIRINGHARNESS
PREPARATION
COLOURGRAPHICDISPLAY
Kl.15
WH 0.5Q
0.5Q
BK
=K
X1 8
A22.CAN_Low
A
CAN_Low
CAN_Low
CAN:
HEAT/AIRCON
+K4
A22
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
=K
A15
+K2
=K
17
RD 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
A4
=K
+K2
A11.X1
+K4
=K
/85.C1
CANLOW3
A
A15.CAN3L
.CAN.X 2
RD 1Q
A11.X1
+K4
=K
=K
A15
+K2
=K
+K2
XMSP6a
/85.C1
A11
+K4
=K
MASTERMODULE
CAN:
BU 1Q
/95.D4
MASTERMODULE
CAN:
13
A11
+K4
=K
MAINKEYBOARD
CAN:
CAN_High
CAN_High
A
A11.CAN_High
X1 3
16
/95.D4
CANBUS3
=K
=K
rpm
time
hours
=K
PROJ: 8920980_003
STOP
MAINKEYBOARD
CAN:
CAN_Low
CAN_Low
A
A11.CAN_Low
X1 4
BU 1Q
/95.D4
X1 7
A11.CAN_High
A
CAN_High
CAN_High
CAN:
MAINKEYBOARD
/95.E4
=K
+K4
A11
RD 1Q
3/
Zustand
A13.X2
+K1
=K
A11.X1
A13.X1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
BK 1.5Q
1/2
1/
1/1
MP
check
A11.X1
mph
km/h
50
120
+K1
A13
A
12
40
11
100
90
40
10
A
13
=K
BU 1Q
30
20
=K
X1 8
A11.CAN_Low
A
CAN_Low
CAN_Low
CAN:
MAINKEYBOARD
=K
+K4
A11
A
23
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
35
114
A11.CAN_Low
X1 4
A11.CAN_High
X1 3
+K4
A22.X1
W156 +WL006 BU
A11.X1
X1 8
A22.CAN_Low
CAN_Low
/43.C2
CAN_Low
CAN:
HEIZ/KLIMATASTATUR
HEIZ/KLIMATASTATUR
CAN:
/43.C2
CAN_Low
A22
CAN_Low
+K4
A19.X1
+K4
A19.X1
X1 8
A19.CAN_Low
+K4
A19
/42.C4
GND
/41.C4
/41.C4
A21
+K4
+K4
A19
/42.C4
A21.X1
A19.X1
A21.X1
+K4
A19
CAN_High
CAN_High
CAN:
OPTIONSTASTATUR
/42.C4
X1 14
A21.CAN1
+K4
A21
/41.C4
/41.D4
A21
+K4
CAN1_HighIN
CAN1_HighIN
CAN:
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
CAN:
CAN1_HighOUT
CAN1_HighOUT
A21.CAN1
X1 17
A21.X1
A19.X1
X1 4
A19.CAN_Low
CAN_Low
CAN_Low
CAN:
OPTIONSTASTATUR
X1 3
A19.CAN_High
+K4
A19
/42.C4
CAN_High
CAN_High
CAN:
OPTIONSTASTATUR
E
A4.X45
+K2
XMSP6b
A19.X2
F.11
W156 +WL036 RD
2
W156 +WL036 BU
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
A15.CAN3H
.CAN.X 7
A21.CAN1
X1 16
X1 7
A19.CAN_High
CAN_Low
CAN_Low
CAN:
OPTIONSTASTATUR
CANHIGH3
A15..CAN.X
CAN1_LowIN
CAN1_LowIN
CAN:
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
CAN:
CAN1_LowOUT
CAN1_LowOUT
W156 +WL045 RD
W156 +WL045 BU
Kl.15
F10
5A
LBN
+K4
A21
A22.CAN_High
X1 3
A22.X1
+K4
A15
+K2
X1 13
A21.CAN1
+K4
A22.X1
+K4
A21.X1
CAN_High
/43.C2
CAN_High
CAN:
HEIZ/KLIMATASTATUR
HEIZ/KLIMATASTATUR
CAN:
/43.C2
CAN_High
A22
CAN_High
A22.CAN_Low
X1 4
A4
=K
+K2
A15..CAN.X
+K4
A22
WH 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
+K4
/33.C1
CANLOW3
A15.CAN3L
.CAN.X 2
X1 7
A22.CAN_High
+K4
A22
11
+K4
A22.X1
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
W156 +WL005 RD
W156 +WL005 BU
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
A11.X1
A15
+K2
/33.C1
W156 +WL010 RD
A11
+K4
14
/40.C4
17
A11
+K4
W156 +WL034 RD
/40.C4
+K2
XMSP6a
MasterModul
CAN:
rpm
time
hours
STOP
MasterModul
CAN:
W156 +WL010 BU
BK 1.5Q
1/1
A13.X2
+K1
/40.C4
13
40
1/
3/
/40.C4
MP
2
1
1/2
A13.X1
check
50
120
mph
km/h
CANCONNECTION3(C)
CAN_High
CAN_High
CAN:
HAUPTTASTATUR
HAUPTTASTATUR
CAN:
CAN_High
CAN_High
16
A
12
W156 +WL034 BU
11
10
40
100
90
+K4
A11
CAN_Low
CAN_Low
CAN:
HAUPTTASTATUR
HAUPTTASTATUR
CAN:
CAN_Low
CAN_Low
A
13
X1 7
A11.CAN_High
30
20
+K1
A13
+K4
A11
A
23
W156 +WL006 RD
3
2
A11.X1
X1 8
A11.CAN_Low
A11.X1
DISPLAYCAN
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
DISPLAYUNIT
CANBUS3
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
36
114
5
MASTERMODULE
CAN:
A15
+K2
=K
CANHIGH1
A
A15.CAN1H
.CAN.X 5
A15.CAN.X
A17a.X1.43.57
+H3
A16c.X1
B
2
A17a.X1.43.57
+H3
44
39
RD 1Q
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
38
38
X1.S
X1.B
BU 1Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
CANBUS1
+H3
A16a
/86.C5
X1 43
A16a.CAN_Low
D
CANlow(Resverb.)
CANlow
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
X1 57
A16a.CAN_High
+H3
A16a
/86.D5
CANhigh(Resverb.)
CANhigh
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
/86.C5
A16a.X1
A16c.X1
+H3
A16a.X1.44
X1 58
A16a.CAN_High
+H3
A16a
58
58
44
A17a.CAN_High
X1 57
A17a.X1
X1 44
A16a.CAN_Low
D
CANlow
CANlow
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
+H3
A16a
/88.C5
A16c
+H3
/88.D5
A16c
+H3
INPUTMODULE3
CAN:
CANhigh
CANhigh
A16c.CAN_High
X1 57
A16c.X1
57
A16a.X1
+H3
BU 1Q
A16a.X1
A16a.X1
A17a.X1
RD 1Q
A700D.X2
BU 1Q
A700D.X2
A700D.CAN1H.1
X2 8
A700D.CAN1L.2
X2 9
CAN1HIGH
INPUTMODULE3
CAN:
CANlow
CANlow
D
A16c.CAN_Low
X1 43
CANhigh
CANhigh
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3
RD 1Q
A700D
+M
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.D5
CANhigh
A17a
CANhigh
/88.D5
+H3
XA16a.X1.58
E
1
/93.C6
CAN1LOW
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C5
CANlow
A17a
CANlow
+H3
D
A17a.CAN_Low
X1 43
/88.C5
+H3
A16c
43
ENGINEECU
CAN:
+H3
A16c
BU 1Q
ENGINEECU
CAN:
CANhigh
/90.D5
CANhigh
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
X1 58
A16c.CAN_High
CAN:
ENGINEECU
+H3
A17a
X1 44
A16c.CAN_Low
D
CANlow
CANlow
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3
57
CAN:
ENGINEECU
A16c.X1
X1 58
A17a.CAN_High
RD 1Q
/93.C6
/93.C6
A700D
+M
CAN1RES
A17a.X1
58
/93.C6
+M
A700D
X1 44
A17a.CAN_Low
D
+H3
CANlow
A17a
/90.C5
CANlow
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
43
CAN1LOW
A17a.X1
57
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+M
A700D
X2 54
A700D.CAN1R
44
A700D.X2
X2 40
A700D.CAN1L.1
54
A700D.X2
40
BU 1Q
43
RD 1Q
=K
BU 1Q
=K
A15.CAN.X
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
MASTERMODULE
CAN:
CANLOW1
A
A15.CAN1L
.CAN.X 4
/85.C1
A15
+K2
=K
OUTPUTMODULE3
OUTPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE3
OUTPUTMODULE2
/85.C1
39
CANhigh
CANhigh
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
/86.D5
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
CANBUS1
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
37
114
+K
A17b.X1.44
29
43
X1 29
A17c.CAN_Res
+H3
A17c
RESERVE
/92.E2 CANMATCHINGRESISTOR
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
+H3
A17c.X1
58
A17c.CAN_High
X1 58
59
59
58
X1.S
X1.B
OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.D5
CANhigh
A17c
CANhigh
44
A17c.X1
58
A17c.X1
57
CANlow
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.C5
CANlow
A17c
CANlow
+H3
D
A17c
X1 44
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
43
58
A16b.CAN_High
X1 57
A16b.X1
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
BU 1Q
A17b.X1
X1 58
A17b.CAN_High
+H3
A17b.X143a
A17b.X1
X1 57
A17b.CAN_High
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.E2 CANMATCHINGRESISTOR
A17b
CANEND
+H3
A17b
+H3
/91.D5
A17b.CAN_Res
X1 29
A17b.X1
57
CANhigh
CANhigh
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
/91.D5
+H3
A17b
CANhigh(CANEm.
CANhigh
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
29
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C5
CANlow
A17b
CANlow(CANEm.
+H3
D
A17b.CAN_Low
X1 43
58
44
A17b.X1
X1 44
A17b
D
+H3
CANlow
A17b
/91.C5
CANlow
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
A16d.CAN_High
X1 57
+K
A17b.X1.58
/92.C5
CANlow(CANEm.CAN_Resverb.)
58
A17b.X1
INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
CANhigh
CANhigh(Resverb.)
A16d.X1
+H3
A17c
X1 43
A17c.CAN_Low
D
CANBUS2
CANhigh
CANhigh
CAN:
INPUTMODUL4
BU 1Q
A16d.X1
/89.D5
A16d
+H3
CAN:
MASTERMODULE
RD 1Q
/89.C5
A16d
+H3
/87.D5
A16b
+K2
43
INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
CANlow
CANlow(Resverb.)
D
A16d.CAN_Low
X1 43
/89.D5
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
CANhigh
CANhigh(CANEm
/85.C1
57
/89.C5
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
.CAN.X 6
A15.CAN2H
A
CANHIGH2
=K
+K2
A15
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
CANlow
CANlow(CANEm.
D
A16b.CAN_Low
X1 43
A16b.X1
RD 1Q
44
BU 1Q
A15.CAN.X
.CAN.X 3
A15.CAN2L
A
CANLOW2
X1 58
A16d.CAN_High
+H3
A16d
WH 1.5Q
+H3
A16d
/87.C5
A16b
+K2
A16b.CAN_High
X1 58
A15.CAN.X
=K
+K2
A15
RD 1Q
1
BU 1Q
44
A16d.X1
43
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A17b..X1.43.57
+K
CAN:
MASTERMODULE
/87.D5
A16b
+K2
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
CANhigh
CANhigh
A16b.X1
/85.C1
X1 44
A16d.CAN_Low
D
CANlow
CANlow
CAN:
INPUTMODUL4
A17c.X1
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
CANlow
CANlow
D
A16b.CAN_Low
X1 44
A16b.X1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16d.X1
WH 1.5Q
A16b
+K2
A17b..X1.43.57
+K
/87.C5
OUTPUTMODULE3
OUTPUTMODULE2
INPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE3
OUTPUTMODULE1
ERECTIONOUTPUTMODULE3
CANEND
(JUMPER)
REMOVE!
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
CANBUS2
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
38
114
SUPPLYELECTRICKEYPAD
SUPPLYMAINKEYBOARD
/27.A5 F07Kl.30
Kl.15
A4
=K
+K2
F71
10A
RD
R71
XMSP6b
+K2
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
RD 1.5Q
C.6
WH 1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
A4.X42
C.4
X1 5
A18.Kl30
=K
A
+K4
SUPPLY
A18
/94.C3
SUPPLY
CAN:
ELECTRICKEYPAD
A18.X1
X1 1
A18.Kl15
=K
A
+K4
INFORMATIONINPUT
A18
/94.C3
INFORMATIONINPUT
CAN:
ELECTRICKEYPAD
A18.X1
X1 2
A18.GND
=K
A
+K4
SUPPLYEARTH
A18
/94.C3
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN:
ELECTRICKEYPAD
=K
+K4
A11
/95.D4
A11.X1
X1 1
A11.Kl15
A
+24V
SUPPLY
CAN:
MAINKEYBOARD
=K
+K4
A11
/95.D4
A11.X1
A18.X1
X1 2
A11.GND
A
SUPPLYEARTH
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN:
MAINKEYBOARD
XMSP6c
+K2
XMSP6c
+K2
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
X1 5
A19.Kl15
A
+K4
SUPPLYKl.15
A19
/98.D4
SUPPLY
CAN:
OPTIONSKEYBOARD
+K4
A22
/99.C2
BK 1.5Q
A22.X1
X1 1
A22.Kl15
A
INFORMATIONINPUT
INFORMATIONINPUT
CAN:
HEAT/AIRCON
/99.C2
Ident.Nr.
SUPPLYKEYPADS
3
+K4
A22
ZeichNr.
A22.X1
X1 2
A22.GND
A
SUPPLYEARTH
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN:
HEAT/AIRCON
+K4
A22
/99.C2
8920980
460901000003
7
WH 1.5Q
A22.X1
X1 2
A19.GND
A
+K4
SUPPLYEARTH
A19
/98.C4
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN:
OPTIONSKEYBOARD
A19.X1
A19.X1
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
X1 1
A19.Kl15
A
+K4
INFORMATIONINPUT
A19
/98.C4
INFORMATIONINPUT
CAN:
OPTIONSKEYBOARD
A19.X1
WH 1.5Q
Kl.15
/51.B6
SUPPLYHEAT/AIRCONKEYBOARD
Kl.15
/51.B6
SUPPLYOPTIONKEYPAD
Zustand
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
* A4.X42
GND
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
L71
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
XMSP6b
+K2
Kl.30
X1 5
A22.Kl15
A
SUPPLYKl.15
SUPPLY
CAN:
HEAT/AIRCON
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
39
114
SUPPLYMASTERMODULE
SUPPLYDIAGNOSTICPLUG
MASTERMODULE
CAN:
A
/85.C5
A15.COM4.X
A15
+K2
=K
Receive(RXD)
A
A15.RXD
.COM4.X 2
Transmit(TXD)
A
A15.TXD
.COM4.X 3
A15.COM4.X
=K
=K
5A
HBR
A
R35
R54
L35
L54
GND
A4
=K
+K2
Kl.30
PROJ: 8920980_003
/85.B5
A15
+K2
=K
=K
F54
10A
RD
GND
XMSP6b
+K2
C
10A
RD
A4.X42
RD 0.5Q
F26
BU 0.5Q
10
BK 0.5Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
XMSP6b
+K2
C.8
R26
L26
GND
A4.X40
10
RD 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
A.9
A4.X40
A.10
A9Kl.30
RD 1.5Q
RD 1.5Q
XMSP6b
+K2
CAN:
MASTERMODULE
CAN:
MASTERMODULE
/85.C1
CAN:
MASTERMODULE
CAN:
MASTERMODULE
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
+K2
X60
DIAGNOSTICPLUG
Ident.Nr.
SUPPLYMASTER
SUPPLYDIAGNOSTICPLUG
3
*9
.PWR.X 6
A15.VBat
A
Kl.30
/85.B1
=K
+K2
A15
.PWR.X 2
A15.DIGIN0
A
Kl.15
/85.C1
=K
+K2
A15
/85.B1
.PWR.X 5
A15.Shield
A
HOUSINGMASTER
/79.C6
=K
+K2
A15
A15.X
IMMOBILISERKl.30
.PWR.X 1
A15.GND
A
EARTH
=K
+K2
A15
A15.X
A15.X
BK 1.5Q
A15.X
Zustand
MASTERMODULE
CAN:
F35
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
SIGNALGround(S
A
A15.GND
.COM4.X 5
A15.COM4.X
Kl.15
E
Kl.30
A4
=K
+K2
MASTERMODULE
CAN:
/85.B5
A15
+K2
=K
A.4
A4.X40
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
40
114
SUPPLYINPUTMODULE2
SUPPLYINPUTMODULE1
Kl.15
A4
=K
+K2
Kl.15
Kl.15
A4
=K
+K2
F43
F45
5A
VI
F44
10A
RD
10A
RD
R45
R44
L43
L45
L44
R43
GND
/42.C2
GND
A4.X44
XMSP6b
+K2
XMSP1a
+H2
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
A16a.X1
XMSP1a
+H2
WH 1.5Q
+K2
A16b
X1 2
A16b.24V_logic
A
VBatt24VLog
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
40
40
+K2
A16b
/87.D2
+K2
A16b
/87.E2
VBatt24V
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2
+K2
A16b
/87.E2
X1 2
A16a.24V_logic
A
+H3
VBatt24VLog
A16a
/86.C2 SUPPLY24VLOGICALPART
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
SUPPLYEARTH
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2
+H3
A16a
/86.D2
X1 16
A16a.GND_logic
A
SUPPLYGNDLOGIK
EARTHLOGICALPART
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
A16a.X1
X1 30
A16a.24V
+H3
A16a
VBatt24V
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
/86.E2
31
A16a.X1
30
A16a.X1
X1 31
A16b.GND
A16b.X1
X1 30
A16b.24V
31
30
16
A16b.X1
X1 16
A16b.GND_logic
A
EARTHLOGIK
EARTHLOGICALPART
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2
X1 31
A16a.GND
+H3
A16a
/86.E2
SUPPLYEARTH
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
/87.C2
A16b.X1
A16b.X1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
=H+H3A17c.X1:2,=K+K6X2.S:33
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
XMSP6b
+K2
16
+K
Splice.X1
41
WH 1.5Q
A.5
OLE7
Verb.
A4.X40
E.11
WH 1.5Q
S.12
41
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
11
A4.X56
/48.C2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
GND
12
PROJ: 8920980_003
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
SUPPLYINPUTMODULE1AND2
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
41
114
SUPPLYOutputmodule1
A
Kl.15
Kl.15
A4
=K
+K2
Kl.15
F47
F43
B
/41.B1
PROJ: 8920980_003
GND
R47
R48
L47
L48
GND
GND
A4.X44
+H3
A17a
/90.D1
EARTHLOGICALPART
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
44
WH 1.5Q
D
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
A17a.X1
X1 3
A17a.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17a
/90.C1
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
10
A17a.X1
X1 15
A17a.24V_B2
A
+H3
SUPPLY24VBank2
A17a
/90.D1
SUPPLY24VBank2
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
17
A17a.X1
XMSP1a
+H2
15
BK 1.5Q
X1 1
A17a.24V_B1
A
+H3
VBatt24VBank1
A17a
/90.B1
SUPPLY24VBANK1
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
SUPPLYEARTHLOGICALPART
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
WH 1.5Q
A17a.X1
X1 16
A17a.GND_logic
A
BK 1.5Q
2
A17a.X1
X1 2
A17a.24V_logic
A
+H3
VBatt24VLog
A17a
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
XMSP1a
+H2
44
WH 1.5Q
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
43
/44.C2
43
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
=K+K6X2.S:64
WH 1.5Q
Splice.X2.F43KL.15
42
XMSP1a
+H2
42
OLE8
Verb.
1
WH 1.5Q
E.10
X1 17
A17a.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17a
/90.D1
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
/71.C1
Kl.15
A17a.X1
A4.X44
E.8
16
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
10
11
A4.X56
+K2
Splice.X2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
R43
L43
S.11
10A
RD
F48
10A
RD
5A
VI
SUPPLYLOGIC
SUPPLYBANK1
SUPPLYBANK2
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE1
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
42
114
F59
F60
10A
RD
R52
L59
L60
L51
L52
GND
A4.X43
GND
A4.X43
D.5
A4.X42
A4.X42
WH 1.5Q
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
50
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
46
45
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
45
C.11
WH 1.5Q
50
WH 1.5Q
GND
C.3
46
PROJ: 8920980_003
R51
WH 1.5Q
X1 28
A17a.24V_B4
X1 26
A17a.GND
+H3
+H3
A17aVBatt24VBk4zuM2/33(2.AST) A17a
/90.E1
SUPPLY24VBank4
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
SUPPLYEARTH
/90.E1
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
SUPPLYBANK4
A17a.X1
A17a.X1
A17b.X1
X1 14
A17a.24V_B3
A
+H3
A17aVBatt24VBk3zuM2/35(2.AST)
/90.D1
SUPPLY24VBank3
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
VBatt24VBk4
/91.E2
SUPPLY24VBank4
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
SUPPLYBANK3
+H3
A17a.DO2
X1 35
A17a.X1
A17b.X1
X1 28
A17b.24V_B4
+H3
A17b
34
32
A17a.DO1
X1 33
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.E1
digital output2
A17a 2.ASTpump2zuM2/14
X1 26
A17b.GND
+H3
A17b
/91.E2
SUPPLYEARTH
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
A17b.X1
X1 12
A17b.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17b
/91.C2
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
SUPPLYBANK4
35
A17b.X1
XMSP1b
+H2
14
A17b.DO2
X1 35
X1 12
A17a.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17a
/90.C1
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
XMSP1b
+H2
+H3
33
A17a.X1
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.E1
digital output1
A17a 2.ASTJoystickzuM2/28
12
+H3
SUPPLYSUPPLYDO2
/90.E1 SUPPLYforDIGTALOUTPUT2
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
BK 1.5Q
+H3
A17a
SUPPLYSUPPLYDO1
/90.E1 SUPPLYfor digital output1
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
28
BK 1.5Q
A17a.X1
26
33
A17b.DO1
X1 33
XMSP1b
+H2
BK 1.5Q
+H3
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.E2
digital output2
A17b 2.ASTTRANSMISSION
+H3
A17a
35
XMSP1b
+H2
12
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.E2
digital output 1
A17b
2.ASTpump1
X1 34
A17a.V_DO2
BK 1.5Q
SUPPLYSUPPLYDO
/91.E2
SUPPLY
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
A17a.X1
X1 32
A17a.V_DO1
26
+H3
A17b
VBattSUPPLYDO1
/91.E2
SUPPLY
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
A17a.X1
A17a.X1
X1 34
A17b.V_DO2
+H3
A17b
A17b.X1
34
A17b.X1
X1 32
A17b.V_DO1
14
A17b.X1
32
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
28
R60
D.4
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
10A
RD
R59
GND
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
A
E
F52
10A
RD
F51
10A
RD
51
A4
=K
+K2
51
Kl.15
11
Kl.15
SUPPLYOutputmodule2
A4
=K
+K2
Kl.15
SUPPLYOutputmodule1
Kl.15
A17b.X1
X1 14
A17b.24V_B3
A
+H3
VBatt24VBK3
A17b
/91.D2
SUPPLY24VBank3
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
SUPPLYBANK3
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE1AND2
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
43
114
SUPPLYOutputmodule2
A4
=K
+K2
Kl.15
A
Kl.15
F55
F56
10A
RD
10A
RD
R56
L55
L56
GND
A4.X43
WH 1.5Q
49
A17b.X1
X1 3
A17b.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17b
/91.C2
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
BK 1.5Q
X1 15
A17b.24V_B2
A
+H3
VBatt24VBank2
A17b
/91.D2
SUPPLY24VBank2
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
SUPPLYBANK1
A17b.X1
17
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
A17b.X1
49
48
48
X1 1
A17b.24V_B1
A
+H3
VBatt24VBank1
A17b
/91.B2
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
SUPPLYLOGIC
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
15
A17b.X1
X1 16
A17b.GND_logic
A
+H3
VBattEARTH
A17b
/91.D2
EARTHLOGICALPART
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
XMSP1b
+H2
16
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
A17b.X1
X1 2
A17b.24V_logic
A
+H3
VBatt24VLOGICALPART
A17b
/91.C2
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
XMSP1b
+H2
Splice.X2.F43KL.15
WH 1.5Q
XMSP1b
+H2
D.6
WH 1.5Q
A.12
A17b.X1
A4.X40
/42.C3
12
SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE2
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
R55
GND
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
X1 17
A17b.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17b
/91.D2
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
SUPPLYBANK2
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE2
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
44
114
WH 1.5Q
9
C.5
5
1
=K+K4S43.X2:9
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
E200.X
1
WH 1.5Q
+K4
E200
+H3
A17b
VBattDO3
/91.F2
SUPPLY
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
B12.1
BK 1.5Q
/25.D1
54 X1
A17b.GND_DO4
X1 38
A17b
+H3
+H3
A17b
EARTHBackup
A17b
EARTH
/91.D5
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
VBattD04
/91.F2
SUPPLY
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
+K2
XMSP6a
Ident.Nr.
OUTPUTMODULE2BACKUPALARM
ANDCANBESWITCHEDOFF
4
STOPLIGHT
X1 36
A17b.V_DO3
A17b.X1
54
A17b.X1
38
A17b.X1
10
E200.X
Zustand
20
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
20
B16b.X
B16.X
+H5
2 B16a.X1
C
WH 1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
OLE9
Verb.
WH 1.5Q
1
1
1
B16b.X
+H5
A4.X44
22
22
21
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
WH 1.5Q
21
52
52
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
+H5
B16
+H1
B16c.X1
+K2
XMSP6d
BK 1.5Q
53
53
+H5
B16
0
M
2
H22a.X2
B16.X
+H1
H22a
0
B16a.X1
1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
S43.X2
WH 1.5Q
B16c.X1
+H1
L22
GND
WH 1.5Q
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
10
R22
WH 1.5Q
A4.X42
H22a.X1
10A
RD
A
10
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4.X43
F22
S43.X2
10
S43.X1
OPTION&#5482
Rear side/ERECTIONUPbonnet
GND
36
L62
D.10
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
L61
GND
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
R62
=K
+K4
S43
0
WH 1.5Q
R61
WH 1.5Q
S43.X1
A17b.X1
10A
RD
A
E
10
F62
10A
RD
39
F61
+H3
A17b.DO4
39 X1
Kl.15
BK 1.5Q
A4
=K
+K2
WH 1.5Q
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
Digitalausgang4
/91.F2
A17b
BackupALARM
Kl.15
WH 1.5Q
Kl.15
OPTIONBackupALARMCANBESWITCHEDOFF
SUPPLYOutputmodule2
A4
=K
+K2
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
45
114
=K
+K4
S43
0
GND
=K
+K2
XMSP6d
22
WH 1.5Q
22
A4.X44
20
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
BK 1.5Q
D
X1 36
A17b.V_DO3
=H
+H3
A17b
54
38
=H
+H3
A17b.X1
54 X1
A17b.GND_DO4
X1 38
A17b
Reserve
Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2
VBattDO3
Reserve
=H+H/51.F2
VersorgungfrDigitalausgang3
=H+H/51.F2
VersorgungfrDigitalausgang4
CAN:
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2
OUTPUTMODUL2
=H
+H3
A17b
=K+K/7.D1
=H
+H3
A17b
+H3
A17b.X1
36
+H3
A17b.X1
B12.1.2
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
20
B16.X
+H5
B16b.X
+H5
=H
=H
2
+H5
B16a.X1
2
+H1
B16c.X1
+H5
B16
0
BK 1.5Q
52
52
53
53
H22a.X2
=H
+H5
B16b.X
B16a.X1
+H5
=H
21
21
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
+H5
B16
0
M
2
=K
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
+K6
=K
+H1
H22a
0
B16c.X1
+H1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
H22a.X1
=K
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
+K6
=K
10
S43.X2
C.5
+H5
B16.X
Verb. A4.X44:5
10
PROJ: 8920980_003
S43.X1
A4.X42
=H+H/51.D5
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
10
Bremslicht
A4.X43
S43.X2
WH 1.5Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
GND
D.10
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
GND
F22
10A
RD
=K+K4S43.X2:9
=K
+K4
S43a
S2
6905201
6002120 0
Rckfahrwarneinrichtungoptisch
Heckseitig/MontageaufMotorhaube
S43.X1
WH 1.5Q
A17b.X1
+H3
=H
WH 1.5Q
A17b.DO4
39 X1
F62
10A
RD
39
F61
10A
RD
A17b
+H3
=H
WH 1.5Q
=H+H/51.F2
Kl.15
WH 1.5Q
A4
=K
+K2
Kl.15
10
Kl.15
OUTPUTMODUL2
CAN:
Digitalausgang4
Reserve
A4
=K
+K2
OptionBackupAlarmwhich can be switched off
SupplyOutputmodule2
A
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
OUTPUTMODULE2BACKUPALARM
ANDCANBESWITCHEDOFF
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
46
114
+K2
A4.X40.3a
+K2
Kl.30a
1
WH 1.5Q
SUPPLYLHECUUP/CR
PROJ: 8920980_003
R24
R38
L36
L24
L38
GND
GND
A4.X40
A.1
R36
GND
A.2
XMSP6c
+K2
XMSP6c
RD 6Q
Verb.
37
37
1
5A
LBN
A4.X41
+K2
B.2
A700D.X2
+K2
F216
5A
LBN
X2 68
A700D.15
+M
A700D
IGNITION
ON
ENGINEECU
/93.B2
=K
+K2.RH
2 100mm
RD 1.5Q
F38
10A
RD
=K+K2K216:87
F24
40A
OG
WH 1.5Q
F36
68
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
Kl.30
Kl.15
Kl.30
A4
=K
+K2
A4.X40
OLE10
A4.X40
A.3
+K3
S216
21
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+M
A700D
/93.B2
SUPPLY30b
PERFORMANCEPART
ENGINEECU
+M
A700D
/93.C2
X2 15
A700D.31.2
EARTH
PERFORMANCEPART
ENGINEECU
+M
A700D
/93.C2
X2 2
A700D.30.2
SUPPLY30b
PERFORMANCEPART
ENGINEECU
+M
A700D
EARTH
PERFORMANCEPART
ENGINEECU
/93.C2
X2 4
A700D.30.3
+M
A700D
SUPPLY30b
ELECTRONICS
ENGINEECU
/93.C2
A700D.X2
87 10022680
10022680
87a
E
1
A700D.X2
X2 16
A700D.31.3
A700D.X2
16
A700D.X2
15
A700D.X2
X2 1
A700D.30.1
31
BK 1.5Q
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
BU 2.5Q
RD 2.5Q
BU 2.5Q
15
+K2
XMSP12.1
+M
A700D.X2
+K2
K216
0
RD 2.5Q
30
57
X1.S
X1.B
57
56
=K
+K2.RH
56
X1.S
X1.B
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
BU 2.5Q
24
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
24
55
RD 2.5Q
21
54
X1.S
X1.B
55
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
21
54
BU 2.5Q
RD 2.5Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1.5Q
22
XMSP6c
X2 3
A700D.31.1
+M
A700D
EARTH
ELECTRONICS
ENGINEECU
/93.C2
OPTIONLAGGING AUTOMATICS
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
MOTORCONTROLAUTOMATICRUNOUT
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
47
114
CONNECTWITHA4.X56.12F43
F64
10A
RD
10A
RD
R63
R64
L63
L64
/41.F1
GND
A4.X41
+K2
10
A4.X41
+K2
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
29
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
XMSP1d
+H2
29
28
33
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
XMSP1d
+H2
28
33
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
XMSP1d
+H2
A17c.X1
X1 3
A17c.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17c
/92.C2
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
A17c.X1
X1 15
A17c.24V_B2
A
+H3
SUPPLY24VBank2
A17c
/92.D2
SUPPLY24VBank2
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
17
A17c.X1
X1 1
A17c.24V_B1
A
+H3
VBatt24VBank1
A17c
/92.B2
SUPPLY24VBANK1
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
15
A17c.X1
X1 16
A17c.GND_logic
A
+H3
VBattEARTHLOGICALPART
A17c
/92.D2
EARTHLOGICALPART
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
A17c.X1
X1 2
A17c.24V_logic
A
+H3
VBatt24VLOGICALPART
A17c
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
A17c.X1
16
E
2
F63
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
GND
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
Kl.15
A4
=K
+K2
Kl.15
SUPPLYOutputmodul3
X1 17
A17c.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17c
/92.D2
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE3
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
48
114
SUPPLYOutputmodule3
F66
L65
L66
GND
A4
=K
+K2
GND
E
F71
10A
RD
WH 1.5Q
11
A4.X40
A4.X40
1
1
30
86
+K2
K246
D
V48
+K4
A18.X1.1a
87a
87
85
V36
V37
WH 1.5Q
GND
MP
A4.X48
I.11
I.10
MP
10
BK 1.5Q
A18.X1.1b
+K4
A4.X48
I.8
A4
=K
+K2
X1 1
A18.Kl15
A
+K4
A18 INFORMATIONINPUT
/52.C3 INFORMATIONINPUT
CAN:
ELECTRIESKEYBOARD
WH 1.5Q
A4.X48
12
C.6
A18.X1
WH 1.5Q
A4.X42
I.12
C.4
WH 1.5Q
* A4.X42
SUPPLYOPTIONS/KLIMATASTATUR
31
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
31
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
30
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
XMSP1d
+H2
30
WH 1.5Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
XMSP1d
+H2
GND
X1 12
A17c.GND
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A17c
/92.C2
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
A17c.X1
A17c.X1
X1 28
A17c.24V_B4
+H3
A17c
SUPPLY24VBank4
/92.E2
SUPPLY24VBank4
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
26
A17c.X1
X1 14
A17c.24V_B3
A
+H3
SUPPLY24VBank3
A17c
/92.D2
SUPPLY24VBank3
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
28
A17c.X1
12
E
14
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1.5Q
R66
32
PROJ: 8920980_003
SUPPLYELECTRICKEYPAD
R65
32
10A
RD
SUPPLYMAINKEYPAD
10A
RD
Kl.15
F65
OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.C2
PWMOutput1(Bank1)
A17c VccCUTOFFLIGHTING
+H3
A
A17c.PWM1
X1 4
Kl.15
Kl.15
A4
=K
+K2
X1 26
A17c.GND
+H3
A17c
/92.E2
OPTIONAUTOMATICLIGHTING
CUTOFF(ABA)
SUPPLYEARTH
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
SUPPLYOUTPUTMODULE3AUTOMATIC
LIGHTINGSHUTDOWN
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
49
114
A17c.X1
OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.C2
PWMOutput4(Bank1)
A17c 4.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1
+H3
A
A17c.PWM4
X1 7
A17c.X1
OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.D2
PWMOutput5(Bank2)
+H3
A
A17c.PWM5
X1 18
A17c.X1
F209
5A
LBN
F210
10A
RD
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
18
OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.C2
PWMOutput3(Bank1)
+H3
A
A17c.PWM3
X1 6
WH 6Q
A17c.X1
/89.D2
+H3
A16d
/89.E2
Y12b.JPT
Y11b.JPT
SUPPLY24V
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODUL4
+H3
A16d
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
A17c.X1
50
49
A17c.X1
X1 47
X1 48
X1 49
X1 50
A17c.GND_PWM2
A17c.GND_PWM3
A17c.GND_PWM4
A17c.GND_PWM9
D
D
D
D
+H3
+H3
+H3
+H3
RESERVE
A17cGND3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1 A17cGND3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV2 A17cGND4.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1 A17c
/92.C5
EARTH
/92.C5
EARTH
/92.C5
EARTH
/92.C5
EARTH
CAN:
CAN:
CAN:
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
OUTPUTMODULE3
OUTPUTMODULE3
OUTPUTMODULE3
SUPPLYEARTH
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODUL4
/89.E2
A17c.X1
48
A17c.X1
X1 31
A16d.GND
47
BK 1.5Q
A16d.X1
X1 30
A16d.24V
31
WH 1.5Q
A16d.X1
D
BK 1.5Q
+H3
A16d
X1 16
A16d.GND_logic
A
EARTHLOGICALPART
EARTHLOGICALPART
CAN:
INPUTMODUL4
30
BK 1.5Q
A16d.X1
X1 2
A16d.24V_logic
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A16d
CAN:
INPUTMODUL4
16
WH 1.5Q
A16d.X1
Y12b.JPT
1
+V1
Y12b
0
Y12a.JPT
Y11a.JPT
2
2
BK 1.5Q
Y11b.JPT
1
+V1
Y11b
0
57
56
Y12a.JPT
1
+V1
Y12a
0
57
WH 1.5Q
Y11a.JPT
1
+V1
Y11a
0
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
56
BK 1.5Q
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
55
54
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
54
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
XMSP200
+K2
55
WH 1.5Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
XMSP200
+K2
OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.C2
PWMOutput2(Bank1)
+H3
A
A17c.PWM2
X1 5
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
=K
+K2.RH
WH 6Q
+K2
A4.Kl.15.a
1
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
SUPPLYINPUTMODULE4EP3.AND4.CONTROLCIRCUIT
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
50
114
Kl.15
A4
=K
+K2
F9
10A
RD
A4.X45
WH 1Q
5
A4.X45 F.10
F.9
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
CONTROLLEVEROption1
A
A16b.UI9
X1 8
/87.C2
A16b
+K2
WH 1Q
A16b.X1
18
A16b.X1
10
A4.X44
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
CONTROLLEVERBACKWARD2
A
A16b.UI6
X1 19
19
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
/87.D2
CONTROLLEVERFORWARD2 A16b
+K2
A
A16b.UI5
X1 18
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
A16a.X1
A16a.X1
XMSP6c
+K2
A16b.X1
/87.C2
A16b
+K2
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
CONTROLLEVEROption2
A
A16b.UI10
X1 9
A16b.X1
/87.C2
A16b
+K2
A16b.X1
WH 1Q
10
11
12
OPT2
sw3
10
WH 1Q
10
E
1
OPT3
sw5
S222.X1
S222.X2
10
S222.X2
12
11
10
COMFORTCONTROLVIA1<>5
3CONTROLCIRCUITVIA1<>5AND6<>2
INFOASSEMBLYINSTRUCTIONS!
0
S2.1
S2.2
S2.3
S2.4
BK 1.5Q
VNR
WH 1.5Q
+K4
S2
S2.X
OPT1
sw4
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
0
S222
+K4
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
A16b.X1.10a
+K2
WH 1Q
A16b.X2.9+10b
+K2
WH 1Q
A16b.X2.9+10b
+K2
A16b.X1.9a
+K2
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
WH 1Q
D
1
WH 1Q
23
+K6
X1.B
X1.S
+K6
23
+K6
X1.B
X1.S
+K6
LHCONTROLLEVERVNRANDOPTIONS
OLE5
OLE6
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
+K
Splice.X3
S222.X1
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
CONTROLLEVEROption3
A
A16b.UI11
X1 10
WH 1Q
22
PROJ: 8920980_003
GND
E.4
22
L9
GND
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
L15
10
R9
F15.3
R15
/39.E8
Kl.15
F15.2
10A
RD
/39.E3
F15
Kl.15
F15.1
/20.C3
INPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
CAN:
/86.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input9
/87.D2
A16a CONTROLLEVERFORWARD1 A16a CONTROLLEVERBACKWARD1 A16b
+H3
+H3
+K2
A
A
A16a.UI9
A16a.UI10
X1 8
X1 9
/20.B2
Kl.15
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
LHCONTROLLEVER
SWITCHCOMFORTCONTROL3AND4CONTROLCIRCUIT
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
Verb.
Verb.
1
1
8920980
460901000003
7
=K+K4S222.X2:9
=K+K4S222.X2:10
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
51
114
A16b.X1
35
A16b.24V
X1 35
RD 0.5Q
21
15
15
14
14
BU 0.5Q
12
/87.E2
A16b
+K2
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
24Vthrottle transmitter2
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
12
11
11
BU 0.5Q
RD 0.5Q
1
BU 0.5Q
RD 0.5Q
A16b.X1
BU 0.5Q
A16a.X1
25
A16a.X1
/87.D2
A16a.UI16
X1 25
RD 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
A16b.X1
A16a.24V
X1 39
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
throttle transmitter2
A
A16b.UI8
X1 21
A16b
+K2
+H3
+K6
R5
R5.X
BK 0.5Q
EARTHInchPot.1
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
16
A16b.X1
X1 67
A16a.GND
EARTHInchPot.2
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2
+H3
A16a
/86.E5
EARTHthrottle transmitter1
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
63
67
A16a.X1
X1 62
A16b.GND
/87.D5
62
A16b.X1
+K2
A16b
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
63
X1 63
A16a.GND
16
13
BK 0.5Q
13
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
/86.D5
signal
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
+H3
A16a
3
signal
A16a.X1
BK 0.5Q
R1.X
signal
R5.X
3
signal
+K6
R1
1
4
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16b.24V
X1 34
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/86.E2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input16
A16a
throttle transmitter1
R1.X
/86.F2
A16a
+H3
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
24Vthrottle transmitter1
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
/87.E2
A16b
+K2
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
24VInchPotentiometer2
39
A16b.X1
PROJ: 8920980_003
/87.D2
A16b
+K2
RD 0.5Q
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
InchPotentiometer2
A
A16b.UI7
X1 20
21
A16a.X1
RD 0.5Q
A16a.X1
20
INPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
24VInchPotentiometer1A16a
InchPotentiometer1
+H3
A
A16a.24V
A16a.UI8
X1 35
X1 21
35
/86.E2
A16a
+H3
34
X1 63
A16b.GND
+K2
A16b
/87.D5
EARTHthrottler transmitter
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
ANGLESENSORINCH/GASPEDAL
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
52
114
A17b.X1
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.D1
PWMOutput13(Bank4)
A17a
oil engine1
+H3
A
A17a.PWM13
X1 22
A17a.X1
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.D1
PWMOutput14(Bank4)
A17a
oil engine2
+H3
A
A17a.PWM14
X1 23
A17a.X1
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
A
/90.D1
PWMOutput8(Bank2)
A17a Swivel angle limitation.oil engine1
+H3
A
A17a.PWM8
X1 21
A17a.X1
21
A17a.X1
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput1(Bank
A17b OVERSPEEDPROTECTION
+H3
A
A17b.PWM1
X1 4
23
A17a.X1
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C1
PWMOutput9(Bank3)
A17a
cruising range1
+H3
A
A17a.PWM9
X1 8
22
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C1
PWMOutput11(Bank3)
A17a
cruising range3
+H3
A
A17a.PWM11
X1 10
A17a.X1
10
A17a.X1
11
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C1
PWMOutput10(Bank3)
A17a
cruising range2
+H3
A
A17a.PWM10
X1 9
9
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C1
PWMOutput12(Bank3)
A17a
Modulation
+H3
A
A17a.PWM12
X1 11
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
Y6.3
Y16.JPT
YEP2.DT
Y57.DT
H
G
YEP1.DT
G
F
+F3
Y57
Y6.1
0
E
Y6.X
Y57.DT
Y6.2
+H
Y16
YEP2.DT
1
+F3
YEP2
MO1
YEP1.DT
1
+F3
YEP1
+F3
Y6
Y16.JPT
Y6.X
A
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
+H3
A17a
+H3
A17a
EARTHModulation
/90.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
EARTHTRAVELRANGES2
/90.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
X1 52
A17a.GND_PWM11
+H3
A17a
EARTHTRAVELRANGES3
/90.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
X1 46
A17b.GND_PWM1
D
+H3
EARTHoverspeed
A17b
/91.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
A17a.X1
X1 64
A17a.GND_PWM13
+H3
A17a
A17a.X1
X1 65
A17a.GND_PWM14
EARTHoil engine1
/90.D5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
+H3
A17a
EARTHoil engine2
/90.E5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
63
A17a.X1
65
A17b.X1
X1 50
A17a.GND_PWM9
D
+H3
EARTHTRAVELRANGES1
A17a
/90.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
64
A17a.X1
46
A17a.X1
X1 51
A17a.GND_PWM10
50
A17a.X1
X1 53
A17a.GND_PWM12
51
A17a.X1
52
E
53
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
X1 63
A17a.GND_PWM8
+H3
A17a
/90.D5
Swivel angle limitation.oil engine1

EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
TRAVELRANGESSWIVELANGLEHYDROMOTORS
OVERSPEEDPROTECTION
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
53
114
A
A17b.PWM9
X1 8
A17a.X1
A17b.X1
TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump2BACKWARD
A
A17b.PWM10
X1 9
A17b.X1
A17b.X1
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput4(Bank
A17b SWIVELANGLEtravel pump2
+H3
A
A17b.PWM4
X1 7
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/86.C2 ANALOGUEOutput2
A16a
+H3
HIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP
A
A16a.UI2
X1 5
A16a.X1
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.D1
PWMOutput7(Bank2)
A17a
BUZZER
+H3
A
A17a.PWM7
X1 20
A17a.X1
26
26
WH 1Q
BU 1Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
+K6
X1.B
X1.S
Y15.JPT
Y15a.JPT
H40.X2
IP
+H4
B45
0
+K2
H40
0
+
C
BK 1Q
B45.X
Y15a.JPT
1
+H
Y15a
0
Y3a.DT
1
1
+H
Y15
0
+H
Y3a
0
Y2a.DT
Y15.JPT
Y3.DT
+H
Y2a
0
2
Y2.DT
+H
Y3
0
Y3a.DT
+H
Y2
0
Y2a.DT
Y3.DT
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Y2.DT
H40.X1
B45.X
BK 1Q
20
20
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
RD 1Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
+H3
A17a EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1FORWARD
+H3
A17a EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1BACKWARD
+H3
A17b
/90.E5
/90.E5
/91.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
+H3
A17b
/91.C5
EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
X1 48
A17b.GND_PWM3
D
+H3
EARTHtravel
pump
A17b
/91.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
A17b.X1
X1 49
A17b.GND_PWM4
D
+H3
EARTHSWIVELANGLE
A17b
/91.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
A16a.X1
41
A17b.X1
X1 51
A17b.GND_PWM10
49
A17b.X1
X1 41
A16a.24V
D
+H3
HIGHPRESSUREtravel
pump
A16a
/86.B5
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
A17a.X1
62
X1 50
A17b.GND_PWM9
D
48
A17b.X1
X1 67
A17a.GNDPWM16
51
A17a.X1
X1 66
A17a.GND_PWM15
50
A17a.X1
67
E
66
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
WH 1Q
A17b.X1
20
TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump2
A17a.PWM16
X1 25
24
A17a.X1
A17b
+H3
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput3(Bank
A17b SWIVELANGLEtravel pump1
+H3
A
A17b.PWM3
X1 6
A
A17a.PWM15
X1 24
A17b
+H3
TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1FORWARD
A17a
+H3
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput10(Ban
A17a
+H3
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput9(Bank
25
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.E1
PWMOutput16(Bank4)
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.D1
PWMOutput15(Bank4)
X1 62
A17a.GND_PWM7
+H3
A17a
/90.D5
EARTHBUZZER
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
TRAVELDIRECTIONSHYDRAULICPUMPBUZZER
PRESSUREHIGHPRESSURETRAVELPUMP
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
54
114
OPTIONGEROTORSTEERING
+H3
+H3
A17a.V_DO4
X1 38
A17a.DO4
X1 39
A17a.X1
38
A17a.X1
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.D2
PWMOutput15(Ban
A17b VccMVGEROTORSTEERING
+H3
A
A17b.PWM15
X1 24
A17b.X1
39
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.F1
digital output4
A17a back up alarm .OPTICAL
OPTIONFUELPREHEATING
Kl.30
A4
=K
+K2
F34
Kl.15
A4
=K
+K2
24
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.F1 SUPPLYfor digital output4
A17a supply for digital output 4via.A4
A
E
F14
20A
YE
15A
BU
L34
L14
GND
A4.X42
A4.X44
GND
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
RD 2.5Q
1
1
Y63.JPT
+H2
S204
BK 2.5Q
+H3
Y63
BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
XMSP6.14
+K2
C
WH 2.5Q
=B
+B1
H59
Y63.JPT
10
10
=B
+B1
H58
BK 1.5Q
A4
=K
+K2
F49
WH 2.5Q
BK 1.5Q
A4.X43
BK 1.5Q
10A
RD
+M
A17b.X1
X1 54
A17a.GND_DO4
R49
L49
+H3
A17b
/90.D5
/91.E5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
X1 66
A17b.GND_PWM15
+H3
A17a EARTHback up alarm.OPTICAL
GND
R13
66
A17a.X1
M10
0
EARTHGEROTORSTEERING
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
Kl.15
OPTIONBACKUPALARMVISUALREDFLASHING
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
R14
B
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
54
R34
WH 1.5Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
OPTIONREFUELLINGPUMP
3
Ident.Nr.
BACKUPALARMGEROTORSTEERING
DIESELPREHEATING
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
55
114
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C1
PWMOutput3(Bank1)
A17a BUCKETRETURNTODIG
+H3
A
A17a.PWM3
X1 6
A16a.X1
X33.X 2
36
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
32
33
33
32
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
31
D
BK 1.5Q
WH 1Q
2
2
BK 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
+V
B17.B
B17.X
Y18
Y17
Y9
+K4
X33
0
+V1
Y9a
0
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
+H3
A17a.X1.48a
BK 1Q
/23.E6
10A
RD
F11
BK 1Q
WH 1Q
Kl.15
A4
=K
+K2
1
OPT2
sw3
OPT3
sw5
31
OPT1
sw4
1
1
X33.X
B17.X_1
+
+V
B17
0
B17.X_1
F.7
A4.X45
36
35
35
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
34
WH 1.5Q
WH 1Q
OPTION
BUCKETRETURNTODIGVIA
PUSHBUTTONSWITCHAMLHCONTROLLEVER
34
+K6
X1.B
X1.S
WH 1Q
B32.X
WH 1Q
27
27
B17.X
B17.B
+V
WH 1Q
R11
X1 11
A16a.UI12
A
+H3
A16a BUCKETRETURNTODIG
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
GND
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
X1 66
A16a.GND
+H3
A16a
/86.E5
BUCKETRETURNTODIG
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
+H3
A16a
/86.D5
LIFTKICKOUT
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
+H3
A17a
/90.C5
EARTHBUCKETRETURNTODIG
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
X1 49
A17a.GND_PWM4
D
+H3
A17a EARTHLIFTKICKOUT
/90.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
8920980
460901000003
7
A17a.X1
60
A17a.X1
X1 48
A17a.GND_PWM3
D
49
48
A17a.X1
X1 64
A16a.GND
FLOATPOSITIONBUCKETRETURNTODIG
LIFTKICKOUT
3
A16a.X1
X1 10
A16a.UI11
A
+H3
LIFTKICKOUT
A16a
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
64
A16a.X1
10
A16a.X1
11
A16a.X1
66
L11
Zustand
A17a.X1.6a
+H3
A17a.X1
WH 1Q
36
18
A16a.24V
X1 38
A17a.X1
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.D1
PWMOutput5(Bank2)
A17a
FLOATPOSITION
+H3
A
A17a.PWM5
X1 18
B15.X
+
+V3
B15
0
B15.X
+K4
B32
0
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
B32.X
A17a.X1
38
A16a.24V
X1 36
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
24VLIFTKICKOUT
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C1
PWMOutput4(Bank1)
A17a
LIFTKICKOUT
+H3
A
A17a.PWM4
X1 7
WH 1Q
A16a
+H3
+H3
A16a.X1
Kl.15
+K6
X1.B
X1.S
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
/86.F2
WH 1Q
A16a.X1
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/86.F2
SUPPLY24V
A16a 24VBUCKETRETURNTODIG
A
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/86.D2 ANALOGUEall-purpose input5
A16a
FLOATPOSITION
+H3
A
A16a.UI5
X1 18
18
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
X1 60
A17a.GND_PWM5
+H3
A17a
/90.D5
EARTHFLOATPOSITION
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
56
114
/87.C2
A16b.X1
10
2
BK 1.5Q
=K+K4S23.X2:9
+K2
XMSP6.12
EARTHAdditional equipment
/91.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
+H3
A17c
RESERVE
/92.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
+H3
A17c
/92.C5
RESERVE
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE3
Verb.
47
+H3
A17b
A17a.X1
X1 47
A17a.GND_PWM2
D
+H3
EARTHAHS
A17a
/90.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
ADDITIONALEQUIPMENT123AND4
QUICKCHANGEDEVICE
4
+H
X1.B.65
E
1
OLE23
/91.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
X1 51
A17c.GND_PWM10
+H
+K6
X1.B
X1.S
F2210AX44/5
+H3
A17b
A17c.X1
X1 52
A17c.GND_PWM11
51
A17c.X1
X1 53
A17b.GND_PWM12
52
A17b.X1
X1 52
A17b.GND_PWM11
53
A17b.X1
63
1
A17.X2
70mm
+K2
XMSP6.12
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
S23.X2
BK 1.5Q
2
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
S23.X1
10
BK 1.5Q
Y14.JPT
0 1
+V1
Y53
0
S23a
0
+H
A17.X2
BK 1.5Q
Y12a.JPT
+K4
S23
0
*
S23.X2
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
Y11a.JPT
S23.X1
Y14.JPT
+H
Y14
0
Y12.JPT
Y11.JPT
Y12a.JPT
1
+V
Y12a
0
+V
Y12
0
Y11a.JPT
1
+V
Y11a
0
+V
Y11
0
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
63
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
+K6
X1.B.64
+H
WH 1.5Q
64
+K2
V100
Zustand
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
alarm buzzer
A
A16b.UI12
X1 11
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
Y12.JPT
52
Y11.JPT
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1.5Q
A17a.X1
A16b
+K2
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C1
PWMOutput2(Bank1)
A17a
AHS
+H3
A
A17a.PWM2
X1 5
64
A17c.X1
WH 1.5Q
OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.C2
PWMOutput10(Bank3)
A17c
RESERVE
+H3
A
A17c.PWM10
X1 9
11
A17c.X1
WH 1.5Q
A17b.X1
10
A17b.X1
OUTPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/92.C2
PWMOutput9(Bank3)
A17c
RESERVE
+H3
A
A17c.PWM9
X1 8
11
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput12(Bank
A17b
Additional equipment2
+H3
A
A17b.PWM12
X1 11
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.C2
PWMOutput11(Bank
A17b
+H3
A
A17b.PWM11
X1 10
ZeichNr.
SEEASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS!
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
57
114
A17a.PWM2
X1 5
A4
=K
+K2
=H
+H3
A17bMasseZusatzausrstung1
Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2
X1 53
A17b.GND_PWM12
=H
+H3
A17bMasseZusatzausrstung2
=H+H/38.C5
Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2
X1 47
A17b.GND_PWM2
=H
+H3
A17b GNDQuick change device
=H+H/38.B5
MGND
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2
=H
+H3
A17a
=H+H/37.B5
A4.X45
XMSP6a
+K2
F.12
X1 47
A17a.GND_PWM2
MasseAHS
Masse
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL1
+K4
A21
/41.B4
BK 1.5Q
+K4
A21.X1
X1 3
A21.Kl15
Klemme30
Versorgung
CAN:
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
+K4
A21
/41.B4
RD 2.5Q
+K4
A21.X1
X1 2
A21.GND
+K4
A21
Klemme15
Klemme15
CAN:
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
/41.B4
AnspeisungMasse
AnspeisungMasse
CAN:
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
A4.X41
X1 1
A21.Kl30
47
=H
+H3
A17a.X1
47
=H
+H3
A17b.X1
53
52
X1 52
A17b.GND_PWM11
=H+H/38.C5
=H
+H3
A17b.X1
GND
B.5
+K4
A21.X1
=H
+H3
A17b.X1
F19
10A
rt
GND
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
1
+H
Y14.JPT
1
+H
Y14
0
2
Y14.JPT
+H
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
F19a
20A
ge
WH 1.5Q
+V1
Y53.JPT
1
+V1
Y53
0
2
Y53.JPT
+V1
WH 1.5Q
+V
Y12.JPT
1
+V
Y12
0
2
Y12.JPT
+V
=V
+V
Y11.JPT
1
+V
Y11
0
2
Y11.JPT
+V
=V
BK 1.5Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
F19Kl.15.Kl.15
A17a.X1
+H3
=H
SpeisungKlimaanlage
/25.F1
A17b.X1
+H3
=H
+H3
=H
Kl.15
A17b.PWM2
X1 5
12
A17b.X1
+H3
=H
+H3
=H
WH 1Q
A17b.PWM12
X1 11
OUTPUTMODUL1
CAN:
=H+H/37.B2 PWMAusgang2(Bank1)
A17a
AHS
A17b.X1
+H3
=H
+H3
=H
A17b.PWM11
X1 10
OUTPUTMODUL2
CAN:
=H+H/38.B2 PWMOutput2(Bank1)
A17b Squick change device
+H3
=H
10
OUTPUTMODUL2
CAN:
=H+H/38.C2 PWMAusgang12(Bank3)
A17b Zusatzausrstung2
11
OUTPUTMODUL2
CAN:
=H+H/38.C2 PWMAusgang11(Bank3)
A17b Zusatzausrstung1
Kl.30
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
ADDITIONALEQUIPMENT12
QUICKCHANGEDEVICE
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
58
114
OPTIONWORKINGBASKET
WH 1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
87a
WH 1.5Q
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
9
9
S210.X2
BK 1.5Q
5
5
WH 1.5Q
1
1
+H2
XMSP1.e
210
+K4
S213
22
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
Y67.JPT
BK 1.5Q
+H2
XMSP1.e
5
WH 1.5Q
2
2
WH 1.5Q
+H
X48.S
X48.B
25
A16c.X1
X1 25
A16c.UI16
+H3
A16c
basket functionNotOFF2
/88.E1 ANALOGUEall-purpose input16
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3
ZeichNr.
X1 6
A16c.UI3
A
+H3
basket
functionNotOFF1
A16c
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3
Ident.Nr.
FUNCTIONWORKINGBASKET
3
A16c.X1
2
BK 1.5Q
+H2
XMSP1.e
Y66.JPT
BK 1.5Q
Verb.
OLE20
+H2
XMSP1.e
+V1
Y67
0
2
2
Y65.JPT
Verb.
WH 1.5Q
+V1
Y66
0
+V1
Y65
0
Y67.JPT
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
=K+K4S210.X2:9
Y66.JPT
BK 1.5Q
=K+K4S210.X2:10
Y65.JPT
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
10
S210.X2
WH 1.5Q
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
22
WH 1.5Q
+K6
Splice.X30
10
S210.X1
Datum
21
D
3
Ersteller
+K4
S214
21
+K4
S210
0
WH 1.5Q
X2.S
X2.B
WH 1.5Q
S210.X1
WH 1.5Q
+H
X48.B
X48.S
3
BK 1.5Q
5
5
WH 1.5Q
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
WH 1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
A4.X43
WH 1.5Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
30
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
GND
85
K208
WH 1.5Q
Zustand
87
L50
OLE19
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
K208
*
=K
+K2.RH
86
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
R50
WH 1.5Q
10A
RD
A16c.X1
F50
A16c.X1
+K
X51.S 1/1
X51.B
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
Kl.15
A4
=K
+K2
INPUTMODULE3
CAN:
A16c
basket functionMode2
+H3
A
A16c.UI9
X1 8
8
INPUTMODULE3
CAN:
A16c
basket functionMode1
+H3
A
A16c.UI4
X1 7
WH 1.5Q
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
59
114
OPTIONPROPORTIONALCONTROL3.AND4.CONTROLCIRCUIT
A16d.X1
INPUTMODUL4
INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
CAN:
/89.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input2 /89.C2 ANALOGUEall-purpose Input9
A16d 3.CONTROLCIRCUITAktiv A16d
OPTION
+H3
+H3
A
A
A16d.UI2
A16d.UI9
X1 5
X1 8
BK 1Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
GND
+K4
S2a
0
cap.sensor
feed24V
S2.X1
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
GND
GND
Out
Vcc5V
Out
GND
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
EP3.AND4.CONTROLCIRCUIT
3
CAPACITIVE
Hallsensors+SW1
feed5V
Ulow(V)Umid(V)Uhigh(V)
Sensor10,5052,524,54
Sensor20,5562,5214,539
state off1,4....1,6mAnot active

state on2,9....3,6mAactive
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
FNR
JOYSTICK SENSOR
Vcc5V
WH 1Q
Datum
NO
SW1
WH 1Q
Ersteller
NC
COM
WH 1Q
+K6
X1.B
X1.S
+K6
WH 1Q
+K6
X1.B
X1.S
+K6
HALL SENSOR
1.and2.
VNR
Vcc24V
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
S2a.X2
INPUTMODUL2
/50.D2 ANALOGUEUniversal
A16b JOYSTICK REVERSE2
+K2
A16b.UI6
X1 19
A16b.X1
+K2
S020mA
CAN:
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
7
INPUTMODUL2
/50.D2 ANALOGUEUniversal
A16b
JOYSTICKFORWARD2
+K2
A16b.UI5
X1 18
A16b.X1
+K2
WH 1Q
INPUTMODUL1
CAN:
INPUTMODUL1
=H+H/48.C2 ANALOGUEUniversale=H+H/48.C2 ANALOGUEUniversal

A16a
JOYSTICK FORWARD1 A16a JOYSTICKREVERSE1
+H3
+H3
A16a.UI9
A16a.UI10
X1 8
X1 9
A16a.X1
A16a.X1
+H3
+H3
SW1
A4.X44
E.4
Zustand
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
A
F15.3
BK 1Q
FUNKTIONFNR
F15.2
E
F15
10A
RD
BU 1Q
/6.C3
F15.1
RD 1Q
/6.B2
WH 1Q
Kl.15
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A4
=K
+K2
CAN:
A16d.X1
+K
Splice.X70
CAN:
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16d.X1
54
A16d.X1
INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
EARTH
GNDRockerRollerCap
A16d.GND
X1 54
WH 1Q
A16d.X1
/89.D5
A16d
+H3
10
A16d.X1
INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
A16d
OUTPUTHallsensor2
+H3
A
A16d.UI11
X1 10
A16d.X1
INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
A16d
OUTPUTHall sensor1
+H3
A
A16d.UI3
X1 6
A16d.X1
INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
A16d
CONTROL5V
+H3
A
A16d.UI4
X1 7
WH 1Q
A16d.X1
36
A16d.X1
A16d.GND
X1 59
/89.C5
A16d
+H3
INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
SUPPLY5V
RollerRockerCap
D
A16d.5V
X1 50
50
A16d.24VV
X1 36
/89.D5
A16d
+H3
INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
EARTH
capacitive Joysticksensor
59
/89.F2
A16d
+H3
INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
A16d
capacitiveJoystick sensor
+H3
A
A16d.UI1
X1 4
4
INPUTMODUL4
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
capacitiveJoystick sensor
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
60
114
+K2
Kl.15
1
BK 1Q
=K
+K2.RH
+K2
XMSP201
+V1
S213
0
B213.X
=V +
+V2
B213
0
S
B213.X
*
30
85
+K2
K213
10
0
10
87a
87
86
BK
WH,WH 1Q,1Q
BU
3
B213.X
S213.X2
BK 1Q
S213.X1
10
1
BN
BK 1Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K2
F213
7,5A
HBR
S213.X2
S213.X1
=K
+K2.RH
XMSP201
+K2
WH 1Q
=K
XMSP201
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WH 1Q
Y68.JPT
+V1
Y68
0
BK 1Q
Y68.JPT
=K
+K2
XMSP201
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
WH 6Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
WH 1Q
WH,WH 1Q,1Q
WH 1Q
OPTIONCUTOFFTILTCYLINDER
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
F
Ident.Nr.
CUTOFFTILTCYLINDER
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
61
114
/96.B2
HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
/96.B2
X1 2
A21.GND
A
SUPPLYEARTH
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN:
28
A21.X1
29
26
27
10
A21
+K4
/68.E8
RD 0.5Q
6
6
5
5
1
+K4
X22b.S
X22b.B
BU 0.75Q
RD 0.75Q
WH 2.5Q
1
C
XB39
B39.X
Y22.X
B42.X
+K1
B42
0
2
B42.X
WH 2.5Q
53
+K6
B39
0
B39.X
XB39
62
+K4
X22b.S
X22b.B
BU 0.5Q
BU 0.75Q
RD 0.75Q
WH 1.5Q
62
WH 1.5Q
+K4
A21
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
F19Kl.15.Kl.15
/96.B2
+K4
A21
X1 3
A21.Kl15
A
CLAMP15
CLAMP15
CAN:
A21.X1
/96.D2
/62.D2
+K4
A21
61
18bar
WH 1Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
/62.E4
X1 1
A21.Kl30
A
CLAMP30
SUPPLY
CAN:
A21.X1
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
F19Kl.15.Kl.15
WH 1Q
RD 2.5Q
A21.X1
B27.X
A21.X1
3
P
+K6
X1.B
X1.S
A21
+K4
F.12
A21.X1
/96.D2
CAN:
SUNSENSOR
SUNSENSOR
A
A21.PME
X1 28
XMSP6a
+K2
A21
+K4
WH 0.75Q
B.5
A4.X45
/96.D2
CAN:
SUNSENSOR+
SUNSENSOR+
A
A21.PME
X1 29
WH 1Q
12
+H
B27
A21.X1
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
B27.X
GND
A4.X41
+K2
X1.S
X1.B
Kl.15
GND
A21
+K4
CAN:
SENSOR_ambient temp.
A
A21.PME
X1 27
CAN:
SENSOR_ambient temp
A
A21.PME
X1 26
L19
/96.D2
WH 2.5Q
L19A
WH 2.5Q
5
WH 1Q
R19
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
R19A
+M
Y22
0
REMOVEWIRE JUMPERXB39WHEN
MOUNTING B39!
/68.E2
PROJ: 8920980_003
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
60
10A
RD
60
F19
20A
GE
A21
+K4
CAN:
compressor clutch
compressor clutch
A
A21.PME
X1 10
A21.X1
WH 1Q
F19A
A21.X1
/96.C2
CAN:
/96.B2
SWITCHHIGH&#
A21
SWITCHHIGH&#
+K4
A
A21.PME
X1 5
Kl.15
Kl.30
A4
=K
+K2
61
AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
Kl.15
53
OPTIONAIR CONDITIONING AUTOMATIC
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
AMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSORSUNSENSOR
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
62
114
A21.X1
A21.PME
X1 21
A21.X1
+K4
A21.PME
X1 20
A21.X1
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
CAN:
Sonnensensor
Sonnensensor
A21.PME
X1 29
A21.X1
A21.PME
X1 28
A21.X1
28
A21.X1
A21.PME
X1 26
A21
+K4
29
A21.X1
+K4
A21.PMES
X1 27
+K4
/41.E4
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
CAN:
Sonnensensor+ /41.E4
A21
Sonnensensor+
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
A21.PME
X1 10
+K4
A21
+K4
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
CAN:
Fhler_Innenr.1
Fhler_Innenr.1
20
A21.X1
+K4
A21.X1
+K4
A21.PME
X1 6
6
A21.PME
X1 5
+K4
/41.D4
21
+K4
HEAT-/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM HEAT-/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE

CAN:
CAN:
CAN:
/41.D4 Sensor_ambient temp.+ /41.D4 Sensor_ambient temp. /41.D4 Fhler_Innenr.1+
A21 Sensor_ambient temp.+ A21 Sensor_ambient temp. A21 Fhler_Innenr.1+
26
+K4
10
+K4
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
CAN:
/41.C4 Kompressorkupplung
A21 Kompressorkupplung
27
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
CAN:
CAN:
/41.B4SchalterHochNiederdruck /41.C4 SchalterMitteldruck
A21SchalterHochNiederdruck A21 SchalterMitteldruck
W160 +WL040 BU
X1.S
+K6
1
2
B42.X
+K1
=M
+M
Y22
F19Kl.15.Kl.15
2
B40.X
62
=M
+M
Y22.X
B40
+K1
B42
WH 1Q
2
B39.X
+K1
B42.X
B40.X
B39.X
1
=H
+K6
C
B39
62
W156 +WL037 BU
W156 +WL037 RD
W156 +WL038 BU
W156 +WL038 RD
3
3
W160 +WL040 RD
WH 1Q
=H
+H
Splice.X4
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
2
B27.X
+H
X2.S
X2.B
/24.E7
4
B27.X
+H
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
+H
B27
W156 +WL039 BU
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
+H
B27.X
WH 1Q
3
+H
B27.X
61
61
60
+K6
X1.S
60
PROJ: 8920980_003
+K6
X1.S
W156 +WL039 RD
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
AMBIENTTEMPERATURESENSORSUNSENSOR
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
63
114
A21a
+K4
A21a.X2
A21a
+K4
CAN:
Sensor2(icing)
Sensor2(icing)
A
A21a.38
X2 38
A21a.X2
38
CAN:
Sensor2+(icing)
Sensor2+(icing)
A
A21a.37
X2 37
WH 1.5Q
A21a.X2
37
A21a
+K4
CAN:
Sensor1(icing)
Sensor1(icing)
A
A21a.36
X2 36
WH 1.5Q
A21a.X2
36
A21a
+K4
CAN:
Sensor1+(icing)
Sensor1+(icing)
A
A21a.35
X2 35
WH 1.5Q
A21a.X2
35
42
A21a.X2
A21a
+K4
CAN:
diagnosticsFAN
diagnosticsFAN
A
A21a.16
X2 16
WH 1.5Q
A21a
+K4
16
CAN:
Logic output(010V)
Logic output(010V)
A
A21a.2
X2 2
WH 1Q
BK 2.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K4
M5
1
+K4
B26a
M5.X
+K4
B26
1
A21a.X2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A21a
+K4
28
A21a.X2
CAN:
GND FAN
GND FAN
A
A21a.42
X2 42
RD 2.5Q
A21a
+K4
WH 1Q
CAN:
24VFAN
24VFAN
A
A21a.28
X2 28
FANMOTOR
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
MOTOR AND
SENSORICEUPPROTECTION
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
64
114
CAN:
VMC2clockwise rotation
A
A21a.8
X2 8
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
12
A21a.X2
A21a
+K4
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
CAN:
VMC2potentiometer tap
A
A21a.12
X2 12
A21a.X2
CAN:
VMC2counter clockwise rotation
VMC2 counter clockwise rotation
A
A21a.9
X2 9
A21a
+K4
10
11
A21a
+K4
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
A21a
+K4
A21a.X2
CAN:
A
A21a.3
X2 3
BK 0.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
A21a.X2
A21a
+K4
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
M14.X
M11.X
A21a.X2
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A21a
+K4
CAN:
VrefVMC2
VrefVMC2
A
A21a.10
X2 10
CAN:
A
A21a.7
X2 7
7
CAN:
GNDVMC2
GNDVMC2
A
A21a.11
X2 11
A21a.X2
A21a
+K4
A21a.X2
CAN:
A
A21a.4
X2 4
A21a
+K4
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
CAN:
VrefVMC1
VrefVMC1
A
A21a.5
X2 5
A21a
+K4
A21a
+K4
CAN:
MasseVMC1
MasseVMC1
A
A21a.6
X2 6
+K4
M11
+K4
M14
URECIRCULATED AIR FLAP VMC2
WATERVALVEVMC1
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
WATERVALVEVMC1
RECIRCULATEDAIRFLAPVMC2
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
65
114
23
A21a.X2
CAN:
A21a
+K4
A
A21a.22
X2 22
BK 0.5Q
22
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
26
A21a.X2
BK 0.5Q
CAN:
VMC4counter-clockwise rotation
A21a
VMC4counter-clockwise rotation
+K4
A
A21a.23
X2 23
24
25
18
A21a.X2
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
CAN:
A21a
+K4
A
A21a.26
X2 26
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
CAN:
VrefVMC4
A21a
VrefVMC4
+K4
A
A21a.24
X2 24
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
CAN:
A21a
+K4
A
A21a.17
X2 17
21
PROJ: 8920980_003
A21a.X2
CAN:
GNDVMC4
A21a
GNDVMC4
+K4
A
A21a.25
X2 25
M16.X
M15.X
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A21a.X2
CAN:
A21a
+K4
A
A21a.18
X2 18
17
CAN:
A21a
+K4
A
A21a.21
X2 21
A21a.X2
20
A21a.X2
CAN:
VrefVMC3
A21a
VrefVMC3
+K4
A
A21a.19
X2 19
19
CAN:
GND VMC3
A21a
GND VMC3
+K4
A
A21a.20
X2 20
+K4
M15
+K4
M16
FOOTFLAPVMC3
MIDDLEFLAPVMC4
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
FOOTFLAPVMC3
MIDDLEFLAPVMC4
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
66
114
40
39
31
A21a.X2
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
+K4
M17
M17.X
1
2
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
1
2
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
CAN:
temp.sensor(air cond. aut.)
A21a temp.sensor(air cond. aut.)
+K4
A
A21a.40
X2 40
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
BK 0.5Q
BK 0.5Q
A21a.X2
CAN:
A21a
+K4
A
A21a.30
X2 30
34
PROJ: 8920980_003
A21a.X2
CAN:
temp.sensor+(air cond. aut.)
A21a temp.sensor+(air cond. aut.)
+K4
A
A21a.39
X2 39
+K4
X75.S
X75.B
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A21a.X2
CAN:
A21a
+K4
A
A21a.31
X2 31
30
CAN:
A21a
+K4
A
A21a.34
X2 34
A21a.X2
33
A21a.X2
CAN:
VrefVMC5
A21a
VrefVMC5
+K4
A
A21a.32
X2 32
32
CAN:
GNDVMC5
A21a
GND VMC5
+K4
A
A21a.33
X2 33
+K4
B40
0
HEADFLAPVMC5
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
HEADFLAPVMC5
TEMPERATURESENSORAUTOMATICAIRCONDITIONING
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
67
114
Zustand
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
1
Name
Datum
BK 2.5Q
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
MP
A4.X48
A4.X48
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
1,5Ohm
70Watt
M13.X
+H3
M13
0
M13.X
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
+K2
XMSP6c
VENTILATORCONDENSERINTEGRATED
5
6
Kl.15
A4.X56
87a
MP
A
B
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
30
86
K245
0
V49
87
85
V34
GND
8920980
460901000003
7
WH 2.5Q
86
I.6
A4
=K
+K2
I.9
I.4
A4.X48
/62.A4
MP
I.5
V33
V50
WH 2.5Q
V32
85
51
GND
87
51
WH 2.5Q
K244
L13
I.7
A4
=K
+K2
R13
87a
A4.X48
WH 2.5Q
30
WH 2.5Q
Kl.15
I.3
A4.X48
50
I.2
15A
BU
50
*
2
F13
I.1
52
WH 2.5Q
WH,WH 2.5Q,2.5Q
52
WH 2.5Q
A4
=K
+K2
BK 2.5Q
Kl.15
X1 8
A21.PME
A
+K4
FAN_interior.
A21
/96.C2
FAN_interior.2+
CAN:
/62.E4
A21.X1
WH 2.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
D
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
1
7
8
A
A
A4.X48
V35
GND
MP
A4.X48
C
F
F
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
68
114
RETROFITKITCONDENSERFAN
A
A4.X48.
=K
+K2.RH
I.5
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
1
WH 1.5Q
M13.X
1,5Ohm
70Watt
2
2
53a
53a
WH 1Q
B27.X.2
+H
=H
+K6
X2.B*
X2.S*
M13.X
BK 1.5Q
ONLY USE WITH FLUFF FILTER OPERATION!
3
+H
B27
P
=H
+H3a
M13
0
LOCATE SPLICE
CLOSE TOX2.S:1!
X2.S.51
X2.B.51
WH 1.5Q
10
WH 1.5Q
+K2
XMSP.20
+K
Splice.X4
1
A4.X48.
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K
X1.S.61a
X1.B
MP
I.7
MP
X2.S.50
X2.B.50
+K6
2
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
GND
10022680
V35
V34
61
87
WH 1.5Q
87a
WH 1.5Q
31
87a
A21.PME
X1 10
A21.X1
+K4
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X2.S.52
=M
+M
Y22.X
85
A4.X48.
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
87
15
X45.B
86
K245
X45.S
HEIZ/KLIMAANLAGE
CAN:
Kompressorkupplung
Kompressorkupplung
30
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
10008761 0
/62.C2
A21
+K4
A4.X48.
V49
WH 1.5Q
=K
+K2.
K248
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4.X56a
X45.S
30
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
B
GND
A4
=K
+K2
R13
L13
+K2
X45.B
I.6
15A
BU
F13
I.9
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
A4
=K
+K2
WH 1.5Q
Kl.15
=M
+M
Y22
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
VENTILATORCONDENSERRETROFITKIT
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
69
114
DIAGNOSTICPLUGDIESELENGINE
A
A700D.RXD
X2 37
A700D.GND
X2 38
A700D.X2
38
A700D.X2
/93.D6
A700D
+M
DIAGNOSTICLEADAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
A700D.TXD
X2 36
A700D.X2
X.M7a.S 1/2 2/2

+K2
5
3
2
/93.D6
A700D
+M
ENGINEECU
EMIT
DIAGNOSIS
36
/93.D6
A700D
+M
ENGINEECU
RECEIVE
DIAGNOSIS
37
ENGINEECU
EARTH
DIAGNOSIS
X.RS232.B
+K
BK 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
RD 0.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1Q
BU 1Q
RD 1Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
* =K
11
12
22
+K4
A21.XB
*29
+K4
A21.XB
+M
X60a
3
2
WH 1Q
BK 1Q
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
10290843 0
*9
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
DIAGNOSTICPLUGMOTORCONTROL
ANDAIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
70
114
A
A16c.UI1
X1 4
A16b.UI16
X1 25
A16b.X1
A16c.X1
BK5 1Q
BK 1Q
2
OG
GY
WH
RD
4
signal
signal
BK 1Q
BK6 1Q
+H3
A16c
/88.D1
X1 16
A16c.GND_logic
A
EARTHLOGICALPART
EARTHLOGICALPART
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3
+H3
A16c
/88.E1
SUPPLY24V
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3
A16b.X1
X1 31
A16c.GND
+H3
A16c
+K2
A16b
SUPPLYEARTH
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3
/88.E1
A16c.X1
X1 67
A16b.GND
/87.E5
E
67
A16c.X1
X1 30
A16c.24V
67
A16c.X1
31
A16c.X1
X1 2
A16c.24V_logic
A
+H3
SUPPLYEARTH
A16c
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3
30
A16c.X1
16
BK 1.5Q
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
67
67
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1Q
61
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
B202.X
BK3 1Q
61
62
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
62
63
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
64
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
63
64
B202.X
BK
BN
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
B202.X
+K4
B202
BK4 1Q
BK 1Q
BK2 1Q
BK 1Q
BK1 1Q
1
12
/42.E1
Kl.15
XMSP6.11
+K2
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A4.X44
B202.X
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
GND
XMSP6.10
+K2
A16c.X1
66
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
L46
JOYSTICKSTEERINGSENSOR2re
66
R46
BK 1Q
/88.E1
A16c
+H3
A16c.24VDO1
X1 33
WH 1.5Q
A16b.X1
JOYSTICKSTEERINGSENSOR2
INPUTMODULE3
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
33
10A
RD
X56/11F34/5A
A16b.24V
X1 36
A16c
+H3
65
F46
INPUTMODULE3
CAN:
/87.E2
A16b
+K2
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
ANALOGUEUniversal
/87.F2
A16b
+K2
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
VCCJOYSTICKSTEERING
65
Kl.15
A4
=K
+K2
WH 1.5Q
25
36
X1 67
A16c.GND
+H3
A16cJOYSTICKSTEERINGSENSOR2re
GNDJOYSTICKSTEERING
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2
/88.E5
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
71
114
A
A16c.UI2
X1 5
INPUTMODULE3
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
24VJoystickARMREST
A16c.24VV
X1 36
A16c.X1
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.D2
PWMOutput13(Bank
A17b JOYSTICKSTEERINGLEFT
+H3
A
A17b.PWM13
X1 22
A16c.24V
X1 37
A16c.X1
A17b.X1
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.D2
PWMOutput14(Bank
A17b JOYSTICKSTEERINGRIGHT
+H3
A
A17b.PWM14
X1 23
A17b.X1
OUTPUTMODULE2
CAN:
/91.E2
PWMOutput16(Bank
A17b
SavetyMVJoy
+H3
A17b.PWM16
X1 25
A17b.X1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
68
68
60
WH 1.5Q
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
BK 1Q
BK9 1Q
X1 38
A16c.24V
+H3
A16c
PRESSUREstandard steering1
/88.D5
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3
+H3
A16c VccPRESSUREstandard steering1
/88.F1
SUPPLY24V
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3
Y64.JPT
1
2
Y52.AF2
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
70
+K6
BK 1Q
X1 23
A16c.UI14
A
+H3
JoystickARMREST
A16c
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3
A16c.X1
A17b.X1
X1 65
A16c.GND
+H3
A16c
/88.E5
EARTHJoystick armrest
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3
A17b.X1
X1 64
A17b.GND_PWM13
+H3
A17b
EARTHJOYSTICKSTEERING
/91.D5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
A17b.X1
X1 65
A17b.GND_PWM14
+H3
A17b
/91.E5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
67
E
65
A16c.X1
Y51.AF2
WH 1Q
X1 22
A16c.UI13
A
+H3
Joystick
activation
A16c
CAN:
INPUTMODULE3
0
3
+H3
Y64
0
BK 1.5Q
BK 1Q
BK11 1Q
A16c.X1
22
A16c.X1
X1 64
A16c.GND
38
A16c.X1
+H3
Y52
70
BK 1Q
59
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
WH 1.5Q
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
69
59
BK10 1Q
BU
BK8 1Q
B202.X
WH 1Q
B201.X
BK 1Q
BK
Y64.JPT
+H3
Y51
65
Y52.AF2
S202
Y51.AF2
BN
69
+H3
P
B201 U
0 B
+K4
B200.X
1
+
+K4
B200
0
S 2
B200.X B200.X
BK 1Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
64
B202.X
C
23
B201.X
BK 1Q
BK7 1Q
60
WH 1Q
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
64
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
WH 1.5Q
WH 1Q
A16c.X1
/88.F1
A16c
+H3
25
JoystickPRESSUREstandard steering1
/88.F1
A16c
+H3
23
A16c
+H3
INPUTMODULE3
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
24VJoystick activation
36
INPUTMODULE3
CAN:
22
37
X1 67
A17b.GNDPWM16
+H3
A17b
/91.E5
GNDSavetyMVJoy
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE2
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
JOYSTICKSTEERING
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
72
114
A16b24VJoystick activation
+K2
=K
A16b.24V
E
F46
10A
RD
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
=K+K/49.E2
+K2
=K
X56/11F3475A
A16b.X1
+K2
=K
BK 1Q
5
WH
BN
RD
WH
RD
BK 1Q BK6 1Q
BK 1Q
61
67
A16c.X1
+H3
A16c
X1 2
A16c.24V_logic
A
A Feed GND
=H+H3/58.C1 Supply 24VLogic part

CAN:
INPUTMODUL3
Feed24V
Supply24V
CAN:
INPUTMODUL3
A16b.X1
X1 31
A16c.GND
+H3
A16c
=H+H3/58.E1
67
A16c.X1
X1 30
A16c.24V
31
A16c.X1
X1 16
A16c.GND_logic
A
+H3
+H3
Feed
GNDLogic
part
A16c
A16c
=H+H3/58.D1
GNDLogic part =H+H3/58.E1
CAN:
INPUTMODUL3
30
A16c.X1
A16c.X1
16
BK 1.5Q
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
67
67
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
X2.B
X2.S
+K6
4
signal
signal
BK3 1Q
61
62
X2.S
X2.B
62
63
X2.S
X2.B
63
64
64
X2.S
X2.B
BK4 1Q
BK 1Q
4
BN
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
=K
+K4
S202
B_JOYSTICK
BK5 1Q
BK2 1Q
1
XMSP6.11
+K2
=K
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
A16c.X1
66
65
BK 1Q
BK 1Q
BK1 1Q
12
=H+H/19.E1
Kl.15.2
PROJ: 8920980_003
XMSP6.10
+K2
=K
X1 67
A16b.GND
+K2
A16b GNDJoystick
FeedGND
MGND
CAN:
INPUTMODUL3
=K+K/49.E5
steeringleft
MGND
CAN:
INPUTMODUL2
X1 67
A16c.GND
+H3
A16c GNDJoystick
=H+H3/58.E5
steeringSensor2re
MGND
CAN:
INPUTMODUL3
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
A16c.X1
A4.X44
+K2
=K
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
GND
INPUTMODUL3
CAN:
=H+H3/58.C1 analogueuniversal input1

A16c Joystick steeringsensor2re
VccJoystick steeringsensor2ree
+H3
+H3
A
A16c.24VDO1
A16c.UI1
X1 33
X1 4
66
65
A16b.UI16
X1 25
X1 36
A16b.X1
+K2
INPUTMODUL3
CAN:
Supply24V
6 =H+H3/58.E1
A16b Joystick steeringtransmitter1
A16c
analogueall-purpose Input16
=K+K/49.F2
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
Supply24V
33
Kl.15
WH 1.5Q
A4
=K
+K2
WH 1.5Q
25
36
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
73
114
WH 1Q
25
A17b.X1
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1Q
+H3
Y64
YVENTIL_2 0
BK 1Q
A17b.X1
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
A17b.X1
X1 65
A17b.GND_PWM14
A17b.X1
X1 67
A17b.GNDPWM16
+H3
A17b
+H3
MasseGNDJoystick steeringright
A17b
=H+H/51.E5
=H+H/51.E5
67
A16c.X1
X1 23
X1 22
X1 65
X1 64
A16c.UI14
A16c.UI13
A16c.GND
A17b.GND_PWM13
A
+H3
A
+H3
+H3
+H3
JoystickArmrest
A16c
Joystick
activation
GNDJoystick armrest
GNDJoystick steeringleft
A16c
A16c
A17b
aanalogueuniversal input14 =H+H3/58.E5
=H+H3/58.D1 1analogueall-purpose Input13=H+H3/58.D1
3
MGND
=H+H/51.D5
MGND
CAN:
CAN:
CAN:
CAN:
INPUTMODUL3
INPUTMODUL3
INPUTMODUL3
OUTPUTMODUL2
65
70
70
BK 1.5Q
69
BK 1Q
64
A16c.X1
23
22
WH 1.5Q
WH 1Q
59
59
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
69
BK 1Q
A16c.X1
BU
+H3
Y52
0
+K4
S202
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
+H3
Y51
0
65
BK
BN
60
1
=K +
+K4
B200
0
S 2
BK 1Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X2.B
X2.S
+K6
60
WH 1Q
+H3
Splice.X11
BK 1Q
68
X2.B
X2.S
+K6
Reserve
MGND
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2
MGND
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2
INFORMATIONFROM
Ident.Nr.8920980
Zeich.Nr.460901000000
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
A17b.X1
23
36
A17b.X1
OUTPUTMODUL2
OUTPUTMODUL2
CAN:
CAN:
PWMOutput16(Bank4)
=H+H/51.E2
=H+H/51.D2 PWMOutput14(Bank4)
Reserve
A17b Joystick steering right A17b
+H3
+H3
A
A17b.PWM16
A17b.PWM14
X1 25
X1 23
22
A16c.24V
X1 37
WH 1Q
24
+H3
A16c.X1
OUTPUTMODUL2
CAN:
=H+H/51.D2 PWMOutput13(Bank4)
A17b Joystick steering left
+H3
A
A17b.PWM13
X1 22
68
PROJ: 8920980_003
1
Servostat
26bar
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
1
P
INPUTMODUL3
CAN:
=H+H3/58.F1
Supply24V
A16c 24VJoystickArmrest
Reserve
+H3
B201a
0
A16c.X1
WH 1Q
A16c.X1
WH 1Q
A16c.X1
INPUTMODUL3
INPUTMODUL3
INPUTMODUL3
CAN:
CAN:
CAN:
aanalogueuniversal-input155 =H+H3/58.F1
=H+H3/58.C1 analogueuniversal-input22 =H+H3/58.D1
Supply24V
A16c
A16c JJoystickpressurestandard steering11
A16c 224VJoystick activation
steering22
+H3 JJoystickpressurestandard
+H3
+H3
A
A
A16c.UI2
A16c.UI15
A16c.24VV
X1 24
X1 5
X1 36
37
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
JOYSTICKSTEERING
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
74
114
OUTPUTMODUL2
CAN:
Digitaloutput4
BackupALARM
/75.F2
A17b
+H3
A17b.DO4
39 X1
39
Kl.15
A4
=K
+K2
F23
A17b.X1
10A
RD
A
R23
Verb.
WH 1.5Q
A4.X41
+K2
NOT USED
=K+K2X52.B:2
PROJ: 8920980_003
GND
WH 1.5Q
+K2
X52.B
B16.X
+H5
B16
0
2
1
2
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
+K2
XMSP6.22
RD
BU
YE
A17b.X1
54
B16.X
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
L23
Rckfahrs.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
OLE23
54 X1
A17b.GND_DO4
MASSEBackup&#
MASSE
CAN:
OUTPUTMODUL2
+H3
A17b
/75.D5
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
75
114
E
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Zustand
nderung
1
1
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
OLE24
OLE25
Verb.
Verb.
1
1
4
PK
RT
BN
BK
OG
WH
PROJ: 8920980_003
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
1
4
5
A4
=K
+K2
F73
MONITOR
REARAREAMONITORING
BERMONITORANDCAMERA
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
REARAREAMONITORINGVIAMONITORANDCAMERA
Kl.15
3A
VT
R73
L73
B
GND
A4.X41.6
+K2
XMSP6.21
+K2
C
ELECTRONICS
REARAREAMONITORING
D
CAMERA
F
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
76
114
A17a.X1
R53
32
RD 0.5Q
1
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
RD 0.5Q
A
RD 1Q
+V1
X43
BN
BN
WH 1.5Q
+H5
X31
X31
BU
BU
BK
B43
M6.X
+H5
M6
0
47
B44
X43
47
WH 1.5Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
9
WH 1.5Q
+K6
X1.S
X1.B
BK
PROJ: 8920980_003
A4.X41
+K2
B.9
+H3
A17a
/90.F1
GNDcentral lubrication systemMVPUMP

EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
+K2
A16b
/87.D2
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
/87.D5
+K2
A16b
/87.D5
5
Ident.Nr.
BK 0.5Q
42
42
BK 0.5Q
X1 59
A16b.GND
+K2
A16b
/87.D5
8920980
460901000003
7
59
56
Sig.DISTRIBUTOR centr.
frequency input2
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2
ZeichNr.
A16b.X1
X1 56
A16b.FI2
GNDLEVEL centr
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2
A16b.X1
X1 60
A16b.GND
+K2
A16b
41
BU 0.5Q
45
45
A16b.X1
X1 22
A16b.UI13
A
Sig.LEVELcentr
ANALOGUEUniversale
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2
CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEMLIEBHERR
3
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
1
60
A16b.X1
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
1
22
X1 40
A17a.GND_DO3
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
BK 0.5Q
BU 0.5Q
44
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
41
44
BK 1.5Q
A17a.X1
BU 0.5Q
BK 1Q
BU 1Q
Zustand
GND
40
A16b.X1
L53
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16b.24V
X1 32
40
A17a.DO3
X1 37
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
VCCDISTRIBUTORcen. l. s.
RD 0.5Q
+H3
37
A16b.X1
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.F1
digital output3
A17a VCCcentral lubrication unit.MVPUMP
10A
RD
/87.E2
A16b
+K2
33
Kl.15
F53
A16b.24V
X1 33
SUPPLYSUPPLYDO3
/90.F1 SUPPLYfordigital output3
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
SUPPLY24V
VCCLEVELcentral l. s.
+H3
A17a
A4
=K
+K2
40
/87.E2
A16b
+K2
X1 36
A17a.V_DO3
43
A17a.X1
36
43
GNDDISTRIBUTOR centr.
EARTH
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
77
114
A16a.FI2
X1 56
A16a.FI1
X1 55
A16a.X1
A16b.FI1
X1 55
A16b.X1
AUTOMATIC
GREASING
SYSTEM
10A
RD
L12
1
*1
2
WH 1.5Q
*2
A204.X
*
A4.X56
+K2
X50.S
X50.B
+H3
4
4
GND
RD 1Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
R12:
RD 1Q
17
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
17
B
GREASING
MODE
WH 1.5Q
RD 1Q
F12
RD 1Q
A16a.X1
/87.D5
A16b
+K2
INPUTMODULE2
CAN:
frequency input1
SPEEDhydro motor
55
/86.D5
A16a
+H3
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
frequency input1
SPEEDhydro motor1
55
INPUTMODULE1
CAN:
frequency input2
drive rotation speed
+H3
Splice.X10
+H3
X50.S
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
/86.D5
27
+F3
B2
0
+K2
XMSP63
B1.X
B2.X
B2a.X
BU 1Q
BK 1.5Q
+V1
B203
0
BU 1Q
18
18
P
BU 1Q
B203.X
+K6
X2.B
X2.S
Groeneveld
TwinPump
A16a.X1
X1 70
A16a.GND_FI2
+H3
A16a
/86.E5
EARTHoutput speed
EARTHfrequency input2
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
69
A16a.X1
X1 46
A17a.GND_PWM1
D
+H3
EARTHPARKINGBRAKE
A17a
/90.C5
EARTH
CAN:
OUTPUTMODULE1
70
A16b.X1
X1 69
A16a.GND_FI1
+H3
A16a
/86.E5
SPEEDhydro motor1
EARTHfrequency input1
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
69
B203.X
BU 1Q
+H3
A205
A17a.X1
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
A205.X
+F3
B2a
0
+F3
B1
0
B2a.X
B2.X
B1.X
BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
27
WH 1.5Q
26
WH 1.5Q
25
WH 1.5Q
Y10.JPT
25
+K6
X2.S
X2.B
26
WH 1.5Q
+K6
Y10
0
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Y10.JPT
WH 1.5Q
46
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K4
A204
Kl.15
A4
=K
+K2
A17.aX1a
+H3
A16a
+H3
A17a.X1
OPTIONGROENEVELD
CENTRALLUBRICATIONSYSTEM
OUTPUTMODULE1
CAN:
/90.C1
PWMOutput1(Bank1)
A17a
PARKINGBRAKE
+H3
A
A17a.PWM1
X1 4
56
X1 69
A16b.GND_FI1
+K2
A16b
/87.E5
EARTHSPEEDhydro m.
EARTHfrequency input
CAN:
INPUTMODULE2
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
PARKINGBRAKESPEEDSENSOR
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
78
114
INGITIONLOCKWITHTRANSPONDERCOIL
OLE12
S1.X1.8PINNINGOUT
WITHOLE12CONNECT
+K4
S1.X1.8a
Verb.
=K+K2A9.X:2
WH 2.5Q
+K6
X1.S
30
S1.X3
K01
CAN:
INPUTMODULE1
WH 2.5Q
WH 2.5Q
F29
25A
WH
Kl50a
ANALOGUEuniversal-input15
GNDMP6CABIN
86
igniton lockS1.X1:6
T.3
F26A4.X40:9
A4.X57
X1 24
A16a.UI15
=H
+H3
A16a
=H+H/37.D2
24
WH 2.5Q
S1.X2
30
V1
(1) dashboard
(3) igniton switch
85
(5) key
Kl.30
=K
+K2
A9
Kl.30
Kl.15
GND
Operation-Key
Relais1
Relais2
Relais3
RD
WH
BK
WH
WH
11
14
13
1
3
BK 1.5Q
A9Kl.15
XMSP12.2
+K2
1.5Q
2.5Q
1.5Q
2.5Q
2.5Q
WH 2.5Q
WH 2.5Q
2
4
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
8
10
A4
=K
+K2
/5.B2
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
Relais4
11
14
13
1
3
5
2
4
6
8
10
12
7
9
A9.X
Master-Key
WH 2.5Q
XMSP12
A9Kl.30
Kl.30.X
1
RD 1.5Q
1
GND
Kl.15
87
(4) mother
/19.A1
/40.E5
(2) antenna
WH 2.5Q
WH 2.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
+H3
A16a.X1
Kl.15.X
1
30
/5.C3
F15.1
E
F15
10A
RD
F15.2
A
F15.3
10pinPLUG
NOTin use!
ELECTRONICSIMMOBILISER
+K4
S2
10
11
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
A4.X44a:4
+K2
VNR
OPTION
Ersteller
12
=K+K2A9.X:8
Ident.Nr.
ELECTRONICIMMOBILISER
3
ZeichNr.
Verb.
460901000003
7
E.4
A4.X44:4PINNINGOUT
WITHOLE13CONNECT
OLE13
8920980
A4.X44
WH 1Q
GND
Zustand
50a
OLE11
E
50a
Kl.15
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
15
+K2
A4.X56a:4
S.4
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
15
RD 2.5Q
A4.X56
A4
=K
+K2
P 0 12
S1
A4.X56:4PINNINGOUT
WITHOLE11CONNECT
10
58
Verb.
WH 2.5Q
=K+K2A9.X:1
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
79
114
PRESELECTORCLOCK
A4
=K
+K2
120 min
F39
5A
BN
A
20A
YE
A
R40
L40
OLE14
=K
WH 2Q
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
XMSP6.16
+K2
BK 2.5Q
Kl.30
X2/1
M15.X
A4.X41
+K2
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
OR
NOZZLESTICKPREHEATER
Verb.
+K2
XMSP6.16
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
1
BK 1.5Q
2
1
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
WH 1.5Q
OLE22
Verb.
=K+K2OLE17:1
=K
+K4
A21.X1
WITHCABLE(OR)CONNECT!
+B2
X5
=B+B2X5:1 RD 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
BK 1.5Q
+K2
X223.B
OLE18
M15.X
A4.X52
C.X1
12
2
1
DBW2010
GND
A.X1
+B2
L42
Verb.
+H1
M15
0
OLE17
30
+B2
B.X6
=B+B2OLE22:1
1
2
3
4
5
6
K243
V46
A
86
OLE16
87a
WH 2.5Q
R42
Verb.
WH 2.5Q
10A
RD
87
85
=K+K2A4.X52:7
BK,BK 1.5Q,1.5Q
RD 2.5Q
A4.X52
RD 2.5Q
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A4.X52
F42
=K
RD,RD 2.5Q,2.5Q
A4
=K
+K2
A4.X41
+K2
XMSP6.16
Verb.
A4.X41
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
+K2
XMSP6.16
GND
=K+K4X4:1
RD 1Q =K+K4X4:11
Zustand
RD 1Q
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
BK 1.5Q
GND
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
L39
A4
=K
+K2
Verb.
R39
F40
X4
+K4
7
F810AKl.58A4.X57/4
OLE15
X1 4
A21.PME
A
AUXILIARYHEATER
/46.B2 AUXILIARYHEATER
CAN:
1
2
3
4
=K
+K4
A21
PLUGCONNECTION
FUELPREHEATING
F
Ident.Nr.
AUXILIARYHEATERDBW2010
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
80
114
PRESELECTORCLOCK
Kl.30
120 min
F39
Kl.30
5A
BN
11
12
20A
YE
A
R40
/19.F7
GND
A4.X41
+K2
PROJ: 8920980_003
GND
A4.X41
+K2
RD 1Q
WH 2Q
BK 1Q
RD 2.5Q
WH 1Q
WH 1Q
XMSP6.15
+K2
11
12
+B2
X12.ST2
3
4
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
BK 2.5Q
THERMO90
=K+K4A21.X1:4
+B2
X11.ST1
WH 1.5Q
X13.ST3
Verb.
OLE21
WITHCABLE(SW)CONNECT!
A21.X1
E
4
F40
L40
BK,BK 1Q,1Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
R39
A
E
L39
1
2
X3
+K4
A4
=K
+K2
F810AKl.58A4.X57/4
A4
=K
+K2
X1 4
A21.PME
A
+K4
AUXILIARYHEATER
A21
/96.B2
AUXILIARYHEATER
CAN:
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
AUXILIARYHEATERTHERMO90
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
81
114
A4
=K
+K2
Kl.15
F14
PLUGCONNECTION
AUXILIARYHEATER
DBW2010
15A
BU
A
R14
L14
GND
WH,WH 1.5Q,1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
WH 2.5Q
=K
+K2.RH
F208
20A
YE
87a
87
86
87a
K227
+K2
K228
+K2
30
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
87
86
85
30
RD 2.5Q
85
WH 2.5Q
RD 2.5Q
BK 2.5Q
RD 2.5Q
D
BK 2.5Q
R10.X
BK 2.5Q
X44
+K2
RD 6Q
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
=K
+K2
Kl.30.Xa
1
2/2
BK 1.5Q
WH 1.5Q
X223.S 1/2
+K2
R10
+M
TON+50:OFF+10
+K6
XMSP6.19
+K6
XMSP6.20
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
DIESELPREHEATINGCOLDWEATHERKIT40
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
82
114
Zustand
BK 95Q
nderung
1
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Datum
Name
Datum
XMSP4.1*
+H.
+H5.
S15*
2
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
1
RD 25Q
+B1.
G1*
+
30.1
2
K11*.X4
+H5.
F01*
100A
2
RD 95Q
+B1.
G2*
+
30
+M.
M1*
M
50
31
K11*
+H4.
30.2 50
30.1
+H5.
F03*
200A
+H.
F02*
100A
*
2
+M.
G3*
VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSES40
B+
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
RD 6Q
M
1
WH 25Q
5
6
F07*.X1
+H5.
F07*
10A
RD
+H4.
M8*
0
K11*.X3
RD 25Q
RD 25Q
RD,RD 25Q,6Q
RD 25Q
RD 25Q
RD,RD 95Q,25Q
BK 95Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
BK 95Q
D
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
1
7
8
VERSIONBATTERYWIRINGHARNESSESCOLDWEATHERKIT40C
A
A
+H5.
K04*
30.2 50
B
31
*
RD 25Q
*
D+
31
B
8920980
460901000003
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
83
114
Zustand
BK 95Q
nderung
1
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Datum
Name
Datum
XMSP4.1*
+H
+H5
S15*
2
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
1
RD 25Q
+H4
M8*
0
+B1
G1*
1
+
+M
XMSP10*
+H4
K11*
88
88a
1
1
+H5
F01*
100A
+H5
F03*
200A
RD 95Q
+B1
G2*
+M
M1*
M
50
+H
F02*
100A
2
2
2
+M
G3*
B+
RD 6Q
B
WH 25Q
5
6
30.1
F07*.X1
+H5
F07*
10A
RD
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
RD 25Q
RD 25Q
RD,RD 6Q,25Q
RD 25Q
RD 25Q
RD,RD 25Q,95Q
BK 95Q
PROJ: 8920980_003
BK 95Q
D
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
1
7
8
A
A
86
+H5
K04*
30.2 50
B
85
31
RD 25Q
*
30
D+
BK 95Q
31
B
8920980
460901000003
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
84
114
PMEMASTERGENERALOUTLAYONANDOUTLETS
=K
+K2
A15
ModuleNr.:
Module name:
PME_MASTER
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
Phys.Adr.
Sheet
A15.GND
A15.DIGIN0
A15.DIGIN1
A15.DIGIN2
A15.Shield
A15.VBat
A15.CAN4L
A15.CAN3L
A15.CAN2L
A15.CAN1L
A15.CAN1H
A15.CAN2H
A15.CAN3H
A15.CAN4H
A15.DCD
A15.RXD
A15.TXD
A15.DTR
A15.GND
A15.n.c.
A15.RTS
A15.CTS
A15.n.c.
A15.DCD
A15.RXD
A15.TXD
A15.DTR
A15.GND
A15.n.c.
A15.RTS
A15.CTS
A15.n.c.
/40.E1
/40.E3
Description
EA
/40.E2
/40.E4
/35.B6
/38.C3
/37.A4
/37.A5
/38.C4
/35.B7
A15.DCD
A15.RXD
A15.TXD
A15.DTR
A15.GND
A15.n.c.
A15.RTS
A15.CTS
A15.n.c.
Plug
Pin
EARTH
Kl.15
DIGITAL1
DIGITAL2
HOUSINGMASTER
Kl.30
CANLOW4
CANLOW3
CANLOW2
CANLOW1
CANHIGH1
CANHIGH2
CANHIGH3
CANHIGH4
DataCarrierDetec
Receive(RXD)
Transmit(TXD)
DataDerminalRead
SIGNALGround(S
NOTUSED
Requesttosend(R
Cleartosend(CTS
NOTUSED
DataCarrierDetec
Receive(RXD)
Transmit(TXD)
DataDerminalRead
SIGNALGround(S
NOTUSED
Requesttosend(R
Cleartosend(CTS
NOTUSED
.PWR.X
.PWR.X
.PWR.X
.PWR.X
.PWR.X
.PWR.X
CAN
CAN
CAN
CAN
CAN
CAN
CAN
CAN
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM2
COM2
COM2
COM2
COM2
COM2
COM2
COM2
COM2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DataCarrierDetec
Receive(RXD)
Transmit(TXD)
DataDerminalRead
SIGNALGround(S
NOTUSED
Requesttosend(R
Cleartosend(CTS
NOTUSED
COM3
COM3
COM3
COM3
COM3
COM3
COM3
COM3
COM3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Phys.Adr.
A15.DCD
A15.RXD
A15.TXD
A15.DTR
A15.GND
A15.n.c.
A15.RTS
A15.CTS
A15.n.c.
A15.TXD+
A15.TXD
A15.RXD+
A15.n.c.
A15.n.c.
A15.RXD
A15.n.c.
A15.n.c.
A15.TXD+
A15.TXD
A15.RXD+
A15.n.c.
A15.n.c.
A15.RXD
A15.n.c.
A15.n.c.
Sheet
EA
/40.A7
/40.A8
/40.A6
Description
DataCarrierDetec
Receive(RXD)
Transmit(TXD)
DataDerminalRead
SIGNALGround(S
NOTUSED
Requesttosend(R
Cleartosend(CTS
NOTUSED
TransmitData+
TransmitData
ReceiveData+
NOTUSED
NOTUSED
ReceiveData
NOTUSED
NOTUSED
TransmitData+
TransmitData
ReceiveData+
NOTUSED
NOTUSED
ReceiveData
NOTUSED
NOTUSED
TransmitData+
TransmitData
ReceiveData+
NOTUSED
NOTUSED
ReceiveData
NOTUSED
NOTUSED
A15.TXD+
A15.TXD
A15.RXD+
A15.n.c.
A15.n.c.
A15.RXD
A15.n.c.
A15.n.c.
Plug
COM4
COM4
COM4
COM4
COM4
COM4
COM4
COM4
COM4
LAN1
LAN1
LAN1
LAN1
LAN1
LAN1
LAN1
LAN1
LAN2
LAN2
LAN2
LAN2
LAN2
LAN2
LAN2
LAN2
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LAN3
LAN3
LAN3
LAN3
LAN3
LAN3
LAN3
LAN3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
GENERALOUTLAYMASTER
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
85
114
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16a.UI10
A16a.UI11
A16a.UI12
A16a.GND
A16a
A16a.24V
A16a.24V
A16a.GND_logic
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16a.24V
A16a.24V_logic
A16a.GND
A16a.UI1
A16a.UI2
A16a.UI3
A16a.UI4
A16a.UI9
A16a.GND
A16a.UI5
A16a.UI6
A16a.UI7
A16a.UI8
A16a.UI13
A16a.UI14
A16a.UI15
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Sheet
ModuleNr.:
Module name:
EA
/41.E5
/23.A3
/54.A7
/23.A4
/21.A3
/51.C1
/51.C2
/56.F4
/56.F2
/41.E6
/56.A1
/23.A6
/52.A2
/21.A5
/21.A2
/19.B6
A16a.UI16
A16a.GND
A16a
A16a.24V
A16a.CAN_Res
A16a.24V
A16a.GND
A16a.24V
/52.A6
A16a.24V
A16a.24V
A16a.24V
A16a.24V
A16a.24V
A16a.24V
A16a.24V
A16a.GND
/23.E4
/23.E5
/52.A1
/56.A2
/21.A1
/56.A4
/52.A5
INPUTMODULE1ONANDOUTLETS
A16a
Phys.Adr.
+H3
OUTPUTMODULE1
OUTPUTMODULE2
INPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE3
/41.E7
/41.E8
/21.F3
PME1_INPUT MODULE
Description
Plug
Pin
Phys.Adr.
A16a.24V
A16a
A16a.CAN_Low
A16a.CAN_Low
A16a.GND
A16a.RI1
A16a.RI1
A16a.RI2
Sheet
RESERVE
VBatt24VLog
RESERVE
PRESSURENLPCheck
PRESSURENLP
PRESSUREPRESSURERESERVOIRBRAKE
CONTROLLEVERVOR1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CONTROLLEVERREVERSE1
LIFTKICKOUT
BUCKETRETURNTODIG
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
SUPPLYGNDLOGIK
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A16a.RI2
A16a.5V
A16a.5V
A16a.5V
A16a.5V
A16a.GND
A16a.FI1
A16a.FI2
RESERVE
FLOATPOSITION
LFD
QUICKCHANGEDEVICE
InchPotentiometer1
Transmission overtemperature
TANKSENSOR
Kl50a
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
A16a.CAN_High
A16a.CAN_High
A16a.GND
A16a.GND
A16a.GND
A16a.GND
A16a.GND
A16a.GND
/37.E3
/37.E5
/23.E3
/23.E4
/21.F2
Throttle transmitter1
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
CANENDWITHPIN43verb.
VBatt24V
SUPPLYEARTH
VccPRESSURERESERVOIRBRAKE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A16a.GND
A16a.GND
A16a.GND
A16a.GND
A16a.GND_FI1
A16a.GND_FI2
/21.F1
/56.F3
/52.F6
VccNLPCheck
VccNLP
24VBUCKETRETURNTODIG
24VTANKSENSOR
24VLIFTKICKOUT
24VThrottle transmitter1
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
EA
/54.F7
/37.E2
/37.E4
/21.A6
/21.F6
/78.A7
/78.A6
/52.F2
/56.F5
/78.F7
/78.F6
Description
Plug
Pin
HIGHPRESSUREtravel pump
RESERVE
CANlow(Resverb.)
CANlow
RESERVE
Hydraulic oil temperature
Hydraulic oil temperature
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
SPEEDhydro motor1
Drive rotation speed
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
CANhigh(Resverb.)
CANhigh
GNDNLPCheck
GNDNLP
GNDPRESSURERESERVOIRBRAKE
EARTHInchPotentiometer1
LIFTKICKOUT
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
EARTHTANKSENSOR
BUCKETRETURNTODIG
EARTHThrottle transmitter1
RESERVE
SPEEDhydro motor1
EARTHOutput speed
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
65
66
67
68
69
70
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
86
114
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16b.UI10
A16b.UI11
A16b.UI12
A16b.GND
A16b
A16b.24V
A16b.24V
A16b.GND_logic
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16b.24V
A16b.24V_logic
A16b.GND
A16b.UI1
A16b.UI2
A16b.UI3
A16b.UI4
A16b.UI9
A16b.GND
A16b.UI5
A16b.UI6
A16b.UI7
A16b.UI8
A16b.UI13
A16b.UI14
A16b.UI15
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Sheet
ModuleNr.:
Module name:
EA
/41.E1
/25.A5
/25.A7
/27.A8
/51.C6
/51.C6
/51.C8
/57.A6
/41.E2
/51.C3
/51.C4
/52.A3
/52.A7
/77.F4
A16b.UI16
A16b.GND
A16b
A16b.24V
A16b.CAN_Res
A16b.24V
A16b.GND
A16b.24V
/71.A6
A16b.24V
A16b.24V
A16b.24V
A16b.24V
A16b.24V
A16b.24V
A16b.24V
A16b.GND
/77.A4
/52.A4
/52.A8
/71.A5
INPUTMODULE2ONANDOUTLETS
A16b
Phys.Adr.
+K2
OUTPUTMODULE1
OUTPUTMODULE2
INPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE3
/41.E3
/41.E4
/77.A7
PME1_INPUTMODULE
Description
Plug
Pin
Phys.Adr.
RESERVE
VBatt24VLog
RESERVE
DRIVINGLIGHT
HIGHBEAM
INDICATORSIGNAL
RESERVE
CONTROLLEVER Option1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A16b.24V
A16b
A16b.CAN_Low
A16b.CAN_Low
A16b.GND
A16b.RI1
A16b.RI1
A16b.RI2
CONTROLLEVEROption2
CONTROLLEVEROption3
Warning buzzer
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
EARTHLOGIK
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A16b.RI2
A16b.5V
A16b.5V
A16b.5V
A16b.5V
A16b.GND
A16b.FI1
A16b.FI2
RESERVE
CONTROLLEVERFORWARD2
CONTROLLEVERREVERSE2
InchPotentimeter2
Throttle transmitter2
Sig.LEVELZentr
Diesel particulate filter
Diesel particulate filter
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
A16b.CAN_High
A16b.CAN_High
A16b.GND
A16b.GND
A16b.GND
A16b.GND
A16b.GND
A16b.GND
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
CANEND
VBatt24V
SUPPLYEARTH
VCCDISTRIBUTORCentral lubrictaion system
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A16b.GND
A16b.GND
A16b.GND
A16b.GND
A16b.GND_FI1
A16b.GND_FI2
VCCLEVELCentral lubrication system

24VThrottler transmitter2
VCCJOYSTICKSTEERING
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Sheet
EA
/38.B5
/38.B3
/78.A8
/77.F7
/38.B6
/38.B4
/77.F8
/77.F5
/52.F3
/52.F7
/71.F6
/78.F8
Description
Plug
Pin
RESERVE
RESERVE
CANlow(CANEm.
CANlow
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
SPEEDhydro motor
Sig.DISTRIBUTORcentral lubrication system
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
CANhigh(CANEm
CANhigh
GNDDISTRIBUTORcentral lubrication system
GNDLEVELcentral lubrication system
RESERVE
EARTHInchPotentiometer2
EARTHThrottle transmitter
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
EARTHJoystick&
RESERVE
GNDJOYSTICKSTEERING
RESERVE
EARTHSPEEDHy
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
65
66
67
68
69
70
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
87
114
A16c
PROJ: 8920980_003
Sheet
Plug
Pin
Phys.Adr.
/71.A7
/72.A2
/59.F7
/59.A2
/59.A3
/71.F2
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
EARTHLOGICALPART
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A16c.RI2
A16c.5V
A16c.5V
A16c.5V
A16c.5V
A16c.GND
A16c.FI1
A16c.FI2
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
Joystick activation
JoystickARMREST
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
A16c.CAN_High
A16c.CAN_High
A16c.GND
A16c.GND
A16c.GND
A16c.GND
A16c.GND
A16c.GND
/37.D7
/37.C7
A16c.UI16
/59.F8
A16c.GND
A16c
A16c.24V
A16c.CAN_Res
A16c.24V
/71.F3
A16c.GND
/71.F4
A16c.24VV_DO1
basket functionNotOFF2
SUPPLYEARTH
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
CANENDWITHPIN43conn.
SUPPLY24V
SUPPLYEARTH
VbattSUPPLYDO1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A16c.GND
A16c.GND
A16c.GND
A16c.GND
A16c.GND_FI1
A16c.GND_FI2
/72.F5
A16c.24VDO1
A16c.24V
A16c.24V
A16c.24VV
A16c.24V
A16c.24V
A16c.24V
A16c.GND
JOYSTICKSTEERINGSENSOR2right
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
24VJoystick activation
24VJoystickARMREST
VccPRESSUREstandard steering1
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
/72.F3
/72.F4
/71.A8
/72.A3
/72.A4
/72.F2
A16c.24V
A16c
A16c.CAN_Low
A16c.CAN_Low
A16c.GND
A16c.RI1
A16c.RI1
A16c.RI2
Sheet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A16c.GND
A16c.UI5
A16c.UI6
A16c.UI7
A16c.UI8
A16c.UI13
A16c.UI14
A16c.UI15
PME1_INPUTMODULE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
/71.F1
INPUTMODULE3ON/OUTLETS
Description
EA
NOTUSED!
SUPPLYEARTH
NOT USED!
JOYSTICKSTEERINGSENSOR2right
JoystickPRESSUREstandard steering1
Basket functionNotOFF1
Basket functionModus1
Basket functionModus2
A16c.UI10
A16c.UI11
A16c.UI12
A16c.GND
A16c
A16c.24V
A16c.24V
A16c.GND_logic
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A16c.24V
A16c.24V_logic
A16c.GND
A16c.UI1
A16c.UI2
A16c.UI3
A16c.UI4
A16c.UI9
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Phys.Adr.
Module Nr.:
Module name:
+H3
OUTPUTMODULE1
OUTPUTMODULE2
INPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE3
/37.D6
/37.C6
/72.F1
/71.F7
EA
Description
Plug
Pin
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
CANlow
CANlow
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
CANhigh
CANhigh
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
PRESSUREstandard steering1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
EARTHJoystick armrest
NOTUSED!
JOYSTICKSTEERINGSENSOR2re
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
65
66
67
68
69
70
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
88
114
INPUTMODULE4ON/OUTLETS
A16d
PROJ: 8920980_003
A16d.24V
A16d.24V_logic
A16d.GND
A16d.UI1
A16d.UI2
A16d.UI3
A16d.UI4
A16d.UI9
EA
PME1_OUTPUTMODULE
Description
Plug
Pin
Phys.Adr.
NOTUSED!
SUPPLYEARTH
NOTUSED!
capacitive Joystick sensor
3.CONTROLCIRCUITActive
OUTPUTHall sensor1
CONTROL5V
OPTION
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NOTUSED!
OUTPUTHall sensor2
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
EARTHLOGICALPART
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A16d.RI2
A16d.5V
A16d.5V
A16d.5V
A16d.5V
A16d.GND
A16d.FI1
A16d.FI2
A16d.GND
A16d.UI5
A16d.UI6
A16d.UI7
A16d.UI8
A16d.UI13
A16d.UI14
A16d.UI15
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
A16d.CAN_High
A16d.CAN_High
A16d.GND
A16d.GND
A16d.GND
A16d.GND
A16d.GND
A16d.GND
A16d.UI16
A16d.GND
A16d
A16d.24V
A16d.CAN_Res
A16d.24V
/50.E3
A16d.GND
/50.E4
A16d.24VV_DO1
NOTUSED!
SUPPLYEARTH
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
WITHPIN43conn.
SUPPLY24V
SUPPLYEARTH
VbattDO1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A16d.GND
A16d.GND
A16d.GND
A16d.GND
A16d.GND_FI1
A16d.GND_FI2
A16d.24VDO1
A16d.24V
A16d.24V
A16d.24VV
A16d.24V
A16d.24V
A16d.24V
A16d.GND
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
A16d.UI10
A16d.UI11
A16d.UI12
A16d.GND
A16d
A16d.24V
A16d.24V
A16d.GND_logic
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Sheet
Phys.Adr.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
ModuleNr.:
Module name:
+H3
/50.E1
/60.A2
/60.B7
/60.A5
/60.A4
/60.B7
/60.A6
/50.E2
/60.A1
A16d.24V
A16d
A16d.CAN_Low
A16d.CAN_Low
A16d.GND
A16d.RI1
A16d.RI1
A16d.RI2
Sheet
EA
/38.D1
/38.D1
/60.A3
/60.A8
/38.D2
/38.D2
/60.A3
Description
Plug
Pin
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
CANlow(Resconn.)
CANlow
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
NOTUSED!
RollerRockerCap
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
GNDRockerRollerCap
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
CANhigh(Resverb.)
CANhigh
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
NOTUSED!
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
65
66
67
68
69
70
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
89
114
A17a
PROJ: 8920980_003
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PME1_OUTPUTMODULE
Sheet
Description
A17a.24V_B1
A17a.24V_logic
A17a.GND
A17a.PWM1
A17a.PWM2
A17a.PWM3
A17a.PWM4
A17a.PWM9
/42.E4
/42.E1
/42.E5
/78.A1
/57.A5
/56.A6
/56.A7
/53.A4
VBatt24VBank1
VBatt24VLog
SUPPLYEARTH
PARKINGBRAKE
AHS
BUCKETRETURNTODIG
LIFTKICKOUT
cruising range1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A17a.24V
A17a.24V
A17a.CAN_Low
A17a.CAN_Low
A17a.GND_DO2
A17a.GND_PWM1
A17a.GND_PWM2
A17a.GND_PWM3
A17a.PWM10
A17a.PWM11
A17a.PWM12
A17a.GND
A17a.24V_logic
A17a.24V_B3
A17a.24V_B2
A17a.GND_logic
/53.A2
/53.A3
/53.A1
/43.E3
/43.E4
/42.E7
/42.E2
cruising range2
cruising range3
Modulation
SUPPLYEARTH
RESERVE
VBatt24VBk3zuM2/35(2.AST)
SUPPLY24VBank2
SUPPLYEARTHLOGICALPART
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A17a.GND_PWM4
A17a.GND_PWM9
A17a.GND_PWM10
A17a.GND_PWM11
A17a.GND_PWM12
A17a.GND_DO4
A17a.FI1
A17a.FI2
A17a.GND
A17a.PWM5
A17a.PWM6
A17a.PWM7
A17a.PWM8
A17a.PWM13
A17a.PWM14
A17a.PWM15
/42.E7
/56.A8
/21.A7
/54.A8
/53.A8
/53.A6
/53.A7
/54.A1
SUPPLYEARTH
FLOATPOSITION
VENTILATOR
BUZZER
Swivel angle limitation.oil engine1
oil engine1
oil engine2
TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1FORWARD
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
A17a.PWM16
A17a.GND
A17a.GND_logic
A17a.24V_B4
A17a.CAN_Res
A17a.24V
A17a.GND_DO1
A17a.V_DO1
/54.A2
/43.E2
/43.D5
SUPPLYEARTH
RESERVE
VBatt24VBk4zuM2/33(2.AST)
CANENDWITHPIN43verb.
RESERVE
RESERVE
SUPPLYSUPPLYDO1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A17a.DO1
A17a.V_DO2
A17a.DO2
A17a.V_DO3
A17a.DO3
A17a.V_DO4
A17a.DO4
A17a.GND_DO3
/43.D5
/43.D8
/43.D8
/77.A3
/77.B3
/55.A1
/55.A2
/77.F3
2.ASTJoystickzuM2/28
SUPPLYSUPPLYDO2
2.ASTPump2zuM2/14
SUPPLYSUPPLYDO3
VCCcentral lubrication systemMVPUMP
Supplydigital output4A4
Back alarmOPTICAL
GNDcentral lubrication systemMVPUMP
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
/43.E1
OUTPUTMODULE1ON/OUTLETS
Phys.Adr.
EA
ModuleNr.:
Module name:
+H3
OUTPUTMODULE1
OUTPUTMODULE2
INPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE3
Plug
Pin
Plug
Pin
RESERVE
RESERVE
CANlow
CANlow
RESERVE
EARTHPARKINGBRAKE
EARTHAHS
EARTHBUCKETRETURNTODIG
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
/56.F7
/53.F4
/53.F2
/53.F3
/53.F1
/55.E2
EARTHLIFTKICKOUT
EARTHTRAVELRANGES1
EARTHTRAVELRANGES2
EARTHTRAVELRANGES3
EARTHModulation
EARTHBack alarmOPTICAL
RESERVE
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
A17a.CAN_High
A17a.CAN_High
A17a.GND
A17a.GND_PWM5
A17a.GND_PWM6
A17a.GND_PWM7
A17a.GND_PWM8
A17a.GND_PWM13
/37.D5
/37.C5
CANhigh
CANhigh
RESERVE
EARTHFLOATPOSITION
EARTHVENTILATOR
EARTHBUZZER
Swivel angle limitation,oil engine1
EARTHOil engine1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
A17a.GND_PWM14
A17a.GND_PWM15
A17a.GNDPWM16
A17a.GND
A17a.GND_FI1
A17a.GND_FI2
/53.F7
/54.F1
/54.F2
EARTHOil engine2
EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1FORWARD
EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump1BACKWARD
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
65
66
67
68
69
70
Phys.Adr.
Sheet
/37.D4
/37.C4
/78.F1
/57.F5
/56.F6
/56.F8
/21.F7
/54.F8
/53.F8
/53.F6
EA
Description
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
90
114
A17b
PROJ: 8920980_003
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Phys.Adr.
Sheet
A17b.24V_B1
A17b.24V_logic
A17b.GND
A17b.PWM1
A17b.PWM2
A17b.PWM3
A17b.PWM4
A17b.PWM9
/44.E4
/44.E1
/44.E5
/53.A5
/28.B1
/54.A5
/54.A6
/54.A3
VBatt24VBank1
VBatt24VLOGICALPART
SUPPLYEARTH
OVERSPEEDPROTECTION
OPTIONS
SWIVELANGLEtravel pump1
SWIVELANGLEtravel pump2
TRAVELLINGDIRECTIONPump2
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A17b.24V
A17b.24V
A17b.CAN_Low
A17b
A17b.GND_DO2
A17b.GND_PWM1
A17b.GND_PWM2
A17b.GND_PWM3
A17b.PWM10
A17b.PWM11
A17b.PWM12
A17b.GND
A17b.24V_logic
A17b.24V_B3
A17b.24V_B2
A17b.GND_logic
/54.A4
/57.A1
/57.A2
/43.E7
/43.E8
/44.E7
/44.E2
SUPPLYEARTH
RESERVE
VBatt24VBK3
VBatt24VBank2
VBattEARTH
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A17b.GND_PWM4
A17b.GND_PWM9
A17b.GND_PWM10
A17b.GND_PWM11
A17b.GND_PWM12
A17b.GND_DO4
A17b.FI1
A17b.FI2
A17b.GND
A17b.PWM5
A17b.PWM6
A17b.PWM7
A17b.PWM8
A17b.PWM13
A17b.PWM14
A17b.PWM15
/44.E7
/23.A2
/21.A8
/23.A7
/23.A8
/72.A6
/72.A7
/55.A4
SUPPLYEARTH
Emergency steering
FANREVERSAL
LFD
LFD/FLOATPOSITION
JOYSTICKSTEERINGLEFT
JOYSTICKSTEERINGRIGHT
VccMVGEROTORSTEERING
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
A17b.PWM16
A17b.GND
A17b.GND_logic
A17b.24V_B4
A17b.CAN_Res
A17b.24V
A17b.GND_DO1
A17b.V_DO1
/72.A8
/43.E6
SavetyMVJoy
SUPPLYEARTH
RESERVE
VBatt24VBk4
CANEND
RESERVE
RESERVE
VBattSUPPLYDO1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A17b.DO1
A17b.V_DO2
A17b.DO2
A17b.V_DO3
A17b.DO3
A17b
A17b.DO4
A17b.GND_DO3
/43.D1
/43.D4
/43.D4
/45.F1
/25.B8
/45.F2
/45.A5
2.ASTPump1
SUPPLYSUPPLYDO
2.ASTTRANSMISSION
VBattDO3
REVERSINGLIGHT
VBattD04
BackupALARM
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
/43.D1
PME1_OUTPUTMODULE
Plug
/43.E5
/38.E6
Description
EA
ModuleNr.:
Module name:
+H3
OUTPUTMODULE1
OUTPUTMODULE2
INPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE3
Pin
Plug
Pin
RESERVE
RESERVE
CANlow(CANEm.
CANlow
RESERVE
EARTHover rotation speed
EARTHOPTIONS
EARTHtravel pump
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
/54.F6
/54.F3
/54.F4
/57.F1
/57.F2
/45.F5
EARTHSWIVELANGLE
EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTION
EARTHTRAVELLINGDIRECTION
EARTHBackup
RESERVE
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
A17b.CAN_High
A17b.CAN_High
A17b.GND
A17b.GND_PWM5
A17b.GND_PWM6
A17b.GND_PWM7
A17b.GND_PWM8
A17b.GND_PWM13
/38.E8
/38.D6
CANhigh(CANEm.
CANhigh
RESERVE
EARTHemergency steering
EARTHFANREVERSAL
EARTHLFD
EARTHLFD
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
A17b.GND_PWM14
A17b.GND_PWM15
A17b.GNDPWM16
A17b.GND
A17b.GND_FI1
A17b.GND_FI2
/72.F7
/55.E4
/72.F8
EARTHGEROTORSTEERING
GNDSavetyMVJoy
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
65
66
67
68
69
70
Phys.Adr.
Sheet
/38.E5
/38.D5
/53.F5
/28.D1
/54.F5
/23.E2
/21.F8
/23.E7
/23.E8
/72.F6
Description
EA
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
91
114
OUTPUTMODULE3
OUTPUTMODULE1
OUTPUTMODULE2
INPUTMODULE1
INPUTMODULE3
A17c
PROJ: 8920980_003
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
/48.F3
/48.F1
/48.F5
/49.A7
/50.A5
/50.A6
/50.A7
/57.A3
VBatt24VBank1
VBatt24VLOGICALPART
SUPPLYEARTH
VccCUTOFFLIGHTING
3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A17c.24V
A17c.24V
A17c.CAN_Low
A17c
A17c.GND_DO2
A17c.GND_PWM1
A17c.GND_PWM2
A17c.GND_PWM3
A17c.PWM10
A17c.PWM11
A17c.PWM12
A17c.GND
A17c.24V_logic
A17c.24V_B3
A17c.24V_B2
A17c.GND_logic
/57.A4
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
SUPPLYEARTH
RESERVE
SUPPLY24VBank3
SUPPLY24VBank2
VBattEARTHLOGICALPART
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
A17c.GND_PWM4
A17c.GND_PWM9
A17c.GND_PWM10
A17c.GND_PWM11
A17c.GND_PWM12
A17c.GND_DO4
A17c.FI1
A17c.FI2
A17c.GND
A17c.PWM5
A17c.PWM6
A17c.PWM7
A17c.PWM8
A17c.PWM13
A17c.PWM14
A17c.PWM15
/48.F7
/50.A8
SUPPLYEARTH
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
A17c.CAN_High
A17c.CAN_High
A17c.GND
A17c.GND_PWM5
A17c.GND_PWM6
A17c.GND_PWM7
A17c.GND_PWM8
A17c.GND_PWM13
RESERVE
SUPPLYEARTH
RESERVE
SUPPLY24VBank4
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
VBattSUPPLYDO1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A17c.GND_PWM14
A17c.GND_PWM15
A17c.GNDPWM16
A17c.GND
A17c.GND_FI1
A17c.GND_FI2
RESERVE
VBattSUPPLYDO2
RESERVE
VBattSUPPLYDO3
RESERVE
VBattSUPPLYD04
RESERVE
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
/49.F1
/48.F6
/48.F2
/49.F4
/49.F3
/38.B8
A17c.DO1
A17c.V_DO2
A17c.DO2
A17c.V_DO3
A17c.DO3
A17c
A17c.DO4
A17c.GND_DO3
A17c.24V_B1
A17c.24V_logic
A17c.GND
A17c.PWM1
A17c.PWM2
A17c.PWM3
A17c.PWM4
A17c.PWM9
/49.F2
PME1_OUTPUTMODULE
Sheet
EA
Phys.Adr.
A17c.PWM16
A17c.GND
A17c.GND_logic
A17c.24V_B4
A17c.CAN_Res
A17c.24V
A17c.GND_DO1
A17c.V_DO1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
ModuleNr.:
Module name:
+H3
Description
Plug
Pin
Phys.Adr.
Sheet
EA
/38.B7
/38.B7
/50.E5
/50.E6
/50.E7
/50.E8
/57.F4
/57.F3
/38.B8
Description
Plug
Pin
RESERVE
RESERVE
CANlow(CANEm.CAN_Resconn.)
CANlow
RESERVE
GNDCUTOFFLIGHTING
GND3.CONTROLCIRCUITEPMV1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
CANhigh(CANEm.CAN_Resconn.)
CANhigh
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
65
66
67
68
69
70
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
92
114
LHECUUP/CRGENERALOUTLAYONANDOUTLETS
+M
A700D
LHECUUPCREXT
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
Phys.Addr.
A700D.50
A700D.15
A700D.30.1
A700D.30.2
A700D.30.3
A700D.31.2
A700D.31.3
A700D.31.1
Sheet
Type
Description
PIN
Phys.Addr.
/47.C6
ENGINE
IGNITION
STARTING
ON
X2
X2
66
68
/47.F1
/47.F3
/47.F5
/47.F2
/47.F4
/47.F6
SUPPLY30b
SUPPLY30b
SUPPLY30b
EARTH
EARTH
EARTH
PERFORMANCEPART
PERFORMANCEPART
ELECTRONICS
PERFORMANCEPART
PERFORMANCEPART
ELECTRONICS
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
1
2
4
15
16
3
X2
X2
X2
67
69
70
A700D.DI5
A700D.DI6
A700D.DI7
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
A700D.AI9.1
A700D.AI9.2
A700D.AI9.GND
A700D.AI10.1
A700D.AI10.2
A700D.AI10.GND
GASPEDALCHANNEL1
GASPEDALCHANNEL1
GASPEDALCHANNEL1
GASPEDALCHANNEL2
GASPEDALCHANNEL2
GASPEDALCHANNEL2
SUPPLY
SIGNAL
EARTH
SUPPLY
SIGNAL
EARTH
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
35
34
33
49
48
47
COOLANT LEVEL SENSOR

COOLANT LEVEL SENSOR
EARTH
VCC
SIGNAL
X2
X2
X2
63
62
61
A700D.AL1.REF1
A700D.AI1.05V
A700D.AI1.GND
WATERFUEL
WATERFUEL
WATERFUEL
FUEL
FUEL
FUEL
X2
X2
X2
7
6
5
A700D.AI2.REF1
A700D.AI2.05V
A700D.AI2.GND
COOLINGWATER
COOLINGWATER
COOLINGWATER
LEVEL
LEVEL
LEVEL
X2
X2
X2
21
20
19
X2
X2
60
46
A700D.AI11.1
A700D.AI11.2
A700D.AI11.GND
/21.A4
/21.F4
A700D.TI1
A700D.TI1.GND
A700D.DO1
A700D.DI2
A700D.DO2
A700D.DI3
A700D.DO3
A700D.DO4
A700D.DO5
/23.A5
/23.F5
AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION VACUUM

AIR FILTER CONTAMINATION VACUUM
/19.B5
D+
HEATERFLANGE
GENERATOR
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
X2
X2
53
64
HEATERFLANGE
FREE
SOLENOIDVALVE
ENGINEBRAKE
RESERVE
SELECTION
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
39
65
25
11
13
/19.B6
FUEL
SELECTION
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
Plug
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Plug
A700D.DO5.GND
A700D.DO6
A700D.DO6.GND
RESERVE
FANVALVE
FANVALVE
SELECTION
EARTH
X2
X2
X2
12
27
26
A700D.DO10
A700D.DO11
A700D.DO12
FEHLERLAMPE
CONTROL
RESERVE
(LowSide)
PREHEAT
(LowSide)
X2
X2
X2
14
28
42
A700D.FO
A700D.CAN1.H.2
A700D.CAN1R
A700D.CAN1L.1
A700D.CAN1H.1
A700D.CAN1L.2
SIGNAL
/37.C3
/37.C2
/37.D3
/37.D2
SPEED
CAN1HIGH
CAN1RES
CAN1LOW
CAN1HIGH
CAN1LOW
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
56
40
9
8
54
10
EARTH
/70.A3
/70.A2
CAN1GND
CAN2HIGH
CAN2LOW
CAN2RES
CAN2HIGH
CAN2LOW
CAN2GND
DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSIS
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
45
41
23
22
55
24
59
36
37
DIAGNOSIS
SUPPLY
SIGNAL
EARTH
X2
X2
X2
38
50
51
A700D.GND
A700D.LSB1
A700D.LSB2
/70.A1
EMIT
RECEIVE
PIN
A700D.GND
A700D.FREI1
A700D.FREI2
A700D.FREI3
A700D.FREI4
EARTH
NC
NC
NC
NC
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
52
17
18
29
30
A700D.FREI7
NC
X2
43
A700D.FREI11
A700D.FREI5
A700D.FREI6
A700D.FREI8
NC
NC
NC
NC
X2
X2
X2
X2
44
31
57
58
A700D.FREI9
NC
X2
32
Ident.Nr.
GENERALOUTLAYMOTORCONTROL
ENGINESIDE
Description
A700D.CAN1.GND
A700D.CAN2H.2
A700D.CAN2L.1
A700D.CAN2R
A700D.CAN2H.1
A700D.CAN2L.2
A700D.CAN2.GND
A700D.TXD
A700D.RXD
Type Sheet
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
93
114
ELECTRICKEYPAD
B
PROJ: 8920980_003
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Phys.Addr.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
=K
+K4
A18
ELECTRICKEYPAD
10278758
TYPE Sheet
Description
A18.Kl15
A18.GND
A18.CAN_High
A18.CAN_Low
A
A
A
A
/39.D2
/39.D4
INFORMATIONINPUT
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN_High
CAN_Low
A18.Kl30
A18.Flasher
A
A
/39.D3
/27.A7
A18.CAN_High
A18.CAN_Low
A
A
A18.CAN_RES.
A18.PWM1
A18.PWM2
A18.PWM3
A
A
A
A
A18.PWM4
A18.PWM5
A18.PWM6
A18.PWM7
A18.PWM8
A18.PWM9
PLUG PIN
INFORMATIONINPUT
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN_High
CAN_Low
X1
X1
X1
X1
1
2
3
4
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
HAZARDWARNINGLIGHT FLASHINGSPEEDINPUT
X1
X1
5
6
CAN_High
CAN_Low
CAN_High
CAN_Low
X1
X1
7
8
/27.A1
/33.A3
/28.A6
CAN_RES.
HAZARDWARNINGLIGHT
WARNINGBEACON
WINDSCREENWIPER
MATCHINGRESISTOR
OUTLETA1
OUTLETA2
OUTLETA3
X1
X1
X1
X1
9
10
11
12
A
A
/28.A7
/33.A7
WASHINGPUMPREAR
REARWINDOWHEATER
OUTLETA4
OUTLETA5
X2
X2
1
2
A
A
A
A
/20.A7
/25.D1
/30.D1
/31.E1
PARKINGLIGHT
OUTLETA6
Abblentlicht
OUTLETA7
OUTLETA8
WORKINGPROJECTORREAR
OUTLETA9
X2
X2
X2
X2
3
4
5
6
ELECTRICKEYPAD
E
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
94
114
=K
+K4
A11
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Phys.Addr.
MAINKEYPAD
10278781
TYPE Sheet
A11.Kl15
A11.GND
A11.CAN_High
A11.CAN_Low
A
A
A
A
A11.Kl15
A11.GND
A
A
A11.CAN_High
A11.CAN_Low
A
A
A11.CAN_RES.
A11.Res.
A11.Res.
A11.Res.
A
A
A
A
Description
/39.D5
/39.D7
/35.B5
/35.B4
PLUG
PIN
+24V
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN_High
CAN_Low
SUPPLY
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN_High
CAN_Low
X1
X1
X1
X1
1
2
3
4
24V
SUPPLYEARTH
SUPPLY
SUPPLYEARTH
X1
X1
5
6
CAN_High
CAN_Low
CAN_High
CAN_Low
X1
X1
7
8
CAN_Abschlusswid.
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
MATCHINGRESISTOR
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
X1
X1
X1
X1
9
10
11
12
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
/35.A5
/35.A4
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
GENERALOUTLAYMAINKEYPAD
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
95
114
ELECTRICKEYPAD
B
PROJ: 8920980_003
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
ELECTRICKEYPAD
=K
+K4
A18
10278758
Phys.Addr.
TYPE
Sheet
Description
PLUG
A18.Kl15
A18.GND
A18.CAN_High
A18.CAN_Low
A
A
A
A
/39.D2
/39.D4
INFORMATIONINPUT
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN_High
CAN_Low
A18.Kl30
A18.Flasher
A
A
/39.D3
/27.A7
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
HAZARDWARNINGLIGHT FLASHINGSPEEDINPUT
A18.CAN_High
A18.CAN_Low
A
A
CAN_High
CAN_Low
A18.CAN_RES.
A18.PWM1
A18.PWM2
A18.PWM3
A
A
A
A
/27.A1
/33.A3
/28.A6
A18.PWM4
A18.PWM5
A
A
A18.PWM6
A18.PWM7
A18.PWM8
A18.PWM9
A
A
A
A
INFORMATIONINPUT
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN_High
CAN_Low
PIN
X1
X1
X1
X1
1
2
3
4
X1
X1
5
6
CAN_High
CAN_Low
X1
X1
7
8
CAN_RES.
HAZARDWARNINGLIGHT
WARNINGBEACON
WINDSCREENWIPER
MATCHINGRESISTOR
OUTLETA1
OUTLETA2
OUTLETA3
X1
X1
X1
X1
9
10
11
12
/28.A7
/33.A7
WASHINGPUMPREAR
REARWINDOWHEATER
OUTLETA4
OUTLETA5
X2
X2
1
2
/20.A7
/25.D1
/30.D1
/31.E1
PARKINGLIGHT
Low beam
OUTLETA6
OUTLETA7
WORKINGPROJECTORFRONT OUTLETA8
OUTLETA9
WORKINGPROJECTORREAR
X2
X2
X2
X2
3
4
5
6
ELECTRICKEYPAD
E
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
94
114
HEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEMSYSTEMSIDE
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
A21a
ModuleNr.:
Module name:
+K4
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
Phys.Adr.
Sheet
A21a.1
A21a.2
A21a.3
A21a.4
A21a.5
A21a.6
A21a.7
A21a.8
/64.B3
/65.B3
/65.A3
/65.A2
/65.A1
/65.B2
/65.B7
EA
HEAT-/ AIR CONDITIONING (INSTALLATION)
PLUG
BDescription
Pin
Phys.Adr.
Sheet
/66.A5
/66.B6
not used
logic output(010V)
VrefVMC1
GNDVMC1
VMC1Potentiometer tap
not used
logic output(010V)
VrefVMC1
GNDVMC1
VMC1Potentiometer tap
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A21a.25
A21a.26
A21a.27
A21a.28
A21a.29
A21a.30
A21a.31
A21a.32

VrefVMC2
GroundVMC2
not used
not used
not used
diagnosefan
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
VrefVMC3
GroundVMC3
VrefVMC4
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
A21a.9
A21a.10
A21a.11
A21a.12
A21a.13
A21a.14
A21a.15
A21a.16
/65.A7
/65.A6
/65.A5
/65.B6
/64.B4

VrefVMC2
GroundVMC2
VMC2 potentiometer tap
not used
not used
not used
diagnosefan
A21a.17
A21a.18
A21a.19
A21a.20
A21a.21
A21a.22
A21a.23
A21a.24
/66.B3
/66.A3
/66.A2
/66.A1
/66.B2
/66.B7
/66.A7
/66.A6
VrefVMC3
GroundVMC3
VrefVMC4
EA
Description
Plug
Pin
/67.B3
/67.A4
/67.A3
GroundVMC4
not used
24Vfan
not used
VrefVMC5
GroundVMC4
not used
24Vfan
not used
VrefVMC5
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A21a.33
A21a.34
A21a.35
A21a.36
A21a.37
A21a.38
A21a.39
A21a.40
/67.A2
/67.B2
/64.B5
/64.B6
/64.B7
/64.B8
/67.A6
/67.A7
GroundVMC5
Sensor1+(icing)
Sensor1(icing)
Sensor2+(icing)
Sensor2(icing)
Temp.Sensor+(air cond. autom.)
Temp.Sensor(air cond. autom.)
GroundVMC5
Sensor1+(icing)
Sensor1(icing)
Sensor2+(icing)
Sensor2(icing)
Temp.Sensor+(air cond. autom.)
Temp.Sensor(air cond. autom.)
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
A21a.41
A21a.42
/64.B2
not used
Ground FAN
not used
Ground FAN
41
42
/64.B1
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
GENERALOUTLAYHEAT/AIRCONDITIONINGSYSTEM
SYSTEMSIDE
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
97
114
Phys.Addr.
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
OPTIONKEYPAD
+K4
A19
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
10278759
TYPE SHEET
BDESCRIPTION
PLUG
PIN
A19.Kl15
A19.GND
A19.CAN_High
A19.CAN_Low
A
A
A
A
/39.F2
/39.F4
/35.E7
/35.E6
INFORMATIONINPUT
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN_High
CAN_Low
INFORMATIONINPUT
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN_High
CAN_Low
X1
X1
X1
X1
1
2
3
4
A19.Kl15
A19.c.
A
A
/39.F3
SUPPLYKl.15
n.c
SUPPLY
n.c
X1
X1
5
6
A19.CAN_High
A19.CAN_Low
A
A
/35.E5
/35.E4
CAN_High
CAN_Low
CAN_High
CAN_Low
X1
X1
7
8
A19.CAN_RES.
A19.PWM1
A19.PWM2
A19.PWM3
A
A
A
A
CAN_RES.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
MATCHINGRESISTOR
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
X1
X1
X1
X1
9
10
11
12
A19.PWM4
A19.PWM5
A
A
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
X2
X2
1
2
A19.PWM6
A19.PWM7
A19.PWM8
A19.PWM9
A
A
A
A
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
X2
X2
X2
X2
3
4
5
6
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
GENERALOUTLAYOPTIONKEYPAD
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
98
114
PROJ: 8920980_003
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Phys.Addr.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+K4
A22
10278759
TYPE SHEET
PLUG PIN
BDESCRIPTION
A22.Kl15
A22.GND
A22.CAN_High
A22.CAN_Low
A
A
A
A
/39.F5
/39.F7
/35.D5
/35.D4
INFORMATIONINPUT
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN_High
CAN_Low
INFORMATIONINPUT
SUPPLYEARTH
CAN_High
CAN_Low
X1
X1
X1
X1
1
2
3
4
A22.Kl15
A22.c.
A
A
/39.F8
SUPPLYKl.15
n.c
SUPPLY
n.c
X1
X1
5
6
A22.CAN_High
A22.CAN_Low
A
A
/35.C5
/35.C4
CAN_High
CAN_Low
CAN_High
CAN_Low
X1
X1
7
8
A22.CAN_RES.
A22.PWM1
A22.PWM2
A22.PWM3
A
A
A
A
CAN_RES.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
MATCHINGRESISTOR
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
X1
X1
X1
X1
9
10
11
12
A22.PWM4
A22.PWM5
A
A
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
X2
X2
1
2
A22.PWM6
A22.PWM7
A22.PWM8
A22.PWM9
A
A
A
A
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
X2
X2
X2
X2
3
4
5
6
CANAIR COND. KEYPAD
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
GENERALOUTLAYAIRCONDITIONINGKEYPAD
FLAPCONTROL
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
99
114
PROJ: 8920980_003
240.00
F1 10A
F31a 10A
...
F2 7,5A
F31b 10A
HIGHBEAMLEFT
F3 7,5A
F32a 10A
HIGHBEAMRIGHT
WORKINGPROJECTORLEFT
REARHATCH
F4 7,5A
F32b 10A
WORKINGPROJECTORRIGHT
REARHATCH
F5 7,5A
F33a 10A
130.00
LOWBEAMRIGHT
WORKINGPROJECTORLEFT*
CABROOF
F6 3A
F33b 10A
BOUNDARY/PARKINGLIGHT
LEFT
F7 3A
WORKINGPROJECTORRIGHT*
CABROOF
F29 25A
F9
10A
F45 10A
F56 10A
FUELPREHEATING
..................................
INPUTMODULE2
Vcc
OUTPUTMODULE2BANK2 OUTPUTMODULE3
K11/50,Y50,Y20,Y21
VccDO1
F67 10A
F27 10A
PROFILELIGHT/
PARKINGLIGHT
F15 10A
F46 10A
F57 10A
F68 10A
F28 10A
LHCONTROLLEVERVNR
Erreg.G3,SIMULATIOND+
INPUTMODULE3
VccJOYSTICKSTEERING
...
...
OUTPUTMODULE3
VccDO2
WEIGHINGDEVICE
...
F18 10A
F47 10A
F58 10A
F69 10A
F30 15A
Windscreen wiper motor

OUTPUTMODULE1BANK1 ...
washing p. backdust filter check Y10,Y14,Y9,Y17
...
OUTPUTMODULE3
VccDO3
VccVOLTAGECONVERTER
(RADIO,12Vplug.)
F19 10A
F70 10A
F34 20A
HEAT/AIRCond. system.Kl.15 OUTPUTMODULE1BANK2 OUTPUTMODULE2DO1

Y18,Y13,H40,Y57*
OPM1YEP1,YEP2,Y2,Y3
F48 10A
OUTPUTMODULE3
VccDO4
REFUELLINGPUMP
F20 15A
F49 10A
F71
F35 10A
WIPER,WASHINGPUMP
frontHORN
VccDO4
OUTPUTMODULE2DO2
RFWEOPTICALred flashing li. OPM1MO1,Y6.1.2.3
VccKEYPADSKl.15
VccMASTERKl.30
F21 10A
F50 10A
F61
F72
F38 5A
LOWBEAM
HIGHBEAM
...
...
OUTPUTMODULE2DO3
E1,E5back off lights
...
...
LHECUUP/CR
VccController
F22 7,5A
F51
F62 10A
F73
F39 5A
OUTPUTMODULE1DO1
OUTPUTModul2Y51,Y52
OUTPUTMODULE2DO4
B16BackupALARM
...
...
UhrAUXILIARYHEATER
F52 10A
10A
F59 10A
F60 10A
10A
10A
BOUNDARY/PARKINGLIGHT Ignition lock release

RIGHT
PUSHBUTTONSWITCHLHCONTROLLEVERR
AIRCON/OPTIONKEYPAD
Switch lighting
STOPLIGHT
F07b 10A
F75 10A
F10 5A
F23 5A
F63 10A
F74 15A
F40 20A
Flashing function
RADIOKl.58
12VELECTRICALSOCKET
DISPLAYUNIT
...
PuritecPARTICLEFILTER
OUTPUTMODULE1DO2
REVERSINGOBSTACLEDETECTOR OPM2Y2a,Y3a,Y11,Y12
OUTPUTMODULE3
VccBANK1
REARWINDOWHEATER
MIRRORHEATING*
VCCAUXILIARYHEATERKl.30
...
F8 15A
F76 10A
F11 10A
F24 10A
F53 10A
F64 10A
F19A 20A
F41
compressor seat*,(RADIO)
CIGARETTELIGHTER(X70)
RADIOKl.30
PRESSURESWITCH
B32,B28,B3,B3a
IGNITIONON
ENGINEECU
OUTPUTMODULE1DO3
Y62central lubrication sys.LH
OUTPUTMODULE3
VccBANK2
HEAT/AIRCOND.SYS.Kl.30 Dust particle filter .

...
F12 10A
F43 5A
F8A
10A
Interior lighting
ClockAUXILIARYHEATER
F54 5A
F65 10A
F25
Groeneveldcentr. lubr. system LogicINPUT1+2

...
LogicOUTPUT1+2
Kl.15MASTER
...
OUTPUTMODULE3
VccBANK3
WARNINGBEACON
F13 15A
F55 10A
F66 10A
F26
F44 10A
M11VENTILATORCONDENSER INPUTMODULE1
...
Vcc
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LOWBEAMLEFT
F14 15A
OUTPUTMODULE2BANK1 OUTPUTMODULE3
Y16,Y53,Y15,Y15a
VccBANK4
20A
F42
10A
...
...
10A
KL.30
DIAGNOSTICPLUG
IMMOBILISERKAT
S1
F36 40A
F17
LEDTEST
A14.B1LHECUUP/CR
A14.B2LHECUUP/CR
F16 40A
40A
...
...
...
KL.15
F37
...
...
...
8922717_002
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
GENERALOUTLAYPROTECTIVEFOIL
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
100
114
E
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Zustand
nderung
Ersteller
Datum
Datum
Name
Datum
Ausgabe
27.03.2007 09:42
lbhhae0
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
ELECTRICALDIAGRAMDIESELENGINE4AND6CYLINDER
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
A
A
B
B
ENGINE
D936A6ANDD934A6
WITHENGINEECU
C
F
F
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
101
114
&#5199
COOLANTTEMPERATURE
ENGINEECU
+M
B708
M710<>Y22
VEHICLESIDE
ENGINESIDE
/107.C5
1
R710<>R701
X1
ENGINECONTROLUNIT
D+
/105.B3
GENERATOR
B
+M
PROJ: 8920980_003
+M
Y711
+M
/109.B3 +M /109.B4 +M /109.B6 +M /110.B3 +M /110.B4 +M /110.B6

X1
Y712 X1 Y713 X1 Y714 X1 Y715 X1 Y716 X1
/105.B6
50
M700<>M1
1
/107.C7
CHARGEAIRTEMPERATURE
B707
+M
/108.B2
1
SPEED
1
/106.B2
+M
B711
CHARGEAIRPRESSURE
PHASESENSOR
B710
+M
/108.B7
1
n1
3
/106.C7
SPEED
=M
+M
B712
/108.B4
1
WATERDETECTOR
B709
+M
TEMPERATURESENSORFUEL
1
/107.C3
B701 1
+M /106.B5
OILPRESSURE
1
B703
+M
+M
B713
STARTER
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
INJECTIONPUMP
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
G700<>G3
n2
Ersteller
Datum
lbhhae0
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
STANDBY
AM6CYLINDERENGINE
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
102
114
Zustand
+M
B707
nderung
1
Datum
Ersteller
Datum
Name
Datum
COOLANTTEMPERATURE
Ausgabe
27.03.2007 09:42
WL701
CHARGEAIRPRESSURE
WH 1.94
/108.B7
1
Y715
/110.B3 +M
X1
Y714
+M
ENGINEPLUG
R710
M710<>Y22
M710
R710
&#5199
lbhhae0
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
4
1
G700<>G3
X1
M710
+M
G700
WL700
GENERATOR
WH 1.94
2
X701.B
+M
n
3
/106.C7
+M
B713
R710<>R701
+M
Y713
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
Y716
/110.B4 +M
X1
X1
/109.B4
/110.B6
X1
X1
/109.B6
+M
X701.S
OILPRESSURE
B710
+M
/106.B5
1
n2
X700.S
+M
+M
B701
PHASESENSOR
+M
X700.B
/107.C5
1
/106.B2
1
+M
Y712
X1
/109.B3
+M
Y711
X700.B
+M
+M
B708
/108.B4
1
SPEED
/107.C3
1
3
2
+M
B703
/108.B2
1
SPEED
+M
X700.S
+M
B709
n1
+M
B712
+M
B711
PROJ: 8920980_003
/107.C7
1
D
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
1
6
7
G700
/105.B3
D+
+M
M700
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
INJECTIONPUMP16
ENGINEECU
A
VEHICLEPLUG
ENGINECONTROLUNIT
B
B
M700<>M1
M700
/105.B6
50
STARTER
WATERDETECTOR
F
F
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
103
114
PIN
OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER SUPPLY(5V)

OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER SIGNAL(0,54,5V)
X1
X1
63
49
OIL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
Air intake pressure transmitter
GND
NC
NC
NC
SUPPLY(5V)
SIGNAL(0,54,5V)
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
35
62
48
34
61
47

RESERVE
RESERVE
GND
NC
NC
X1
X1
X1
33
60
46
A
A
A
A
A
A
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
32
59
45
31
58
44
A700C.AI8.GND
A700C.TI2
A700C.TI2.GND
A
A
A
/107.E7
/107.E6
RESERVE
Air intakte temp. transmitter
Air intake temp. transmitter
NC
SIGNAL
GND
X1
X1
X1
30
50
36
A700C.TI3
A700C.TI3.GND
A700C.TI4
A
A
A
/107.E5
/107.E4
/107.E3
Coolant temp. transmitter

Coolant temp. transmitter
Fuel temp. transmitter
SIGNAL
GND
SIGNAL
X1
X1
X1
51
37
52
A700C.TI4.GND
A700C.POWER.PS1
A700C.TI5
/107.E2
/106.E7
/106.E7
Fuel temp. transmitter

water detector
water detector
GND
SUPPLY(UBat)
SIGNAL
X1
X1
X1
38
57
53
A700C.TI5.GND
A700C.POWER.SPEED1
/106.E6
/108.E3
water detector
Speed sensor1
GND
SUPPLY(12V)
X1
X1
A700C.SPEED1
A700C.SPEED1.GND
/108.E2
/108.E1
Speed sensor1
Speed sensor1
SIGNAL
GND
X1
X1
39
69
55
A700C.POWER.SPEED2
A700C.SPEED2
A700C.SPEED2.GND
A700C.POWER.INDEX
A700C.INDEX
/108.E5
/108.E4
/108.E4
/108.E7
/108.E7
Speed sensor2
Speed sensor2
Speed sensor2
phase sensor
phase sensor
SUPPLY(12V)
SIGNAL
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
Sheet
A700C.AI3.REF2
A700C.AI3
A
A
/106.E5
/106.E4
A700C.AI3.GND
A700C.AI4.REF2
A700C.AI4
A700C.AI4.GND
A700C.AI5.REF3
A700C.AI5
A
A
A
A
A
A
/106.E4
A700C.AI5.GND
A700C.AI6.REF3
A700C.AI6
A
A
A
/106.E1
A700C.AI6.GND
A700C.AI7.REF4
A700C.AI7
A700C.AI7.GND
A700C.AI8.REF4
A700C.AI8
Description
GND
SUPPLY(12V)
SIGNAL
56
Type
Sheet
Description
Plug
PIN
42
24
phase sensor
RESERVE
RESERVE
GND
NC
NC
X1
X1
X1
RESERVE
RESERVE
DynamoD+
NC
NC
Ubat
X1
X1
X1
23
25
26
64
Starting motor.KL50
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
Activation(UBat)
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
29
66
67
43
65
14
/109.E2
/109.E3
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
EPCYLINDER1
EPCYLINDER1
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
PWM(+)
PWM(GND)
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
28
13
27
9
10
11
12
22
8
A700C.A2.HIGH.MV2
A700C.A2.LOW.MV2
A700C.A3.HIGH.MV3
/109.E4
/109.E4
/109.E5
EPCYLINDER2
EPCYLINDER2
EPCYLINDER3
PWM(+)
PWM(GND)
PWM(+)
X1
X1
X1
21
7
20
A700C.A3.LOW.MV3
A700C.A4.HIGH.MV4
A700C.A4.LOW.MV4
A700C.B1.HIGH.MV5
A700C.B1.LOW.MV5
/109.E6
/110.E2
/110.E3
EP CYLINDER3
RESERVE
RESERVE
EPZYLINDER4
EPZYLINDER4
PWM(GND)
NC
NC
PWM(+)
PWM(GND)
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
6
19
5
18
4
A700C.B2.HIGH.MV6
/110.E4
EPZYLINDER5
PWM(+)
X1
17
A700C.B2.LOW.MV6
A700C.B3.HIGH.MV7
A700C.B3.LOW.MV7
A700C.B4.HIGH.MV8
/110.E4
/110.E5
/110.E6
EPZYLINDER5
EPZYLINDER6
EPZYLINDER6
RESERVE
PWM(GND)
PWM(+)
PWM(GND)
NC
X1
X1
X1
X1
3
16
2
15
RESERVE
NC
X1
/108.E6
A700C.INDEX.GND
A700C.FI1
A700C.FI1.GND
A700C.FI2
A700C.FI2.GND
A700C.DI1
41
68
54HS
40
70
/105.E2
A700C.DO9
A700C.DI9
A700C.DO13
A700C.POWER.PS1
A700C.DI8
A700C.DO8
D
D
D
/105.E7
A700C.DO8.GND
A700C.DO7
A700C.DO7.GND
A700C.CURR1.HIGH
A700C.CURR1.LOW
A700C.CURR2.HIGH
A700C.CURR2.LOW
A700C.A1.HIGH.MV1
A700C.A1.LOW.MV1
D
D
D
D
D
A700C.B4.LOW.MV8
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
/106.E3
/106.E2
Phys.Addr.
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
Typ
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
*70/70
153
PROJ: 8920980_003
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Plug
Phys.Addr.
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+M
A700C.6
F
Ersteller
Datum
lbhhae0
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
6CYLINDER
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
104
114
/19.E4
VEHICLESIDE
+M
G700
D+
+M
G700
G3~
B+
D+
+M
M700
G3~
B+
1080A
30
WH 1.94
50
M
31
6,6kW
15100A
/104.B6
A700C.6.X1
X1 64
A700C.DI1
D
DYNAMO ( Generator )D+
Ubat
MOTORECU
+M
A700C.6
/104.B6
2
1
+M
X701.B
X701.S
+M
2
2
+M
X701.B
X701.S
+M
WH 1.94
+M
X700.B
X700.S
+M
29
WH 1.94
WH 0.96
A700C.6.X1
64
WH 0.96
+M
A700C.6
64
A700C.6.X1
+M
X700.B
X700.S
+M
WH AWG14
WL700
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
WL701
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
X1 29
A700C.DO9
D
Starter.KL50
Activation(UBat)
MOTORECU
F
Ersteller
Datum
lbhhae0
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
STARTER,GENERATOR
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
105
114
CHARGEAIRPRESSURE
OILPRESSURE
+M
B701
BK
BK
1
2
B701.X
IN+
OUT
1
1
GND
3
3
PROJ: 8920980_003
IN+
OUT
12K
0,54,5V
B710.X
/104.B2
X1 33
A700C.AI5.GND
A
Charge air pressure sensor
GND
MOTORECU
X1 61
A700C.AI5.REF3
A
SUPPLY(5V)
MOTORECU
+M
A700C.6
/104.B2
X1 49
A700C.AI3
A
Oil pressure sensor
SIGNAL(0,54,5V)
MOTORECU
+M
A700C.6
/104.D2
X1 39
A700C.TI5.GND
WH 0.96
X1 53
A700C.TI5
WATER DETECTOR
GND
MOTORECU
WATER DETECTOR
SIGNAL
MOTORECU
57
53
A700C.6.X1
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
X1 63
A700C.AI3.REF2
A
Oil pressure sensor
Supply(5V)
MOTORECU
39
WH 0.96
63
WH 0.96
X1 35
A700C.AI3.GND
A
Oil pressure sensor
GND
MOTORECU
49
A700C.6.X1
35
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
X1 47
A700C.AI5
A
SIGNAL(0,54,5V)
MOTORECU
61
47
WH 0.96
+M
A700C.6
33
A700C.6.X1
WH 0.96
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
B703.X
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
GND
0,54,5V
1
+M
B710
+M
B703
010bar/g
0,54,5bar/a
WATERDETECTOR
X1 57
A700C.POWER.PS1
WATER DETECTOR
SUPPLY(UBat)
MOTORECU
F
Ersteller
Datum
lbhhae0
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
CHARGEAIRCOOLER
OILPRESSURESWITCH,WATERDETECTOR
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
106
114
+M
B708
+M
B707
B708.X
B707.X
1
1
B709.X
30130C
2
2
PROJ: 8920980_003
30130C
R
1
+M
A700C.6
/104.D2
+M
A700C.6
/104.D2
X1 37
A700C.TI3.GND
A
COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR
GND
MOTORECU
+M
A700C.6
/104.D2
WH 0.96
50
WH 0.96
X1 51
A700C.TI3
A
COOLANT TEMP. SENSOR
SIGNAL
MOTORECU
36
A700C.6.X1
51
A700C.6.X1
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
X1 52
A700C.TI4
A
FUEL TEMP. SENSPR
SIGNAL
MOTORECU
37
WH 0.96
X1 38
A700C.TI4.GND
A
FUEL TEMP. SENSOR
GND
MOTORECU
52
A700C.6.X1
38
WH 0.96
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+M
B709
30130C
COOLANTTEMPERATURE
FUELTEMPERATURE
X1 36
A700C.TI2.GND
A
AIR INTAKE TEMP. Sensor
GND
MOTORECU
X1 50
A700C.TI2
A
AIR INTAKE TEMP. Sensor
SIGNAL
MOTORECU
F
Ersteller
Datum
lbhhae0
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
FUELTEMPERATURESENSOR
AKTIVEOSCILLATING
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
107
Blatt
von
114
GND
SIGNAL
B713.X
U+
3
3
U+
SIGNAL
B712.X
GND
U+
2
1
PROJ: 8920980_003
SIGNAL
+M
B713
/104.E2
X1 41
A700C.SPEED1.GND
ENGINE SPEED Sensor1
GND
MOTORECU

SIGNAL
MOTORECU

SUPPLY(12V)
MOTORECU
+M
A700C.6
/104.E2
X1 40
A700C.SPEED2.GND
GND
MOTORECU
X1 54
A700C.SPEED2
SIGNAL
MOTORECU

SUPPLY(12V)
MOTORECU
+M
A700C.6
WH 0.96
X1 42
A700C.INDEX.GND
X1 56
A700C.INDEX
PHASE SENSOR
GND
MOTORECU
PHASE SENSOR
SIGNAL
MOTORECU
/104.B6
70
56
A700C.6.X1
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
X1 68
A700C.POWER.SPEED2
42
WH 0.96
68
54
WH 0.96
WH 0.96
A700C.6.X1
X1 69
A700C.POWER.SPEED1
40
WH 0.96
X1 55
A700C.SPEED1
69
55
WH 0.96
+M
A700C.6
41
A700C.6.X1
WH 0.96
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
GND
PHASESENSOR
+M
B712
B711.X
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+M
B711
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1
X1 70
A700C.POWER.INDEX
PHASE SENSOR
SUPPLY(12V)
MOTORECU
F
Ersteller
Datum
lbhhae0
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1,ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2,
PHASESENSOR
3
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
108
114
INJECTIONPUMP1
+M
Y711
+M
Y713
X2
X1
X2
X1
X2
IPCYLINDER1
PWM(+)
MOTORECU
IPCYLINDER1
PWM(GND)
MOTORECU
+M
A700C.6
/104.D6
X1 7
A700C.A2.LOW.MV2
IPCYLINDER2
PWM(+)
MOTORECU
IPCYLINDER2
PWM(GND)
MOTORECU
+M
A700C.6
/104.D6
WH 1.23
WH 1.23
X1 21
A700C.A2.HIGH.MV2
20
WH 1.23
A700C.6.X1
WH 1.23
X1 8
A700C.A1.LOW.MV1
/104.D6
A700C.6.X1
X1 22
A700C.A1.HIGH.MV1
21
WH 1.23
+M
A700C.6
22
A700C.6.X1
WH 1.23
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+M
Y712
PROJ: 8920980_003
INJECTIONPUMP3
INJECTIONPUMP2
X1 20
A700C.A3.HIGH.MV3
X1 6
A700C.A3.LOW.MV3
IPCYLINDER3
PWM(+)
MOTORECU
IPCYLINDER3
PWM(GND)
MOTORECU
F
Ersteller
Datum
lbhhae0
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
109
114
INJECTIONPUMP5
INJECTIONPUMP4
+M
Y714
+M
Y716
X2
X1
X2
X1
X2
IPCYLINDER4
PWM(+)
MOTORECU
IPCYLINDER4
PWM(GND)
MOTORECU
+M
A700C.6
/104.E6
X1 3
A700C.B2.LOW.MV6
IP CYLINDER5
PWM(+)
MOTORECU
IPCYLINDER5
PWM(GND)
MOTORECU
+M
A700C.6
/104.E6
WH 1.23
WH 1.23
X1 17
A700C.B2.HIGH.MV6
16
WH 1.23
A700C.6.X1
WH 1.23
X1 4
A700C.B1.LOW.MV5
/104.D6
A700C.6.X1
X1 18
A700C.B1.HIGH.MV5
17
WH 1.23
+M
A700C.6
18
A700C.6.X1
WH 1.23
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X1
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+M
Y715
PROJ: 8920980_003
INJECTIONPUMP6
X1 16
A700C.B3.HIGH.MV7
X1 2
A700C.B3.LOW.MV7
EPZYLINDER6
PWM(+)
MOTORECU
EPZYLINDER6
PWM(GND)
MOTORECU
F
Ersteller
Datum
lbhhae0
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
3
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
110
114
&#5199
COOLANTTEMPERATURE
ENGINEECU
B708
1
VEHICLESIDE
M710<>Y22
1
ENGINESIDE
R710<>R701
X1
ENGINECONTROLUNIT
GENERATOR
PROJ: 8920980_003
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Y711
n1
Y713
X1
Y714
X1
1
1
B707
B713
n
CHARGEAIRPRESSURE
1
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR
B712
OILPRESSURESWITCH
B703
B701
n2
B710
WATERDETECTOR
1
B709
50
STARTER
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
X1
Y712
PHASESENSOR
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
X1
B711
INJECTIONPUMP14
G700<>G3
D+
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
Ident.Nr.
STANDBY
AM4CYLINDERENGINE
3
M700<>M1
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
111
114
Zustand
1
1
PROJ: 8920980_003
D
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
n1
3
2
nderung
Datum
1
Name
Y712
Y711
n2
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Datum
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR
B713
OILPRESSURESWITCH
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
R710<>R701
&#5199
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Y713
R710
X1
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ENGINESIDE
M710<>Y22
M710
G700
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
Y714
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
X1
X1
X1
X1
1
5
6
GENERATOR
G700<>G3
M700<>M1
G700
M700
PHASESENSOR
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
ENGINEECU
INJECTIONPUMP14
A
VEHICLESIDE
ENGINECONTROLUNIT
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR
B
B711
B712
D+
50
STARTER
n
WATERDETECTOR
B701
CHARGEAIRPRESSURE
B703
COOLANTTEMPERATURE
B708
E
B709
B707
F
F
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
112
114
PLUG
Description
Typ
A700C.AI3.REF2
A700C.AI3
A
A
OILPRESSURESWITCH
OILPRESSURESWITCH
SUPPLY(5V)
SIGNAL(0,54,5V)
X1
X1
63
49
A700C.AI3.GND
A700C.AI4.REF2
A700C.AI4
A700C.AI4.GND
A700C.AI5.REF3
A700C.AI5
A
A
A
A
A
A
OILPRESSURESWITCH
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
CHARGEAIRCOOLER
CHARGEAIRCOOLER
GND
NC
NC
NC
SUPPLY(5V)
SIGNAL(0,54,5V)
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
35
62
48
34
61
47
A700C.AI5.GND
A700C.AI6.REF3
A700C.AI6
A
A
A
CHARGEAIRCOOLER
RESERVE
RESERVE
GND
NC
NC
X1
X1
X1
33
60
46
A700C.AI6.GND
A700C.AI7.REF4
A700C.AI7
A700C.AI7.GND
A700C.AI8.REF4
A700C.AI8
A
A
A
A
A
A
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
32
59
45
31
58
44
A700C.AI8.GND
A700C.TI2
A700C.TI2.GND
A
A
A
RESERVE
NC
SIGNAL
GND
X1
X1
X1
30
50
36
A700C.TI3
A700C.TI3.GND
A700C.TI4
A
A
A
Coolant temperature sensor

Coolant temperature sensor
Fuel temperature sensor
SIGNAL
GND
SIGNAL
X1
X1
X1
51
37
52
A700C.TI4.GND
A700C.POWER.PS1
A700C.TI5
Fuel temperature sensor

WATER SENSOR
WATER SENSOR
GND
SUPPLY(UBat)
SIGNAL
X1
X1
X1
38
57
53
A700C.TI5.GND
A700C.POWER.SPEED1
WATERSENSOR
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1
GND
SUPPLY(12V)
X1
X1
A700C.SPEED1
A700C.SPEED1.GND
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR1
SIGNAL
GND
X1
X1
39
69
55
A700C.POWER.SPEED2
A700C.SPEED2
A700C.SPEED2.GND
A700C.POWER.INDEX
A700C.INDEX
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2
ENGINESPEEDSENSOR2
PHASESENSOR
PHASESENSOR
SUPPLY(12V)
SIGNAL
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
GND
SUPPLY(12V)
SIGNAL
PIN
Phys.Addr.
41
68
54
40
70
56
Type
Description
Sheet
Plug
PIN
A700C.INDEX.GND
A700C.FI1
A700C.FI1.GND
PHASESENSOR
RESERVE
RESERVE
GND
NC
NC
X1
X1
X1
A700C.FI2
A700C.FI2.GND
A700C.DI1
RESERVE
RESERVE
GENERATORD+
NC
NC
Ubat
X1
X1
X1
23
25
26
64
STARTER.KL50
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
SELECTION(UBat)
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
29
66
67
43
65
14
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
EPCYLINDER1
EPCYLINDER1
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
PWM(+)
PWM(GND)
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
28
13
27
9
10
11
12
22
8
A700C.A2.HIGH.MV2
A700C.A2.LOW.MV2
A700C.A3.HIGH.MV3
EPCYLINDER2
EPCYLINDER2
RESERVE
PWM(+)
PWM(GND)
NC
X1
X1
X1
21
7
20
A700C.A3.LOW.MV3
A700C.A4.HIGH.MV4
A700C.A4.LOW.MV4
A700C.B1.HIGH.MV5
A700C.B1.LOW.MV5
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
EPCYLINDER3
EPCYLINDER3
NC
NC
NC
PWM(+)
PWM(GND)
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
6
19
5
18
4
A700C.B2.HIGH.MV6
EPCYLINDER4
PWM(+)
X1
17
A700C.B2.LOW.MV6
A700C.B3.HIGH.MV7
A700C.B3.LOW.MV7
A700C.B4.HIGH.MV8
EPCYLINDER4
RESERVE
RESERVE
RESERVE
PWM(GND)
NC
NC
NC
X1
X1
X1
X1
3
16
2
15
A700C.B4.LOW.MV8
RESERVE
NC
X1
A700C.DO9
A700C.DI9
A700C.DO13
A700C.POWER.PS1
A700C.DI8
A700C.DO8
D
D
D
A700C.DO8.GND
A700C.DO7
A700C.DO7.GND
A700C.CURR1.HIGH
A700C.CURR1.LOW
A700C.CURR2.HIGH
A700C.CURR2.LOW
A700C.A1.HIGH.MV1
A700C.A1.LOW.MV1
D
D
D
D
D
42
24
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
153
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
*70/70
PROJ: 8920980_003
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
Sheet
Phys.Addr.
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
+M
A700C4
F
Ersteller
Datum
Ausgabe
Zustand
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
3
Ident.Nr.
4CYLINDER
4
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
113
114
CODE
LETTER
STABE
CODE
LETTER
S
= SYSTEM
KIND OF EQUIPMENT
DIN EN613462
DENOTATION
EXTRACTED OF DIN 72552
CLAMP
SIGNAL
SIFUSES
UNDER CARRIAGE
REVOLVING STAGE
BOOM
CARRIAGE(CRAWLER CRANE)
MOTOR
forbidden.
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
LIEBHERRWERKEHINGEN
PROJ: 8920980_003
+ INSTALLATION LOCATION
UNDER CARRIAGE
H
CAB
VEHICLE
SWITCHCABINET
APPROXIMATION,SENSOR,SWITCH
TACHO SENSOR,TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PRESSURE SENSOR,SWITCH,SENSOR
K
D
A
CARRIGE
SWITCHCABINET
MOTOR
Ausgabe
nderung
Datum
Name
Datum
RETURN WIRETOBATTERY,PLUS
VIASWITCH/RELAY(SWITCHED PLUS)
RETURN WIREFROMBATTERIE,
MINUS/GROUNDDIRECT
FUSES,FI,CIRCUIT BREAKER
31b
RETURN WIRETOBATTERY,MINUS/GROUND
VIASWITCH/RELAY(SWITCHEDMINUS)
DYNAMOS,GENERATORS,BATTERIES
LAMPS ,ANNOUNC.
SWITCHING RELAY,TIME RELAY,CONTACTOR RELAY

I/OMODULE,UEAMODULE,ABVELECTRONICS,
TRANSISTOR,ELECTRONIC VALVES
INDUCTORS
GREY
GRAU
VT
VIOLET
VIOLETT
LB
LIGHTBROWN
BEIGE
7,5
BN
BROWN
BRAUN
10
RD
RED
ROT
15
BU
BLUE
BLAU
YE
YELLOW
GELB
50
STARTER,STARTER CONTROL UNITDIRECT
30
GN
GREEN
GRN
50e50f
START LOCK RELAY,INPUTOUTPUT
52
TAG SIGNAL
WIPER MOTOR
WIRE COLOURS DIN IEC 757
TRANSDUCER
54
STOPLIGHT
BUZZER,CLAMP,SPEAKERS,CLOCK,
TACHOGRAPH,PRINTER,VOLTMETER,WATTMETER,
54g
TAG SIGNAL(COMPRESSED AIR VALVE)
POWER SWITCH RELAY(FOR LOAD)

BREAKER,MOTOR STARTER,TYRISTOR
55
FOG LAMP
56,a,b,d
HEADLIGHT
57,a,L,R
PARKING LIGHT
58,b,c,d,L,R
LIMITATION,END,LICENSE PLATE
AND DEVICE LIGHTS
61
RESISTORS, DIODES
SWITCH,KEYPAD( WITHOUT DISPLAY),MOUSE
LSBBUS SENSOR,ANTENNA,TELEPHONE SET

POWER TRANSFORMER,RECTIFIER,RADIO
ISOLATOR
FILTER
COLLECTING ELECTRODE,CABLE,CABLE LOOP,INFORMATION BUS

OPTICAL FIBER,
DUCT (RING WHEEL TRANSDUCER)
CONNECTOR(ELECTRICAL),PLUG,CLAMP,
TERMINAL BLOCK,TERMINAL STRIP,CONNECTION TERMINAL STRIP
ADD. PART
GY
20
MOTORS
FLASHER UNIT
VALVES
FARBEN
49
53,a,b,c,e,i
COLOURS
ALT
COLOURS
FARBEN
gr
GY
GREY
GRAU
vi
VT
VIOLET
VIOLETT
rs
PK
PINK
ROSA
br
BN
BROWN
BRAUN
rt
RD
RED
ROT
GENERATOR CONTROL
bl
BU
BLUE
BLAU
72
ALARM SWITCH,(ALL AROUND, INDICATOR LAMP)
ge
YE
YELLOW
GELB
75
RADIO,CIGARETTE LIGHTER
gn
GN
GREEN
GRN
76
SPEAKERS
sw
BK
BLACK
SCHWARZ
B+,B
BATTERY,PLUS,MINUS
or
OG
ORANGE
ORANGE
D+,D
DYNAMO,PLUS,MINUS
ws
WH
WHITE
WEISS
DF,DF1,DF2
DYNAMO,FIELD,FIELD1,FIELD2
BEXAMPLE FOR SIGNAL CROSS-REFERENCE
EINSTALLATION LOCATION
Datum
30b
31
EXAMPLE FOR EQUIPMENT LABELING

SYSTEM
INPUTOFBATTERYPLUS,DIRECT
FLOURESCENT LAMP,LAMP,BULB,LIGHT FIXTURE

HEADLIGHTS,RUNNING LIGHT,HEATING
30
CARRIAGE
SWITCHEDPLUSBEHINDBATTERY
(OUTPUT IGNITION[DRIVE]SWITCH)
CAPACITOR
CABIN
15
+ INSTALLATION LOCATION
REVOLVING STAGE / CARRIAGE
Ersteller
Zustand
KEYPAD UNIT,BRACE UNIT,MONITOR,

ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
MOTOR
AKIND OF EQUIPMENT
ZNUMBERING
53
ACONNECTION
30
DonningerJ.
26.03.200716:16
lbhhae0
27.03.2007 09:42
SFUSE
or
30b.F390
FUSE
SIGNAL
+24V.L1
KEYOFSYMBOLS
DINEN613461DINEN613462DINEN60617
3
SIGNAL
Ident.Nr.
ZeichNr.
8920980
460901000003
7
F
Anlage
Ort
003
8
Blatt
von
114
114
Service Manual
Electrical system
Electrical components
10.1 Electrical components

10.1.1
Electrical components in the cab

The main electrical/electronic components are located on the cab rear wall
Design
The following components are fitted on the cab rear wall:
- Fuse and relay board
- Voltage converter
- Main electronics (master)
- Input module
- Warning buzzer
- Diagnostic plug
- Optional components
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
The electrical and electronic components are mounted under the covering
on the cab rear wall.
Components on the rear cab wall

1 Warning buzzer H40
(behind cover)
2 Diagnostic plug
3 Main electronics (master) A15
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
4
5
6
7
Voltage transformer T1
Rear wiper motor M3
Relay and fuse board A4
Relay base fixing (optional)
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
8 Input module 2 A16b

9 Connector X1
10 Connector X2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-1 o f 1
Electrical system
Service Manual
10.1.2
Fuse and relay board A4

(ID no. 10290014)
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Design
Fuse and relay board A4
10.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Electrical system
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
F1
F2
F3
10 A terminal 15 reserve
7.5 A terminal 15 left high beam
7.5 A terminal 15 right
high beam
F4 7.5 A terminal 15 left low beam
F5 7.5 A terminal 15 right low beam
F6 3 A terminal 30 left profile light /
parking light
F7 3 A terminal 30 right profile light
/ parking light
F07b 10 A terminal 15 hazard lights
F8 15 A terminal 58 compressor
seat, seat heater*
F8a 10 A terminal 58 interior lighting,
radio, cigarette lighter (X70)
F9 10 A terminal 15 LH control
lever button, air conditioning
keypad, optional keypad
F10 5 A terminal 15 display unit
F11 10 A terminal 15 pressure
switches B32, B28, B3, B3a
F12 20 A terminal 15 reserve
F14 15 A terminal 15 fuel preheating
F15 10 A terminal 15 S2 LH control
lever; tank pipe sensor; terminal
15 master; engine stop relay;
alternator excitation
F16 40 A terminal 15 (MAXI fuse)
F17 40 A terminal 15 (MAXI fuse)
F18 10 A terminal 15 washer pump,
rear wiper motor
F19 10 A terminal 15 heater, B27
air conditioning
F19A 20 A terminal 30 heater, air
conditioning
F20 15 A terminal 15 front wiper,
washer pump, horn
F21 10 A terminal 15 driving light,
high beam
F22 7.5 A terminal 15 brake lights,
switch illumination
F24 10 A terminal 15 ignition ON,
engine ECU
F25 10 A terminal 30
flashing beacon
F26 10 A terminal 30 diagnostic plug
F27 10 A terminal 30 profile light /
parking light
F29 25 A terminal 30 ignition starter
switch relief
F30 15 A terminal 30 voltage
converter, radio, 12 V socket
F31a 10 A terminal 30/15 working
floodlight + double beam,
front left
F31b 10 A terminal 30/15 working
floodlight + double beam,
front right
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
F47 10 A terminal 15 output module

1 bank 1 - Y9, Y10, Y14, Y17
1 bank 2 - H40, Y13, Y18, Y57
1 bank 3 - YMo1, Y6.1, Y6.2,
Y6.3 Y11, Y12
1 bank 4 - Y2, Y3, YEP1, YEP2
1 DO1 supply - OP M2 - Y51,
Y52
1 DO2 supply - OP M2 - Y2a,
Y3a, Y11, Y12
1 DO3 supply Y62 central
lubrication system
F54 5 A terminal 15 master control
A15 supply
2 bank 1 - Y16, Y53, Y15
2 bank 2 - K11/50, Y50, Y20,
Y21
2 bank 3 - Y11, Y12
2 bank 4 - reserve
2 DO1 supply - OP M1 - YEP1,
YEP2, Y2, Y3
2 DO2 supply - OP M1 Y6.1.2.3
2 DO3 supply - E1, E5
2 DO4 supply - B16
3 bank 1 - reserve
3 bank 2 - reserve
3 bank 3 - reserve
3 bank 4 - reserve
3 DO1 supply
3 DO2 supply
3 DO3 supply
3 DO4 supply
F71 10 A terminal 15 keypad supply
F74 15 A terminal 15 rear window
heater, heated mirror*
F75 10 A terminal 30 radio IGN,
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
K209 Dust filter excess pressure

system relay
K228 Visual back-up alarm relay
K229 Visual back-up alarm relay
K230 Automatic run-off relay
K240 Power hazard light relay
K241 Reserve
K242 Reserve
K243 Reserve
K244 Reserve
K245 Reserve
K246 Reserve
K270 Immobiliser relay
K271 Return-to-dig relay M3
R9b Alternator exciter resistance
220
S1 Safety test button
V1 Extinguishing diode K01
V2 Extinguishing diode K01/87
V12 Extinguishing diode K22a
V13 Extinguishing diode K22b
V22 Extinguishing diode F9 reserve
V23 Extinguishing diode F14
preheating
V24 Extinguishing diode F19 heater
blower, air conditioning
V25 Extinguishing diode F72 reserve
V32 Extinguishing diode K244/87a
V32c Reversing light blocking diode
V33c Reversing light blocking diode
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-3 o f 3
Electrical system
Service Manual

floodlight rear left (rear hatch)
floodlight rear right (rear hatch)
floodlight rear left (cab door)*
floodlight rear right (cab door)*
F34 20 A terminal 30
refuelling pump*
F35 10 A terminal 30 master control
supply A15
F36 40 A terminal 30 engine control
unit supply A14 LH-ECU
(output)
F38 5 A terminal 30 engine control
unit supply A14 LH-ECU
(output)
F39 20 A terminal 30 engine
compartment lighting, auxiliary
heater clock
F40 20 A terminal 30 auxiliary
heater control
F43 5 A terminal 15 input module
1+2 logic
F44 10 A terminal 15 input module 1
supply
supply
supply
terminal 58, 12 V socket

F76 10 A terminal 30 radio +
K01 Ignition starter switch relief relay
terminal 15
K02 Starter solenoid relay*
K03 Engine stop relay*
K1 Direction indicator relay
K2 Profile light, parking light relay
K3 Low beam / driving light relay
K3a High beam relay
K5 Relay terminal 15
K8 Rear windscreen wiper and
washer pump relay
K9 Flashing beacon relay
K10 Mirror/rear window heater relay
K12 Radio / 12 V socket relay
terminal 58
K22 Hazard lights relay terminal 15
K22a Relay S4 H16, H18
K22b Relay S4 H15, H17
K25 John Deere (USA) hazard light
relay
K26 John Deere (USA) hazard light
relay
K31a Left working floodlight + double
beam relay, front left
K31b Right working floodlight +
double beam relay, front right
K32a Left working floodlight + double
beam relay, rear left
K32b Right working floodlight +
double beam relay, rear right
V44
V45
V46
V48
V49
V50
V51
V52
V53
V54
V57
V58
V59
V60
V81
V82
V83
V84
V85
V86
V87
V88
V89
V90
V99
Extinguishing diode K271

Extinguishing diode K3a
Alternator excitation blocking
diode
Alternator excitation blocking
diode
Direction indicator blocking
diode
diode
diode
diode
diode
diode
diode
Hydraulic quick change device
blocking diode
diode
* Options
Basic function
However, the other electrical and electronic components are powered via the
relay and fuse board.
Working floodlight fuse function

The function of the working floodlights can be selected by plugging the fuses
F31A, F31B, F32A, F32B, F33A and F33B:
- When the fuses are plugged to terminal 30 the working floodlights work
as soon as the main switch is turned ON.
- When the fuses are plugged to terminal 15 the working floodlights only
work when the ignition is turned ON.
You can also choose a mixed function, for example by plugging the front
working floodlights to terminal 15 and the rear floodlights to terminal 30.
10.1-4 o f 3
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
The relay and fuse board houses and connects the electrical components.
The relay and fuse board does not have a control function.
Service Manual
Electrical system
Fuse test
The fuses on the relay and fuse board are divided into three categories.
- Fuses for power supply from terminal 30
- Fuses for power supply from terminal 15
- Fuses to protect various functions
(e.g. low beam, profile lights / parking light)
Each fuse has an LED and can be tested by pressing the button S1.
The fuse test depends on the electrical status.
Only the fuses of the activated circuit can be tested:
- When the main switch is on (terminal 30) only the LEDs on terminal 30
power supply fuses light up when the button S1 is pressed.
- When the main ignition is on (terminal 15) the LEDs on terminal 30 and
terminal 15 power supply fuses light up when the button S1 is pressed.
- The LEDs to protect the various functions only light up when the
corresponding function is activated.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
If an LED does not light up, the fuse is defective.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-5 o f 5
Electrical system
Service Manual
10.1.3
Main electronics (master) A15

ID no. 10223177
Technical data
See section 2.1
The main electronics (master) A15 are located on the cab rear wall.
Design

1 Cover fixing thread
2 Status display LEDs
3 Slot 1 (CF1) for memory card
with application software
4 Memory card status LEDs
5
6
7
8
9
Slot 2 (CF2) (optional)

Green system status LED
Ventilation and bleeder screw
Cover for Compact Flash (CF)
memory card slot
Basic function
The main electronics (master) is the brain of the machine control system.
The application software in the main electronics (master) strictly follows the
following time cycles:
- Fetch all input data from the CAN/external modules
- Perform all calculations in the application software with the input data;
calculate the output data
- Generate output data for connected external/CAN modules, which
convert the commands into actions (for example activating a solenoid
valve via one of the output modules)
Memory card
The application software is stored on the memory card in slot 1 (CF1).
1 128 MB capacity memory card
2 ID no. of memory card including current software
3 Current software INDEX
4 Production date
Each time the system is started up (ignition switched on), the application
software on the memory card in slot 1 (CF1) is tested and (if there are
changes) an update is performed.
128 MB memory card
10.1-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
The main electronics (master) controls and monitors all connected CAN or
external modules.
Service Manual
Electrical system
The data on the memory card takes priority. The system cannot be operated
without a memory card.
How the status LEDs work
Status display LEDs
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Status list
Status
Description
On
LED
activation
test
Directly after the main electronics (master) are switched on, an automatic
LED test is performed. The system is started.
Off
Off
Booting
The system is started and waits for all the conditions, such as the presence
of CAN modules in the system, to be met.
Flashes
(1 s on,
1 s off)
Off
Running
The system is running fully in normal operation
Off
Flashes
(0.2 s. on,
0.2 s. off)
Critical
Flashes
(1 s on,
1 s off)
On
CAN
download
On
Flashes
(0.2 s. on,
0.2 s. off)
ALARM
The entire control system has been shut down due to an error with
ALARM priority. The application software is stopped and the machine
cannot be operated.
Flash in time
(0.2 s. on, 0.2 s. off)
FATAL
The entire control system has been shut down due to a fatal error. The
application software is stopped and the machine cannot be operated.
Flash in time
(1 s on, 1 s off)
Power down
The system has been shut down due to a power down command. The
machine cannot be operated.
Power off
The system has been completely shut down. The machine cannot be
operated.
LED B
Green
LED A
Orange
On
Flash alternately
(1 s on, 1 s off)
Off
On
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
The entire control system has been shut down due to a critical error. The
application software is stopped and the machine cannot be operated.
Download of required software to a CAN module is in progress. The application software has not yet been started. The machine cannot yet be operated.
Flash
Part of the main electronics software is being updated. The machine cannot
programming be operated until this has been completed.
Flash erase
Part of the MASTER's internal FLASH memory is being deleted (prior to

reprogramming)
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-7 o f 7
Electrical system
Service Manual
How the memory card LEDs work

The LEDs show the status of and communication between the memory card
and the control unit.
- LED 1 indicates that the memory card CF1 is plugged in.
- LED 3 indicates that the memory card CF2 is plugged in.
- LED 2 lights up or flickers when the memory card CF1 is communicating
with the control unit.
- LED 4 lights up or flickers when the memory card CF2 is communicating
with the control unit.
Memory card status LEDs
How the system status LEDs work

The LED 3 lights up to signal the power supply for the main electronics
(master).
System status LED
Main electronics (master) connectors

1
2
3
4
5
6
10.1-8 o f 8
PWR_X power supply connector

CAN_X CAN connector
LAN 1 connector (unassigned)
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7 COM1_X COM 1 connector

(unassigned)
(unassigned)
(unassigned)
(unassigned)
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Main electronics (master) connectors
Service Manual
Electrical system
Plug assignment
6-pin Deutsch connector
1 Earth (ground)
2 Terminal 15 from fuse F54
3 Unassigned
4 Unassigned
5 Housing earth
6 Terminal 30 from fuse F35
PWR_X connector
8-pin Deutsch connector
1
2
3
4
CAN 4 low
CAN 3 low
CAN 2 low
CAN 1 low
5
6
7
8
CAN 1 high
CAN 2 high
CAN 3 high
CAN 4 high
5
6
7
8
9
Earth (GND)
Standby (DSR)
Transmitter activation (RTS)
Transmission standby (CTS)
Incoming call (RI)
CAN_X connector
9-pin SUB-D connector
Reception signal level (DCD)
Reception data (RXD)
Transmission data (TXD)
Terminal operational (DTR)
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
COM4_X connector
1
2
3
4
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-9 o f 9
Electrical system
Service Manual
10.1.4
Input modules (A16a, A16b, A16c)

ID no. 10046435
Technical data
See section 2.1
The input modules are located under the left cab access and in the cab, and
are arranged as follows:
1 Left rear section
2 Output module 3 A17c (optional)
3 Input module 3 A16c (optional)
4 Input module 1 A16a
5 Output module 2 A17b
6 Output module 1 A17a
Input module 2 A16b in the cab on the rear wall
Module layout
Design
1 Input module
2 Ventilation and bleeder screw
with Goretex membrane
3 Connector
4 Type plate
The input modules have the following functions:
1 Power supply for switches and sensors
2 Converting analogue and digital signals to CAN bus messages
3 Forwarding the converted signals via CAN bus to the main electronics
(master)
The only difference between the input modules is their address.
The input modules 1 A16a and 2 A16b must be plugged in and operational
for the system to work.
10.1-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Input module
Service Manual
Electrical system
Input module connector assignment
Input module connectors

1 24 V sensor supply
2 CAN interface with logic supply
3 16 analogue universal inputs
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Input module 1 connector

A16a.X1:
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
4 Frequency test inputs

5 Earth
6 5 V sensor supply
Plug connector, 70-pin Deutsch DRC

1 Spare
2 24 V power supply, logical
unit 200 mA
3 Spare
pressure test
5 Spare
pressure
7 Brake accumulator pressure
8 Control lever forward 1
9 Control lever back 1
10 Lift kick-out
11 Bucket return-to-dig
12 Spare
13 Spare
14 Spare
15 Spare
16 Logical unit supply earth
17 Spare
18 Float position
19 Ride control (LFD)
20 Quick-change device switch
21 Inch pedal angle sensor 1
22 Transmission overheating
23 Tank sensor
24 Terminal 50a
25 Gas pedal angle sensor 1
26 Spare
27 Spare
28 Spare
29 CAN end connected to pin 43
30 Terminal 30 power supply
31 Earth
32 Power supply for service brake
accumulator B19
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
36 Power supply for bucket returnto-dig

37 Power supply for tank sensor
38 Power supply for lift kick-out
39 Power supply for gas pedal
angle sensor 1
40 Spare
41 Spare
42 Spare
43 CAN low (CAN-E connected to
CAN_Res)
44 CAN low
45 Spare
48 Spare
49 Spare
50 Spare
51 Spare
52 Spare
53 Spare
54 Spare
55 Variable displacement motor
speed 1
56 Output speed
57 CAN high (CAN-E connected to
CAN_Res)
58 CAN high
59 Spare
60 Spare
61 Spare
62 Spare
63 Earth for inch pedal angle
sensor 1
64 Earth for lift kick-out
65 Earth for tank sensor
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-11 o f 1 1
Electrical system
Service Manual
33 Spare
34 Spare
35 Power supply for inch pedal
angle sensor 1
10.1-12 o f 1 1
Earth for return-to-dig

Earth for gas pedal angle sensor 1
Spare
Earth for variable displacement
motor speed 1
70 Earth for output speed

1 Spare
2 24 V power supply, logical unit
200 mA
3 Spare
4 Driving light
5 High beam
6 Indicator signal
7 Spare
8 Control lever option 1
11 Warning buzzer
12 Spare
13 Spare
14 Spare
15 Spare
16 Logical unit supply earth
17 Spare
18 Control lever forward 2
19 Control lever reverse 2
20 Inch pedal angle sensor 2
21 Gas pedal angle sensor 2
22 Central lubrication system filling
level signal B44
23 Particle filter (optional)
24 Particle filter (optional)
25 Joystick steering sensor 1
26 Spare
27 Spare
28 Spare
29 CAN end connected to pin 43
30 24 V power supply
31 Earth supply
32 Power supply for central
lubrication system cycles
inductive switch B43
33 Power supply for central
lubrication system filling level
inductive switch B44
34 Power supply for inch pedal
angle sensor 2
35 Power supply for gas pedal
angle sensor 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
36 Power supply for joystick

activation
37 Spare
38 Spare
39 Spare
40 Spare
41 Spare
42 Spare
43 CAN low (CAN-E connected to
CAN_Res)
44 CAN low
45 Spare
46 Spare
47 Spare
48 Spare
49 Spare
50 Spare
51 Spare
52 Spare
53 Spare
54 Spare
55 Variable displacement motor
speed 2
56 Central lubrication system cycle
signal B43
57 CAN high (CAN-E connected to
CAN_Res)
58 CAN high
59 Earth for central lubrication
system cycles B43
60 Earth for central lubrication
system filling level inductive
switch B44
61 Spare
62 Earth for inch pedal angle
sensor 2
63 Earth for gas pedal angle
sensor 2
64 Spare
65 Earth for arm rest joystick
66 Spare
67 Earth for joystick steering, left
68 Spare
69 Earth for variable displacement
motor speed 2
70 Spare
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Input module 2
connector A16b.X1:
66
67
68
69
Service Manual
Electrical system
LED indication
LEDs behind the bleeder screw

1 Input module ventilation
opening
2 Green LED
After the ignition is switched on, the following conditions may be shown:
Status
Description
Green LED flashes slowly
Module ready, waiting to receive

the first message on the CAN bus
Green LED flickers/lights up
CAN bus communication active,

normal control
Red LED flickers/lights up
Error frames detected on CAN bus.

Defect on the CAN bus (e.g. wiring
error, loose contact, no terminating
resistor) Normal control may not
be possible
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Module status display
3 Orange LED
4 Red LED
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-13 o f 1 3
Electrical system
Service Manual
Addressing the input and output modules
Ventilation and bleeder opening

1 Input module ventilation opening
2 Green LED 100s display
3 Button
Addressing procedure
4 Orange LED 10s display

5 Red LED 1s display
6 5 V sensor supply
A module must be addressed when it is replaced or installed.

The input modules are delivered with the default address 45.
The address is required in order to identify CAN bus messages.
- Input module (sender)
- Output module (receiver)
Addressing is performed as follows:
Connect the module
Remove the ventilation and bleeder screw
Unplug the PWR.X connector on the main electronics (master)
Press the button 3
Switch on the ignition and keep the button pressed until the LEDs
start flashing
Note: If you release the button too quickly, the module is in download mode
for the outer core (orange flashes once, red flashes once). In this case,
switch the module off and try again.
The flashing LEDs indicate the module number (address):
- The green LED flashes to indicate the 100s of the module number
(1x = 100, 2x = 200)
- The orange LED flashes to indicate the 10s of the module number
(1x = 10, 2x = 20)
- The red LED flashes to indicate the 1s of the module number
(1x = 1, 2x = 2)
Example: 1x green, 3x orange, 10x red = 130
All three LEDs briefly flash between each repeat of the number display.
Changing the module number (address):
10.1-14 o f 1 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Service Manual
Electrical system
Press the button again to increase the module number by one.

Four numbers are available for each module; after the last one it starts with
the first one again.
Addressing the input modules:
Address
Setting after
replacement
Status function
Input module 1 A16a
45
No
Yes
Input module 2 A16b
46
Yes
Yes
Input module 3 A16c

(optional)
47
Yes
No
Component
10.1.5
Output modules (A17a, A17b, A17c)

ID no. 10046438
Technical data
See section 2.1
The output modules are located under the left cab access and are arranged
as follows:
1 Left rear section
2 Output module 3 A17c (optional)
3 Input module 3 A16c (optional)
4 Input module 1 A16a
5 Output module 2 A17b
6 Output module 1 A17a
Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Module layout
Output module
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-15 o f 1 5
Electrical system
Service Manual
1 Output module
2 Ventilation and bleeder screw
with Goretex membrane
3 Connector
4 Type plate
The output modules have the following functions:
- Converting digital input signals (CAN bus messages) from the main
electronics (master) into analogue commands.
- Controlling the consumer units via terminal equipment.
The power supply for the terminal equipment is divided as follows:
- Activation via banks, which consist of 4 terminal devices and have a
single power source (fuse).
- Direct activation from a fuse, where individual terminal devices are
powered directly by a corresponding fuse.
- Indirect activation from a fuse, where individual terminal devices are
powered by a corresponding fuse via an upstream module. This
configuration is required for switching off outputs in safety-critical states.
Output module connector assignment
1
2
3
4
5
Output module 1
connector A17a.X1:
10.1-16 o f 1 6
Internal 0 Ohm jumper

24 V power supply
Logic earth connection
Bank 1 power outputs (1.3 A)
6
7
8
9
10
11

Frequency test inputs
Earth for power outputs
Positive-switching outputs (8 A)
CAN interface

1 Bank 1 power supply (16 A)
200 mA
3 Power earth
4 Bank 1 power output for parking
brake Y10
5 Bank 1 power output for working
hydraulics lockout Y14
6 Bank 1 power output for bucket
return-to-dig Y9
7 Bank 1 power output for lift kick-
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Spare
Spare
Digital 1 power supply (8 A)
Digital 1 switching output (8 A)
central lubrication M6
38 Digital 4 power supply (8 A)
39 Digital 4 switching output (8 A)
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Output module connectors
Service Manual
Electrical system
out Y17
8 Bank 3 power output for AVG
coupling 1 Y6.1
coupling 2 Y6.2
coupling 3 Y6.3
modulation YMo1
12 Power earth
200 mA (reserve)
16 Logical unit earth
17 Power earth
18 Bank 2 power output for float
position Y18
19 Bank 2 power output for cooling
system fan Y13
20 Bank 2 power output for warning
buzzer H40
21 Bank 2 power output for swivel
restrictor Y57
22 Bank 4 power output for variable
displacement motor 1 YEP1
23 Bank 4 power output for variable
displacement motor 2 YEP2
24 Bank 4 power output for forward
travel direction Y2
25 Bank 4 power output for reverse
travel direction Y3
26 Power earth
27 Spare
29 CAN terminating resistor to
CAN_High
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Output module 2
connector A17b.X1:
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
back-up alarm H58, H59

Earth for central lubrication M6
Spare
Spare
CAN low input
CAN low output
Spare
Earth for parking brake Y10
Earth for working hydraulics
lockout Y14
Earth for return-to-dig Y9
Earth for lift kick-out Y17
Earth for AVG coupling 1 Y6.1
Earth for modulation Mo1
Earth for back-up alarm H58, H59
Spare
Spare
CAN high input
CAN high output
Spare
Earth for float position Y18
Earth for fan Y13
Earth for warning buzzer H40
Earth for swivel restrictor Y57
motor 1 YEP 1
motor 2 YEP 2
Earth for travel direction pump 1
Y2
Earth for travel direction pump 1
Y3
Spare
Spare
Spare

200 mA
3 Power earth
4 Bank 1 power output for
overspeed protection Y16
5 Bank 1 power output for option
6 Bank 1 power output for travel
pump control Y15
7 Bank 1 power output for travel
pump control Y15a (L586 only)
8 Bank 3 power output for forward
travel direction Y2a (L586 only)
9 Bank 3 power output for reverse
travel direction Y3a (L586 only)
additional equipment 1 Y11
additional equipment 2 Y12
12 Power earth
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171

reversing light
back-up alarm
40 Power earth reserve
41 Power supply for 24 V sensor
reserve
42 Power supply for 24 V sensor
reserve
43 CAN low input
44 CAN low output
46 Power earth for overspeed
protection Y16
47 Power earth for options
48 Power earth for travel pump 1
Y15
49 Power earth for travel pump 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-17 o f 1 6
Electrical system
Service Manual

200 mA (reserve)
16 Logical unit earth
17 Power earth
emergency steering relay K11
19 Bank 2 power output for fan
reversal Y50
20 Bank 2 power output for ride
control Y20
21 Bank 2 power output for float
position Y21
22 Bank 4 power output for joystick
steering, left Y51
steering, right Y52
24 Bank 4 power output for gerotor
steering (2-in-1) Y63
steering safety valve Y64
26 Power earth
27 Logical unit earth reserve
29 CAN terminating resistor to
CAN_High
30 Power supply for 24 V
frequency sensor reserve
2 pump control 1
2 transmission control
Y15a
50 Power earth for travel direction
pump 2 Y2a
51 Power earth for travel direction
pump 2 Y3a
52 Power earth for additional
equipment 1 Y11
53 Power earth for additional
equipment 2 Y12
54 Power earth for reserve back-up
alarm
55 Frequency input 1 reserve
56 Frequency input 2 reserve
57 CAN high input
58 CAN high output
60 Power earth for emergency
steering relay K11
61 Power earth for fan reversal
Y50
62 Power earth for LFD
63 Power earth for LFD
64 Power earth for joystick
steering, left Y51
65 Power earth for joystick
steering, right Y52
66 Power output for gerotor
steering (2-in-1) Y63
67 Power output for joystick
steering safety valve Y64
69 Earth for frequency input 1
reserve
70 Earth for frequency input 2
reserve
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
LED indication
LEDs behind the bleeder screw
10.1-18 o f 1 7
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Electrical system
1 Output module ventilation

opening
2 Green LED
Module status display
3 Orange LED
4 Red LED
After the ignition is switched on, the following conditions may be shown:
Status
Description
Green LED flashes slowly
Module ready, waiting to receive the

first message on the CAN bus
Green LED flickers/lights up
CAN bus communication active,

normal control
Red LED flickers/lights up
Error frames detected on CAN bus.

Defect on the CAN bus (e.g. wiring
error, loose contact, no terminating
resistor) Normal control may not be
possible
Addressing the input and output modules
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Ventilation and bleeder opening

1 Output module ventilation
opening
2 Green LED 100s display
3 Button
Addressing procedure
4 Orange LED 10s display

5 Red LED 1s display
6 5 V sensor supply
A module must be addressed when it is replaced or installed.

The output modules are delivered with the default address 21.
- Input module (sender)
- Output module (receiver)
Connect the module
Remove the ventilation and bleeder screw
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-19 o f 1 9
Electrical system
Service Manual
Unplug the PWR.X connector on the main electronics (master)

Press the button 3
Switch on the ignition and keep the button pressed until the LEDs start
flashing
Note: If you release the button too quickly, the module is in download mode
for the outer core (orange flashes once, red flashes once). In this case,
switch the module off and try again.
- The green LED flashes to indicate the 100s of the module number (1x =
100, 2x = 200)
- The orange LED flashes to indicate the 10s of the module number (1x =
10, 2x = 20)
- The red LED flashes to indicate the 1s of the module number (1x = 1, 2x
= 2)
Example: 1x green, 3x orange, 10x red = 130
All three LEDs briefly flash between each repeat of the number display.
Changing the module number (address):
Press the button again to increase the module number by one.
Four numbers are available for each module; after the last one it starts with
the first one again.
Addressing the input modules:
Address
Setting after
replacement
Status function
Output module 1 A17a
22
Yes
Yes
Output module 2 A17b
21
No
Yes
Output module 3 A17c

(optional)
23
Yes
No
Component
10.1.6
Electrical components in the rear section
Components on the rear left of the rear section

K04
B16
F01
F03
10.1-20 o f 2 0
Preglow relay
Back-up alarm (optional)
100 A main fuse
200 A emergency steering
pump fuse
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
F02 60 A preglow fuse

F07 10 A hazard warning system
fuse
F010 5 A heating flange feedback
fuse
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
Components on the rear left of the rear section
Service Manual
Electrical system
How the relay K04 works

The relay K04 controls the intake air pre-heating flange.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
The preglow system is controlled by the engine electronics A700D and

depends on the following criteria:
- Coolant temperature
- Intake air temperature
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.1-21 o f 2 1
Electrical system
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
10.1-22 o f 2 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Electrical system
Battery installation
10.2 Battery installation

The electrical system operates at 24 volts.
Design
Battery arrangement
1 Connecting cable from fuses to
consumers
2 Fuses in the rear section
3 Connecting cable from battery to
main switch
4 Connecting cable from main
switch to vehicle earth
5 Main switch
6 Earth point on machine frame

7 Connecting cable from battery
(+) to the consumers
8 Connecting cable from battery 1
(+) to battery 2 (-)
9 Batteries 1 and 2 in the left
ballast weight
10 Electrical consumers
The batteries are installed in the left ballast weight. The two batteries are
connected in series.
The battery main switch S1 is installed in the rear left of the engine compartment and disconnects the battery circuit (-) from the vehicle earth.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
The following components are powered directly by the battery.

- M1 Starter
- G3 Alternator
- A4 Voltage converter
- F01 100 A main fuse
- F02 60 A preglow fuse
- F03 200 A fuse for emergency steering pump
- F07 10 A fuse for hazard lights
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
10.2-1 o f 1
Electrical system
Service Manual
Battery installation
10.2.1
Batteries
(ID 6002886, 613203208)
Technical data
See section 2.1
Apart from the terminals, the batteries require no maintenance during

normal operation.
Battery arrangement
1 Battery
2 Back-ignition protection
3 Drip catcher
The battery has a gas escape mechanism and is equipped with back-ignition
protection and a drip catcher.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/21/02/2007
The free channels must be sealed with dummy plugs.
10.2-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
11 Transmission
11.0
Chapter contents
11
Transmission..................................................................... 11.0-1
11.0
Transmission.................................................................................11.0-1
11.1
Mechanical transmission ..............................................................11.1-1
11.2
Electronic control unit ...................................................................11.2-1

11.2.1
Main electronics (master) ...................................................11.2-1
11.2.2
Main wiring harness (including transmission) ....................11.2-4
11.2.3
Gear shifting solenoid valves .............................................11.2-5
11.2.4
Speed sensor .....................................................................11.2-6
11.3
Hydraulic control ...........................................................................11.3-1

Control valve block .............................................................11.3-3
11.3.2
Gear pump..........................................................................11.3-5
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
11.3.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30.01.2007
Transmission
11.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission
11.0 Transmission
Design
Main components of the transmission system

1 A11 control unit
2 Transmission
3 Gear pump
4 Oil cooler
The transmission system consists of the gearbox including the control valve
block, the main electronics (master), the control unit A11, the hydraulic
supply system and the oil cooler.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The gearbox is elastically mounted in the rear section of the wheel loader.
The control valve block is bolted on the gearbox from above.
The main electronics (master) are located on the rear wall of the cab behind
the driver's seat. The control unit A11 is located on the panel in the right of
the cab.
The gear pump which supplies the gearbox with control and lubrication oil is
connected to the wheel drive of the engine. The oil cooler is in the cooling
system between the cab and the engine.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Transmission
11.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission
Mechanical transmission
11.1 Mechanical transmission

Technical data
See section 2.1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Design
Cross section of the transmission (note: the drive shaft 2 with the coupling 2 is shown turned upwards to make it
easier to see)
1 Transmission housing
drive shaft
3 Coupling 2
drive shaft
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
5
6
7
8
9
10
Coupling 3
Coupling 1
Rear axle drive shaft flange
Oil strainer
Power take-off shaft
Front axle drive shaft flange
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
11
12
13
14
15
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Coupling 1 lube oil duct

Oil filter
Control valve block
11.1-1 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
The gearbox is elastically mounted in the rear section of the wheel loader and
is driven by two variable displacement motors. The motors drive the two input
shafts 2 and 4, which transfer the torque to the coupling sets 3, 5 and 6. The
hydraulically actuated couplings consist of an inside-geared coupling cage, an
outside-geared coupling hub, discs, piston, press plate and return springs.
The outside-geared steel discs and inside-geared friction discs are arranged
alternately. The outside-geared discs are connected to the coupling cage
and the inside-geared discs are connected to the coupling hub in such a way
that they cannot twist. The hub and the friction discs turn freely with the input
shafts when the coupling is not actuated.
When the travel range is shifted, oil is directed from the solenoid valve in the
control valve block 15 through the appropriate duct to the coupling valve. As
soon as the coupling valve is actuated, oil flows through the duct to the
corresponding coupling piston. The oil pressure pushes the piston and discs
against the press plate.
When the steel and friction discs are pressed together, they connect the
coupling cage and hub so that they turn together.
When the coupling is closed, power is transmitted from the oil motor to the
output shaft. The two drive shafts to the front and rear section are connected
to the flanges of the output shaft 7 and 10.
When the coupling is open, the return springs push the coupling piston back.
The oil in front of the piston escapes through the coupling valve and holes in the
coupling piston to the oil sump. The oil sump is fitted in transmission housing 1.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
A pump fitted to the engine draws the gear oil is through pipes out of the
sump. The oil strainer 8 is fitted on the intake port of the oil sump. The gear
oil is pumped back through a filter into the transmission. Some of the oil is
directed through the oil cooler. The cooled oil is pumped to the transmission
lubrication system.
11.1-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission
Basic function
Arrangement of shafts, gears and couplings in the transmission

Motor 1 drive shaft
Shaft 1 drive gear
Coupling 3
Intermediate shaft power takeoff gear
5 Motor 2 drive shaft
6 Shaft 2 drive gear
7 Coupling 2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
1
2
3
4

input
9 Coupling 1
10 Intermediate shaft drive gear
11 Intermediate shaft
input
13 Shaft 1 drive gear
14 Power take-off shaft
These are the basic functions of the 2plus2 transmission:

Increasing the input torque of the two variable displacement motors
Shifting gear without reducing tractive force
Increasing the speed range through 3 travel ranges
Distributing torque to the front and rear axles
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.1-3 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
The 3 gears
1st gear
In first gear, the couplings K1 and K2 are closed. The torques from both
variable displacement motors are used to provide maximum tractive force.
Input shaft 1
The power from motor 1 is transferred directly via the input shaft 1 to the
drive gear of the intermediate shaft 3. The closed coupling K1 transfers the
torque of the intermediate shaft 3 to the output shaft 4.
Input shaft 2
The power from motor 2 is transferred via the input shaft 2 to the coupling
K2 and the output gear of the input shaft 2. The power is then transferred via
the output gears of the intermediate shaft 3 to the output shaft 4.
The power of both motors is accumulated in the intermediate shaft 3. The
power flow is shown in the adjacent graph.
2nd gear
In 2nd gear, the coupling K1 is opened and the motor 1 pivots to 0. At the
same time, motor 2 pivots to a wider angle.
Input shaft 1
Motor 1 pivots to 0 and the coupling K1 is opened.
Input shaft 2
The power from motor 2 is transferred via the input shaft 2 to the coupling
K2 and the output gear of the input shaft 2. The power is then transferred via
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The power flow is shown in the adjacent graph.
11.1-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission
3rd gear
In 3rd gear, the coupling K3 is closed and the coupling K2 is opened. The
full torque is transferred during shifting.
Input shaft 1
The power from motor 1 is transferred via the input shaft 1 and the coupling
K3 to the output gear of the input shaft 1. The power is then transferred via
Input shaft 2
After the coupling K3 closes, motor 2 pivots to 0 and the coupling K2 is opened.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The power flow is shown in the adjacent graph.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.1-5 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
11.1-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission
Electronic control unit
11.2 Electronic control unit

11.2.1

(ID 10223177)
For a detailed description of the main electronics (master), see section 10.1.3.
Design
The main electronics (master) are attached to the rear trim of the cab under
a plastic cover and contains a flash card with the current machine software.
Basic function
The main electronics (master) is the brain of the machine control system.
The main electronics (master) controls and monitors all connected CAN or
external modules.
The application software in the main electronics (master) strictly follows the
following time cycles:
Fetch all input data from the CAN/external modules
Perform all calculations in the application software with the input data;
calculate the output data
Generate output data for connected external/CAN modules, which
convert the commands into actions (for example activating a solenoid
valve via one of the output modules)
A laptop can be connected to the master via a serial interface.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Using the SCULI software, the service engineer can make settings, perform
diagnosis and view operating data in the main electronics.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.2-1 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
Block diagram of transmission

Gas pedal
LH control lever
Input module 1
Input module 2
Display unit
Control unit
8
9
10
11
12
13
Output module 1
2plus2 gearbox
Output speed sensor
Thermostat
Motor 2 speed sensor
14
15
16
17
18
Motor 1 speed sensor

Solenoid valve Y6.1
Solenoid valve Y6.2
Solenoid valve Y6.3
Solenoid valve Y6.mo
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
11.2-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission
Selecting travel ranges

When the electrical system is turned on, travel range A1-3 is automatically
selected. The transmission remains in neutral until the parking brake is
released and the travel direction is selected. Other travel ranges can be
selected by pressing the Shift Up (1) or Shift Down (2) buttons on the
control unit A11. The selected travel range is indicated on the display.
The following travel ranges can be selected:
A2 - 3
Automatic travel range 2nd and 3rd gear
A1 - 3
Automatic travel range 1st to 3rd gear
A1 - 2
Automatic travel range 1st and 2nd gear
Fixed 2nd gear
Fixed 1st gear
Tempomat
Neutral
Gearshift strategy
The controller constantly monitors the speed signals and the pump and motor
positions, and selects the most suitable gear in the automatic travel ranges.
The travel ranges can be changed at any speed. If the speed is too high for
the new travel range, the controller slows the machine by changing the
current to the pump and the variable displacement motor(s). When the
speed is appropriate for the new travel range after hydrostatic braking, the
travel range automatically changes.
Control unit A14
Maximum speed Vmax

If the task in hand required a reduced maximum speed, you can reduce the
maximum speed by pressing the button 3.
This function is only available when travelling forward in fixed gears 1 and 2.
then reaches this speed at full throttle. If the Vmax button is pressed when
the machine is not moving, the minimum speed for the gear is stored.
1st gear approx. 4 km/h
2nd gear approx. 10 km/h
The Vmax function is deactivated when you press the Vmax button again or
change the travel range.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
If reverse travel direction is selected, the master shifts to automatic travel

range A1-3 and the Vmax function is deactivated.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.2-3 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
Kick-down
The kick-down function allows manual shifting to first gear. Kick-down
shifting is used in the following situations:
Slowing the machine down when approaching the pile. The kick-down
function hydrostatically brakes the machine, and it shifts down to 1st gear.
Before driving onto a steep slope, you can use the kick-down function to
shift to 1st gear.
When you select the travel direction, the machine drives off in 2nd gear. If
steep terrain prevents this, you can use the kick-down function to shift
straight to 1st gear.
When you press the lick-down button 2 on the LIEBHERR control lever 1,
the machine is automatically hydrostatically braked and is shifted down to
1st gear.
At high travel speeds, the machine automatically shifts to 2nd gear, and then
to 1st gear.
At low travel resistance, 1st gear remains selected for 10 seconds.
During acceleration, the transmission automatically shifts to 2nd gear.
While pushing into the pile, first gear remains selected as long as the
resistance is high.
In kick-down mode, the maximum travel speed is 10 km/h. Kick-down mode
can be deactivated early by pressing the travel direction switch 3.
11.2.2
Main wiring harness (including transmission)

Design
The main wiring harness is connected to the right side of the transmission
using a Cannon plug.
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The Cannon plug is water- and dust-tight. Five lugs around its circumference
prevent it from being plugged in incorrectly.
Plug for electrical transmission control
11.2-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission
Plug assignment
11.2.3
Pin
Colour
Function
Red
Modulation solenoid valve
Green
Coupling 2 solenoid valve
Blue
Yellow
White
Weight

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The transmission control valves are actuated by four solenoid valves. These
are installed on the left of the control valve block.
2plus2 transmission control valve block

1 Solenoid valve Y6.1

4 Solenoid valve Y6.mo
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Basic function
Once a solenoid valve is actuated, its function is triggered by applying
pressure to its associated hydraulic valve.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.2-5 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
11.2.4
Speed sensor
(ID 7009274)
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The input and output speeds of the transmission are recorded by speed
sensors and monitored by the main electronics (master).
Speed sensors on the transmission

speed sensor
2 Power take-off speed sensor

speed sensor
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The sensors generate an AC signal with a frequency proportional to the

speed and number of teeth of the corresponding gear. This signal is
recorded by the main electronics (master) and converted to the speed.
11.2-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission
Hydraulic control
11.3 Hydraulic control

Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Diagram of the hydraulic gearbox control unit

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Coupling 2
Coupling 3
Coupling 1
Lubrication oil supply
Gear pump
Filter
Hydro accumulator
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Oil cooler
Bypass valve filter
Safety valve
Cooler bypass valve
Pressure reducing valve
Modulation solenoid valve
Y6.mo
17 Coupling modulation valve 2
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
18 Coupling modulation valve 1

and 3
21 Coupling valve 3
22 Coupling valve 1
24 Coupling valve 2
P Test connection
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.3-1 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
Hydraulic control
The gear pump 7 draws up oil from the sump via a strainer. The oil sump is
fitted in the transmission housing.
The oil is pushed through the filter 8. The bypass valve 11 protects the filter
from overload. This valve opens at a differential pressure of 4.5 bar.
The hydro accumulator 9 is charged with gear oil.
Some of the oil flows through the pressure reducing valve 15 to the four
solenoid valves. The rest of the oil flows through the gear switching pressure
relief valve 12 to the gear oil cooler 10. The pressure relief valve is set to
203 bar. The pressure relief valve is adjusted using discs. The operating
pressure of the gearbox control unit is measured at the test point P.
The pressure reducing valve 15 reduces the oil pressure for actuating the
coupling valves from 20 to 9 bar.
The bypass valve 14 protects the gear oil cooler from hydraulic overload.
This opens at a differential pressure of 4 bar. Oil not used for lubricating the
couplings flows through the lubricating oil pressure limiting valve 13 to the oil
sump. The lubrication oil pressure limiting valve opens at 4 bar.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The cooled oil is pumped to the transmission lubrication system.
11.3-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Transmission
Hydraulic control
11.3.1
Control valve block
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Design
Cross section of the control valve block
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.3-3 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
Hydraulic control
1
2
3
4
5
6

Bypass valve filter
Valve piston stop
Cooler bypass valve
Pressure reducing valve
Coupling modulation valve 1
and 3
7 Coupling valve 2
8 Coupling 2 solenoid valve Y6.2
9 Modulation solenoid valve
Y6.mo
10 Canon plug
13
14
15
16
17
Coupling valve 3
Coupling valve 1
Separator plate
Separator plate
Control valve block housing
Basic function
The control valve block directs oil to the various consumers in the
transmission. Some are hydrostatically controlled, others electrohydrostatically. The oil pressure, cooling and lubrication are hydraulically
controlled. The couplings and the pressure modulation are electrohydraulically controlled.
The solenoid valves receive control impulses from the main electronics
(master). The solenoid valves open and direct the pressure oil to the valve of
the actuated coupling and control the pressure modulation.
Shifting gears
The illustration here shows the two modulation valves (the sectional view of
the control valve block only shows one modulation valve).
The modulation valve 2 for coupling 2 is held in place by the plug 1. Position 3
is the solenoid valve Y6.mo for the modulation. Component 4 is the
modulation valve for coupling 1 and 3.
Pressure modulation is required for smooth gear shifting.
When a gear is selected, oil is directed to the corresponding coupling valve.
The coupling valve is actuated and the oil flows unchecked through the
modulation valve and the coupling valve into the coupling. This is called the
rapid fill phase.
During the rapid fill phase, the coupling pads should be quickly brought into
contact, but without the coupling closing. This accelerates the shifting process.
A few milliseconds after the solenoid valve shifts a gear, the modulation valve
is energised and the oil is directed via a restrictor to the coupling. The oil flow
to the coupling is metered, and the pressure in the coupling accumulates
slowly and in a controlled manner. This is called the modulation phase.
The actuated variable displacement motor pivots to an angle of 0 with the

required speed. The variable displacement motor is then set to the correct
angle. The motor is synchronised before the torque is transferred, thus
ensuring smooth shifting.
11.3-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Shortly afterwards, the modulation valve is deactivated. The coupling

pressure has now exceeded the force of the coupling springs and the
coupling is closed.
Service Manual
Transmission
Hydraulic control
Increase in coupling pressure during gear shifting

1 Travel range preselection
2 Rapid fill phase
3 Modulation phase
4 Shifting complete
The above graph shows how the pressure changes during a gearshift. The
complete shifting operation only takes around 200 milliseconds, and can
therefore not be recorded using conventional test equipment.
11.3.2
Gear pump
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Components of the gear pump

1
2
3
4
Snap ring
Shaft seal ring
Flange
Seals
5
6
7
8
Bearing bushings
Gears
Housing
Housing cover
The gear pump is attached to the front of the engine. It is driven at a set ratio
via the spur gear transmission of the engine.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
11.3-5 o f 6
Transmission
Service Manual
Hydraulic control
Basic function
The gear pump draws up oil from the transmission. Depending on the speed,
the oil flows from the transmission control valve block.
Pressure cut-off
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
A pressure relief valve in the transmission control valve block protects the
system from excess pressure.
11.3-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
12 Axles, Drive shafts

12.0
Chapter contents
12
Axles, Drive shafts ............................................................ 12.0-1

12.1
Axles L550 - L576 2plus2 ..........................................................12.1-1
12.2
Axles L580 2plus2 .....................................................................12.2-1
12.3
Drive shafts ...................................................................................12.3-1

Front drive shaft..................................................................12.3-1
12.3.2
Rear drive shaft ..................................................................12.3-2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
12.3.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Axles, Drive shafts
12.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Axles, Drive shafts

Axles L550 - L576 2plus2
12.1 Axles L550 - L576 2plus2

Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L566 - 460 / from 14171

L556 - 454 / from 15653; L576 - 457 / from 14171
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the axle

1 Axle casing
2 Self-locking differential
3 Drive shaft flange

4 Wheel hubs
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The axle consists of the differential with the tapered gear and self-locking
differential 2, as well as the planetary drive in the wheel hub 4. The wheel hub
also contains the service brake, which is a wet disc brake. The axle casing 1
contains the tapered roller bearing for the wheel hubs.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12.1-1 o f 6
Axles, Drive shafts
Service Manual
Cross-section of the wheel hub

Retaining pin
Cover
M75x1.5 grooved nut
O-ring
Wheel flange
Brake piston return springs
Sealing ring
Brake housing
Brake piston seals
Brake piston
11 Screw for measuring wear on

the brake discs
12 Brake discs
13 Ring gear
14 Planetary gear
15 Planetary carrier
16 Sun gear shaft
17 Axle casing housing
18 Oil drain plug
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12.1-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
Service Manual
Axles, Drive shafts

Sectional view of the differential

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Half shaft
Axle shaft housing
Housing cover
Differential housing
Bevel gear
Pressure rings
Compensating tapered gear
8
9
10
11
12
13
Axle tapered gear

Compensation axle
Axle input shaft
Drive flange
Shaft seal ring
Dust protection ring
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
These are the basic functions of the axle:

Increasing and transferring the drive torque
Transferring the vertical device forces to the wheels
The gear output torque is transmitted via the drive shaft to the axle input
shaft. The torque is increased to the wheel torque by the ratio of the tapered
gear in the differential housing and that of the planetary drives in the wheel
hubs. The input speed is reduced to the wheel speed accordingly.
The vertical operating load of the machine is transmitted from the rear section
via the screwed connection to the axle casing. The axle casing transmits this
load to the wheel hubs so that the machine is supported by the wheels.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12.1-3 o f 6
Axles, Drive shafts
Service Manual

1
2
3
4
5
Axle input shaft

Crown wheel
Output shafts
Axle tapered gear
6
7
8
9
Pressure rings
Compensation axle
Disc brakes
Speed balance of the left and right wheels

When turning a corner, the left and right wheels cover different distances.
The speeds of the two wheels are then different. The correct speed for each
wheel is induced by the rolling condition.
The spreading force is generated by the transfer of the differential torque

from the two pressure rings 6 to the compensation axles 7, which are loosely
guided on diagonal surfaces. It produces a load-dependent locking torque in
the disc brakes, which is always in equal proportion to the input torque. This
ratio, expressed as a percentage, is called the locking value.
Self-locking function
The disc brakes 9 on the left and right of the axle tapered gears 5 counteract
the relative movement between the axle tapered gear 5 and the differential
housing 3 with a braking force proportional to the rotary speed. This braking
torque has a blocking action and increases the torque on the side with a firm
hold on the ground. The braking torque thus compensates for the insufficient
support from the side with poor hold.
The disc brake consists of outer discs which are mounted in the differential
housing and of non-twisting inner discs linked to the axle tapered gears.
12.1-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The axle input shaft 1 determines the average speed of the two power takeoff shafts 4 via the crown wheel 2. The crown wheel drives the differential
housing 3 and thus the four facing compensation tapered gears 8 of the
differential. These rest on the tooth faces of the adjacent axle tapered gears
5 and thus drive the output shafts 4. The compensation tapered gears 8
have a balancing function and turn about their own axes to compensate for
various wheel torques. The speed reduction of one wheel is compensated by
the increased speed of the other wheel.
Service Manual
Axles, Drive shafts

Service brake function
Sectional view of the wheel hub

1
2
3
4
5
Wheel flange
Brake housing
Brake piston
Brake piston seals
Brake piston return springs
6 Screw for measuring wear on

the brake discs
7 Brake piston guide pin
8 Brake discs
9 Ring gear
10 Planetary carrier
The service brake is a wet disc brake fitted in the wheel hubs. When
pressure oil acts on the brake piston 3 the outer and inner discs 8 press
against the limit stop of the ring gear 9. The inner discs mesh with the
planetary carrier 10 so that they cannot slip. The outer discs mesh with the
brake housing 2 and remain stationary. When the discs press together, the
wheel torque is taken up by the brake housing.
When it is not actuated, the brake piston 3 is held back by the return springs 5.
The brake discs lose contact and the drag torque is minimised.
Wheel fastening
The wheels are fastened onto the flanges of the wheel hubs by wheel nuts.
They are centred by the spherical collar nuts.
Axle lubrication
The axle has a shared oil system. This means the oil chambers in the
differential and the wheel hubs are connected. Oil drain plugs are fitted on
the wheel hubs and differential housing.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The differential and the wheel hubs are always filled and the level checked
using the filler screw on the differential housing
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12.1-5 o f 6
Axles, Drive shafts
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
12.1-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
Service Manual
Axles, Drive shafts

Axles L580 2plus2
12.2 Axles L580 2plus2

Valid for:
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the axle

1 Self-locking differential
2 Axle casing
3 Wheel hub
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The axle consists of the differential with the tapered gear and self-locking
differential 1, as well as the planetary drive in the wheel hub 3. The wheel
hub also contains the service brake, which is a wet disc brake. The axle
casing 2 contains the tapered roller bearing for the wheel hubs.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12.2-1 o f 6
Axles, Drive shafts
Service Manual
Axles L580 2plus2
Cross-section of the wheel hub

Ring gear
Planetary gear
Planetary pinion / cover
Planetary bearing
Thrust washer
6
7
8
10
Sun gear
Press plate
Hub
Double seal ring with supports
and O-rings
11 Axle
12 Axle casing
13 Seal holder
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
1
2
3
4
5
12.2-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Axles, Drive shafts

Axles L580 2plus2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Groove nut
Shims
Housing cover
Differential holder
Crown wheel
Pressure ring
L580 - 459 / from 14171
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Seal screw
Axle tapered gears
Brake discs
Central element
Bevel gear
Tapered gear seal
Grease seal
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Pressure disc
V sealing ring
Tapered gear nut
Drive flange
Seal cartridge
O-ring
Wear sleeve
12.2-3 o f 6
Axles, Drive shafts
Service Manual
Axles L580 2plus2
Basic function
These are the basic functions of the axle:
Increasing and transferring the drive torque
Transferring the vertical device forces to the wheels
The gear output torque is transmitted via the drive shaft to the axle input
shaft. The torque is increased to the wheel torque by the ratio of the tapered
gear in the differential housing and that of the planetary drives in the wheel
hubs. The input speed is reduced to the wheel speed accordingly.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The vertical operating load of the machine is transmitted from the rear section
via the screwed connection to the axle casing. The axle casing transmits this
load to the wheel hubs so that the machine is supported by the wheels.
12.2-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Axles, Drive shafts

Axles L580 2plus2
1
2
3
4
5
Axle input shaft

Crown wheel
Pressure ring
Compensation axle
6
7
8
9

Brake discs
Axle tapered gears
Bevel gear
Speed balance of the left and right wheels

When turning a corner, the left and right wheels cover different distances.
The speeds of the two wheels are then different. The correct speed for each
wheel is induced by the rolling condition.
The axle input shaft 1 determines the average speed of the two power takeoff shafts 1 via the crown wheel 3. The crown wheel drives the differential
housing 2 and thus the four facing compensation tapered gears 6 of the
differential. These rest on the tooth faces of the adjacent axle tapered gears
8 and thus drive the output shafts 1. The compensation tapered gears 6
have a balancing function and turn about their own axes to compensate for
various wheel torques. The speed reduction of one wheel is compensated by
the increased speed of the other wheel.
Self-locking function
The disc brakes 7 on the left and right of the axle tapered gears 8 counteract
the relative movement between the axle tapered gear 8 and the differential
housing 2 with a braking force proportional to the rotary speed. This braking
torque has a blocking action and increases the torque on the side with a firm
hold on the ground. The braking torque thus compensates for the insufficient
support from the side with poor hold.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The disc brake consists of outer discs which are mounted in the differential
housing and of non-twisting inner discs linked to the axle tapered gears. The
spreading force is generated by the transfer of the differential torque from
the two pressure rings 4 to the compensation axles 5, which are loosely
guided on diagonal surfaces. It produces a load-dependent locking torque in
the disc brakes, which is always in equal proportion to the input torque. This
ratio, expressed as a percentage, is called the locking value.
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12.2-5 o f 6
Axles, Drive shafts
Service Manual
Axles L580 2plus2
Service brake function
Sectional view of the wheel hub

1 Axle housing
2 Plug
3 Retainer plate / outer discs
4 Inner discs
5 Return springs
6 Brake piston
The service brake is a wet disc brake fitted in the axle casing. When
pressure oil acts on the brake piston 6 the outer discs 3 and inner discs 4
press against the retainer plate 3. The inner discs mesh with the axle and
turn along at high speed with the drive shaft. The outer discs 3 mesh with
the axle housing 1 and remain stationary. When the discs press together,
the wheel torque, reduced by the ratio of the planetary final drive, is taken up
by the axle housing.
When it is not actuated, the return springs 5 push back the brake piston 6.
The brake discs lose contact and the braking torque is minimised.
The wheels are fastened onto the flanges of the wheel hubs by wheel nuts
with rotating cups.
Axle lubrication
The axle has a shared oil system. This means the oil chambers in the
differential and the wheel hubs are connected. Oil filler and drain plugs are
fitted on the wheel hubs and differential housing.
12.2-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Wheel fastening
Service Manual
Axles, Drive shafts

Drive shafts
12.3 Drive shafts

12.3.1
Front drive shaft

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the drive shaft

1
2
3
4
Flange
Universal joint
Shaft driver
Hub liner
5
6
7
8
Connector tube
Pin driver
Universal joint
Flight ring
9 Universal joint
10 Flange
The drive shaft has one universal joint at the output of the transmission, a universal joint at the input of the front axle and a slider to compensate the length.
Function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The drive shaft transfers the torque from the transmission to the front axle.
The universal joints at either end of the drive shaft allow it to compensate the
angle between the drive and the power take-off. The angle needs to be
compensated due to the articulated steering. The universal joint and
connector tube can be displaced axially to mesh together. This compensates
the length. Tolerances in assembly and slight movements during operation
make this necessary.
Uniformity of torque transmission

On drive shafts with simple universal joints, the connector tube between the
two universal joints rotates unevenly. This is the case whenever the
universal joint has to compensate for an angle. This occurrence is prevented
by using a double cardan shaft. The connector tube turns evenly.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12.3-1 o f 6
Axles, Drive shafts
Service Manual
Drive shafts
12.3.2
Rear drive shaft

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Components of the drive shaft

1 Flange
2 Universal joint
3 Shaft driver
4 Hub liner
5 Connector tube
6 Pin driver
7 Universal joint
8 Flange
The drive shaft is equipped with two universal joints and a slider.
Function
The drive shaft transfers the torque from the transmission to the rear axle.
The universal joints at either end of the drive shaft allow it to compensate the
angle between the drive and the power take-off. The universal joint and
connector tube can be displaced axially to mesh together.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
This compensates the length. Tolerances in assembly and slight movements

during operation make this necessary.
12.3-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
13 Machine frame, Ballast

weight
13.0
Chapter contents
13
Machine frame, Ballast weight .......................................... 13.0-1

Machine frame ..............................................................................13.1-1
13.2
Articulation bearing .......................................................................13.2-1
13.3
Oscillating axle mount...................................................................13.3-1
13.4
Articulation lock.............................................................................13.4-1
13.5
Ballast weight................................................................................13.5-1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
13.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
13.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
Machine frame, Ballast weight
13.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Machine frame
13.1 Machine frame

Design
The machine frame consists of the front section and the rear section. These
are connected by the articulation bearing.
Main components of the machine frame

1 Front section
2 Rear section
3 Oscillating bearing
4 Articulation bearing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
Basic function
The machine frame transfers the forces of the lift arms to the axles. The
frame carries all the most important components of the machine, such as the
engine, cab and transmission.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
13.1-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
Machine frame
13.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Articulation bearing
13.2 Articulation bearing

Design
The articulation bearing is installed between the front and rear sections.
Location of the articulation bearing

1 Front section
2 Rear section
3 Articulation bearing
Main components of the articulation bearing
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
1
2
3
4
5
Pressure flange
Cylinder screw
Bushing
Bearing cover
Shims
6
7
8
9
10
Swivel bearing
Cone tension element
Shaft seal ring
Cylinder screw
Bearing pin
Basic function
The articulation bearing connects the front and rear sections. It allows
steering of the machine by articulating the machine frame to the left or right.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
13.2-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
Articulation bearing
13.2-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Oscillating bearing
13.3 Oscillating axle mount

Design
The oscillating axle mount is installed between the front and rear sections.
Location of the oscillating axle mount

1 Front section
2 Rear section
3 Oscillating bearing
4 Oscillating axle frame
Main components of the oscillating axle mount

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
1
2
3
4
5
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Pressure flange
Cylinder screw
Bushing
Bearing cover
Shims
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
6
7
8
9
10
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Swivel bearing
Cone tension element
Shaft seal ring
Cylinder screw
Bearing pin
13.3-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
Oscillating bearing
13.3-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Articulation lock
13.4 Articulation lock

Design
The articulation lock is fitted between the front and rear sections.
Articulation lock
1 Locking bar
2 Pin
3 Spring clip
Basic function
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
The articulation lock arrests the articulated joint of the machine. This means
the steering is blocked, for example when transporting the machine.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
13.4-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
Articulation lock
13.4-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Ballast weight
13.5 Ballast weight

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The ballast weight consist of two parts. They are bolted on the left and right
sides on the back of the rear section.
Ballast weight layout

2 Right rear section
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
1 Left rear section
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
13.5-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/26/01/2007
Ballast weight
13.5-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
14 Central lubrification system

14.0
Chapter contents
14
Central lubrification system ............................................... 14.0-1

14.1
Manual central lubrication.............................................................14.1-1
14.2
LIEBHERR automatic central lubrication system (optional) .........14.2-1

Central lubrication pump EP-1 ...........................................14.2-4
14.2.2
Progressive distributor MX-F..............................................14.2-5
14.2.3
Central lubrication pump controller EP-1 and operation ....14.2-8
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
14.2.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
14.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Central lubrification system
14.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Manual central lubrication
14.1 Manual central lubrication

Design
Lubricating rail on the front section

1 Lift arms, top left
2 Lift arms, top right
3 Tilt cylinder, top
4 Tilt cylinder, bottom

5 Right steering cylinder, base end
6 Left steering cylinder, base end
Lubricating rail on the rear section

1 Oscillating axle frame, front
2 Oscillating axle frame, rear
3 Right steering cylinder, rod end
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Basic function
The two central lubricating rails are for lubricating points which are difficult
to access.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
14.1-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Manual central lubrication
14.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

14.2 LIEBHERR automatic central

lubrication system (optional)
Design
Components of the central lubrication system

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Central lubrication pump

Rapid fill coupling
Agitator
Transparent reservoir
Level sensor connection
Grease fitting
8 Grease fitting for manual

lubrication
9 Main supply line
10 Main progressive distributor MX-F
11 Secondary progressive distributor
12 Lubricant supply lines
13 Lubrication points
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The central lubrication pump is located under the left cab access.
The distributors are arranged centrally to the respective lubrication points.
The central lubrication pump and the progressive distributors provide the
specified quantity of grease to the connected lubrication points.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
14.2-1 o f 1 0
Service Manual
Valid for:
L550 - 456 / from 16978; L556 - 454 / from 15653
Overview of lubrication points

3 Main progressive distributor
4 6x secondary
progressive distributor
5 6x secondary
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
1 Central lubrication pump

2 Inductive switch for
lubrication cycles
14.2-2 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Valid for:
Overview of lubrication points

lubrication cycles
3 Main progressive distributor

4 6x secondary
5 6x secondary
Progressive lubrication
The automatic central lubrication system is a progressive system. It
lubricates progressively, i.e. all lubricating points in succession.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The main distributor is fitted with an inductive switch, which signals the
lubrication cycles to the main electronics (master).
Overall system
The electrically powered central lubrication pump pumps the grease to the
main progressive distributor, which distributes it to the secondary progressive distributors. The secondary progressive distributors pump the grease to
the lubrication points. The main electronics (master) control the lubrications
cycles and pauses of the central lubrication pump.
Safety function
The pressure relief valve on the central lubrication pump monitors lubrication. If a lubrication point receives no grease from the distributor, the
progressive distributor is blocked. The pressure in the central lubricating
system increases. If the pressure rises above the permitted limit, grease
escapes from the pressure relief valve. During this time, there are no
impulses (lubrication cycles) for the main electronics (master).
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
14.2-3 o f 1 0
Service Manual
If the lubrication cycles are not performed in a specified time, the main
electronics (master) switch off the lubrication system. The driver is notified
by the flashing LEDs on the central lubrication button and a service code.
14.2.1
Central lubrication pump EP-1

Technical data
See section 2.1
1
2
3
4
5
6
14.2-4 o f 1 0
DC motor
Pump housing
Cam
Level sensor (inductive)
Transparent reservoir
Agitator
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
7
8
9
10
11
Strainer
Transfer piston
Check valve
Pressure ring
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Central lubrication pump EP-1
Service Manual

Pump action
A DC motor 1 continually drives the cam 3 with a pressure ring 11.
The cam raises and lowers the transfer piston 8. This provides the suction and
pumping action of the transfer piston. The built-in check valve 9 prevents the
pumped medium from being sucked back out of the main supply line.
The agitator 6 pushes the lubricant out of the transparent reservoir 5 through
a strainer 7 to the pump housing 2. This eliminates air bubbles in the grease.
Checking the grease quantity

When all three LEDs on the central lubrication button light up, there is
insufficient grease. This condition is reported by the level sensor.
The reservoir is a transparent cylinder, in which the rubber stripper on the
agitator can be seen. This allows you to check the grease level.
Filling
The reservoir can be filled via the tapered grease fitting using a standard
lubrication pump or via the rapid fill coupling using the grease gun.
Safety function
The pressure relief valve 10, which is set to 280 bar, prevents excess pressure
in the line system.
14.2.2
Progressive distributor MX-F

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The progressive distributors are manufactured with variable discs. The
advantage of this is that the distributors can be extended or reduced according
to the number of lubrication points.
The flow per stroke depends on the piston diameter. The progressive
distributor needs at least three pumping elements in order to work properly.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The distributors must always be installed horizontally.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
14.2-5 o f 1 0
Service Manual
Main progressive distributor

1 Start element
2 Middle element with actuator
piston and inductive switch for
lubrication cycles
3 Inductive switch housing
4 Middle element
lubrication cycles
6 Inductive switch LED
7 End element
Secondary progressive distributor

1 Start element (without piston)
2 Middle element with
flow engraved
3 Screw connection
4 Connecting line
5 Dummy plug
6 End element
Linkage with gears connects the elements to the distributor blocks.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
O-rings are installed as seals between the elements.
14.2-6 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Basic function
Piston positions of the progressive distributor MX-F

A - C Piston positions
I - III Pistons
1 - 6 Grease duct outlets
The progressive distributors act hydraulically and distribute the lubricant in

series to each outlet.
The lubricant flows via the entrance of the distributor through all the
distributor discs to the piston I (piston position A). The piston pushes to the
left and presses the lubricant out of the left pressure chamber of the piston
to the outlet 1 (piston position B). Pistons II and III then pump the lubricant to
the outlets 2 and 3.
After piston III moves, the lubricant flows to the left side of piston I (piston
position C). The piston I pushes to the right and presses the lubricant out of
the right pressure chamber of the piston to the outlet 4.
Pistons II and III then pump the lubricant to the outlets 5 and 6.
After piston II moves, the lubricant again flows to the right side of piston I
(piston position A) and a new cycle of the progressive distributor begins.
This function is repeated as long as lubricant is pumped to the distributor.
Malfunctions
Malfunctions can occur in the lubricant lines or inside the distributor.
Malfunctions include:
Clogged lubricant lines
Twisted bearing casings
These prevent the flow of lubricant, and thus block the distributors.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
When the distributor is blocked, lubricant flows out of the pressure relief
valve on the central lubrication pump.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
14.2-7 o f 1 0
Service Manual
14.2.3
Central lubrication pump controller EP-1 and operation

Technical data
See section 2.1
Basic function
The central lubrication pump EP-1 is regulated by the main electronics (master).
It is operated via CAN bus from the control unit to the main electronics
(master) and output module 1 A17a.
Central lubrication system control

2 Grease level sensor
3 Central lubrication button
and LEDs
4 CAN bus connections
6
7
8
9
Power supply from fuse F53

Output module 1 A17a
Input module 2 A16b
Inductive switch for lubrication cycles
power supply
If the ignition is switched off or the parking brake is engaged, the main
electronics (master) stop lubrication. The remaining cycles are stored and after
the engine is started or the parking brake released, lubrication is continued at
the point where it was interrupted.
14.2-8 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The feedback from the grease level sensor 2 and the lubrication cycle
inductive switch 9 comes via the input module 2 A16b to the main
electronics (master).
Service Manual

Non-scheduled lubrication intensity (cycle settings)

The following settings can be made with the central lubrication button:
Press briefly for less than 2 seconds: non-schedule lubrication
Hold down for more than 2 seconds: set lubrication intensity 75%,
100%, 125%
The LEDs show the following states when the ignition is switched on.
LED 1 - 75% lubrication (light-duty operation)
LED 2 - 100% lubrication (medium-duty operation)
LED 3 - 125% lubrication (heavy-duty operation)
LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 flash & service code system fault
LEDs 1 + 2 + 3 light up grease has reached minimum level
LED 1 or 2 or 3 flashes indicates lubrication intensity during operation:
75 / 100 / 125%
Adjusting the lubrication intensity

Press the central lubrication button for more than 2 seconds to switch to
setting mode.
With each further press of the button, the mode is switch up one level; after
the highest mode it returns to the first. 75% - 100% - 125% - 75%.....
Non-scheduled lubrication
Using the central lubrication system button, you can perform non-scheduled
lubrication at any time when the ignition is switched on, even when the
parking brake is engaged (with the set lubrication and cycle time).
The pump motor switches off after the set number of cycles and the set
cycle time begins.
Lubrication sequences
A Lubrication (cycles)
1 Light-duty lubrication sequence
2 Medium-duty lubrication
sequence
3 Heavy-duty lubrication sequence
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Fault in the system (cycle error)

The cycles are checked with a set time.
Each completed cycle resets this time. If there is no cycle within the set time, the
system is stopped LEDs 1, 2 and 3 flash and the service code E2017 appears.
Grease reservoir level too low

The LEDs in the central lubrication button light up if the grease supply in the
reservoir falls too low.
The all three LEDs stay on until the grease is topped up.
The driver can also check the grease level by looking at the reservoir.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
14.2-9 o f 1 0
Service Manual
Filling the reservoir

The tapered grease fitting 3 can be used to fill the reservoir.
For fast filling, the rapid filler pump 1 on coupling 2 can be used.
Fast filling with cartridge

1 Rapid filler pump
2 Quick coupling
3 Grease fitting
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Grease specifications: see the section on lubricants and fuels in the maintenance chapter.
14.2-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
15 Covering, access
15.0
Chapter contents
15
Covering, access............................................................... 15.0-1

Coverings......................................................................................15.1-1
15.2
Cab access ...................................................................................15.2-1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
15.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
15.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Covering, access
15.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Covering, access
Covering
15.1
Covering
Design
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Covering components
1 Front left and right mud guards
2 Cooler hood
3 Rear left and right mud guards
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
4 Engine hood
5 Rear section
6 Rear lower covering
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
7 Front lower covering

8 Plastic lid
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
15.1-1 o f 6
Covering, access
Service Manual
Covering
Front mud guard

1 Front mud guard
2 Front section
The two front mud guards 1 are each fastened with three bolts to the front
section 2.
1 Rear right mud guard

2 Rear section
3 Rear left mud guard
The two rear mud guards 1 and 3 are each fastened with two bolts to the
access, the rear section 2 and the ballast weight.
15.1-2 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Rear mud guard
Service Manual
Covering, access
Covering
Engine hood and rear section

1 Cooler support
2 Engine hood
3 Rear cover
4 Rear section
5 Cooler panel
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The engine hood 2 is fastened to the cooler support 1 with two screws. The
hood can be lifted up with the aid of two gas-filled springs. The rear cover 3
is fastened to the rear section of the machine 4 with four bolts.
Rear lower covering

1 Rear section
2 Cover
3 Hinge
The cover 2 is fastened to the underside of the rear section 1 with four bolts
and can be opened downward via the hinge 3.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
15.1-3 o f 6
Covering, access
Service Manual
Covering
Front lower covering

1 Cover
2 Rear section
3 Hinge
The cover 1 is fastened to the underside of the rear section 2 with four bolts
and can be opened downward via the hinge 3.
1 Cooler hood
2 Cooler support
3 Cooler panel
The cooler hood 1 is fastened with one bolt each to the cooler support 2 and
the cooler panel 3.
15.1-4 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Cooler hood
Service Manual
Covering, access
Covering
Cover
1 Plastic lid
2 Front section
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The plastic lid 1 is fastened with four bolts to the front of the front section 2.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
15.1-5 o f 6
Covering, access
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
Covering
15.1-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
Covering, access
Cab access
15.2
Cab access
The handrails on the cab access help you get in and out of the cab and
protect you from falling off.
Design
Cab access
1 Cab access
2 Tool box
3 Cab access handrail

4 Wheel box handrail
The left side of the cab access 1 is fastened to the rear section with three
bolts. The bottom rung is connected by two rubber brackets to the access. The
underside of the cab access is designed to leave space for the input and output modules, and for the electric central lubrication pump (special equipment).
A toolbox 2 is welded between the steps.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The handrails 3 are each fastened to the access and wheel box with
four screws.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
15.2-1 o f 2
Covering, access
Service Manual
Cab access
Access and exit aids

1 Wheel box handrail
2 Cab access
3 Cab access handrail
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/30/01/2007
The cab access is fastened to the rear section with three bolts. The wheel
box handrail is fastened with two bolts each to the access and rear mud
guard. The cab access handrail is fastened to cab access with two bolts.
15.2-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
16 Cab, heating, air conditioning

16.0
Chapter contents
16
Cab, heating, air conditioning............................................ 16.0-1

16.0.1
16.1
Cab, heating and air-conditioning.......................................16.0-1

Instrument panel ...........................................................................16.1-1
16.1.1
Display unit A13..................................................................16.1-1
16.1.2
Control units A11, A18 and A22 .........................................16.1-4
16.1.3
Main function control unit (CAN bus) A11 ..........................16.1-5
16.1.4
Air conditioning control unit (CAN bus) A22 .......................16.1-6
16.1.5
Option control unit (CAN bus) A19 .....................................16.1-6
16.1.6
Electrical control unit A18 ...................................................16.1-8
16.1.7
LIEBHERR control lever ...................................................16.1-11
16.2
Heating, ventilation, air conditioning.............................................16.2-1

16.2.1
Heating/air conditioning unit ...............................................16.2-2
16.2.2
Blower.................................................................................16.2-3
16.3
Air conditioning system.................................................................16.3-1

Air conditioning compressor ...............................................16.3-4
16.3.2
Condenser ..........................................................................16.3-5
16.3.3
Dryer collector unit..............................................................16.3-6
16.3.4
Pressure switch ..................................................................16.3-8
16.3.5
Evaporator ..........................................................................16.3-9
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
16.3.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Cab, heating, air conditioning
16.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

16.0.1

Design
The cab is a safety cab which has been tested and approved according to the
ROPS/FOPS specifications. It is elastically supported on the rear section.
The cab is equipped with heating, ventilation and air conditioning.
The cab can be accessed from the left side of the machine via the steps and
the door.
The right window can be used as an exit in emergencies.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
View of driver's cab

1
2
3
4
5
6
Radio speaker
Sun visor
Interior lights with switch
Interior mirror
Radio compartment
Heater/ventilation/air-conditioning outlet nozzles (9 in total)
7 Inch/brake pedal with
angle sensor
8 Steering column switch
9 Adjustable steering column with
steering wheel
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Steering column adjustment lever

Adjustable LH control lever panel
Display unit
LIEBHERR control lever
Panel adjustment pedal
Window opener lever
Control lever fitting for optional
working functions
18 Right control panel with
control units
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Socket/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Ignition switch
Adjustable arm rest
Mechanical service hours counter
Diagnostic plug
Glove compartment
Fuse box
Drivers seat
16.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
Driver's cab, outside view from right

1 Right side of cab
2 Fresh air filter
3 Heating and airconditioning housing
4 Air conditioning system

expansion valve
5 Heater water connections
6 Valve and water valve
control motors
ROPS/FOPS strength
The driver's cab complies with the ROPS/FOPS regulations.
ROPS (Roll Over Protective Structure) takes into account mechanical rigidity
in the event of the machine rolling over.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
FOPS (Falling Object Protective Structure) governs the rigidity of the cab
when object fall onto it.
16.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Instrument panel
16.1 Instrument panel

All important operating, display and control elements are arranged ergonomically on the instrument panel.
The display unit 2, which indicates the operating condition of the wheel
loader, is located in the upper field of view, slightly to the right of centre.
The LH control lever is in a separate console, which can be adjusted back
and forth using a foot pedal.
The controls are arranged in the right-hand control panel.
The fuses are on the left behind the drivers seat.
Design
Instrument panel
1 Electrical control unit A18
2 Main control unit CAN bus A11
3 Air conditioning control unit CAN
bus A22
16.1.1
4 Additional functions control unit

CAN bus (optional) A19
5 Switch for additional options
Display unit A13

The display unit A13 is on the front right A pillar.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Design
The display unit A13 consists of:
LCD indicators
Symbol fields
Segment displays
The LCD display 21 contains segment displays for:
Clock
Service codes
Engine speed
Service hours
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.1-1 o f 1 2
Service Manual
Instrument panel
The LCD display 26 contains segment displays for:

Current travel range
Symbol fields for:
Warning messages
Travel direction
Travel ranges
Segment fields for:
Fuel supply
Engine oil pressure
Coolant temperature
Travel speed
Each symbol field is either red, yellow, green or orange.
The 9-pin plug connector for communication with the electronic controller A1
(CPU) is attached to the rear.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Travel speed display P6

Emergency steering check symbol field H24
Emergency steering symbol field H8
Brake system accumulator pressure symbol field H19
Joystick steering symbol field H27
Gear oil overheating symbol field H14
Forward travel direction symbol field H3
Working hydraulics lockout symbol field H5
Reverse travel direction symbol field H9
Hydraulic oil overheating symbol field H23
Automatic travel range 2-3 symbol field H35
Fixed gear 2 symbol field H31
Fixed gear 1 symbol field H30
Tempomat T symbol field H29
Neutral position N symbol field H32
Parking brake symbol field H11
16.1-2 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19 Air filter contamination symbol field H7

20 Preglow monitor symbol field H2
21 Segment display for engine speed, time, operating
hours segment and service codes P7
22 Battery charge control symbol field H6
23 High beam symbol field H12
24 Direction indicator symbol field H10
25 Stop symbol field H36
26 Display for tractive force adjustment, current travel
range, fan reversal H37
27 Overspeed protection indicator H38
28 Fuel supply symbol field H1
29 Fuel supply display P2
30 Engine overheating and coolant level symbol field H13
31 Coolant temperature display P3
32 Engine oil pressure symbol field H4
33 Engine oil pressure display P5
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Display unit A13
Service Manual

Instrument panel
Plug assignment
Connector A13.X1
SUB-D / 9-pin male (communication with master electronics A15)

Earth
+24 V power supply
CAN bus CAN_L
CAN bus CAN_H
+5 V power supply
6
7
8
9
Earth
Unassigned
+5 V terminal 1
Indicator signal
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
1
2
3
4
5
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.1-3 o f 1 2
Service Manual
Instrument panel
16.1.2
Control units A11, A18 and A22

The control units A11, A18, A19 (optional) and A22 are fitted in the instrument
panel on the right.
Design
The controls consist of the following units:
Electric control unit A18 - controlled via digital connection
Main function control unit A11 - controlled via a CAN bus
Air conditioning control unit A22 - controlled via a CAN bus
Option control unit A19 - controlled via a CAN bus. With strip inserts to show
the various symbols.
Backlit membrane keypads with buttons (function symbol and LEDs)
1 Electric control unit A18 - controlled via

digital connection
2 Hazard warning system button S4
3 Parking light/driving light button S6
4 Flashing beacon button S9
5 Front/rear working floodlights button S8
6 Rear window heater button S55
7 Rear windshield wiper and washer system button S13
10 Main function control unit A11 - controlled via a
CAN bus
11 Parking brake button S17
12 Ride control (LFD system) button S16
13 Working hydraulics lockout button S19
14 Bucket return-to-dig button S14
15 Travel range up button S27
16 Travel range down button S28
17 Increase tractive force button S32
18 Reduce tractive force button S33
19 Engine speed, clock and service hours button S30
20 Display unit brightness control button S31
16.1-4 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Increase fan speed button S38

Temperature down button S40
Decrease fan speed button S34
Temperature up button S39
Defrost button S47
Fresh/circulated air button S44
Central lubrication system button (optional) S50
Tempomat button S29
Emergency steering button S10
Lift kick-out button S22
Float position button S18
Air conditioning control unit A22 - controlled via a
CAN bus
Blower duct selector button (footwell) S41
Blower duct selector button (head area) S43
Blower duct selector button (middle area) S42
Air conditioning ECO mode button S45
Air conditioning auto mode button S46
Spare button S??
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Control unit A11
Service Manual

Instrument panel
Basic function
The control units operate the various machine functions.
The control units are connected via CAN bus and digitally to the main
electronics (master) A15 and the relay and fuse board A4.
The control unit A18 works as soon as the main switch is turned on (terminal
30). The buttons and switches can be programmed.
The control units A11, A19 (optional) and A22 work when the ignition is turned
on (terminal 15). The control units must be set to the correct CAN bus address.
Function test
When the ignition is turned on, all the LEDs light up for the duration of the test.
If there is a fault or failure in a module (CAN bus module) the LEDs remain lit
after the test (safety-critical condition). In this case, the system cannot be
started up.
(See section 10.1.3 on the main electronics (master) A15).
16.1.3
Main function control unit (CAN bus) A11

The main function control unit A11 is connected via CAN bus to the main
electronics (master) A15.
The main function control unit A11 works as soon as the ignition is turned on
(terminal 15).
When a button is pressed, a signal is sent via CAN bus to the main electronics (master) A15.
The buttons have LEDs, which can signal the following conditions:
All three LEDs on or off button with switch function
All three LEDs only light up when the button is pressed button with
push function
The LEDs go on or off individually each time the button is pressed button
with control function
The functions of each button are described in the operating manual for each
machine: Operating the control units.
Function test
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
When the ignition is turned on, all the LEDs light up for the duration of the test.
If there is a fault or failure in a module (CAN bus module) the LEDs remain lit
after the test (safety-critical condition). In this case, the system cannot be
started up.
(See section 10.1.3 on the main electronics (master) A15).
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.1-5 o f 1 2
Service Manual
Instrument panel
Plug assignment
Connector A11/X1
Deutsch / 12-pin male (communication with main electronics (master) A15

1 +24 V power supply F71
(connected to pin 5)
2 Earth (connected to pin 6)
3 CAN bus CAN_High 1
4 CAN bus CAN_Low 1
5 +24 V power supply (connected
to pin 1)
16.1.4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Earth (connected to pin 2)

CAN bus CAN_High 2
CAN bus CAN_Low 2
Terminating resistor
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
Air conditioning control unit (CAN bus) A22

The heating and air conditioning control unit A22 is connected via CAN bus
to the main electronics (master) A15.
The air conditioning control unit A22 works as soon as the ignition is turned
on (terminal 15).
push function
Plug assignment
Deutsch / 12-pin male (electrical function control)
1
2
3
4
5
Data input F71

Earth
CAN_High 1
CAN_Low 1
+24 V power supply
(terminal 15) - F09
6 Unassigned
16.1.5
7
8
9
10
11
12
CAN_High 2
CAN_Low 2
120 terminating resistor
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
Option control unit (CAN bus) A19

The option control unit A19 is connected via CAN bus to the main electronics
(master) A15.
The option control unit A19 works as soon as the ignition is turned on
(terminal 15).
push function
16.1-6 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Connector A22/X1
Service Manual

Instrument panel
NOTE: when replacing or installing a new option control unit A19, it must
be addressed.
Plug assignment
Connector A19/X1

1
2
3
4
5
Data input F71

Earth
CAN_High 1
CAN_Low 1
+24 V power supply
(terminal 15) - F09
6 Unassigned
7
8
9
10
11
12
CAN_High 2
CAN_Low 2
Unassigned
Unassigned
Unassigned
Addressing a control unit

The control unit must be addressed after it is installed.
Connect the control unit
On the main electronics (master), unplug the PWR_X power supply
connector or remove fuses F35 and F54
Press buttons 1, 2 and 3
Switch on the ignition and keep buttons pressed until the LEDs
start flashing
The LEDs in button 1 show the 100s (1x = 100, 2x = 200)
Example: 9x LEDs in button 2, 3x LEDs in button 3 = 93
The LEDs in all three LEDs briefly flash between each repeat of the
number display.
Changing the address:
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Option control unit A19
Press button 3 once to increase the current address number by 1.

The option control unit A19 has five selectable addresses. After you reach
the highest address by pressing button 3 the control unit returns to the
lowest address.
Addressing the control units:
Address
Setting after
replacement
Status
function
Main function control

unit A11
97
No
Yes
Air conditioning control

unit A22
93
No
No
Option control unit A19
94
Yes
No
Component
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.1-7 o f 1 2
Service Manual
Instrument panel
16.1.6
Electrical control unit A18

The electric control unit A18 is digitally connected to the relay and fuse
board A4.
When a button is pressed, a digital signal is generated and the relays or
solenoid valves are actuated.
The LEDs are arranged on the buttons as shown. In the direction of travel,
LED 1 at the front, LED 2 in the middle and LED 3 at the back.
When a function is activated, the status is shown by one or more of the LEDs.
Each button has seven function (modes), which can be set as required.
Setting the button functions

The mode can be set independently for the buttons/outputs 2 to 6.
Electrical control unit A18
Activating the mode setting

To go to the mode setting function, the following conditions must be met:
The three buttons 2, 4 and 6 must be simultaneously pressed.
The ignition (terminal 15) must be turned on and the three buttons 2, 4 and 6
pressed for at least 5 seconds.
After mode setting is activated, the LEDs in the assigned buttons should
indicate the modes currently used.
When the keypad is in mode setting mode, all outputs are deactivated
(and remain so until normal mode is restored).
The following standard settings are shown (without options):
Mode
LED 1
LED 2
LED 3
4 - cannot
be changed
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Button
16.1-8 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Instrument panel
The following settings are possible:

Mode
Description
Function
available with
terminal 30
Action when
terminal 15 is
turned off
Action when
terminal 15 is
turned on
Switches the output OFF when the ignition

is turned off, always OFF when the ignition
is turned on
NO
OFF
OFF
Switches the output OFF when the ignition

is turned off, always ON when the ignition
is turned on
NO
OFF
ON
Act as normal switch to terminal 15
NO
OFF
Restore state
when terminal 15 is
turned off
Act as latching switch to terminal 30
YES
Switches output OFF when ignition is

turned off, function available with terminal
30, retains terminal 30 status when ignition
is turned on
YES
OFF
No reaction (terminal
30 state remains)

30, always ON ignition is turned on
YES
OFF
ON

30, restores switch-off state when ignition
is turned on
YES
OFF
Restore state
when terminal 15 is
turned off
No reaction (terminal No reaction (terminal

15 state remains)
30 state remains)
Press the button to switch the current mode (increase number by one,
return to lowest number after highest). The LEDs immediately indicate the
altered mode.
After a button is pressed to change the mode, the new configuration is immediately stored in the EEPROM. If no button is pressed within 30 seconds
or terminal 15 is switched off, the keypad returns to normal mode.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
The settings are indicated as follows:
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Mode
LED 1
LED 2
LED 3
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.1-9 o f 1 2
Service Manual
Instrument panel
Plug assignment
Connector A18/X1

1 +24 V power supply
(terminal 15) - F71
2 Earth
3 CAN_High 1 (not used)
4 CAN_Low 1 (not used)
5 +24 V power supply
(terminal 30) - F07
6 Digital input (flashing frequency)
Connector A18/X2
7
8
9
10
11
CAN_High 2 (not used)

CAN_Low 2 (not used)
Switching output (hazard lights)
Switching output
(flashing beacon)
12 Switching output
(windscreen wipers)

4 Switching output (low beam)
5 Switching output (front working
floodlight)
6 Switching output (rear
working floodlight)
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
1 Switching output (rear washer

pump)
2 Switching output (heated rear
window/mirror)
3 Switching output (parking light)
16.1-10 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Instrument panel
16.1.7
LIEBHERR control lever

The LIEBHERR control lever (LH control lever) contains the switch 5 for
preselecting the travel direction, the switch 2 for the kick-down function and
the buttons 3 and 4 for additional functions.
The LH control lever also controls the movements of the working attachment
via the lift and tilt cylinders.
It is connected to the main electronics (master) via input module 1 and input
module 2.
Design
Control lever with switch

1 LH control lever
2 Kick-down button
3 Additional equipment button
4 Additional equipment button

5 Travel direction switch
Basic function
When the electrical system is switched on, the automatic travel range A1-3
is selected and the travel drive is set to neutral N.
Both are indicated by the LC display (H34) and the symbol field N (H32).
The travel direction switch 5 must be moved to neutral N after the parking
brake is released before a travel direction can be preselected.
Switching travel direction

You can switch travel direction using the button 5 on the LH control lever.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
The solenoid valves for forward and reverse travel direction can only be activated after the parking brake is released.
The travel direction is shifted to neutral by closing the parking brake or
shifting the travel direction switch to neutral N (middle position).
Kick-down shifting
Briefly touch the Up button 2 to trigger the command to shift to 1st gear.
The gear can shift up 10 seconds after the kick-down button is released.
Additional function buttons (optional)

If an option is installed or retrofitted, the buttons 3 and 4 can be used to
operate it.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.1-11 o f 1 2
Service Manual
Instrument panel
Plug assignment
Connector S2
12-pin Deutsch
7 Kick-down switching signal
8 Kick-down power supply (+) F9
9 Additional equipment power
supply (+) F9
10 Additional equipment switching
signal
11 Additional equipment power
supply (+) F9
12 Additional equipment
switching signal
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
1 Power supply (+) F15

2 Reverse travel direction
constant signal
3 Reverse travel direction
switching signal
4 Forward travel direction
switching signal
5 Forward travel direction
constant signal
6 Earth
16.1-12 o f 1 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Heating, ventilation, air conditioning
16.2 Heating, ventilation, air conditioning

Technical data
See section 2.1
The driver's cab is equipped with a hot water heater and an air conditioning system.
Optionally, automatic air conditioning is available.
The intake air is filtered through three serviceable dry filter cartridges and
directed to the adjustable air flow nozzles in the cab through the heating/air
conditioning unit.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Design
Heater/air conditioner
1
2
3
4
5
Fresh air filter service cover

Heater/air conditioner covering
Fresh air filter (pre-filter)
Fresh air intake slots
Fresh air filter (fine filter)
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
6
7
8
9
Heating/air conditioning unit

Driver's cab
Circulated air filter cover
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.2-1 o f 4
Service Manual
16.2.1
Heating/air conditioning unit

The heating/air conditioning unit is housed in the right side of the cab.
Design
1 Servo motor for footwell nozzles

2 Servo motor for middle nozzles
3 Servo motor for
windscreen/head area nozzles
4 Flap control housing
5 Heat exchanger
6 Air-conditioning evaporator
16.2-2 o f 4
7 Heating/air conditioning blower

8 Heating/air conditioning control
electronics (A21)
9 Fresh/recirculated air flap
10 Fresh/recirculated air flap
servo motor
11 Water valve servo motor
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
12 Water valve
13 Head area ventilation
connection
14 Footwell ventilation connection
15 Middle ventilation connection
16 Front and side window
ventilation connection
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
Heating/air conditioning unit layout
Service Manual

How the heater works
The heating and air conditioning control electronics (A21) are connected via
CAN bus to the heating/air conditioning control unit.
The heat exchanger is supplied with hot water from the engine cooling system.
It is regulated using an electrically controlled water valve.
The water valve controls the heating power.
The intake air can be controlled using the fresh/recirculated air flap.
The airflow is regulated using the various blower speed levels on the heating/
air conditioning system.
When the air conditioning is in automatic mode, the speed levels are
automatically controlled by the heating/air conditioning control electronics.
Flap control
The driver can set the flaps manually as required, using the heating/air conditioning control unit.
When the air conditioning is in automatic mode, the flaps are automatically
controlled by the heating/air conditioning control electronics.
16.2.2
Blower
The blower is part of the heating and ventilation unit.
Design
The blower is a 6-speed radial fan for ventilation, heating and air conditioning in the cab.
Basic function
The blower sucks air (axial intake) 4 through the fresh/recirculated air
duct and blows it out of the radial outlet 5 to the evaporator and through the
heat exchanger.
The air flow is regulated by changing the blower speed.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
It is operated and regulated using the air conditioning control unit. At level 0
the blower is switched off. Level 6 is maximum air flow.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.2-3 o f 4
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30.01.2007
16.2-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

16.3 Air conditioning system

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Components of the air conditioning system

1 Expansion valve
2 Heat exchanger in the
heating/air conditioning unit
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
3 Compressor (with magnetic

coupling Y22)
4 Condenser
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
5 Pressure switch B27

6 Dryer collector unit
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.3-1 o f 1 0
Service Manual
Basic cooling function
Diagram of cooling circuit

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Magnetic coupling
Condenser
Fan
Pressure switch
Sight glass
8 Heater/air conditioning
control electronics
9 Temperature sensors
10 Condensation tray
11 Evaporator
12 Blower
13 Expansion valve
a
b
c
d
Liquid refrigerant, high pressure

Liquid/gaseous refrigerant, high pressure
Liquid/gaseous refrigerant, low pressure
Gaseous refrigerant, low pressure
The air conditioning compressor 1 draws in the refrigerant in gas form and
increases its energy level (pressure and thermal energy).
The cooled refrigerant liquefies. This change of state further reduces the
energy in it.
The refrigerant, which still has bubbles in it, passes into the dryer collector
unit 6, where it is filtered and dried, and then, with the bubbles removed,
through the rising pipe to the expansion valve 13 on the evaporator.
The liquid, pressurised refrigerant is sprayed through the expansion valve 13
into the depressurised evaporator 11.
16.3-2 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The heat thus generated is transferred to the condenser 3. The heat

dissipation lowers the energy potential.
Service Manual

This allows the refrigerant to expand. The expansion reduces the pressure
energy in the refrigerant and very quickly cools the evaporator.
The evaporator 11 is exposed to hot air from the cab and transfers the
heat to the refrigerant. This thermal exchange cools the cab air and heats
the refrigerant.
The heated refrigerant evaporates and turns to gas. This change of state
requires additional energy from the (warm) evaporator, which further
reduces the temperature.
Temperature regulation
The temperature is regulated by the cyclical activation and deactivation of
the magnetic coupling 2 of the air conditioning compressor during operation,
or by mixing hot air from the heater, as for example in defrost mode.
The frequency of switching is controlled by the temperature sensors in the
evaporator and the program in the heating/air conditioning control electronics (see the technical data).
The temperature is also regulated at the expansion valve. The pressure and
temperature are recorded at the evaporator outlet and the injection quantity
is precisely metered.
These monitoring elements prevent the evaporator from icing up.
Defrost mode
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
When the windows are misted up, the cab air must be dried. This is done by
operating the air conditioning and the heater at the same time. The cab air
can absorb more moisture when it is heated. The air flowing past the cool
evaporator releases the moisture in the form of condensation.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.3-3 o f 1 0
Service Manual
16.3.1

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Sectional view of the compressor

1
2
3
4
Intake connection
Discharge connection
Oil filler plug
Magnetic coupling
5
6
7
8
Swash plate
Piston
Outlet valve
Inlet valve
The air conditioning compressor with its magnetic coupling 4 is attached to

the engine and driven by a V-ribbed belt.
The compressor is equipped with an axial piston rotary group 6, a swash
plate 5 and flap valves.
Basic function
The refrigerant compressor acts as a pump which draws in the gaseous refrigerant from the evaporator, compresses it and pumps it to the condenser.
It is bidirectional, which means that the refrigerant compressor can be used
for both directions of rotation.
16.3-4 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Service Manual

Functions of the compressor oil

There are the main functions of the compressor oil:
Reducing friction, wear and noise
Hydrostatic transmission of force to the various components of the air
conditioning compressor
Dissipating heat
Increasing density
Lubricating the drive components (piston, shaft seal, bearing)
Magnetic coupling
The pulley runs freely on the compressor shaft and is permanently driven by
the V-ribbed belt.
The power transmission between the pulley and the compressor shaft is
controlled by a magnetic coupling 4.
This is activated by the temperature switch in the evaporator or the pressure
switch on the dryer collector unit.
By periodic activation of the compressor, the evaporator is kept at a temperature of between +1 C (uncoupling) and +4 C (coupling), this preventing
the air conditioning unit from icing up.
If the pressure rises above 24 bar or below 2 bar on the pressure side of the
compressor, it is also uncoupled.
16.3.2
Condenser
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The condenser is part of the cooling system.
Condenser with connections

1 Intake
2 Outlet
3 Retaining frame
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
4 Condenser
5 Cleaning access cover
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.3-5 o f 1 0
Service Manual
Basic function
The forced ventilation condenser directs the heat output of the refrigeration circuit to the ambient air and in the process condenses the
gaseous refrigerant.
When the air conditioning system is switched on, the cooling system fan
speed is automatically increased.
16.3.3

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
The dryer collector unit is located under the left cab access.
It is connected to the outlet of the condenser and the intake of the evaporator.
Cross section of the dryer filter

3 Filter element
4 Dryer granules
Basic function
The refrigerant, which is cooled but still has bubbles in it, passes from the
condenser to the dryer collector unit.
The circulation pressure forces the refrigerant inside through the filter element 3 and the dryer granules 4.
The bubbles are removed from the refrigerant and it passes through the
rising pipe 2 to an outlet port connected by a hose to the expansion valve of
the evaporator.
16.3-6 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
1 Sight glass with indicator beads

2 Rising pipe
Service Manual

Sight glass
Sight glass
1 White filling level bead
2 Orange moisture indicator bead
The sight glass is located in the upper third of the dryer collector unit.
The sight glass has the following purposes:
Checking when filling the system
Checking the refrigerant level during operation
Checking the moisture content of the refrigerant
Checking contamination of the refrigerant circuit
Sight glass functions
Checking when filling the system

When completely filling the system, it is necessary to top up with gaseous
refrigerant on the intake side when the system is switched on. When doing
this, watch the level indicator bead 1 in the sight glass. As soon as it floats on
the refrigerant to the top of the sight glass, stop adding refrigerant.
Checking the refrigerant level during operation
Once the system has been running for about five minutes (to allow the
refrigerant to distribute), the white level indicator bead should be near the top
of the sight glass. As the engine speed increases, the level rises slightly. The
refrigerant should flow through the sight glass with no visible bubbles during
operation. If gas bubbles appear, it is normally due to insufficient refrigerant in
the system.
Sometimes the refrigerant is not sufficiently condensed due to insufficient
heat extraction at the condenser (contamination), which can result in
bubbles in the sight glass.
Checking the moisture content of the refrigerant
There is a small orange indicator bead 2 in the sight glass. If it turns light
grey, there is too much moisture in the system.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
In this case the system must be completely drained and evacuated. The oil
in the compressor must also be replaced. The entire dryer collector unit must
be replaced too.
Checking contamination of the refrigerant circuit
A sudden change of colour in the sight glass indicates a problem in the
system. A change in colour is normally caused by overheating in the
refrigerant circuit. This is normally due to internal or external contamination.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.3-7 o f 1 0
Service Manual
16.3.4
Pressure switch
(ID 10014164)
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Dryer
1 Pressure switch
2 Dryer collector unit
The pressure switch is attached to the dryer collector unit in the air conditioning circuit.
Basic function
The pressure switch monitors the pressure in the cooling circuit. It deactivates
the magnetic coupling and therefore the compressor if the pressure is too low
or too high.
This prevents the compressor from running dry if there is too little refrigerant
(insufficient pressure).
Excess pressure may be caused by:

Too much refrigerant in the circuit
Excess temperature due to a dirty condenser or defective fan control
The filter in the dryer collector unit may be very dirty
The expansion valve may be iced up (too much moisture in the refrigerant) or
dirty (blocked).
16.3-8 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
Deactivation is also necessary when the pressure is too high. This prevents
damage to components in the system.
Service Manual

16.3.5
Evaporator
Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Evaporator with expansion valve

1 Hose fitting holder
2 Expansion valve
3 Air conditioning system

sealing rings
4 Evaporator
The evaporator is fitted in the heater/air conditioner and is part of the refrigerant circuit. The heating/air conditioning unit is housed in the right side of
the cab.
Basic function
The evaporator is a heat exchanger which cools the cab air.
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
The pressurised refrigerant, which is cooled and liquefied by the condenser,

is sprayed through the expansion valve 2 into the evaporator 4, where there
is a vacuum.
The drop in pressure allows the refrigerant to expand. The expansion causes
a great drop in the thermal energy. The refrigerant is cooled.
The thermal energy taken from the cab air via the fins on the evaporator 4
evaporates the refrigerant.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
16.3-9 o f 1 0
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/03.2006/en/hd/30/01/2007
16.3-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
17 Lift arms and quick-change

device
17.0
Chapter contents
17
Lift arms and quick-change device.................................... 17.1-1

17.1
Lift arms ........................................................................................17.1-1
17.2
Pin bearing....................................................................................17.2-1
Standard bearing ................................................................17.2-1
17.2.2
Bucket bearing....................................................................17.2-2
17.2.3
Removing the pin bearings.................................................17.2-3
17.2.4
Changing the bushings.......................................................17.2-4
17.2.5
Assembling the bucket bearing ..........................................17.2-5

Quick change device (optional) ....................................................17.3-1
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
17.3
17.2.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17.1-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
17.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Lift arms
17.1 Lift arms

Technical data
See section 2.1
Design
Main components of the Z lift arms

1 Connecting link
2 Linkage
3 Contact face for linkage
4 Bucket return-to-dig
proximity switch
5 Tilt cylinder
6 Bucket arm
7 Lift cylinder
8 Bucket stops
9 Bucket bearing
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
The lift arms are fitted on the front section of the machine. The lift arms are
designed with Z-bar kinematics. This means that the tilt cylinder, linkage and
connecting link form a Z shape. The Z shape can be seen from the right
side. Parallel load movement is not guaranteed with lift arms with Zkinematics. Two lift cylinders and a tilt cylinder are attached to the lift arms.
Z kinematics
The lift arms are bolted to the front section via the bucket arm bearings and
the cylinder bearings on the base of the cylinder. The bearing points on the lift
arms have seals to protect them against dirt and corrosion. The lift cylinders
are mounted at the piston rod end on the bucket arm and at the cylinder base
end on the front section. The tilt cylinder is mounted at the piston rod end on
the linkage and at the cylinder base end on the front section.
The mechanical bucket return-to-dig device is mounted on the tilt cylinder.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17.1-1 o f 2
Service Manual
Lift arm
Basic function
Movements of the bucket arm
The lift arms bear and move the attached equipment or implement.
Bucket arm movement

The bucket arm is raised or lowered by extending or retracting the
lift cylinders.
You can find details on this in the section on the working hydraulics.
Movements of the
working attachment
Bucket movement
The bucket is tilted in or out by extending or retracting the tilt cylinder.
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
You can find details on this in the section on the working hydraulics.
17.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Pin bearing
17.2 Pin bearing

17.2.1
Standard bearing
Design
The standard bearings on the lift arms have a pin bearing seal.
The following section describes the standard bearing sealing on the lift arms.
Main components of the standard bearing

4 Welded threaded bushing
5 Pin fastening screw
6 Pin fixing disc
7 Pin with lug

8 Bearing bushing
9 Radial seal
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
1 Bucket arm
2 Grease fitting
3 Front section
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17.2-1 o f 8
Service Manual
Pin bearing
17.2.2
Bucket bearing
Design
Sectional view of the bucket arm bearing

4 Welded threaded bushing
5 Pin fastening screw
6 Pin fixing disc
7 Pin with lug

8 Bearing bushing
9 Special radial seal
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
1 Bucket arm
2 Grease fitting
3 Bucket bearing plate
17.2-2 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Pin bearing
Basic function
The bucket base and bushings are protected from corrosive or abrasive
material by a special radial sealing ring. If this material penetrates the
bearing it can increase wear and enlarge the play. If the bearing is loose, the
friction will cause increased wear despite lubrication.
The radial seal is installed on both sides of the bushing between the bucket
arm and bearing plates. The radial seal is held in place by the bearing pin.
The steel ring is positioned parallel to the contact faces of the bucket arm
and bearing plate and prevents the lip seal ring from being damaged by the
forces acting on the bucket bearing.
Axial clearance between the bearing journals of the bucket arm and the bearing
plate ensures that the bearing moves smoothly and is perfectly sealed.
17.2.3
Removing the pin bearings

Design
Extractor hammer
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
There are many ways to remove a pin. One tried-and-tested method is to

use the extractor hammer shown above. The tool is easy to make and the
pin is not damaged when removed. The extractor hammer consists of a
round rod with an M36 thread on both ends, two machined faces for an
open-ended wrench, the hammer head and two nuts. The first nut has a
flange to prevent damage to the nuts.
Procedure
Put the machine in maintenance position 1.
Screw the round rod into the extractor thread of the pin.
Push the hammer onto the rod and tighten the nuts.
Remove the retaining screw.
Knock out the pin.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17.2-3 o f 8
Service Manual
Pin bearing
17.2.4
Welding processes
Changing the bushings

This section describes how to change the bushings on the bucket bearing.
The method for other bearings is similar.
Procedure
Put the machine in maintenance position 1.
Remove the pin as described in 17.2.3.
Start the machine and drive in reverse.
Drive the machine to a suitable place for repairs.
Slightly raise the lift arms and securely support them.
Switch off the engine and pull out the key.
Turn off the battery main switch.
To make it easier to remove the steel bucket bushings, we recommend
welding several lengthways seams around the bushing. The advantage of
this is that when the bushing cools down it becomes smaller in diameter and
thus easier to push out of the hole.
Perform the welding in accordance with the safety instructions for welding
on the machine (see the operating manual).
Attach the earth lead of the welding equipment as close as possible to
the welding position.
Weld on the inside of the bushing.
Leave a distance of 10 mm between the ends of the bushing and the welds
(see illustration).
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Let the bushing cool down after welding.
17.2-4 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Pin bearing
Pushing out the bushing using

the extraction device
You can push out all the bushings on the lift arms using the appropriate pushing tool. Position a steel washer in the bushing, flush and slightly below centre.
Use a threaded rod and a hydraulic ram to push the bushing out of the hole.
Procedure
Assemble the hydraulic ram 1, the pusher 2, the threaded rod 3 and the
pushing washer 6 (illustrated).
Pushing tool
Fix the threaded rod with a nut.
Carefully push the bushing out of the hole.
There are two ways to fit a new bushing:
Using a press
By shrinking it using liquid nitrogen
Caution
Be very careful when handling liquid nitrogen.
If using liquid nitrogen, carefully follow the safety instructions for handling it.
! Read and follow the safety instructions.
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
17.2.5
Assembling the bucket bearing

Make sure that:
The holes in the bucket are lined up with the holes in the arm
All parts to be assembled are clean
Procedure
Prepare the pin bearing seal.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17.2-5 o f 8
Service Manual
Pin bearing
Main components of the pin bearing seal
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
1 Steel ring
4 Mounting screw
2 Lip seal ring
5 O-ring
3 Protection and installation ring
Mz Assembly condition
Screw in the mounting screw 4. This moves the protection and installation
ring 3.
Using a screwdriver, push the lip seal ring 2 (see illustration Mz) into the
grooves of the protection and installation ring 3.
Grease the O-ring 5 well.
Sectional view of the bucket arm bearing

1 Bucket arm
2 Bucket bearing plates
17.2-6 o f 8
3 Pin with lug

4 Retaining pin with washer
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
5 Radial sealing rings
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Pin bearing
Grease the pins, bushings and holes.

Push in the pin until it is flush with the inside of the hole.
Push the pin bearing seal between the bearing arms of the bucket arm
and the bucket bearing plate.
Push in the pin until it is flush with the inside of the bucket arm.
Push the second pin bearing seal between the bearing arms of the
bucket arm and the bucket bearing plate.
Drive the pin completely through the bearing hole.
Remove the mounting screws from the sealing rings and free the sealing
lips by moving the mounting rings.
Push the bucket to the left or right using a crowbar.
Check that the axial clearance between the bearing journals of the bucket
arm and bucket bearing plate is 3.2 mm.
Secure the pin with the pin fixing screw 2 and washer 1.
Pin fastening
The illustration shows gaps between the pin lug 4 and the disc 1, and
between the pin lug and the bushing 3. This allows the pin to move slightly,
preventing it from jamming in the fixed bearing (steel to steel).
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Caution
Dirt, water and other corrosive substances may wear or corrode the bearing
pin, surfaces or hole.
Wear and corrosion will irreparably damage the bearing.
! Before you install the pin bearing seal, check the maximum axial
clearance!
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17.2-7 o f 8
Service Manual
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Pin bearing
17.2-8 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Quick change device (optional)
17.3 Quick change device (optional)

Technical data
See section 2.1
The quick-change device is fitted to the lift arms of the machine. It is used for
quickly changing the various attachments on the lift arms.
The different versions are operated differently. You can find detailed operating instructions in the operating manual.
Design
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Main components of the quick-change device

1 Hydraulic quick-change device
2 Grease fitting
3 Left locking pin
4 Hydraulic lines
5 Hydraulic cylinder
6 Right locking pin
7 Mechanical indicator
8 Cover
The quick change device also has brackets for attaching and holding the
working attachment.
The hydraulic lines 4 lead to the hydraulic cylinder 5 via bulkhead fittings.
The hydraulic cylinder and the locking pins are fitted in a bracket and
protected from dust and damage by a cover 8.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
17.3-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 02/10.2006/en/nk/01/02/2007
Quick change device (optional)
17.3-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
18 Equipment and accessories

18.0
Chapter contents
18
Equipment and accessories .............................................. 18.0-1

18.1
Loading bucket .............................................................................18.1-1
18.2
Forklift ...........................................................................................18.2-1
18.3
Connection sizes L550 / L556 ...................................................18.3-1

18.3.1
Buckets - direct attachment................................................18.3-2
18.3.2
Buckets - quick-change device...........................................18.3-3
18.3.3
Dimensions - Z kinematics, direct attachment ...................18.3-4
18.4
Connection sizes L566 / L576 / L580 ........................................18.4-1

Buckets - direct attachment................................................18.4-2
18.4.2
Buckets - quick-change device...........................................18.4-3
18.4.3
Dimensions - Z kinematics, direct attachment ...................18.4-4
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
18.4.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
18.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
18.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Bucket
18.1 Loading bucket

Technical data
See section 2.1
The loading bucket is one of many different attachments that can be fitted to
the lift arms.
The bucket is normally fitted directly to the lift arms. If the lift arms are fitted
with an optional quick change device, the bucket is attached to that.
The following section describes the loading bucket with teeth.
Design
The bottom cutting edge varies according to the application.
The various designs include:
Welded tooth holder with plug-in teeth
Four-section, reversible undercut blade
Bucket with teeth

1 Tooth
2 Tooth holder
3 Bottom cutting edge

4 Locking pin
The tooth 1 is plugged into the holder 2 and secured with a crosswise
locking pin 4.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
The tooth holder 2 is welded to the bottom cutting edge 3.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
18.1-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
Bucket
18.1-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Forklift
18.2 Forklift
Technical data
See section 2.1
The forklift is one of many different attachments that can be fitted to the
lift arms.
The forklift is mounted either directly on the lift arms or onto the optional
quick change device.
The following section describes the forklift with adjustable prongs.
Design
The forklift consists of the fork carrier and adjustable fork prongs.
Forklift
1 Fork carrier
2 Fork prongs
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
The fork prongs 2 are attached to the fork carrier 1 and are secured against
slipping with the fork lock on the upper fork hook.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
18.2-1 o f 2
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
Forklift
18.2-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Connection sizes
18.3 Connection sizes L550 / L556

General information:
The connection sizes provide information when fitting equipment not supplied
by Liebherr.
This is defined as any equipment not bought from Liebherr.
Note that all genuine Liebherr equipment is optimally designed for used with
the machines.
This means that equipment not supplied by Liebherr can impair the operation
of the wheel loader and the machine cannot be guaranteed to work in the
best manner.
Also, equipment not supplied by Liebherr which is poorly or inadequately
designed may damage the machine. Liebherr accepts no liability for damage
caused by equipment which it does not supply.
When fitting attachments, check that the stability described in EN 474
is maintained.
Furthermore, the maximum axle loads and total weight of the machine (see
the type plate) may not be exceeded.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
Equipment not manufactured according to the Liebherr connection sizes

must be inspected and approved by the specialist department at Liebherr.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
18.3-1 o f 4
Service Manual
Connection sizes
Buckets - direct attachment
This drawing may not be copied, reproduced or made accessible to third

parties without our permission. Violation of this will lead to claims for
compensation and, if deliberate, is punishable by law.
All information in this drawing must be kept confidential.
18.3-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
18.3.1
Service Manual

Connection sizes
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
18.3.2
Buckets - quick-change device

L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
18.3-3 o f 4
Service Manual
Connection sizes
Dimensions - Z kinematics, direct attachment

18.3-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
18.3.3
Service Manual

Attachment handbook
18.4 Connection sizes L566 / L576 / L580

General information:
The connection sizes provide information when fitting equipment not supplied
by Liebherr.
This is defined as any equipment not bought from Liebherr.
Note that all genuine Liebherr equipment is optimally designed for used with
the machines.
This means that equipment not supplied by Liebherr can impair the operation
of the wheel loader and the machine cannot be guaranteed to work in the
best manner.
Also, equipment not supplied by Liebherr which is poorly or inadequately
designed may damage the machine. Liebherr accepts no liability for damage
caused by equipment which it does not supply.
When fitting attachments, check that the stability described in EN 474
is maintained.
Furthermore, the maximum axle loads and total weight of the machine (see
the type plate) may not be exceeded.
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
Equipment not manufactured according to the Liebherr connection sizes

must be inspected and approved by the specialist department at Liebherr.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
18.4-1 o f 4
Service Manual
Cab access
Buckets - direct attachment

18.4-2 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
18.4.1
Service Manual

Attachment handbook
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
18.4.2
Buckets - quick-change device

L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
18.4-3 o f 4
Service Manual
Cab access
Dimensions - Z kinematics, direct attachment

18.4-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/nk/06/02/2007
18.4.3
19 Service Codes, Diagnose

Chapter contents
19
Service Codes, Diagnose ................................................... 19.0-1

19.0
Malfunctions...................................................................................19.0-1
Service codes indicated on the display unit (A13) .................19.0-1
19.0.2
Audible and visual warning signals.......................................19.0-2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
19.0.1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-1 o f 2
Service Codes, Diagnose
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Malfunctions
19.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Malfunctions
19.0 Malfunctions
Warning and error messages
Various faults are indicated by the corresponding symbol fields (visually) or
by display instruments on the instrument panel.
Some warning functions are accompanied by audible warning signals.
Finding and eliminating errors and malfunctions
Faults can often be traced back to incorrect operation or servicing of
the machine.
Therefore, carefully read the appropriate section of the operating
manual each time a fault occurs.
Analyse the cause of the fault and correct it immediately.
19.0.1
Service codes indicated on the display unit (A13)

The main electronics (master) monitor many of the machines functions. It
monitors for short circuits, cable rupture, external voltage and incorrect input and
output signals. In addition, the main electronics (master) continuously check the
program sequence and communication with the display unit.
Display unit
Service code display
STOP indicator
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
If a fault occurs while you are setting up or operating the machine, it is shown on
the display unit and stored in the error memory.
Error indicator
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-1 o f 2
Service Manual
Malfunctions
Service code display

The service codes are classed in the following groups:
CRITICAL:
This is a fault which only concerns the main electronics
(master).
ERROR:
This is a fault in the various electrical components or wiring.
ERROR Motor This is a fault in the various electrical components or wiring.
WARNING:
This is information on the condition of the power supply,
CAN bus or diesel engine.
The following must be taken into account:
The service codes CRITICAL and ERROR are shown in segment field 1
of the display unit and stored in the service code memory.
The service codes ERROR Motor and WARNING are not shown in the
display unit but are stored in the service code memory.
A warning tone accompanies all service codes (CRITICAL and ERROR)
Effects of a fault
Every malfunction has a defined effect. This is specified in the Effect column of
the service code table.
If errors occur which can damage the machine, the entire machine is shut down.
Neutral travel direction is automatically selected and the machine coasts to a
halt.
Make a note of the service code, as it may disappear from the segment field of
the display unit when the ignition is switched off.
Analyse and rectify the fault.
List of abbreviations
LFD
LH-ECU
PWM
RAM
REF
sec
t
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
Ubat
V
Liebherr ride control system

Liebherr engine control unit (A700D)
Pulse width modulated outputs (proportional solenoid)
Memory
Reference (comparison)
Seconds
Fault time; how long a fault must be active to trigger a
service code
Battery power supply (terminal 30)
Volts
19.0-2 o f 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Malfunctions
CRITICAL
This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone
Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
The entire control system
Turn the ignition off and on
C1002 has been shut down due to
again; if the problem persists,
a critical error.
System fault
contact the manufacturer.
a critical error.
System fault
a critical error.
System fault
a critical error.
System fault
C100E has been shut down due to
System fault
a critical error.
a critical error.
System fault
C101C has been shut down due to
a critical error.
System fault
C101F has been shut down due to
System fault
a critical error.
Copy software (see label) onto
a critical error.
Invalid boot card (CF1)
the card again
the card again
a critical error.
a critical error.
the card again
C104A has been shut down due to
the card again
a critical error.
C104B has been shut down due to
the card again
a critical error.
a critical error.
the card again
C104D has been shut down due to
the card again
a critical error.
the card again
a critical error.
the card again
a critical error.
the card again
a critical error.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-3 o f 3
Service Manual
CRITICAL
Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
the card again
a critical error.
the card again
a critical error.
the card again
a critical error.
a critical error.
the card again
the card again
a critical error.
the card again
a critical error.
the card again
a critical error.
the card again
a critical error.
a critical error.
the card again
the card again
a critical error.
the card again
a critical error.
a critical error.
the card again
the card again
a critical error.
a critical error.
the card again
the card again
a critical error.
the card again
a critical error.
a critical error.
the card again
the card again
a critical error.
the card again
a critical error.
19.0-4 o f 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
Malfunctions
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Malfunctions
CRITICAL
Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
the card again
a critical error.
the card again
a critical error.
the card again
a critical error.
a critical error.
the card again
the card again
a critical error.
the card again
a critical error.
the card again
a critical error.
Check that the CAN modules and
software board have the right ID
Invalid CAN module type
a critical error.
numbers
Two CAN modules with the same
module number but different serial
numbers have been detected on a
C200E The entire control system
has been shut down due to CAN bus; CAN module production
a critical error.
Replace the CAN module
error
Check the power supply to the
CAN module F35, check the
C200F
has been shut down due to An essential CAN module has not
CAN wiring; then replace the
a critical error.
reported on the CAN bus
CAN module
System fault
a critical error.
Check the CAN bus connection,
C2011 has been shut down due to None of the modules on a CAN line check the power supply to the
a critical error.
have reported on the CAN bus
modules
C2012 has been shut down due to None of the modules on a CAN line check the power supply to the
have reported on the CAN bus
a critical error.
modules
a critical error.
System fault
a critical error.
System fault
System fault
a critical error.
a critical error.
System fault
a critical error.
System fault
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-5 o f 5
Service Manual
CRITICAL
Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
System fault
a critical error.
C202B has been shut down due to Data has been received on the CAN software board have the right ID
bus from an undefined CAN module numbers
a critical error.
System fault
a critical error.
Check the power supply to the
CAN modules F24, F38, F43,
C202D
has been shut down due to An essential CAN module has failed F71, check the CAN wiring; then
a critical error.
on the CAN bus
replace the CAN module
C2033 has been shut down due to Data has been received on the CAN software board have the right ID
bus from an undefined CAN module numbers
a critical error.
a critical error.
System fault
System fault
a critical error.
a critical error.
System fault
C203E has been shut down due to All the modules on a CAN line have check the power supply to the
failed during operation.
a critical error.
modules
System fault
a critical error.
An attempt was made to reactivate a
C2043 has been shut down due to CAN module during a timeout; this is
a critical error.
not permitted
Turn the ignition off and on again
C205A
has been shut down due to A critical error in a CAN module
a critical error.
caused the system to shut down.
according to the error stack.
C205C
has been shut down due to A critical error in a CAN module
a critical error.
a critical error.
Error downloading to a CAN module contact the manufacturer.
a critical error.
a critical error.
a critical error.
a critical error.
19.0-6 o f 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
Malfunctions
Service Manual
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Malfunctions
CRITICAL
Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
C2065 has been shut down due to A CAN download file could not be
found on the boot card.
the card again
a critical error.
a critical error.
a critical error.
C3003 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system
a critical error.
error
error
a critical error.
error
a critical error.
C3009
has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system
replace the main electronics
a critical error.
error
(master).
C300A has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system
a critical error.
error
C300B
a critical error.
error
(master).
a critical error.
error
error
a critical error.
error
a critical error.
error
a critical error.
error
a critical error.
C3023
a critical error.
error
(master).
C3024
a critical error.
error
(master).
error
a critical error.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-7 o f 7
Service Manual
Malfunctions
CA024

has been shut down due to
a critical error.

Invalid correction values found in the again; the correction check sum
memory.
is automatically corrected.
CA029

a critical error.

memory.
CA02A

a critical error.

memory.
CA02B

a critical error.

memory.
CA02C

a critical error.

memory.
19.0-8 o f 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
CRITICAL
Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
error
a critical error.
C302A has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system
error
a critical error.
C302B has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system
error
a critical error.
C302C has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system
a critical error.
error
C302D has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system
error
a critical error.
error
a critical error.
CA002 has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system
error
a critical error.
error
a critical error.
a critical error.
error
error
a critical error.
CA00A has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system
error
a critical error.
CA00B has been shut down due to Main electronics (master) system
a critical error.
error
again; the correction file is
CA01E has been shut down due to Invalid correction file found on the
boot card
a critical error.
generated correctly.
Service Manual

Malfunctions
CRITICAL
Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
CA047
CA048

a critical error.
a critical error.
Invalid correction check sum

Invalid retain value check sum

a critical error.
A critical error in a CAN module

C205C

a critical error.
A critical error in a CAN module

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
C205A

again; the correction check sum
again; the retain variable check
sum is automatically corrected.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-9 o f 9
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E2003
E2013
E2016
E2017
E2018
E201A
E201B
E201C
E201D
E201E
E201F
E2020
Emergency steering: Emergency

steering pump pressure switch
check closed without check
No emergency steering
function
The output of the travel
pump is reduced
Brake system accumulator
pressure symbol field H19
lights up, after 2 minutes
warning beep sounds
constantly, travel direction
cannot be selected
All three LEDs on the
control unit switch light up,
does not work
Check emergency steering

pressure switch B3 and wiring
pressure switch B3 and wiring
pressure switch B3a and wiring
Hydraulic oil temperature:

temperature above 95 C

pressure switch B3a and wiring
Clean cooling system, check fan
pressure (fan speed), hydraulic
oil temperature switch B8 (at 20
C - 1112 )
Brake accumulator pressure:

pressure too low
Check accumulator pressure

switch B19 (switching point 120
bar), wiring, accumulator charge
valve, gear pump
Central lubrication system: electrical

fault at output (cable rupture) of
grease line fault
Gyrator steering (2 in 1 steering):
Signal at output does not
correspond to the activation (fault
current)
Gyrator steering (2-in-1)

deactivated
Enabled options have no
Incorrect options enabled
function
Variable displacement
motor 1 (YEP1), variable
(YEP2), forward travel
direction (Y2), reverse travel
Output module 1 / bank 4: no power
direction (Y3) have no
function
supply. Wiring or fuse defective
No travel range function
Remedy
Check distributor, grease lines

and lubrication points
Check the wiring

Enable correct options
Check fuse F59 or wiring


No joystick gyrator steering

(2-in-1) function
Travel direction and
additional equipment do not
work (driving only possible
at reduced speed)
Parking brake, working
hydraulics lockout, bucket
return-to-dig and lift kick-out
do not work


Float position and cooling

system fan do not work

19.0-10 o f 1 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone

Service
Effect
Cause
code
E2000 No emergency steering
is closed even though the engine is
function
not running
E2001 No emergency steering
does not switch after the engine
function
starts
Emergency steering: Check failed
(B3a emergency steering pump
E2002
check pressure switch did not
function
switch)
Service Manual

Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
code
Emergency steering, fan
E2022 reversal, ride control and
float position do not work
Output module 1: return voltage
measured at an output (bank 3)
E2023
although it is not activated - wiring or
module 1 defective
E2024
No travel direction function
Output module 1, check wiring to

gearbox Y6.1, Y6.2, Y6.3, YMo1
or check output module 1
variable displacement pump Y2,
measured at control output (bank 4) Y3 or wiring to variable
although it is not activated - wiring or displacement motors YEP1,
module 1 defective
YEP2 or output module 1
variable displacement pump Y2a,
measured at an output (bank 3)
Y3a or wiring to additional
although it is not activated - wiring or equipment Y11, Y12 or output
module 2 defective
module 2
E2025
No travel direction and

additional equipment
function
E2026

(2-in-1) function

module 2 or output module 1
E2048
The ride control system

does not work
Enable correct option

Joystick steering pressure switch
B201; check wiring or input
module 3
Ride control: set activation and
deactivation speeds correctly
(SCULI)
E2049
Automatic lighting shutdown Faulty activation of power supply

does not work
terminal 15 (optional) - fault current
Check output module 3, wiring or

relay K246
E204A
Functions activated via

terminal 15 do not work
Faulty activation of power supply

terminal 15 (optional) - interruption
Check output module 3, wiring or

relay K246
E204B
All three LEDs on the

control unit switch light up
STOP symbol field H24
flashes, no emergency
steering function available
STOP symbol field H8
flashes, no emergency
steering function available
Brake system accumulator
pressure symbol field H19
lights up, condition of the
service brake cannot be
detected
Central lubrication system: filling

level low
E2046
E2047
E3000
E3001
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Remedy
E3002
E3003
E3004
E3005
Output module 1: fault current/short

circuit at output 33 (bank 4,) - wiring
or module 2 defective
Back-up alarm: options incorrectly
No back-up alarm function
enabled, more than one option
available
enabled per output
Joystick steering: pressure switch
check failed; fault in pressure switch
No joystick steering function or wiring
Ride control: speed limits incorrectly
set
Emergency steering pump check

pressure switch: shorted to earth
Emergency steering pump pressure
switch: shorted to earth
Brake accumulator pressure switch:

shorted to earth
No float position available
Bucket float position pressure

None
Inching angle sensor: channel 1

over current >20 am
None

undercurrent <4 am
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Top up central lubrication system

Emergency steering pump check
pressure switch B3a; check
wiring or input module 1
pressure switch B3; check wiring
or input module 1
Brake accumulator pressure
switch B19; check wiring or input
module 1
module 1
Inching angle sensor R1; check
Inching angle sensor R1, power
supply F44, check wiring or input
module 1
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-11 o f 1 1
Service Manual
Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
code
Remedy
E3006
Travel direction cannot be

selected
Travel direction switch: forwards

signal channel 1 shorted to earth
Travel direction switch S2a;

check wiring or input module 1
E3007

selected
Travel direction switch: reverse


E3009
E300B
E300C
E300D
E300E
E300F
E3010
E3011
No lift kick-out available
Lift kick-out inductive switch: shorted Lift kick-out inductive switch B17;
to earth
Bucket return-to-dig inductive
Bucket return-to-dig inductive
switch B15; check wiring or input
module 1
No bucket return-to-dig
available
Fuel level cannot be
detected - minimum filling
level displayed
Fuel level cannot be
detected - minimum filling
level displayed
Fuel level sensor: under voltage <1

V
Fuel level sensor B25; check

Fuel level sensor: over voltage >4 V
Fuel level sensor B25; check

Engine cannot be started
Ignition switch: Start signal T. 50a

shorted to earth
Ignition switch S1; check wiring

or input module 1
None
Gas pedal angle sensor: channel 1

over current >20 am
undercurrent <4 am
Gas pedal angle sensor R5;

Gas pedal angle sensor R5,
power supply F44, check wiring
or input module 1
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor:

shorted to earth

B8; check wiring or input module
1
None
Hydraulic oil overheating
symbol field H23 lights up,
fan running at high speed,
driving only possible in fixed
gear 1 or 2
Hydraulic oil overheating
symbol field H23 lights up,
fan running at high speed,
driving only possible in fixed
gear 1 or 2
E3012
Continued driving is only

possible in fixed gear 2

speed sensor: shorted to earth
E3013


speed sensor: Interruption

B8; check wiring or input module
1
speed sensor B2; check wiring or
input module 1
speed sensor B2; check wiring or
input module 1
E3014

Power take-off speed sensor:

shorted to earth
Power take-off speed sensor B1;

E3015

Power take-off speed sensor:

Interruption
No driving light available
Driving light response: shorted to

earth
No high beam available
High beam response: shorted to

earth
Power take-off speed sensor B1;

Steering column switch S3, relay
K3; check wiring or input module
2
Steering column switch S3, relay
K3a; check wiring or input
module 2
None
Indicator signal response: input of

input module shorted to earth
No ride control function
Ride control pressure switch:

shorted to earth
E3016
E3017
E3018
E3019
19.0-12 o f 1 2
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor:

Interruption
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Input module 2, check fault in

wiring H15, H16, H17, H18
module 1
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
E3008
Service Manual

Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
code
E301A

selected
Travel direction switch: forwards


E301B

selected
Travel direction switch: reverse


None

over current >20 am
None

undercurrent <4 am
Inching angle sensor R1; check

Inching angle sensor R1, check
power supply F45, wiring or input
module 2
None

over current >20 am
None

undercurrent (<4 am)
Gas pedal angle sensor R5;

Gas pedal angle sensor R5,
check power supply F45, wiring
or input module 2
Kick-down function not

available
Kick-down button: shorted to earth
Kick-down button S2b; check

No option 1 function
Option 1 button: shorted to earth
Option 1 button S2c; check

No option 2 function
Option 2 button: shorted to earth
Option 2 button S2d; check

No warning buzzer function
Warning buzzer: shorted to earth
Warning buzzer H40; check

E3024
No central lubrication
function
Central lubrication system (filling

level) inductive switch: shorted to
earth
Central lubrication system (filling

level) inductive switch B44;
E3025
Particle filter cannot be

monitored
Particle filter: input 1 electrical fault

(shorted to earth)
Input module 2, fault in sensor,

check data logger wiring
E3026
Particle filter cannot be

monitored
Particle filter input 2 electrical fault

(shorted to earth)
E3027
Joystick steering not

available
E3028

available
E301C
E301D
E301E
E301F
E3020
E3021
E3022
E3023
E3029
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Remedy
E302A
Driving is not possible

E302B

not available
E302C

not available
E302D

available
E302E

available
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

check data logger wiring
Joystick steering signal encoder
Joystick steering signal encoder: left B202; check wiring or input
signal over current >20 am
module 2
Joystick steering signal encoder: left B202; check wiring or input
signal undercurrent <4 am
module 2
speed sensor B2a; check wiring
speed sensor: shorted to earth
or input module 2
speed sensor B2a; check wiring
speed sensor: Interruption
or input module 2
Central lubrication system (cycles)
(cycles) inductive switch B43;
inductive switch: shorted to earth
Central lubrication system (cycles)
(cycles) inductive switch B43;
inductive switch: Interruption
Joystick steering signal encoder:
right signal over current >20 am
module 3
Joystick steering signal encoder:
right signal undercurrent <4 am
module 3
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-13 o f 1 3
Service Manual
Malfunctions
Remedy
E302F

available
Joystick steering pressure switch:

shorted to earth
Joystick steering pressure switch

B201a; check wiring or input
module 3
E3031
Basket mode - emergency

off function not available
Basket mode emergency off: input

signal 1 shorted to earth

check wiring
E3032
Basket mode - emergency

off function not available
Basket mode function not
available
Basket mode function not
available
Basket mode emergency off: input

signal 2 shorted to earth
Basket mode: input signal 1 shorted
to earth
Basket mode: input signal 2 shorted
to earth

check wiring
check wiring
check wiring
E3035

available
Joystick steering button: shorted to

earth
E3036

available
Joystick steering inductive switch:

shorted to earth
Joystick steering button S202;

Joystick steering inductive switch
module 3
E3037

possible in fixed gear 1 or 2
None
Gear oil temperature sensor: fault

current
Pump: pressure sensor shorted to
earth
Pump: pressure sensor power
interruption
Check output module 1 or wiring

Check pressure sensor BXXX
and wiring
Check pressure sensor BXXX
and wiring
Option not available
LH control lever: capacitive grip

sensor shorted to earth
Check grip sensor, wiring or

control unit
LH control lever: power interruption

to capacitive proximity switch
Check proximity switch, wiring or

control unit
LH control lever: direction

potentiometer 1 shorted to earth
Check potentiometer, wiring or

control unit

potentiometer 1 power interrupted

control unit

potentiometer 2 shorted to earth

control unit

potentiometer 2 power interrupted

control unit
LH control lever: button 1 shorted to

supply voltage
Check button 1, wiring or control

unit
LH control lever: implausible status

button signal

unit
LH control lever: button 2 shorted to

supply voltage
Travel pump: pressure sensor
detected

unit
E3033
E3034
E3039
E303A
E304F
E3050
E3051
E3052
E3053
E3054
E3055
E3056
E3059
E305A
E4000
E4001
E4002
None

None
Parking brake symbol field
H11 flashes, parking brake
cannot be released, driving
not possible
Parking brake symbol field
H11 flashes, parking brake
cannot be released, driving
not possible
Parking brake: short circuit at output

Y10; check wiring or output
module 1
Parking brake: interruption at output

module 1
Working hydraulics lockout

cannot be lifted
Working hydraulics lockout: short

circuit at output

solenoid valve Y14; check wiring
19.0-14 o f 1 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
None
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Service
Effect
Cause
code
Service Manual

Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
code
Remedy
or output module 1
E4003

cannot be lifted
Working hydraulics lockout:

interruption at output
E4004
No bucket return-to-dig
available
Bucket return-to-dig: short circuit at

output
No lift kick-out available
Lift kick-out: short circuit at output
No float position available
Float position: short circuit at output
Fan turns at full speed
Fan: short circuit at output

Fan: interruption at output

Fan: fault current at output
Fan: the measured return current at
output does not match the output
current
E4006
E4008
E400A
E400B
E400C
E400D
E400E
E4010
E4011
E4012
E4013
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
E4014
E4015
E4016
E4017
E4018

No warning buzzer function
Possible gearbox damage,
coupling damage during
longer trips
Possible gearbox damage,
coupling damage during
longer trips
Automatic range A2-3
activated (1st gear blocked),
kick-down not possible
activated (1st gear blocked),
kick-down not possible
Fixed gear 1 is activated
and variable displacement
motor 1 is set to a wide
angle to prevent overspeed
or automatic range A1-2
or automatic range A1-2
Sudden shifting
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Warning buzzer: short circuit at

output
Swivel angle restriction: short circuit
at output
Swivel angle restriction: interruption
at output

or output module 1
valve Y9; check wiring or output
module 1
Lift kick-out solenoid valve Y17;
check wiring or output module 1
Float position solenoid valve
module 1
Fan motor proportional valve
module 1
module 1, check power supply
F48
Check wiring or output module 1
module 1
Warning buzzer H40; check
wiring or output module 1
Swivel angle restriction solenoid
module 1
Swivel angle restriction solenoid
module 1
Coupling 1: interruption at output
Coupling 1 solenoid valve Y6.1;

or output module 1
Coupling 2: short circuit at output


or output module 1


Modulation: short circuit at output
Modulation solenoid valve Y6.4;

L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-15 o f 1 4
Service Manual
Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
code
E401A
E401B
Modulation solenoid valve Y6.4;

Fixed gear 2 activated, kick- Variable displacement motor 1: short proportional valve YEP1; check
down not possible
circuit at output
solenoid valve YEP1; check
Fixed gear 2 activated, kick- Variable displacement motor 1:
power supply F59, wiring or
down not possible
output module 1
Sudden shifting
Modulation: interruption at output
E401C
Fixed gear 2 activated, kick- Variable displacement motor 1: fault

down not possible
current at output
E401D
Fixed gear 2 activated, kickdown not possible

E401E
E401F
E4020
E4021
E4022
E4023
E4024
E4025
Only reverse travel possible

Only reverse travel possible
Only forward travel possible
Only forward travel possible
E4026
No rear axle brake available

at overspeed
E4027
No rear axle brake available

at overspeed
E4028
Quick change device not

available
E402A
19.0-16 o f 1 6
Variable displacement motor 1: the

measured return current at output
does not match the output current

proportional valve YEP1; check

Variable displacement motor 2: short proportional valve YEP2; check
circuit at output
solenoid valve YEP2; check
Variable displacement motor 2:
power supply F59, wiring or
output module 1
Variable displacement motor 2: fault
current at output

Variable displacement motor 2: the


Forward travel direction (pump 1):
short circuit at output
module 1
module 1
Reverse travel direction (pump 1):
module 1
module 1
Overspeed protection solenoid
Overspeed protection: short circuit
at output
module 2
Overspeed protection solenoid
Overspeed protection: interruption at valve Y16; check wiring or output
output
module 2
Quick-change device solenoid
Quick-change device: short circuit at valve Y53; check wiring or output
output
module 2
Control pressure proportional
Control pressure (pump 1): short
circuit at output
module 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
E4019
Remedy
Service Manual

Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
code
Control pressure (pump 1):


module 2
Control pressure (pump 1): fault

current at output
Control pressure (pump 1): the

Control pressure (pump 2): short

circuit at output
Control pressure (pump 2):


module 2
valve Y15a; check wiring or
output module 2
output module 2
Control pressure (pump 2): fault

current at output
Control pressure (pump 2): the

E4032
available
Emergency steering: short circuit at

output
E4033
available
Emergency steering: interruption at

output

output module 2
K11; check wiring or output
module 2
K11; check wiring or output
module 2
No fan reversal available
Fan reversal: short circuit at output
Fan reversal solenoid valve Y50;

No fan reversal available
Fan reversal: interruption at output
Fan reversal solenoid valve Y50;

No ride control available
Ride control: short circuit at output
Ride control solenoid valve Y20;

No ride control available
Ride control: interruption at output
E4038
No ride control and float

position available
Float position / ride control: short

circuit at output
E4039
No ride control and float

position available
Float position / ride control:

E403A

Only reverse travel possible short circuit at output
E403B

Only reverse travel possible interruption at output
E403C

Only forward travel possible short circuit at output
E403D

Only forward travel possible interruption at output
E403E
Additional equipment 1
cannot be activated
E402B
E402C
E402D
E402E
E402F
E4030
E4031
E4034
E4035
E4036
E4037
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Remedy
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Additional equipment 1: short circuit

at output
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Ride control solenoid valve Y20;

Float position / ride control
or output module 2
Float position / ride control
or output module 2
valve Y2a; check wiring or output
module 2
module 2
module 2
module 2
Additional equipment 1 solenoid
module 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-17 o f 1 7
Service Manual
Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
code
Remedy

(2-in-1) function
Travel direction and
additional equipment do not
work (driving only possible
at reduced speed)
Additional equipment 2 solenoid

module 2
Joystick steering left proportional
Joystick steering, left: short circuit at valve Y51; check wiring or output
output
module 2
Joystick steering right
Joystick steering, right: short circuit proportional valve Y52; check
at output
Gyrator steering solenoid valve
Gyrator steering (2-in-1): short circuit Y63; check wiring or output
at output
module 2
Gyrator steering solenoid valve
Gyrator steering (2-in-1): interruption Y63; check wiring or output
at output
module 2
Output module 1 pin 33, check
measured at control output bank 4
although it is not activated - wiring or wiring to module 2 or output
module 2 defective
module 2
although it is not activated - wiring or wiring to module 2 or output
module 2 defective
module 2
E404C
No central lubrication
function
Output module 1: Central lubrication

system: fault current/short circuit wiring or module 1 defective

central lubrication system M6 or
output module 1
E404E
No flashing back-up alarm

function

lamps H58, H59 or output
module 1
No travel direction function
Output module 1: Flashing back-up

alarm: fault current/short circuit wiring or module 1 defective
although it is not activated - wiring or
module 1 defective

wiring to module 1 or output
module 1
Output module 2: Control output

bank 3 : fault current/short circuit wiring or module 1 defective

wiring to module 1 or output
module 1
E4054
Reversing light does not

work
Reversing light,: short circuit
Output module 2, fault in

consumer E1, E5 or check wiring
E4056
Back-up alarm does not

work
Back-up alarm: short circuit
E4058
Comfort control does not

work
Comfort control fault at output (over

current / short circuit)
E405A
Option output: electrical

fault at output
Electrical fault in consumer or wiring

- option does not work
E405B
No joystick steering
available
Joystick steering safety shutdown:

E405C
available

E405D
available
Joystick steering, left: undercurrent

at output
E4040
cannot be activated
E4042
available
E4044
available
E4046
No Gyrator steering (2-in-1)

available
E4047
No Gyrator steering (2-in-1)

available
E404A
E4050
E4052
19.0-18 o f 1 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS

consumer B16 or check wiring
consumer Y11, Y12 or check
wiring
Check consumer or wiring
Joystick steering safety
shutdown solenoid valve Y64;
Joystick steering safety
shutdown solenoid valve Y64;
module 2
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
E4048
Additional equipment 2: short circuit

at output
Service Manual

Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
code
E405E
E405F
E4060
available
E4061
available
available
E4062
E4076
E4077
E4078
E4079
E407A
E407B
E407C
E407D
E407E
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
available
available
E407F
E4080
E4081
E4082
E4083

L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Remedy

Joystick steering, left: over current at valve Y51; check wiring or output
output
module 2
Joystick steering, left: discrepancy at
output
Check output module 2
Joystick steering, right: undercurrent proportional valve Y52; check
at output
Joystick steering, right: over current proportional valve Y52; check
at output
Joystick steering, right: discrepancy
Output module 2
at output
Direction 1 output signal (3rd control
circuit) - electrical fault at output
(undercurrent)
Check wiring and consumers
(over current)
(deviation)
(short circuit)
(undercurrent)
(over current)
(deviation)
(short circuit)
Direction 1 output signal (4th control
(undercurrent)
(over current)
(deviation)
(short circuit)
(undercurrent)
(over current)
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-19 o f 1 9
Service Manual
Malfunctions
Remedy

E4086
cannot be activated
Additional equipment 3: electrical

fault at output (surge/short circuit)
Check solenoid valve Y11a or

wiring
E4087
cannot be activated
Additional equipment 4: electrical

fault at output (surge/short circuit)
Check solenoid valve Y12a or

wiring
Travel slow or impossible

synchronisation complete
Engine speed cannot be

changed, driving not
possible
Gas pedal angle sensor: different

values from sensors 1 and 2
Synchronise variable
displacement motors again
Gas pedal angle sensor R5:
check redundant signals
(maximum current difference
10%), check power supply F44,
F45
Inching angle sensor R1: check
redundant signals (maximum
current difference 10%), check
power supply F45
pressure (fan speed), gear oil
temperature switch B14
(switching point 120 C), oil level
E5022
E5026
E5027
E5028
No inching function
available
Speed limited to 20 km/h,
driving only possible in 1st
or 2nd gear
E5029
No immediate reaction
E502A
E502B
E502C
E5034
Driving only possible in 1st

gear
No kick-down function
available
No inching function
available
Engine damage
E5035
Travel direction selection

cannot be clearly detected
E5036
The motor retains the old

value
E5037

value
E5038

value
19.0-20 o f 2 0
Inching angle sensor: different

values from sensors 1 and 2
Gear oil temperature sensor
triggered: gear oil temperature
above 120 C, oil level too high or
temperature switch defective
Rear axle brake fault: rear axle
brake activated for longer than 3
seconds at a time or for more than
16 % intermittently
Transfer gear speed sensor,
implausible signal: power take-off
speed does not match variable
displacement motor speed
(monitoring only in 1st gear)
Kick-down button is pressed longer
than 10 sacs. (or jammed) after
ignition or pressed longer than 2
minutes (or jammed) in normal
operation
Inching angle sensor constantly less
than 100 % for longer than 2
minutes (inch pedal dirty)
Check rear axle brake solenoid

valve Y16 for faults
Transfer gear speed sensor B1;
check wiring, coupling 1 or 2 or
switching pressure
Check kick-down button
Clean the inch pedal so that it

moves properly
Check engine oil pressure, fault
Engine oil pressure too low: Fault in in pressure sensor B701 or
pressure sensor or wiring
wiring
Travel direction switch S2a,
Travel direction switch: invalid
check power supply F15 or wiring
switching condition
Adjust variable adjustment motor
1 control range (loosen adjusting
balance 1 maximum current too low screw)
1 control range (tighten adjusting
balance 1 maximum current too high screw)
balance 1 minimum current too high screw)
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Service
Effect
Cause
code
E4084
(deviation)
E4085
(short circuit)
Service Manual

Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
code
E5039

balance 1 minimum current too low
E5042
available
E5043
available
Joystick steering: redundant input

signals outside tolerance
Joystick steering: safety shutdown
due to excessive discrepancies in
joystick signals
E503B
E503C
E503D
E503E
E503F
E5040
E5041
E5054
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

screw)
value
balance 2 maximum current too low screw)
value
balance 2 maximum current too high screw)
value
balance 2 minimum current too high screw)
value
balance 2 minimum current too low
screw)
Driving only possible in fixed Difference between variable
Check coupling 1, check wiring
gear 1, kick-down not
displacement motor speed 1 and
and speed sensors B1, B2
possible
take-off speed in 1st gear
Driving only possible in fixed
gear 1, variable
displacement motor 1 only
controls from 50 - 100 %,
Difference between variable
variable displacement motor displacement motor speed 2 and
and speed sensors B1, B2a
2 is at 0, coupling 2 is open take-off speed in 1st gear
Driving only possible in fixed
gear 1, variable
displacement motor 1 only
controls from 50 - 100 %,
variable displacement motor displacement motor speed 2 and
and speed sensors B1, B2a
2 is at 0, coupling 2 is open take-off speed in 2nd gear
deactivated (3rd gear
displacement motor speed 1 and
blocked)
take-off speed in 3rd gear
and speed sensors B1, B2
value
E503A
E5055
E5056
E6000
E6001
E6002
Remedy
Option still available

Coolant temperature symbol
field (H13) flashes, STOP
symbol field lights up,
continuous warning buzzer
sounds
Warning buzzer sounds
intermittently, engine has
reduced power
intermittently, engine has
reduced power
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Input module 2, synchronise

tolerance, check sensor signals
Input module 2, synchronise
tolerance, check sensor signals
LH control lever: potentiometer

outside tolerance range
LH control lever: function
deactivated due to excessive
potentiometer discrepancy
Check wiring, replace

potentiometer
LH control lever: potentiometer

power supply too low
Check module, wiring or

potentiometer
Check wiring and potentiometer

speed, coolant temperature
Coolant temperature above 100 C
sensor B708, thermostat in
engine
for more than 3 seconds
Charge air temperature above 75 C speed, charge air temperature
for more than 3 seconds
sensor B707
Fuel temperature above 75 C for
speed, fuel temperature sensor
more than 10 seconds
B709
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-21 o f 2 1
Service Manual
Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
code
E6003 intermittently, engine has
reduced power
Water in fuel pre-filter
Engine oil pressure symbol
field (H4) lights up, STOP
E6004 symbol field (H36) lights up,
after 10 sec.
Engine oil pressure too low
E6008
Air filter contamination

Air filter contamination: vacuum
symbol field (H7) lights up
switch switched
Coolant temperature symbol
field (H13) and STOP
symbol field light up,
Coolant level too low
sounds
E600B
Risk of damage to the

engine
Engine overspeed: too high while

driving downhill > 2500 rpm
E600C
Calculation error depends

on the fault
Always given for an additional

service code
E600D
E600E
E600F
Engine shuts down

Engine not running
smoothly
Engine shuts down
E6010
Engine has reduced power
E6011
E6012
E6016
E6017
EA005
EA006
EA007
Engine has reduced power
Check coolant level, check

coolant level sensor B13, check
power supply F36
Brake machine while driving
downhill
Depends on the fault. - (see
additional code in the error
memory)
Emergency engine shutdown: speed

sensors 1 and 2 defective
Check speed sensor B711, B712
Faulty injector (pump element
Check injector (pump element
solenoid)
solenoid), wiring
Check
engine control unit, check
Engine electronics detected internal
wiring,
check power supply F36
error
Power reduction can be triggered
by: coolant temperature, charge
air temperature, fuel
temperature, altitude
Engine power reduction active
(atmospheric pressure)
Engine altitude power reduction
active (from 2250 m above sea
level)
None
Always given for an additional
service code
memory)

on the fault
Charge control symbol field
(H6) lights up, parking brake
Alternator not supplying power
cannot be released
Calculation error, engine module
sent internal error code. - This is
shown in the display unit instead of
on the fault
the engine service code
CAN bus: display unit timeout ,
hardware defective, fault in CAN
No display unit function
wiring
CAN bus: air conditioning controller
Air conditioning controller
timeout, hardware defective, fault in
does not work
CAN wiring
CAN bus: output module 3 timeout,
Output module 3 does not
hardware defective, error in CAN
work
wiring
19.0-22 o f 2 2
Drain water from fuel pre-filter,

check pre-filter water detector
B710
Check oil level, engine oil
pressure (2 bar at 1000 rpm, 3
bar at 2100 rpm), pressure relief
valve, engine oil pressure sensor
B701, wiring
Replace/clean air filter, check air
filter contamination vacuum
switch B4, wiring
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
Check alternator G3 or wiring

memory)
Check display unit A13 power
supply F11 or CAN wiring
Check air conditioning controller
A21 power supply F19, F19a or
CAN wiring
Check output module 3 (A17c) or
CAN wiring
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
E6006
Remedy
Service Manual

Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

Service
Effect
Cause
code
CAN bus: input module 3 timeout,
EA008 Input module 3 does not
hardware defective, error in CAN
work
wiring
CAN bus: air conditioning control
EA010 Air conditioning control unit unit timeout, hardware defective,
does not work
fault in CAN wiring
CAN bus: option control unit timeout,
EA011 Option control unit does not hardware defective, fault in CAN
work
wiring
EA020

on the fault
EA021

on the fault
EA023

on the fault
EA024

on the fault
EA025

on the fault
EA026

on the fault
EA027

on the fault
EA028

on the fault
EA029

on the fault
EA02A

on the fault
EA02B
Calculation error depending on the fault
EA02C
Calculation error depending on the fault
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Remedy
Check input module 3 (A16c) or
CAN wiring
Check air conditioning control
unit A22 power supply F9or CAN
wiring
Check option control unit A19 or

CAN wiring
Calculation error, option input
module 1 sent an internal error code memory)
Calculation error, option output
module 1 sent an internal error code memory)
Calculation error, option keypad
module sent an internal error code
memory)
Calculation error, main keypad
memory)
Calculation error, display unit
memory)
Calculation error, output module 2
sent an internal error code
memory)
Calculation error, output module 1
memory)
Calculation error, input module 2
memory)
Calculation error, input module 1
memory)
Calculation error, master unit
memory)
Depends on the fault. - Check
power soppy F36 (see additional
CAN module calculation error
code in the error memory)
General calculation error
memory)
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-23 o f 2 3
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4976C
No direct effect
CAN communication was

resynchronised
CAN driver problem in ECU
Check the ECU A700D engine

control unit
E4976D
No direct effect
CAN communication timeout


control unit
E49638
Construction machine CAN timeout

Emergency operation: engine when requesting global process
running at lower idle speed
CAN bus connection problem or
master unit A15 defective
Check cables, plugs, master
E49639

Emergency operation: engine receiving total output data
E4963A

Emergency operation: engine while sending messages
E4963B
Construction machine CAN

Emergency operation: engine passive error
E4963C
Construction machine CAN bus off

Emergency operation: engine
E4969C
CAN AMET timeout while requesting

Emergency operation: engine global process
E4969D
CAN AMET timeout receiving total

Emergency operation: engine output data
E4969E
CAN AMET timeout while sending

Emergency operation: engine messages
E4969F
CAN AMET passive error

E496A0
CAN AMET bus off

E49764
No direct effect
CAN communication status CAN A

cannot connect at 125kB

control unit
E49765
No direct effect


control unit
19.0-24 o f 2 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
ERROR Motor This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Service Manual

Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
E49766
No direct effect


control unit
E49767
No direct effect

cannot connect at 1MB

control unit
E49768
No direct effect
CAN communication status CAN B


control unit
E49769
No direct effect


control unit
E4976A
No direct effect


control unit
E4976B
No direct effect

cannot connect at 1MB

control unit
CAN communication could not

detect actual CAN A baud rate

control unit
Master unit A15
Input module 1
Output module 1
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
E4976E
No direct effect
E4976F
No direct effect
CAN communication could not

detect actual CAN B baud rate

control unit
Master unit A15
Input module 1
Output module 1
E497C8
Engine cannot be started, or

engine shut down
Internal error stack overflow

Internal engine control unit error
Turn the ignition off and on again;

if the problem persists, replace the
ECU A700D engine control unit.
E497C9

engine shut down
Internal error exception


E497CA

engine shut down
Internal error program test


E497CB

engine shut down
Internal error RAM test


E497CC
No direct effect

Internal error error memory overflow if the problem persists, replace the
E497CD
No direct effect
Internal error computing time test
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-25 o f 2 5
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E497CE
The error that occurred

cannot be displayed
Internal error error index too high

E4982C

engine shut down
Error accessing EEPROM


E4982D

engine shut down
Parameter memory check sum fault


E4982E

engine shut down
Invalid parameter memory in

EEPROM

E4982F
No direct effect
ECU page check sum fault


E49830
No direct effect
NMI page check sum fault


E49831
No direct effect
Work data page check sum fault


E49832
No direct effect
Load collective check sum fault


E49833
No direct effect
Load collective structure value has

changed

E49834
No direct effect
EEPROM does not have enough

space for the load collective

E49835
No direct effect
Permanent data check sum fault

E49890

engine shut down
Supply voltage too low (<9V)
Check the on-board circuit

(battery, alternator, wiring,
connectors)
E49891

engine shut down
Supply voltage too high (>33V)
Communication only possible
with diagnostic tools

connectors)
E49892
Engine shutdown
Digital output shorted to supply
Communication only possible voltage
Defective line or component
Check the wiring and ECU A700D

engine control unit
If the problem cannot be rectified:
Replace the ECU A700D engine
control unit
19.0-26 o f 2 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Service Manual

Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
E49893
E49894

engine shut down
E49895
Engine shutdown
12V reference fault: voltage too low
Communication only possible (<10V)

connectors) with reference to PS1
E49896
Engine shutdown
12V reference fault: voltage too high
Communication only possible (>14V)

E499BD
Power curve internally

restricted
Offset on full-load curve

New data record or replace the

ECU A700D engine control unit
E499BF
Injector class 3 is used as a

replacement
Incorrect pump code (pump code is

wrong on at least one element)
Check and modify pump code
E49B4C
Higher speed is used
Speed recording error

Check the ECU A700D wiring to
Maximum speed difference between
the speed sensor and check the
transmission and odometer is too high speed sensor
No direct effect
Insufficient alternator voltage when

engine is not running
Defective wiring from engine control
unit to alternator, defective alternator
or broken V belt
Check the wiring from the ECU

A700D engine control unit to the
alternator and check the ECU
A700D engine control unit
No direct effect
Excess alternator voltage when

engine is not running
or broken V belt

No direct effect
Insufficient alternator voltage when

engine is running
or broken V belt

No direct effect
Excess alternator voltage when

engine is running
or broken V belt

No direct effect
Alternator voltage insufficiently

different to supply voltage
or broken V belt

E49BB0
E49BB1
E49BB2
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Check the wiring and ECU A700D

engine control unit
If the problem cannot be rectified:
control unit
Error releasing power outputs

Engine shutdown
Power outputs cannot be activated or
All digital outputs switched off
deactivated
E49BB3
E49BB4
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
Error on PS1
Engine control unit supply voltage
PS1 defective
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-27 o f 2 7
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E49BB5
No direct effect
Alternator voltage excessively different

to supply voltage
or broken V belt
E49ED0
External exhaust gas

recirculation 1 not activated
Exhaust gas recirculation fault

Short circuit to earth or cable rupture
Output and feedback values do
not match
Check the wiring harness,

connectors, EGR valve, ECU
E49ED1


Shorted to supply voltage
not match

E49ED2


Hardware fault
Transistor status does not match
feedback value

control unit


Negative control deviation
Target less than actual value,
controlled PWM goes
towards minimum



Positive control deviation
Target greater than actual value,
controlled PWM goes
towards maximum



Current too high (switched off)
current higher than permitted
minimum value although
not energised
Threshold violation when switched off



Current too low (activated state)
current less than permitted
minimum value
Threshold violation

E49ED7


Current too high (activated state)
maximum value
Threshold violation

E49EDB


EGR open without activation
Open status is read even
without activation

E49EDC


EGR closed without activation
Closed status is read even
without activation

E49ED3
E49ED4
E49ED5
E49ED6
19.0-28 o f 2 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS

L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Service Manual

Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Air flap not activated
Air flap fault

not match

connectors, air flap, ECU A700D
engine control unit
Air flap fault

not match

engine control unit
Air flap fault

Hardware fault
feedback value

control unit
Air flap fault

controlled PWM goes
towards minimum

engine control unit
Air flap fault

controlled PWM goes
towards maximum

engine control unit
Air flap fault

not energised

engine control unit
Air flap fault

minimum value
Threshold violation

engine control unit
E49F3B
Air flap fault

maximum value
Threshold violation

engine control unit
E4A060
Starter fault

connectors, starter, ECU A700D
engine control unit
E4A061
Starter fault

connectors, starter, ECU A700D
engine control unit
E4A18C
Preglow and afterglow

phases fail
Heating flange 1 fault

not match

connectors, heating flange/glow
plug unit, external relay, ECU
E49F34
E49F35
E49F36
E49F37
E49F38
E49F39
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
E49F3A
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-29 o f 2 9
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4A18D

phases fail

not match

E4A18E

phases fail

Hardware fault
feedback status

control unit

phases fail

controlled PWM goes
towards minimum


phases fail

controlled PWM goes
towards maximum


phases fail

not energised


phases fail

minimum value
Threshold violation


phases fail

maximum value
Threshold violation


phases fail

No voltage in heating element
A low level is read despite activation
the external relay has not switched
correctly

E4A198

phases fail

Voltage in heating element
A high level is read despite no
activation the external relay has not
switched correctly

E4A1F0

phases fail

not match

E4A18F
E4A190
E4A191
E4A192
E4A193
E4A197
19.0-30 o f 3 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Service Manual

Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
E4A1F1

phases fail

not match

E4A1F2

phases fail

Hardware fault
feedback status

control unit

phases fail

controlled PWM goes
towards minimum


phases fail

controlled PWM goes
towards maximum


phases fail

not energised


phases fail

minimum value
Threshold violation


phases fail

maximum value
Threshold violation


phases fail

No voltage in heating element
A low level is read despite activation
the external relay has not
switched correctly


phases fail

Voltage in heating element
A high level is read despite no
activation the external relay has not
switched correctly

Afterglow phase failure
Turbocharger fault
not match

connectors, turbocharger solenoid
valve, ECU A700D engine control
unit
E4A1F3
E4A1F4
E4A1F5
E4A1F6
E4A1F7
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
E4A1FB
E4A1FC
E4A254
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-31 o f 3 1
Service Manual
Malfunctions
Turbocharger fault
not match

unit
Turbocharger fault
Hardware fault
feedback status

control unit
Turbocharger fault
controlled PWM goes
towards minimum

unit
Turbocharger fault
controlled PWM goes
towards maximum

unit
Turbocharger fault
not energised

unit
Turbocharger fault
minimum value
Threshold violation

unit
E4A25B
Turbocharger fault
maximum value
Threshold violation

unit
E4A2B8
Turbocharger fault
Turbocharger is not activated
not match

unit
E4A2B9
Turbocharger fault
not match

unit
E4A2BA
Turbocharger fault
Hardware fault
feedback status

control unit
E4A2BB
Turbocharger fault
Turbocharger is not activated Target less than actual value,
controlled PWM goes
towards minimum

unit
E4A255
E4A256
E4A257
E4A258
E4A259
E4A25A
19.0-32 o f 3 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Service Manual

Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
E4A2BC
Turbocharger fault
Turbocharger is not activated Target greater than actual value,
controlled PWM goes
towards maximum

unit
E4A2BD
Turbocharger fault
minimum value although not
energised

unit
E4A2BE
Turbocharger fault
Turbocharger is not activated current less than permitted minimum
value
Threshold violation

unit
E4A2BF
Turbocharger fault
Turbocharger is not activated current higher than permitted
maximum value
Threshold violation

unit
E4A31C


Output and feedback values do not
match

E4A31D


match

E4A31E


Hardware fault
feedback value

control unit


controlled PWM goes towards
minimum



controlled PWM goes towards
maximum



minimum value although not
energised

LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
E4A31F
E4A320
E4A321
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-33 o f 3 3
Service Manual
Malfunctions


current less than permitted minimum
value
Threshold violation

E4A323


maximum value
Threshold violation

E4A327


EGR open without activation
"Open" status is read even without
activation

E4A328


EGR closed without activation
Closed status is read even without
activation

No direct effect
Engine speed output fault

match

connectors, connected module
E4A705
No direct effect
Engine speed output fault

match

connectors, connected module
E4A768
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault
Incorrect current measurement or
cable rupture

connectors, solenoid valve, ECU
E4A769
No direct effect

Cylinder A1 fault
Excess low side current (earth switch)
E4A76A
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault
Excess high side current (positive
switch)

E4A76B
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault
Excess high side current on free
wheel cylinder

E4A76C
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault
No flight time measured

control unit
E4A76D
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault
Flight time too short

E4A76E
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault
Flight time too long

E4A76F
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault
No rise time measured

control unit
E4A322
E4A704
19.0-34 o f 3 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Service Manual

Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
E4A770
No direct effect
Cylinder A1 fault
Rise time too long

E4A7CC
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault
cable rupture

E4A7CD
No direct effect

Cylinder A2 fault
E4A7CE
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault
switch)

E4A7CF
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault
wheel cylinder

E4A7D0
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault

control unit
E4A7D1
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault

E4A7D2
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault

E4A7D3
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault

control unit
E4A7D4
No direct effect
Cylinder A2 fault
Rise time too long

E4A830
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault
cable rupture

E4A831
No direct effect

Cylinder A3 fault
E4A832
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault
switch)

E4A833
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault
wheel cylinder

E4A834
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault

control unit
E4A835
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault

E4A836
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault

L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-35 o f 3 5
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4A837
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault

control unit
E4A838
No direct effect
Cylinder A3 fault
Rise time too long

E4A894
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault
cable rupture

E4A895
No direct effect

Cylinder A4 fault
E4A896
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault
switch)

E4A897
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault
wheel cylinder

E4A898
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault

control unit
E4A899
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault

E4A89A
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault

E4A89B
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault

control unit
E4A89C
No direct effect
Cylinder A4 fault
Rise time too long

E4AA88
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault
cable rupture

E4AA89
No direct effect

Cylinder B1 fault
E4AA8A
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault
switch)

E4AA8B
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault
wheel cylinder

E4AA8C
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault

control unit
E4AA8D
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault

19.0-36 o f 3 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Service Manual

Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
E4AA8E
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault

E4AA8F
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault

control unit
E4AA90
No direct effect
Cylinder B1 fault
Rise time too long

E4AAEC No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault
cable rupture

E4AAED No direct effect

Cylinder B2 fault
E4AAEE No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault
switch)

E4AAEF
No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault
wheel cylinder

E4AAF0
No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault

control unit
E4AAF1
No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault

E4AAF2
No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault

E4AAF3
No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault

control unit
E4AAF4
No direct effect
Cylinder B2 fault
Rise time too long

E4AB50
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault
cable rupture

E4AB51
No direct effect

Cylinder B3 fault
E4AB52
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault
switch)

E4AB53
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault
wheel cylinder

E4AB54
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault

control unit
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-37 o f 3 7
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4AB55
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault

E4AB56
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault

E4AB57
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault

control unit
E4AB58
No direct effect
Cylinder B3 fault
Rise time too long

E4ABB4
No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault
cable rupture

E4ABB5
No direct effect

Cylinder B4 fault
E4ABB6
No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault
switch)

E4ABB7
No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault
wheel cylinder

E4ABB8
No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault

control unit
E4ABB9
No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault

E4ABBA No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault

E4ABBB No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault

control unit
E4ABBC No direct effect
Cylinder B4 fault
Rise time too long

E4AED4
Engine shutdown
Injection system fault

Cylinder fault
More than the permitted number of
solenoid valves have failed

Engine shutdown

Injection overlap to bank A
Distance between the current tooth
and the next tooth on bank A is more
than 540 crankshaft angle
Check the start and duration of

injection
E4AED5
19.0-38 o f 3 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Service Manual

Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Engine shutdown

Injection overlap to bank B
Distance between the current tooth
and the next tooth on bank A is more
than 540 crankshaft angle
No direct effect

High side short circuit to earth on bank Check the wiring harness,
A
Excess high side PWM current on all A700D engine control unit
injectors on bank A
No direct effect

High side short circuit to earth on bank Check the wiring harness,
B
Excess high side PWM current on all A700D engine control unit
injectors on bank B
No direct effect

High side short circuit to supply
voltage on bank A
Excess high side FREEcurrent on all
injectors on bank A

E4AEDA No direct effect

High side short circuit to supply
voltage on bank B
Excess high side FREEcurrent on all
injectors on bank B

E4AEDB No direct effect

Low side short circuit to earth on bank
A
On at least one injector on bank A
Rise time too long or cannot be
measured
E4AEDC No direct effect

Low side short circuit to earth on bank
B
On at least one injector on bank B
Rise time too long or cannot be
measured
E4AEDD No direct effect

Low side short circuit to supply voltage
on bank A
On at least one injector on bank A
Excess low side current, excess high A700D engine control unit
side free current on all other injectors
in this bank
E4AEDF No direct effect

Low side short circuit to supply voltage
on bank B
On at least one injector on bank B
Excess low side current, excess high A700D engine control unit
side free current on all other injectors
in this bank
E4AED6
E4AED7
E4AED8
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
E4AED9
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Check the start and duration of

injection
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-39 o f 3 9
Service Manual
Malfunctions
Engine shutdown
Overspeed fault
Overspeed from speed sensor 2
safety limit exceeded
Check engine operation

(overspeed due to thrust mode),
check ECU A700D engine control
unit
No direct effect
Overspeed fault
warning limit exceeded

unit
No direct effect
Overspeed fault
warning limit exceeded

unit
E4AF3A
Engine shutdown
Overspeed fault
safety limit exceeded

unit
E4AF9C
Synchronisation error
Synchronisation lost while engine was check the engine speed and phase
running; gap not detected
sensor
Distance between gap (engine speed
sensor) and phase sensor signal too
great

check the engine speed and phase
sensor
E4AF9E
Incorrect number of teeth during the
synchronisation phase, the number of
teeth measured between successive
gaps is not as specified

check the engine speed sensor
E4AF9F
Synchronisation not possible speed
too low during synchronisation phase

sensor
E4AFA0
Faulty camshaft wheel index counter Turn the ignition off and on again;
the additional tooth of the Bosch
camshaft wheel is not measured at
sensor
the right place
E4B000
Emergency shutdown at the

same time as redundant
sensor (1 or 2) fails;
otherwise engine speed
recorded by redundant
sensor
Engine speed sensor 1 fault

Signal from impulse recorder lost
Check distance of engine speed

sensor to flywheel (0.5 2.0 mm),
check wiring to engine speed
sensor, check engine speed
sensor
E4B001

sensor

Engine speed sensor does not
provide a signal

sensor
E4AEFB
E4AF38
E4AF39
E4AF9D
19.0-40 o f 4 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Service Manual

Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
E4B002

sensor

Invalid signal difference engine
speed measurement gradient too
steep

sensor
E4B003

sensor

Frequency too high (implausible
value)

sensor
E4B004

sensor

Impulse sensor polarity reversed
engine speed sensor incorrectly fitted
or wrongly configured in the ECU
Check the installation of the engine

speed sensor; check the ECU
E4B005

sensor

Incorrect measurement (different
measurement to the other sensor)

E4B064

sensor


sensor
E4B065

sensor

Engine speed sensor does not
provide a signal

sensor
E4B066

sensor

Invalid signal difference engine
speed measurement gradient too
steep

sensor
E4B067

sensor

Frequency too high (implausible
value)

sensor
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-41 o f 4 1
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4B068

sensor

Impulse sensor polarity reversed
engine speed sensor incorrectly fitted
or wrongly configured in the ECU

E4B069

sensor


E4B0C8
No effect when engine is

running
Phase sensor fault

Check distance of phase sensor to

flywheel (0.5 2.0 mm), check
wiring to phase sensor, check
phase sensor
E4B0CC
No effect when engine is

running
Phase sensor fault

Phase sensor polarity reversed
phase sensor incorrectly fitted or
wrongly configured in the ECU A700D A700D engine control unit
engine control unit
E4B0CD

sensor
Phase sensor fault


E4B1F4
Replacement sensor value is

used. The error disappears
when the measured value is
in the defined range
Coolant level sensor fault

Check the wiring and the ECU

A700D engine control unit / sensor
E4B1F5


Sensor signal: shorted to supply
voltage

E4B1F6


Sensor supply voltage: cable rupture
or shorted to earth

E4B1F7


Sensor supply voltage: shorted to
supply voltage

E4B1F8
Reduced power or no
reaction, depending on the
configuration and sensor
Check the medium for range

violation; repair any mechanical
Signal outside permitted range (limit 1)
problems
E4B1F9
Reduced power or no

problems
19.0-42 o f 4 2
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Service Manual

Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
E4B44C

Air filter pressure sensor 2 fault


E4B44D


voltage

E4B44E


or shorted to earth

E4B44F


supply voltage

E4B450
Reduced power or no

problems
E4B451
Reduced power or no

problems
E4B4B0

Charge air pressure sensor fault


E4B4B1


voltage

E4B4B2


or shorted to earth

E4B4B3


supply voltage

E4B4B4
Reduced power or no

problems
E4B4B5
Reduced power or no

problems
E4B514

Oil pressure sensor fault

L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-43 o f 4 3
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4B515


voltage

E4B516


or shorted to earth

E4B517


supply voltage

E4B518
Reduced power or no

problems
E4B519
Reduced power or no

problems
E4B5DC



E4B5DD


voltage

E4B5DE


or shorted to earth

E4B5DF


supply voltage

E4B5E0
Reduced power or no

problems
E4B5E1
Reduced power or no

problems
E4B708

Ambient pressure sensor fault


E4B709


voltage

19.0-44 o f 4 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Service Manual

Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
E4B70A


or shorted to earth

E4B70B


supply voltage

E4B70C
Reduced power or no

problems
E4B70D
Reduced power or no

problems
E4B76C

Air filter pressure switch 2 fault

Signal line shorted to earth
E4B76D


Short circuit to supply voltage or signal
line broken.
E4B76E


Signal line shorted to supply line

E4B76F

Air filter pressure switch 2 fault, signal

line shorted to supply line

E4B770
Reduced power or no

Monitoring threshold 1 exceeded or
fallen below; medium no longer in
normal operating state

problems
E4B771
Reduced power or no


problems
E4B7D0



E4B7D1


line broken.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171

Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-45 o f 4 5
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4B7D2



E4B7D3

Air filter pressure switch 1 fault, signal

line shorted to supply line

E4B7D4
Reduced power or no


problems
E4B7D5
Reduced power or no


problems
E4B834

Water in fuel filter sensor


E4B835


line broken
E4B836



E4B837


voltage

E4B838
Reduced power or no


problems
E4B839
Reduced power or no


problems
E4B898

Exhaust temperature sensor fault


E4B899


line broken.
19.0-46 o f 4 6
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Service Manual

Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
E4B89A



E4B89B


voltage

E4B89C
Reduced power or no


problems
E4B89D
Reduced power or no


problems
E4B8FC

Oil temperature sensor fault


E4B8FD


line broken.
E4B8FE



E4B8FF


voltage

E4B900
Reduced power or no


problems
E4B901
Reduced power or no


problems
E4B960

Fuel temperature sensor fault


E4B961


line broken.
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-47 o f 4 7
Service Manual
Malfunctions
E4B962



E4B963


voltage

E4B964
Reduced power or no


problems
E4B965
Reduced power or no


problems
E4B9C4

Charge air temperature sensor fault


E4B9C5


line broken
E4B9C6



E4B9C7


voltage

E4B9C8
Reduced power or no


problems
E4B9C9
Reduced power or no


problems
E4BA28

Coolant temperature sensor fault


E4BA29


line broken.
19.0-48 o f 4 8
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Service Manual

Malfunctions
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007

Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
E4BA2A



E4BA2B


voltage

E4BA2B
Reduced power or no


problems
E4BA2C
Reduced power or no


problems
E4BA8C

Internal temperature sensor fault


E4BA8D


line broken.
E4BA8E



E4BA8F


voltage

E4BA90
Reduced power or no


problems
E4BA91
Reduced power or no


problems
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-49 o f 4 9
Service Manual
Malfunctions
WARNING This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone

The service codes are not shown on the display unit.
Service
Effect
Cause
code
L550 - L580 no travel
E2019 function, L586 restricted
Machine type not defined - L566
selected by default
travel
E2028
E2029
E202A
E202B
E202C
E202D
E202E
E202F
E2030
E2031
E2032
E2033
E2034
E2035
E2036
E2037
E2038
E2039
E203A
Selecting machine type

Check output module 1,
Parking brake: faulty activation (fault Greeneville central lubrication
current)
system or wiring
Note! The parking brake

cannot be activated
Note! The working
hydraulics lockout cannot be Working hydraulics lockout: faulty
activation (fault current)
activated
Note! Bucket return-to-dig is

permanently activated
Note! Lift kick-out is
Note! Float position is
Note! Fan turns at incorrect
speed
Note! Warning buzzer is
Note! Swivel angle
restriction is permanently
activated
Note! Coupling 1 is
Note! Coupling 2 is
Note! Coupling 3 is
Note! Modulation solenoid
valve is permanently
activated
Note! Variable displacement
motor 1 proportional valve is
Note! Variable displacement
motor 2 proportional valve is
Note! Forward travel
direction (pump 1) is
Note! Reverse travel
direction (pump 1) is
Bucket return-to-dig: faulty activation

(fault current)
Lift kick-out: faulty activation (fault
current)
Float position: faulty activation (fault
current)
Note! Overspeed protection

is permanently activated
Note! Control pressure
proportional valve (pump 1)
Note! Control pressure
proportional valve (pump 2)
Fan: faulty activation (fault current)

Warning buzzer: faulty activation
(fault current)
Swivel angle restriction: faulty
Coupling 1: faulty activation (fault
current)
current)
current)

Modulation: faulty activation Yom

(fault current)

faulty activation (fault current)



Overspeed protection: faulty

Control pressure (pump 1): faulty

Control pressure (pump 2): faulty

Note! Emergency steering is Emergency steering: faulty

19.0-50 o f 5 0
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
E2027
Remedy
Service Manual

Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
code
Note! Fan reversal is
Fan reversal: faulty activation (fault
E203B
current)
Note! Ride control is
Ride control: faulty activation (fault
E203C
current)
Note! Ride control / float
E203D position is permanently
Ride control / float position: faulty
activated
Note! Forward travel
E203E direction (pump 2) is
Note! Reverse travel
E203F direction (pump 2) is

E2040
Note! Additional equipment

1 is permanently activated
Additional equipment 1: faulty

E2041
Note! Additional equipment

2 is permanently activated

E2042
Note! Joystick steering left

Joystick steering, left: faulty

E2043
Note! Joystick steering right

Joystick steering, right: faulty

E2044
Note! Gyrator steering (2-in- Gyrator steering (2-in-1): faulty

1) is permanently activated activation (fault current)
E2045
available

E2058
cannot be activated

E2059
cannot be activated

E5023
Engine does not take up

fuel
Gas pedal angle sensor:

synchronisation not completed
Synchronise gas pedal angle

sensor R5
E5024
No inching function
available
Inch pedal angle sensor:

synchronisation not completed
Synchronise inching angle

sensor R1
Couplings open --> driving

is not possible, no
hydrostatic brake effect
No inching function
available

synchronisation not completed or
not concluded with parameters
Inch function was deactivated using
parameters
overspeed (in 3rd gear) - motor 2
runs at over 1500 rpm although
coupling 2 is open in 3rd gear
overspeed (in 2nd gear) - motor 1
runs at over 1500 rpm although
coupling 1 or 3 is open in 2nd
Finish variable displacement

motor synchronisation, reset
parameters
E5025
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Remedy
E502D
E502E
None
E502F
E5030
E5031
Inching function activation

Check variable displacement
motor 2 speed
Check variable displacement
motor 1 speed
None
Machine switches to neutral,
driver can select travel
Motor protection active: speed
direction again after speed
is reduced
sensor overspeed
Check conditions of use - check

fault in speed sensor B2a or B2b
or wiring
Machine switches to neutral, Variable displacement motor 2

speed sensor: overspeed
Check conditions of use, variable

displacement motor 1 speed
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-51 o f 5 1
Service Manual
Malfunctions

Service
Effect
Cause
code
is reduced
E5032
E5033
E6009
E600A
E6018
E6026
Machine switches to neutral,

is reduced
speed sensor: overspeed
Overspeed - engine/pump
damage
Batteries overheating,
electrical components may
fail
Engine difficult to start
CAN failure
Battery charge symbol field
(H6) lights up
Engine speed too high

On-board voltage too high
On-board voltage too low
CAN failure due to insufficient
battery voltage, below 8 V for longer
than 100 ms
Battery voltage below 25 V despite
engine running longer than 5
minutes
Remedy
sensor B2a or wiring
Check conditions of use, variable

displacement motor 1 speed
sensor B2 or wiring
Check conditions of use, instruct
driver on driving on slopes, check
engine speed
Check alternator or engine
electronics
Check battery, wiring or engine
electronics, check power supply
F36
Check battery voltage
Check the alternator
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
WARNING diesel engine This kind of malfunction is accompanied by a 1-second warning tone
Service
Effect
Cause
Remedy
code
Batteries overheating,
Check alternator or engine
E6009 electrical components
On-board voltage too high
electronics
may fail
Check battery, wiring or engine
E600A Engine difficult to start
On-board voltage too low
electronics
19.0-52 o f 5 1
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171
Service Manual

Malfunctions
19.0.2
Audible and visual warning signals

The following table contains the warning signals which have an additional audible
tone or which are only displayed visually, along with their causes and remedies.
There are four different audible warning signals:
Continuous tone
Interval tone 1/10 (1 second tone followed by 10 second pause)
Interval tone 2/3 (2 second tone followed by 3 second pause)
Single 1 second beep
Warning signal
Service code E A02A
Interval tone 1/10
Coolant temperature symbol field
(H13) flashes
Service code E A02A, E 6000,
E 6012
(H13) flashes, STOP symbol field
lights up
Continuous warning buzzer
Cause
Remedy

(B708)

Check the fan speed

(B708)

Check the fan speed
Error in the cooling or electrical

system
Check the temperature sensor B708,

<> 2500 at 20 C
check the diesel engine thermostat
Service code E 6008, E6012

(H13) lights up
The STOP symbol field lights up
Continuous warning buzzer
Coolant level too low

(B710)
Checking the coolant level
Fault in the electrical system
Check the coolant level transmitter

B710
Hydraulic oil overheating symbol field Hydraulic oil temperature above 90 C Cleaning the cooling system
(H23) lights up
(B8)
Check the fan speed
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29/03/2007
Hydraulic oil temperature above 95 C Cleaning the cooling system

(B8)
Check the fan speed
Service code E A02A
Check the temperature sensor B8, <>
Hydraulic oil overheating symbol field
1112 at 20 C
(H23) lights up
Check the wiring
Interval tone 1/10
Fault in the cooling / hydraulic /
Check the working hydraulics pressure
The output of the travel pump is
electrical system
relief valves (control valve block)
reduced
Check the travel hydraulics pressure
relief valves (variable adjustment
pump)
Service code E 2002

Emergency steering check symbol
field (H24) lights up
Emergency steering pump check not

successfully completed (B3a)
Error in the electrical / hydraulic
system
Check the emergency steering pump

Check the pressure switch B3a
Check the wiring
Check the emergency steering
pump pressure
Emergency steering function activated

Check the steering pump
due to failure of steering pump (B3)
Service code E 2001
Emergency steering symbol field (H8)
lights up
Warning buzzer 40 second tone
system
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171
L576 - 457 / from 14171

L580 - 459 / from 14171
Check the pressure switch B3

Check the steering pump standby
pressure
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
19.0-53 o f 5 3
Service Manual
Malfunctions
Warning signal
Service code E 6004, E 5034,
E A02A, E 6012
Engine oil pressure symbol field (H4)
lights up
Stop symbol field (H36) lights up
After 10 seconds continual warning
buzzer
Service code E 5028
Gear oil overheating symbol
Driving is only possible at reduced
speed (approx. 20 km/h)
Cause
Remedy
Insufficient engine oil pressure (B701) Check the oil level
Error in the diesel engine lubricating
Check the pressure relief valve
oil supply

Check the wiring
Gear oil temperature over 120 C

(B14)
Oil level too high
Clean the gear oil cooler

Check the fan speed
Correct the oil level
Check the thermo switch B14

Check the wiring
Start the engine: the brake
accumulators are filled while the
engine runs
Check the wiring
Check the accumulator charge valve
Check the gear pump
Service code E 2016

Accumulator charge pressure symbol
No travel direction can be selected
after 2 minutes continual warning
buzzer
Brake accumulator pressure too low

(B19)
Service code E 6016

Battery charge symbol field (H6)
lights up
The parking brake cannot be
released
Torn V-belt
Fit a new V-belt
Defective alternator
Service the alternator

Check the wiring to the main
electronics

system
Service code segment display (P7)

shows the service code,
single 1 second beep
LBH/Version 01/10.2006/en/hd/29.03.2007
See the service code tables
19.0-54 o f 5 4
Copyright by
MJFCIFSS
L550 - 456 / from 16978

L556 - 454 / from 15653
L566 - 460 / from 14171

L576 - 457 / from 14171
L580 - 459 / from 14171

Service Manual L550 - L580 2plus2

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Service Manual L550 - L580 2plus2

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

en

L550 - L580 2plus2

L550 - L580 2plus2

LIEBHERR-WERK BISCHOFSHOFEN GMBH

LIEBHERR-WERK BISCHOFSHOFEN GMBH

This manual describes several types and versions of machines. The

Diesel engine and pump distributor gear

Axles and cardan shaft

Machine frame and ballast weight

Central lubrication system

Coverings and access

Cab, heating and air-conditioning

Lift arms and quick-change device

Equipment and accessories

Service codes and diagnosis

General Informations........................................................... 1.0-1

Safety regulations ...........................................................................1.1-1

Overview of the safety regulations .......................................1.1-2

Special tools for maintenance and repair work...............................1.2-1

Special tools for Liebherr diesel engines..............................1.2-2

Special tools for hydraulic cylinders .....................................1.2-3

Special tools for electronics..................................................1.2-3

Special tools for axles...........................................................1.2-3

Special tools for the transmission.........................................1.2-5

Central lubrication system ....................................................1.2-5

Special tools for the air conditioning system ........................1.2-5

Special tools for cab windows ..............................................1.2-5

L550 - 456 / from 16978

L576 - 457 / from 14171

L550 - 456 / from 16978

L566 - 460 / from 14171

1.1 Safety regulations

L550 - 456 / from 16978

L576 - 457 / from 14171

2. Observance of these instructions does not exempt you from following

Overview of the safety regulations

General safety regulations

Decals on the machine

Instructions on preventing crushing injuries and burns

Instructions on preventing fires and explosions

Safety instructions for start-up

Safety precautions during start-up

Instructions for safe working

Safety instructions for driving on slopes

Transporting the machine safely

Towing the machine safely

Measures for ensuring safe maintenance

Safety instructions for welding work on the machine

Instructions for working safely on the working attachment

Safety instructions for transporting the machine by crane

Safe maintenance of hydraulic hoses and hose lines

Attachments and accessories

Protection against vibrations

L550 - 456 / from 16978

L566 - 460 / from 14171

1.2 Special tools for maintenance and

Anti-freeze and battery tester

All wheel loaders

24 volt vacuum pump

All wheel loaders

All wheel loaders

For checking the hydro accumulator

All wheel loaders

All wheel loaders